Millenium MG Service Manual Rev2 2414259-100 Genie 4 2019

g GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 2414259-100
Revision 2
Millennium™ MG & MC Nuclear Medicine

Imaging System Service Manual
Includes Genie Acq Version 4.0
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems - Europe: Telex 698626

283 rue de la Miniere, B.P.34, 78533, Buc Cedex, France
COPYRIGHT© 2004 BY GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED
Acquisition and/or processing software and the related documentation are

confidential and proprietary information of GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS.
Only licensees of GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS have a right to use the
information contained herein. Only licensees specifically granted copy and/
or transfer rights have the right to copy and/or transfer the information. Any
unauthorized use, disclosure, assignment, transfer or reproduction of this
confidential information will be prosecuted to the full extent of the Law.
DISCLAIMER
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS shall not be liable nor obligated in any manner

in respect of bodily injury and/or property damage arising from the use of
this software if such use is not in strict compliance with instructions and
safety precautions contained in the relevant operating manuals and in all
supplements thereto, in all product labels, and according to all terms of
warranty and sale of this software, nor if any change not authorized by GE
MEDICAL SYSTEMS is made to the software contained herein.
WARNING
User provided programs or scripts are NOT validated nor warranted by GE

MEDICAL SYSTEMS. The use of data obtained using such user provided
programs or scripts is the sole responsibility of the party using such
programs or protocols.
Users exchanging files and diskettes should beware of the risk of software
viruses.
Authorized CE Representative:
GE Medical Systems Europe
Quality Assurance Manager
0459 BP 34, F 78533 BUC CEDEX France
Tel: +33 (0)1 30 70 40 40
Published by GE Medical Systems Israel. P.O. Box170, Tirat Hacarmel 30200 Israel.
Tel: 972-4-8563666; Fax: 972-4-8577663.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In
addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed
electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment,
calibration and testing shall be performed by qualified Medical personnel. The products
involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and
special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these
products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineer. All of Vendor’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical
codes.
The purchase of equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., Vendor’s field
engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or
licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write
“Damage in Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is
accepted or “signed for” by a Vendor’s representative or hospital receiving agent.
Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon
discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers
held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for
damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Call Vendor’s representative immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to
supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number,
item damaged and extend of damage.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента
(BG) е да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали
упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар,
механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
• 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
(ZH-CN) • 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式
的伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
• 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
(ZH-HK) • 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危
險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
• 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
(ZH-TW) • 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受
傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
• Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
(HR) • Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj ser-
visni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili paci-
jenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

• V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění
(CS) překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a
pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního
servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive
vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

• Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar
(DA) at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk
stød, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

• Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor
(NL) de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding
werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de
operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

• If a customer's service provider requires a language other than english, it is the
(EN) customer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and
is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or
patient from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
• Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab
(ET) klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga
tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi
vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

• Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia,
(FI) tarvittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän
huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston
käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

• Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais,
(FR) il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de
maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le
patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

• Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des
(DE) Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und
verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge,
mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.

• Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
(EL) αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον
τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους
κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

• Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a
(HU) fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben
leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg
áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

• Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það
(IS) skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og
skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða
sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è
(IT) tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici
o a tri rischi.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
• サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその
(JA) 業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくだ
さい。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

• 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것
(KO) 은 고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지
마십시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계적 위험 , 또는 기타 위험으로 인해
서비스 제공자 , 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다 .
BRDINJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

• Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
(LV) nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena,
mehānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

• Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo
(LT) paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento
sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

• Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge
(NO) for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren
eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

• Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia
(PL) jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta,
operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

• Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao
(PT-BR) cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou
paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é
(PT-PT) da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do
operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

• Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este
(RO) de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui
manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau
pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском
языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на
каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим
током, механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
• Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodi-
(SR) lačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili
pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
• Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
(SK) prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a
neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb,
obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné
ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el
(ES) inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este
manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios,
el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas
o de o ra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.
• Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar
(SV) kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror
eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
• če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka
(SL) zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali
drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DIKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse,
(TR) bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen,
operatör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
LIST OF REVISIONS
PCN REV DATE DESCRIPTION PAGES APPROVED
02047 1 Nov. 2004 New Release All P. Patlajan
2 Jan 2019 PM Mech. Stopper, Stop Block, and SW Checks Chapter 12 T. Gaither
2266261 GALIC-01-0 Patch App G
PM Gantry Anchor & Obstruction Free Zone Chapter 12
Checks

Direction 2414259-100 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Manual....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Manual Set ...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Symbols Used ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 CE Conformity ................................................................................................ 1-4
1.5 Product Locator Cards .................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 System Design................................................................................................. 1-5
1.6.1 Options ....................................................................................................... 1-6
1.7 Acquisition Computer ..................................................................................... 1-6
1.8 Gantry/Patient Table Configurations .............................................................. 1-8
1.8.1 Gantry / Table Motion Definitions............................................................. 1-8
1.8.2 Patient Table............................................................................................... 1-9
1.8.3 Detectors..................................................................................................... 1-9
1.8.4 Collimators ................................................................................................. 1-9
1.8.5 Accessories............................................................................................... 1-10
1.9 Power Requirements ..................................................................................... 1-11
1.10 Responsibility................................................................................................ 1-11
1.11 Electrical Installation .................................................................................... 1-11
1.12 Use of Equipment.......................................................................................... 1-11
1.13 Protection Against Electric Shock ................................................................ 1-12
1.14 Ambient Temperature ................................................................................... 1-12
1.15 External Connections .................................................................................... 1-12
1.16 Service........................................................................................................... 1-13
1.17 Catalog Structure........................................................................................... 1-14
1.18 Technical Specifications ............................................................................... 1-15
1.19 Tools.............................................................................................................. 1-15
1.19.1 Customer Tools ........................................................................................ 1-15
1.19.2 Standard Tool Kits ................................................................................... 1-15
1.20 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms ................................................................ 1-19
Chapter 2 - Site Planning and Pre-Installation

2.1 General Preparation......................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Pre-Installation Checks ................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Pre-Installation Checklist ........................................................................... 2-2
2.3 System Shipping Dimensions ......................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-3
2.5 Packing List..................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.1 Gantry......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2 IPS .............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.3 Collimators and Collimator Cart ................................................................ 2-4
2.5.4 Patient Table............................................................................................... 2-4

Direction 2414259-100 i 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
SECTION PAGE
2.5.5 Acquisition Computer ................................................................................ 2-4

2.5.6 Mobile Computer Cart ............................................................................... 2-4
Chapter 3 - Installation
3.1 Equipment and Tools ...................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Shipping Dollies......................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Patient Table Shipping Crate...................................................................... 3-3
3.2 System Installation .......................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 On-Site Equipment Transportation ............................................................ 3-6
3.2.3 Installation of the Gantry............................................................................ 3-7
3.2.4 Unpacking and Positioning the Patient Table .......................................... 3-13
3.2.5 Unpacking the Collimators and Collimator Cart...................................... 3-21
3.2.6 Removing the Detectors' Shipping Brackets............................................ 3-22
3.2.7 Positioning the Gantry and Table............................................................. 3-23
3.2.8 Removing the Detectors' Protectors ......................................................... 3-26
3.2.9 Installing the Integrated Power Supply (IPS)........................................... 3-27
3.2.10 Installing the GENIE Acquisition Computer ........................................... 3-34
3.2.11 IBM xSeries 205 Computer System Connections.................................... 3-35
3.2.12 Installation of Boards/Cards..................................................................... 3-37
3.2.13 BIOS Configuration ................................................................................. 3-40
3.2.14 Installing the Hand-Held Controller(s) .................................................... 3-47
3.2.15 Powering Up the System and Checking Motion ...................................... 3-47
3.2.16 Adjusting the Monitor .............................................................................. 3-47
3.2.17 Preliminary Installation of the Table and the Rear Locator Plate ............ 3-48
3.3 Software Configuration................................................................................ 3-50
3.3.1 User Names and Default Passwords......................................................... 3-52
3.3.2 Changing Passwords ................................................................................ 3-52
3.4 System Configurations.................................................................................. 3-53
3.4.1 Configuring the Acquisition Computer.................................................... 3-54
3.4.2 First Time Configuration.......................................................................... 3-55
3.4.3 Setting Host Names and Internet Protocol Address ................................. 3-65
3.4.4 PostScript Printer and Secondary Capture Printer Configurations .......... 3-68
3.4.5 Network Configuration ............................................................................ 3-80
3.4.6 Configuring the Acquisition Computer's InSite Connection ................... 3-84
3.4.7 Saving First-Time Configuration ............................................................. 3-88
3.4.8 Creating the Acquisition Database........................................................... 3-89
3.4.9 Installing Software Option Licenses ........................................................ 3-91
3.4.10 Reboot the Acquisition Computer............................................................ 3-94
3.4.11 Updating a Remote Station Auto-Processing Application List................ 3-95
3.4.12 Contact the On-Line Center for InSite Access......................................... 3-97

Direction 2414259-100 ii 2019
SECTION PAGE
3.4.13 Configuring Other Starlink Stations......................................................... 3-97

3.5 Installing the Collimators............................................................................ 3-100
3.5.1 Aligning the Collimator Cart.................................................................. 3-100
3.6 Using the Table Alignment Program for Final Table Alignment ............... 3-102
3.6.1 Image Acquisition .................................................................................. 3-102
3.6.2 Loading the Images ................................................................................ 3-103
3.6.3 Installing the Table's Rear Locking Plate............................................... 3-104
3.6.4 Repositioning the Table Cables.............................................................. 3-104
3.6.5 Installing the Table Extender ................................................................. 3-105
3.6.6 Installing the IV Pole Holder ................................................................. 3-107
3.7 Gantry/Table Characterization .................................................................... 3-107
3.8 Installing the ECG Monitor......................................................................... 3-108
3.8.1 Setting up for Operation......................................................................... 3-108
3.8.2 ECG Trigger signal verification............................................................. 3-108
3.8.3 Final connection and testing................................................................... 3-109
3.9 Functional Checks....................................................................................... 3-110
3.10 System Backup............................................................................................ 3-110
3.11 Cleaning Up the Site and Removing the Shipping Dolly ........................... 3-110
3.11.1 Preparation ............................................................................................. 3-110
3.11.2 Disposing of Packing Materials ............................................................. 3-110
3.12 Marking the Floor Clearance Area Around the Camera ............................. 3-111
3.13 Post Installation Checklist........................................................................... 3-112
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

4.1 Tool List.......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Shutting Down the System.............................................................................. 4-1
4.3 Starting Up the System ................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Calibrating the Gantry and Table ............................................................... 4-5
4.4 Checking the Gantry and Hand-Held Controller ............................................ 4-7
4.4.1 Checking the Detector Rotate Buttons ....................................................... 4-9
4.4.2 Checking the Detector Radius Buttons ...................................................... 4-9
4.4.3 Checking the Table Longitudinal Move Buttons ....................................... 4-9
4.4.4 Checking the Table Vertical Move Buttons............................................... 4-9
4.4.5 Checking the Table Lateral Move Buttons ................................................ 4-9
4.4.6 Checking the Radial Detector Selection Button....................................... 4-10
4.4.7 Checking the Clear Image Display Button............................................... 4-10
4.4.8 Checking the Acquisition Start Button..................................................... 4-10
4.4.9 Checking the Speed Selection Button ...................................................... 4-11
4.4.10 Checking Detector Rotation ..................................................................... 4-11
4.4.11 Checking Detector Radius Motion........................................................... 4-13
4.5 Checking the Patient Table ........................................................................... 4-14

Direction 2414259-100 iii 2019
SECTION PAGE
4.5.1 Checking Longitudinal Motion ................................................................ 4-14

4.5.2 Checking Lateral Motion ......................................................................... 4-15
4.5.3 Checking Vertical Motion........................................................................ 4-16
4.6 Checking the HHC Jacks .............................................................................. 4-19
4.6.1 Checking the Gantry Jacks....................................................................... 4-19
4.6.2 Checking the Patient Table Jacks............................................................. 4-19
4.6.3 Checking the IPS Jack.............................................................................. 4-19
4.7 Checking the Collimator Exchange .............................................................. 4-20
4.8 Checking Safety Features.............................................................................. 4-24
4.8.1 Checking the Emergency-Stops (E-Stops)............................................... 4-26
4.8.2 Checking Collision Sensors on the Detectors .......................................... 4-28
4.8.3 Check Collision Override......................................................................... 4-32
4.8.4 Checking the Collimator ON/OFF Sensor ............................................... 4-32
4.9 Checking Accessories ................................................................................... 4-33
4.9.1 Checking the Bar Phantom....................................................................... 4-33
4.9.2 Checking the IV Pole Holder ................................................................... 4-34
4.9.3 Checking the Table Extender ................................................................... 4-34
4.9.4 Checking the Head Holder ....................................................................... 4-35
4.9.5 System Functional Checks ....................................................................... 4-36
4.10 Acquiring a Test Scan and Checking Image Quality.................................... 4-37
4.11 Checking the Network .................................................................................. 4-37
Chapter 5 - Theory of Operation

5.1 Introduction..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Acquisition Hardware ..................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 General Description for IBM XSeries 205 Computer................................ 5-4
5.2.2 IBM xSeries 205 Components ................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 TAXI Communication................................................................................ 5-9
5.3 Acquisition Software..................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.1 UNIX Operating System Software........................................................... 5-11
5.3.2 General Description.................................................................................. 5-11
5.3.3 Common UNIX Commands..................................................................... 5-13
5.3.4 GENIE Acquisition Commands ............................................................... 5-14
5.3.5 Acquisition System File Structure............................................................ 5-15
5.3.6 Acquisition Network Capabilities ............................................................ 5-16
5.3.7 TCP/IP...................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.8 Acquisition Application and TCP/IP........................................................ 5-17
5.3.9 Aquisition Processes and Hardware......................................................... 5-18
5.3.10 Software Processes................................................................................... 5-19
5.3.11 License Keys ............................................................................................ 5-20
5.3.12 Diagnostics ............................................................................................... 5-21

Direction 2414259-100 iv 2019
SECTION PAGE
5.3.13 Acquisition Database................................................................................ 5-21

5.4 Printing.......................................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.1 Using a Local Printer................................................................................ 5-23
5.4.2 Using a Network Printer........................................................................... 5-24
5.4.3 Using a Remote Printer ............................................................................ 5-25
5.4.4 Software Configuration ............................................................................ 5-26
5.4.5 /etc/printcap.............................................................................................. 5-27
5.4.6 Using a Secondary Capture Printer .......................................................... 5-29
5.5 Gantry/Table ................................................................................................. 5-30
5.5.1 Electronics Hardware ............................................................................... 5-30
5.5.2 Table Block Level .................................................................................... 5-32
5.5.3 Overview of Motion Control.................................................................... 5-33
5.5.4 Drive Amplifiers and Motherboard.......................................................... 5-35
5.5.5 Integrated Power Supply .......................................................................... 5-36
5.5.6 Circuit Breakers and Fuses....................................................................... 5-37
5.5.7 Surge Suppression .................................................................................... 5-37
5.5.8 Power Supply Board................................................................................. 5-38
5.5.9 MUX Board.............................................................................................. 5-41
5.5.10 Safety Circuits .......................................................................................... 5-43
5.5.11 Motion Control......................................................................................... 5-45
5.5.12 Service Adjustments................................................................................. 5-48
5.6 Detectors ....................................................................................................... 5-50
5.6.1 PM-Tube Array ........................................................................................ 5-52
5.6.2 Autotune ................................................................................................... 5-53
5.6.3 Detector Mechanics.................................................................................. 5-53
5.6.4 Detector Electronics ................................................................................. 5-55
5.6.5 Photomultiplier Tubes .............................................................................. 5-55
5.6.6 Daisy Chain Circuits ................................................................................ 5-56
5.6.7 Pre-Amplifier and the PM Tubes ............................................................. 5-58
5.6.8 Dyncor Driver Module ............................................................................. 5-59
5.6.9 Dyncor Module ........................................................................................ 5-60
5.6.10 Matrix Board ............................................................................................ 5-62
5.6.11 Power Supply ........................................................................................... 5-63
5.6.12 ± 5 Volt Power Supply ............................................................................. 5-63
5.6.13 I/N Board.................................................................................................. 5-65
Chapter 6 - Calibration and Adjustments

6.1 Adjusting the Gantry Roll Limit-Switch......................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Adjusting the Photo Eye Disk .................................................................... 6-4
6.1.2 Radial Limit-switch.................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Table................................................................................................................ 6-5

Direction 2414259-100 v 2019
SECTION PAGE
6.2.1 Adjusting the Longitudinal Cradle Limit-switch ....................................... 6-5

6.2.2 Adjusting the Lateral Cradle Limit-switch................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 Adjusting the Vertical Limit-switch........................................................... 6-6
6.3 Table / Gantry Characterization...................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1 Setting the System for Slow Speed ............................................................ 6-7
6.3.2 Starting the Characterization Program ....................................................... 6-7
6.3.3 Characterizing All Axes in the System ...................................................... 6-8
6.3.4 Table Longitudinal Characterization.......................................................... 6-9
6.3.5 Table Vertical Characterization ............................................................... 6-10
6.3.6 Table Lateral Characterization ................................................................. 6-11
6.3.7 Gantry Roll Characterization ................................................................... 6-15
6.3.8 Characterization of Detector #1 Radial Axis ........................................... 6-17
6.3.9 Characterization of Detector #2 Radial Axis ........................................... 6-19
6.3.10 Resetting System Speeds to Normal ........................................................ 6-21
6.3.11 Final Calibration....................................................................................... 6-21
6.4 Imaging Detector Calibration and Adjustments............................................ 6-22
6.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.2 Prerequisites ............................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.3 Equipment Required................................................................................. 6-23
6.4.4 Using the Bipod........................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.5 Calibration Flow with No Major Repair .................................................. 6-29
6.4.6 Corrections Naming Convention.............................................................. 6-30
6.4.7 Detector Calibration ................................................................................. 6-31
6.5 Acquisition Console...................................................................................... 6-54
Chapter 7 - PWB Configuration and Interconnects

7.1 System Overview, Block Diagram.................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Gantry.............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Gantry Block Diagram ............................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Gantry Wiring Diagram ............................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 Cart Docking and Roll Brake Wiring......................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Docking Switch Wiring.............................................................................. 7-5
7.2.5 Roll Lock Assembly................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.6 Roll Limit-Switch Board Assembly........................................................... 7-7
7.2.7 Roll Limit-Switch Board: Logic ................................................................ 7-8
7.2.8 Encoder Assembly, Logic, and Timing...................................................... 7-9
7.2.9 Wiring for E-Stops and Hand-Held Controller ........................................ 7-10
7.2.10 Roll Limit-Switch Connector, SW2 ......................................................... 7-12
7.2.11 Roll Motor Cable...................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.12 Roll Drive Encoder, Wiring List .............................................................. 7-14
7.2.13 Cable Chain Assembly ............................................................................. 7-15

Direction 2414259-100 vi 2019
SECTION PAGE
7.2.14 Cable Chain Assembly Wiring List ......................................................... 7-16

7.2.15 IPS Wiring List......................................................................................... 7-19
7.3 Detector......................................................................................................... 7-71
7.3.1 Detector Wiring Block Diagram .............................................................. 7-71
7.3.2 Radial Limit-Switch Board ...................................................................... 7-72
7.3.3 Internal Detector Cable ............................................................................ 7-73
7.3.4 Service Cable, Collision Override............................................................ 7-74
7.3.5 Illuminated Switch, Collision Override ................................................... 7-75
7.3.6 Detector Cable Assembly (1 of 2)............................................................ 7-76
7.3.7 Detector Cable Assembly (2 of 2)............................................................ 7-77
7.3.8 Detector Cable, Breakdown Diagrams..................................................... 7-78
7.3.9 Detector I/N Board ................................................................................... 7-82
7.3.10 Detector Power Supply Board.................................................................. 7-83
7.3.11 Detector Matrix Board ............................................................................. 7-84
7.3.12 Detector Pre-Amp Board.......................................................................... 7-85
7.3.13 Detector Dyncor Module.......................................................................... 7-85
7.3.14 Detector Dyncor Driver Module .............................................................. 7-86
7.4 Integrated Power Supply IPS ........................................................................ 7-87
7.4.1 Total IPS Cabling Survey (1 of 7)............................................................ 7-87
7.4.2 IPS Main External and Internal Power (2 of 7)........................................ 7-88
7.4.3 Cabling for HHCs, E-stops, & PC RS232 Communication (3 of 7)........ 7-89
7.4.4 IPS Cabling for Table Motion (4 of 7)..................................................... 7-90
7.4.5 IPS Cabling for Radial Motion and Roll Lock (5 of 7)............................ 7-91
7.4.6 IPS Cabling for Roll Motion and Collision (6 of 7)................................. 7-92
7.4.7 IPS Cabling for TAXI Links and Detector Power (7 of 7) ...................... 7-93
7.4.8 IPS Assembly Drawing ............................................................................ 7-94
7.4.9 IPS Detector Power (1 of 4) ..................................................................... 7-95
7.4.10 Board and Modules Power Supply (2 of 4).............................................. 7-96
7.4.11 Backplane and Fan Power Supply (3 of 4)............................................... 7-97
7.4.12 Relays and Connectors ( 4 of 4) ............................................................... 7-98
7.4.13 MUX Assembly Drawing......................................................................... 7-99
7.4.14 EIPS MUX Board, Roll Lock Control; 1 of 4........................................ 7-100
7.4.15 EIPS MUX Board Inputs, Multiplexers; 2 of 4...................................... 7-101
7.4.16 EIPS MUX Board, Radius/Table MUX; 3 of 4 ..................................... 7-102
7.4.17 EIPS MUX Board, Connectors; 4 of 4................................................... 7-103
7.4 Integrated Power Supply............................................................................. 7-104
7.4.18 CAN Handset Control Board ................................................................. 7-104
7.4.19 Handset CAN Control Board Logic ....................................................... 7-105
7.4.20 Handset CAN Control Board Logic ....................................................... 7-106
7.4.21 MEC Board ............................................................................................ 7-107
7.4.22 IPS Motor Amplifier Board.................................................................... 7-108

Direction 2414259-100 vii 2019
SECTION PAGE
7.4.23 Transformer Wiring................................................................................ 7-109

7.5 Acquisition Computer ................................................................................. 7-110
7.5.1 Acquisition Computer Cables ................................................................ 7-110
7.6 Patient Table ............................................................................................... 7-111
7.6.1 Table Interconnect Diagram .................................................................. 7-112
7.6.2 Table to IPS Harness ............................................................................. 7-113
7.6.3 Table HHC Box Left Cable.................................................................... 7-116
7.6.4 Table HHC Box Right Cable ................................................................. 7-117
7.6.5 Table Internal Lim SW Cable ................................................................ 7-118
7.6.6 Table Long Lim SW Cable .................................................................... 7-119
Chapter 8 - Repair Procedures

8.1 System Power-Off........................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Computer Shutdown................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 System Start-Up .............................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Safety Considerations ..................................................................................... 8-5
8.4 Removing the IPS ........................................................................................... 8-6
8.5 Gantry/IPS Repair Procedures ........................................................................ 8-7
8.5.1 Replacing the Circuit Breakers .................................................................. 8-7
8.5.2 Replacing the Metal Oxide Varistors ......................................................... 8-9
8.5.3 Replacing the Fuse F5 on the Power Supply Board................................. 8-10
8.5.4 Replacing the Power Supply Board ......................................................... 8-11
8.5.5 Replacing the MUX Board....................................................................... 8-15
8.5.6 Replacing the Handset CAN Bus Board .................................................. 8-16
8.5.7 Replacing the MEC Board ....................................................................... 8-16
8.5.8 Replacing the 4-Axis Controller .............................................................. 8-17
8.5.9 Replacing the Motor Amplifier Backplane .............................................. 8-18
8.5.10 Replacing the Amplifier Drive Boards..................................................... 8-19
8.5.11 Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly .......................................... 8-21
8.5.12 Replacing the Radial-Motion-Limit Switch Board .................................. 8-25
8.5.13 Replacing the Roll Motor Drive Assembly.............................................. 8-26
8.5.14 Replacing the Roll-Lock Motor Assembly .............................................. 8-34
8.5.15 Replacing the Cable Chain Assembly...................................................... 8-39
8.5.16 Replacing the Detector Cables ................................................................. 8-44
8.6 Detector Repair Procedures .......................................................................... 8-46
8.6.1 Detector Special Tools and Equipment List............................................. 8-49
8.6.2 Removing the Detector Cover.................................................................. 8-50
8.6.3 Replacing a Detector ................................................................................ 8-52
8.6.4 Replacing the Power Supply Board ......................................................... 8-56
8.6.5 Replacing the I/N Board........................................................................... 8-58
8.6.6 Disconnecting Cables from the Matrix Board.......................................... 8-60

Direction 2414259-100 viii 2019
SECTION PAGE
8.6.7 Replacing the Pre-Amplifier, Dyncor, and Dyncor Driver ...................... 8-62
8.6.8 Replacing the Matrix Board ..................................................................... 8-64
8.6.9 Replacing the PM Tubes .......................................................................... 8-65
8.6.10 Crystal Replacement or Total Re-Grease................................................. 8-69
8.6.11 Replacing the Contact PIN Board ............................................................ 8-75
8.6.12 Replacing the Service Collision-Override Switch ................................... 8-76
8.7 Hand-Held Controller Repair Procedures ..................................................... 8-77
8.8 Collimator and Collimator Cart Repair Procedures...................................... 8-77
8.8.1 Replacing the Collision Sensor on the Collimator ................................... 8-77
8.8.2 Replacing the Collimator Cart Locating Switch ...................................... 8-79
8.9 Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................. 8-84
8.10 3-AxisTable Repair Procedures .................................................................... 8-85
8.10.1 Longitudinal Drive Assembly .................................................................. 8-86
8.10.2 Lateral Drive Assembly ........................................................................... 8-91
8.10.3 Vertical Drive Assembly.......................................................................... 8-93
8.10.4 Table Chassis Assembly........................................................................... 8-96
8.10.5 E-Stop Box Assembly - Left or Right.................................................... 8-101
8.10.6 Junction Box........................................................................................... 8-103
8.10.7 Stretcher ................................................................................................. 8-104
8.10.8 Longitudinal Roller ................................................................................ 8-105
Chapter 9 - Software Installation

9.1 Installation Procedure Flowcharts................................................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Flowchart for Systems WITH Installation Settings Diskette ..................... 9-2
9.1.2 Flowchart for Systems WITHOUT Installation Settings Diskette............. 9-3
9.2 Preparation ...................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.1 Reviewing the Customer Information Sheet (CIS) .................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Current log configuration ........................................................................... 9-4
9.2.3 Recording the Current System Configuration............................................ 9-5
9.3 Recording the Acquisition Computer Configuration Data ............................. 9-6
9.3.1 Network Information.................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.2 Logging the First Time Configuration Information ................................... 9-7
9.3.3 Supplied Software .................................................................................... 9-14
9.4 Full System Backup ...................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.1 Archiving User Acquisition Templates, Tuning & Correction
Site Specific Data to a Hard Disk............................................................. 9-15
9.4.2 Archiving User Acquisition Templates, Tuning & Correction
Site Specific Data to a DAT Tape............................................................ 9-17
9.4.3 Creating the Installation Settings Backup Diskette.................................. 9-19
9.5 Software Installation ..................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.1 Software Installation USING the Installation Settings Backup Diskette. 9-22

Direction 2414259-100 ix 2019
SECTION PAGE
9.5.2 Software Installation WITHOUT Installation Settings Backup Diskette 9-28

9.6 Restoring User Data ...................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Restoring User Data from Hard Disk....................................................... 9-37
9.6.2 Restoring User Data from DAT Tape ...................................................... 9-39
9.7 Configuring Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and Date/Time ........... 9-41
9.7.1 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Savings Method ............................. 9-43
9.8 Automatic Send............................................................................................. 9-45
9.9 Motion Controller Initialization .................................................................... 9-46
9.10 Final System Adjustments ............................................................................ 9-47
9.10.1 Characterizing the Gantry and Table ....................................................... 9-47
9.11 System Check Out......................................................................................... 9-47
Chapter 10 - Renewal Parts

10.1 General Information...................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 FRU Definition......................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 FRU Codes ............................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Genie Acquisition Computer ........................................................................ 10-3
10.2.1 Acquisition Computer and Accessories ................................................... 10-3
10.3 Gantry............................................................................................................ 10-6
10.3.1 Gantry Packing Material .......................................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Gantry - Front........................................................................................... 10-8
10.3.3 Gantry - Back ......................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.4 Roll Lock................................................................................................ 10-13
10.3.5 Radial Drive ........................................................................................... 10-15
10.3.6 Roll Motor Drive Assembly................................................................... 10-17
10.3.7 Roll Drive Gear ...................................................................................... 10-19
10.3.8 Integrated Power Supply (IPS)............................................................... 10-19
10.3.9 Gantry Cable List ................................................................................... 10-34
10.4 Hand Held Controller.................................................................................. 10-35
10.4.1 Hand Held Controller Assembly ............................................................ 10-35
10.5 Detectors ..................................................................................................... 10-36
10.5.1 Detector Assemblies............................................................................... 10-36
10.5.2 Collimators ............................................................................................. 10-43
10.5.3 Collimator Cart Assembly...................................................................... 10-46
10.5.4 Custom Tools - Detector ........................................................................ 10-47
10.5.5 Collimator Cart Guide Bushing & Docking Switch Assembly.............. 10-49
10.5.6 Detector Interface................................................................................... 10-51
10.6 New MG Patient Table ............................................................................... 10-54
10.6.1 MG Patient Table and Accessories General View ................................. 10-54
10.6.2 3-Axis Patient Table Basic Assembly.................................................... 10-56
10.6.3 Patient Table Subassemblies .................................................................. 10-57

Direction 2414259-100 x 2019
SECTION PAGE
10.6.4 MG Patient Table Upper Subassemblies................................................ 10-59

10.6.5 Table Chassis Assembly......................................................................... 10-62
10.6.6 Vertical Drive Assembly........................................................................ 10-63
10.6.7 Rear Locating Pedal Assembly .............................................................. 10-65
10.6.8 Upper Table Assembly........................................................................... 10-66
10.6.9 Lateral Plate Assembly........................................................................... 10-68
10.6.10 Lateral Motor Assembly......................................................................... 10-69
10.6.11 Left E-Stop Box Assembly .................................................................... 10-70
10.6.12 Right E-Stop Box Assembly .................................................................. 10-72
10.6.13 Composite Top Assembly ...................................................................... 10-74
10.6.14 Longitudinal Shade Cover Assembly..................................................... 10-75
Chapter 11 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

11.1 Using the Diagnostic Interface...................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Using the EUI................................................................................................ 11-3
11.2.1 System Calibration ................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Table/Gantry Status Information.............................................................. 11-7
11.3 Error Log Tool Graphical User Interface (ELT)......................................... 11-10
11.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 11-10
11.3.2 Using the ELT Graphical User Interface................................................ 11-11
11.3.3 ELT Filters and Search Tools................................................................. 11-12
11.4 Proactive PMT Analysis (PPA) User Interface........................................... 11-16
11.4.1 Using the PPA Graphical User Interface................................................ 11-17
11.4.2 PMT Histogram...................................................................................... 11-17
11.4.3 Tube Working Values ............................................................................ 11-19
11.5 Troubleshooting the Detector...................................................................... 11-20
11.5.1 Dyncor Analog Test ............................................................................... 11-20
11.5.2 DUI Functional Description ................................................................... 11-23
11.5.3 Accessing the I/N Board Test................................................................. 11-26
11.6 InSite Hardware and Software Checks ....................................................... 11-29
11.6.1 Performing PC Diagnostics.................................................................... 11-29
11.6.2 Testing the Network ............................................................................... 11-30
11.7 Checking the 4-Axis Motion Controller ..................................................... 11-34
11.7.1 Monitoring the Controller's Inputs and Outputs..................................... 11-36
11.7.2 Motor Servo Amplifier LEDs ................................................................ 11-39
11.8 Tightening Roll Motor Encoder Set Screws ............................................... 11-40
11.9 Testing Collimator Locking Mechanisms................................................... 11-43
11.9.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 11-43
11.9.2 Test Procedure........................................................................................ 11-43
11.9.3 Calibration Procedure............................................................................. 11-44

Direction 2414259-100 xi 2019
SECTION PAGE
Chapter 12 - Planned Maintenance

12.1 Tool List........................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule .................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Procedures..................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.1 General ..................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.2 Acquisition Computer .............................................................................. 12-5
12.3.3 Monitor..................................................................................................... 12-7
12.3.4 Keyboard / Mouse .................................................................................... 12-8
12.3.5 Mobile Monitor Cart ................................................................................ 12-9
12.3.6 Detectors and Image Quality.................................................................. 12-10
12.3.7 Collimator Cart....................................................................................... 12-13
12.3.8 Collimators ............................................................................................. 12-15
12.3.9 Gantry..................................................................................................... 12-20
12.3.10 Table....................................................................................................... 12-31
12.4 Planned Maintenance Procedural Checklist ............................................... 12-38
Appendix A - DICOM Modality Worklist

A.1 Description ..................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Configuring a Worklist Provider as a Remote DICOM Station on
GENIE Acquisition ........................................................................................ A-2
A.3 Configuring GENIE Acquisition as a Remote DICOM Station on the
Worklist Provider ........................................................................................... A-4
Appendix B - Genie Acq – Vision Connectivity

B.1 Configuring Genie Acq to Vision P&R Station Connections.........................B-1
Appendix C - Genie Acq – eNTEGRA Connectivity

C.1 Configuring Genie Acq to eNTEGRA P&R Station Connections .................C-1
Appendix D - Installation and Configuration of Other Computer Models

D.1 Dell PowerEdge 1400SC ............................................................................... D-2
D.1.1 General Description for Dell PowerEdge 1400SC Computer................... D-2
D.1.2 Dell PowerEdge 1400SC Computer System Connections........................ D-3
D.1.3 BIOS Configuration .................................................................................. D-5
D.2 Dell Optiplex GX-200.................................................................................... D-7
D.2.1 General Information on the Dell GX-200 Computer ................................ D-7
D.2.2 Connecting the Cables from the PC tower to the Monitor...................... D-11
D.2.3 Cable Connections from the PC Tower to the Gantry and Detector....... D-11
D.2.4 Connect Cables for Network ................................................................... D-11
D.2.5 BIOS Configuration ................................................................................ D-12

Direction 2414259-100 xii 2019
SECTION PAGE
D.2.6 ISA Configuration ................................................................................... D-13

D.3 Preparation ................................................................................................... D-14
D.3.1 Reviewing the Customer Information Sheet (CIS) ................................. D-14
D.4 Software Installation Procedure ................................................................... D-14
D.4.1 System Configurations ............................................................................ D-14
D.4.2 Motion Controller Initialization .............................................................. D-15
D.4.3 Final System Adjustments....................................................................... D-15
D.4.4 System Check Out................................................................................... D-15
D.5 Dell PowerEdge 1300 Computer ................................................................. D-16
D.5.1 Computer System Connections ............................................................... D-16
D.5.2 Bios Configuration: ................................................................................. D-20
D.5.3 ISA Configuration ................................................................................... D-21
D.5.4 SMC Ethernet Board Configuration........................................................ D-22
D.5.5 DOS Based Diagnostics - Etherdiags...................................................... D-23
D.5.6 SMC Ethernet Controller Diagnostic Tests............................................. D-23
D.5.7 Software Installation Procedure .............................................................. D-23
D.6 System Configurations................................................................................. D-24
D.6.1 Graphics Card & Keyboard Configurations............................................ D-24
D.6.2 Monitor Configuration ............................................................................ D-25
D.6.3 Mouse Configuration............................................................................... D-26
Appendix E - 3-Axis Patient Table Specifications

E.1 3-Axis Patient Table Assembly..................................................................E-2
Appendix F - Preparing the Second Hard Drive
Appendix G - Installing Patch GA400-2-1

G.1 Patch Installation from CD LSW000524 ....................................................... G-1
G.2 Patch Installation from DAT Tape LSW000529 ........................................... G-1
G.3 Patch Removal ............................................................................................... G-2

Direction 2414259-100 xiii 2019
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Manual

The manual provides installation and service information for both the
single- and dual-detector nuclear medicine imaging systems, and contains the
following chapters:
• Chapter 1 Introduction
• Chapter 2 Site Planning and Pre-Installation
• Chapter 3 Installation
• Chapter 4 Functional Checks
• Chapter 5 Theory of Operation
• Chapter 6 Calibration and Adjustments
• Chapter 7 PWB Configuration and Interconnects
• Chapter 8 Repair Procedures
• Chapter 9 Software Installation
• Chapter 10 Renewal Parts
• Chapter 11 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
• Chapter 12 Planned Maintenance
• Appendix A DICOM Modality Worklist
• Appendix B Genie Acq – Vision Connectivity
• Appendix C Genie Acq – eNTEGRA Connectivity
• Appendix D Installation and Configuration of Other Computer
Models
• Appendix E 3-Axis Patient Table Specifications
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 1-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Scope of this Manual
Figure 1-1: Millennium MG/MC - Complete System

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Manual Set
1.2 Manual Set

The following manuals explain how to install, operate, and service the
system:
Manual GE Part # ELGEMS Part #
Operator's Reference Manual 2269384-100 MAN000424
Site Preparation Manual 2269387-100 MAN000426
System Service Manuala 2414259-100
a. this guide
1.3 Symbols Used

The following symbols may appear in this manual:
Alternating current.
Caution or warning. Follow procedures exactly as described

to avoid personal injury or damaging equipment.
Denotes that a dangerous voltage may be present.
Protective electrical ground.
Power ON.
Power OFF.
Type B equipment.
CE Marking. Denotes that the equipment complies with the

general requirements set out in the Directive 93/42/EEC
Concerning Medical Devices.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction CE Conformity
1.4 CE Conformity
This product conforms with the requirements of council directive 93/42/EEC
concerning medical devices, and therefore shows the following CE Mark of
Conformity:
This equipment generates, and can radiate, radio frequency energy. The
equipment may cause radio frequency interference to other medical and
non-medical devices and to radio communications. To provide reasonable
protection against such interference, the system complies with the emissions
limits for a Group 1, Class A Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be
determined by turning the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified
service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of
the following measure(s):
• Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected
device.
• Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected
device.
• Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further
suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using

other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized change or
modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized change or modifications could void the users` authority to

operate the equipment.
To comply with the regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Group 1,

Class A Medical Device, all interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be
shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and
grounded may result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference in
violation of the European Union Medical Device and FCC regulations.
Due to installation in less favorable environment, this equipment may be

exposed to electromagnetic and electrostatic interference. To ensure a high
level of reliability when exposed to such interference, this equipment
complies with the immunity requirements as stated in EN 60601-1-2. for
immunity Class 1. The operating conditions are classified on the basis of
performance criteria as defined in IEC 801-2.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Product Locator Cards
1.5 Product Locator Cards

Remove all Product Locator cards marked "Installation", from each package,
and put them in a safe place. On completion of the installation, each card
should be completed, signed, and forwarded to the system vendor.
1.6 System Design

The system vendor's Nuclear Medicine product line is a range of fully
integrated systems for acquisition and display of nuclear medicine data.
The systems can be configured to fit a variety of nuclear medicine data

acquisition needs:
• Single or dual detector planar imaging

• Dedicated whole body scanning
• Circular and elliptical tomographic acquisition
A system consists of: a single detector (MC systems) or dual detectors (MG
systems); the gantry; a patient table; and an Acquisition Computer. The
detectors, gantry and patient table are all controlled from the dedicated
computer. All systems have motorized motion that is controlled from a
Hand-Held Controller (HHC).
• One or two large field-of-view gamma-ray detectors are fitted to the

gantry. Each rectangular detector has a 370 x 520 mm field-of-view.
The detectors are used in association with radio labelled
pharmaceuticals to give information on spatial distribution within the
patient. The detectors send the information to an adapter card, known
as the Framing Board in the Acquisition computer via TAXI
communication cables. The Framing Board converts the information
into a form that can be displayed on the Acquisition Computer
monitor and then is stored in a database on the computer's internal
hard-disk drive. The data must be sent to another computer, such as a
Processing and Review Station, for processing, display, filming, or
archiving.
• The gantry supports and positions the detectors. The ring gantry
provides motorised motion in two axes, allowing tomographic
acquisitions and automated detector positioning around the patient.
• The table supports and positions the patient during scans. When not in
use, the table can be removed to gain full access to the gantry and
detectors.
• The Acquisition system consists of a standard PC computer mounted
on a mobile-cart for convenient positioning of monitor, keyboard, and
mouse near the gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Acquisition Computer
1.6.1 Options
Several options are available to extend the usefulness of the system:
• R-wave trigger unit for gated cardiac scans.

• Fast dynamic acquisition capability.
1.7 Acquisition Computer

The acquisition system is a standard PC computer (network server), with a
color monitor, standard PC keyboard, mouse, and computer cabinet. It is
linked to the gantry by cables providing power, detector communication,
RS-232 communication, and connections to other systems.
The monitor, keyboard, and mouse are mounted on a mobile cart that allows
the operator to work from a standing or seated position. The mobile stand is
supported on four self-locking casters for convenient positioning near the
gantry.
The 17" color monitor, combined with the display board, gives a 1280 x 1024
pixel with 256 colors from a palette of 16.7 million. The monitor displays
images and acquisition information along with the graphical user interface
used to operate the system.
CAUTION
• Do not place items on top of the monitor. They might block the
monitor's ventilation, which could cause damage.
• Do not load non-system software onto the Acquisition computer.
Running non-system applications may interfere with Acquisition
operations.
• Adjust the monitor under the normal lighting levels used in the
department.
The keyboard is a conventional PC style, 102 key, standard QWERTY

keyboard, numeric keypad, and special purpose function keys. The keyboard
is used to enter patient and acquisition setup information, and the function
keys can be used to activate selected acquisition control functions.
The mouse is a standard PC style, three-button serial mouse. The mouse

provides an alternative to the keyboard for interacting with the Acquisition
computer's graphical user interface. Acquisition control functions can be
selected on-screen using a standard point-and-click interface.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Acquisition Computer
The computer tower is a standard enclosure that houses the acquisition

control subsystem. The cabinet contains the PC power supply, motherboard,
Framing Board, ethernet board, RS-232 board, internal hard-disk drive,
floppy disk drive, and disk controller.
The keyboard, mouse, monitor, power lead, gantry serial cable and ethernet
cable all attach to standard connectors at the back of the tower. The detector
cable also connects to a standard DB-9 connector mounted on the Framing
Board at the back of the cabinet.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Gantry/Patient Table Configurations
1.8 Gantry/Patient Table Configurations

The following acquisition configurations are available:
Function Rectangular Detector
Static/Dynamic/Planar Standard
Circular Tomo Step/Shoot Standard
Circular Tomo Continuous Standard
Elliptical Tomo Step/Shoot Standard
Fast Dynamic Planar Optional
Whole-Body Program Body Contour Standard

(Learn Mode)
1.8.1 Gantry / Table Motion Definitions
Radial 1 and Longitudin

Roll/Rotate Radial 2 Height al Lateral
Range ± 270° 106 - 286 mma Low: 605/610 mm 1,570mm/ ± 111.5/115 mm

VG fixed; 268 mm High: 863/868 mm 1,580 mm
Accuracy of positionb < 0.25° < 0.6 mm < 0.5 mm < 0.5 mm < 0.5 mm
Relative accuracy of ± 0.25° - - - -

Detector #1 and Detector
#2
Repeatability = 0.25° - - - -
Position displayed precision 1° 1 mm 1 mm 1 mm 1 mm
Power failure motion Brake Brake Brake Brake Brake

/Self-lock gear /Self-lock gear
Unpowered motion No No No No No
Powered speed:
Hand-Held Controller: fast 1.0 rpm 15 mm/sec 7.6 mm/sec 40 mm/sec 20 mm/sec
Hand-Held Controller: slow 0.2 rpm 5 mm/sec 5 mm/sec 10 mm/sec 5 mm/sec
Computer: max speed 1.0 rpm 15 mm/sec 7.6 mm/sec 40 mm/sec 20 mm/sec
Computer: slow speed 0.01 rpm 1 mm/sec 0.1 mm/sec 0.4 mm/sec 0.1 mm/sec
Computer step size 0.001 rpm 0.1 mm/sec 0.1 mm/sec 0.01 mm/sec 0.1 mm/sec
Max. force limits n/ac n/ac n/ac 180 N 180 N
a. Minimum/maximum radius from center of rotation.

b. The position accuracy is assumed to be maintained over successive gantry motions.
c. Collision sensors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1.8.2 Patient Table

The patient table can perform motor controlled, vertical, longitudinal, and
lateral motions. These features make it possible to set-up the system for
elliptical, step-and-shoot, and tomographic acquisitions.
1.8.3 Detectors
The system is configured with one or two rectangular detectors.
The photomultiplier tubes (PMTs) are mounted in rows and columns which
improve position information and signal-to-noise ratio when applying row/
column thresholding. The detectors are designed to use 3" square PMTs. The
signal output from the PMT pre-amps are summed from the 8 by 6
rectangular detector. These summed signals are subsequently processed in
dynamic linearity correction, and threshold circuits. Finally they are fed into a
resistor matrix for two dimensional positional weighting. This means that not
only events coming from a single tube but contribution from all other tubes in
the row/column are corrected.
The detector also includes the power supply board, and the I/N board for front
end data processing. This includes dynamic linearity correction,
normalization, and pulse pile-up correction. The data is transmitted via a
twisted-pair cable to the Framing Board for masking and linearity and energy
correction. This design offers a number of advantages:
• Improved position information when applying row/column

thresholding.
• Improved signal to noise ratio.
• Reduced Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for the detector due to
reduced number of PMTs.
1.8.4 Collimators
1.8.4.1 Available Collimators
The following types of collimators are available:
GE ELGEMS
Collimator Type Description
Part # Part #
LEGP Cast H2505RA 480-3200-5000 Low energy general purpose
LEHR Cast H2505RB 480-3200-5109 Low energy high resolution
LEUHS Cast H2505RE 480-3200-5406 Low energy ultra high sensitivity
MEGP Cast H2505RC 480-3200-5208 Medium energy general purpose
HEGP Cast H2505RD 4800-3200-5307 High energy general purpose
HEPI High energy pin hole

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1.8.4.2 Changing Collimators
WARNING
The collimator cart is very heavy. Take precautions when moving the
collimator cart and observe the instructions on the label attached to the top
of the cart.
CAUTION
THIS UNIT WEIGHS UP TO 270KG (596 LBS)
Care must be used when transporting from one area of use to another.
Failure to follow these precautions could result in uncontrolled motion and
injury to operator or others.
ALWAYS:
1. Be sure the pathway is clear.
2. Limit the movement to a slow careful walk.
3. Use at least two people when moving on incline.
Each pair of collimators is stored on its own cart. The cart features a
mechanism that locks the collimator onto either the cart or the detectors. This
provides a safe collimator changing procedure, disengaging the collimators
from the cart and engaging them to the detectors in one operation.
Before changing collimators, the detectors are placed in a pre-defined

position, and the collimator cart is positioned in front of the detectors. The
handles are pushed forward and the collimators are locked onto the detectors,
and the cart may be rolled out of the way.
1.8.5 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the detectors:
GE ELGEMS
Type Description
Part # Part #
Flood Phantom E8505JA N/A Refillable flood tank for

extrinsic energy corrections
Bar Phantom H3602LB 480-3200-9804 Quad resolution bar phantom,

with Stand bars at 2.5/3.0/3.5/4.0 mm
In addition, each system is provided with a Camera Uniformity Analysis

(CUA) bipod source holder.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Power Requirements
1.9 Power Requirements
CAUTION
The Acquisition computer receives power through the Integrated Power
Supply (IPS) located on the gantry. The computer should not be plugged
into any other outlet.
Electrical power is supplied to the system from a single-phase, grounded,

power cord. The single power cord plugs into the Integrated Power Supply
(IPS) in the gantry base, which distributes to the other system components.
1.10 Responsibility
In accordance with International Safety Standard IEC 601-1 (BS 5724), the
manufacturer cannot accept responsibility for the consequences of actions
carried out by personnel not authorized to do so by the system vendor,
including the following:
• Assembly operations
• Extensions
• Re-adjustments
• Modifications or repairs
1.11 Electrical Installation

In accordance with IEC 601-1 (BS 5724), the system vendor accepts
responsibility only for safety, reliability, and performance of this equipment if
the installation room complies with local laws and regulations concerning
electrical installations.
1.12 Use of Equipment

This equipment is designed for use in health care facilities and by qualified
personal only.
You should read and understand all instructions in the Operator's Manual
before attempting to use the equipment and request training assistance from
the system vendor if needed.
The system vendor only accepts responsibility for safety, reliability and
performance of this equipment if it is used in accordance with the instructions
found in the Operator's Manual.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Protection Against Electric Shock
1.13 Protection Against Electric Shock

• CLASS 1 TYPE B according to IEC 601-1 safety standard. This
equipment requires a reliable protective earth connection.
• CLASS IIA according to DIRECTIVE 93/42/EEC concerning
medical devices.
1.14 Ambient Temperature

Do not allow the detector to experience a temperature change of more than
5°F (3°C) per hour. Limits of low and high operating temperature ranges are
59°- 81°F (15°-27°C).
1.15 External Connections

In order to maintain electrical safety, only the peripherals listed below, or
others subsequently approved by the system vendor, may be powered directly
from the gantry.
Description Specification
Power to external peripherals 120 V @ 0.5 A, 50/60 Hz supply, one

(such as EKG Trigger) side grounded, the other side protected
by a circuit breaker
Acquisition System Isolated 120 V AC
Monitor Isolated 120 V AC
The external peripheral power should only be used with listed or certified
electro-medical equipment approved by the system vendor and installed by
their engineers.
Other peripherals connected to the system shall:
• Be independently powered and grounded.

• For USA and other 120 V AC, 60 Hz installations:
The devices must carry a test lab listing appropriate to its application
and place of use. For use in patient accessible places this listing should
be under "Medical and Dental Equipment Professional (KFBQ)".
• For European, or other 50 Hz installations:
The devices must carry a certificate of compliance with Directive
93/42/EEC concerning medical devices, and other CENELEC IEC
safety standards appropriate to its application and place of use. For use
in the patient environment, this certification should be made under
IEC 601-1, or an appropriate IEC 601-2 standard.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Service
Installation of any peripheral should be performed by a system vendor

engineer or other qualified biomedical engineer. If the peripheral is not on the
system vendor's Medical Systems approved list, the installation should be
checked to the appropriate safety standard for protective earth impedance
(ground impedance) and for leakage current.
1.16 Service
Service instructions and schematic diagrams, as deemed appropriate, are
provided in this manual.
There are no user-serviceable parts on this system. Suitably trained and

qualified personnel must perform all servicing.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Catalog Structure
1.17 Catalog Structure
MG/MC
GE# S8003WF
ELGEMS#100-32-000-407
GANTRY W/2 DET Acq. Computer Table Cart

GE# H2507LM
GE# H330PA GE# H2504LM GE# H2508KE
ELGEMS# 480-3205-1202
& BR32000041A ELGEMS# 407-3200-3401 ELGEMS# 407-3205-1103 ELGEMS# 480-3200-9101
LEGP
GE# H2505RA
ELGEMS# 480-3200-500
LEHR
GE# H2505RB
ELGEMS# 480-3200-5109
MEGP
GE# H2505RC
ELGEMS# 480-3200-5208
HEGP
GE# H2505RD
ELGEMS# 480-3200-5307
LEUHS
GE# H2505RE
ELGEMS# 480-3200-5406
HEPINHOLE
GE#
ELGEMS#
Options
Adult Pre-gelled Additional Handset Mattress Pad: Long R-Wave Trigger Rec Flood Source
Foam Electrodes 115V, 60Hz
GE# E8811KA GE# H3200JP GE# 2157676 GE# H5205EF GE# C057-E8505JC
ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# 480-3200-4102 ELGEMS# 702-3200-0318 ELGEMS# 480-3200-2106 ELGEMS# N/A
Headholder R-Made Armrest R-Wave Recorder Mounting Panel Mattress Pad: Short
115V, 60Hz
GE# E8500DA GE# E8500NA GE# H5205EG GE# E8500JJ GE# 2157676-2
ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# 480-3200-4300 ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# 702-3200-0607
Accessory Holder Modem IV Catheter Pole Patient Straps Flood Phantom
GE# H5208KB GE# H5208M GE# E8500FB GE# E8500JH GE# E8500JG
ELGEMS# 480-3200-2304 ELGEMS# 480-3200-8608 ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# N/A ELGEMS# N/A
Bar Phantom Manual Egress ATC ABC

GE# H3603LB GE#
ELGEMS# 480-3200-9804 ELGEMS# OPT000278 ELGEMS# OPT00052 ELGEMS# OPT00053

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Technical Specifications
1.18 Technical Specifications

For technical specifications (dimensions, weights, and point loading), refer to
Chapter 2, Site Planning and Pre-Installation.
1.19 Tools
1.19.1 Customer Tools
GE ELGEMS
Type Description
Part # Part #
Source Holder Assembly 2157860-2 BR32000358A Bi-pod source holder for Camera
(Rectangular) Uniformity Analysis (CUA) with vial
and crystal protection plates
1.19.2 Standard Tool Kits

The following tables identify tools needed by a field engineer to properly
service the system vendor's medical equipment.
Table 1-1: Field Engineer Tool Kit #1
Description Description
Pliers, Retaining Ring Pliers 6 in. Diagonal
Scribe Wire Stripper/cutter 5 in. - 100X
Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16 Pliers - very fine needle nose - 87CG
Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 Weller-Soldering Replacement Tip (1)
Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch Wiss - Surgical Scissors
Pliers, Slip Joint Hemostat 5 in. Straight
Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature Hemostat 5 in. Curved
Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc. Alignment tool (red)
Wrench, Adjustable, 4 inch Mini-screwdriver kit
Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby Xacto Pen Knife
Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip Solder Aid, Fork and Hook
Screwdriver, Blade, 1/8 in. x 4 in. Mirror, Round, Telescoping

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Tools
Table 1-1: Field Engineer Tool Kit #1 (Continued)
Screwdriver, Blade, 3/16 in. x 4 in. Steel Rule Decimal 6 in.

20ft Steel Tape, locking Spring load Steel Rule Metric 6 in.
Ratchet, Offset, Slotted Xcelite-hex Blade .050 in.
Ratchet, Offset, Philips Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 in.
Tapered Reamer Xcelite-hex Blade 5/16 in.
Screwdriver, Slotted 1/4 in. x 6 in. Xcelite-hex Blade 3/32 in.
Screwdriver, Philips #2, Stubby Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 in.
Screwdriver, Philips #0 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 in.
Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64 in.
1/4 in. Standard Socket set (19 pc) Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27 mm.
1/2 in. Socket 1/4 in. drive Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5 mm.
Flex Spinner Xcelite-hex Blade 2.0 mm.
Breaker Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5 mm.
6 in. Ext. Xcelite-hex Blade 3.0 mm.
Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep Xcelite-hex Blade 4.0 mm.
Hex Keys Xcelite-hex Blade 5.0 mm.
Torpedo Level, Magnetic Handle
Hammer, Ball Pein, 4 oz. Screwstarter - Kedman Quick Wedge
Universal Joint 1/4 in. Box - 18 Compartment
Weller-Soldering Iron, 3 wire Box - 5 Compartment
Weller-Soldering Iron Tip Pickup Tool, Claw type
Weller-Desoldering Pump 6 pc. Needle File Set
Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.) Utility Knife
Tweezers Pliers Vice Grip 10 in.
Brush - Bristle Pliers 4 1/4 in. Diagonal
Torque Wrench Set - 35-70 Nm (310-610 in-lb)
LOTO Kit
Paint Marker
Loc-tite 242 or 243

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Tools
Table 1-2: Field Engineer Tool Kit #2
Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 in. 12 PC Combination Wrench Set
Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 in. 3/8 in. Socket Set
Punch, Pin 3/32 in. Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive
Punch, Pin 5/32 in. 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. Adapter
Punch, Pin 1/4 in. 3/8 in. Metric Socket Set - 12 PT
Cold Chisel 1/2 in. 1/16 mm. Socket - 12 PT
Center Punch Automatic Metal Socket Tray
File Handle, adj. Metal Socket Tray
File, Round, Bastard 8 in. Metal Socket Tray
File, Half Round, Bastard 8 in. Tap and Drill Set
File, Flat Mill 8 in. #6 Tap
Close Quarter Saw #8 Tap
Wrench, adj. 10 in. High Speed Drill Set
Screwdriver 5/16 in. x 8 in. #36 Drill
Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 in. 29 Drill
Countersink 1/2 in.
Table 1-3: FE Tool Kit #3 (Installation)
C-Clamp 6 in. Case
C-Clamp 6 in. 12 in. Combination Square
C-Clamp 4 in. Rip Bar
Plumb Bob w/Chalk Line Rubber Mallet
Plumb Bob Ball Pein Hammer 8 oz.
14 pc. Socket Set - 1/2 in. Drive Claw Hammer 16 oz.
1/2 Universal Joint Tool Box
6 IN. Extension 1/2 in. Drive Vacuum Cleanera
Pallet Trucka
a. Specific to the system

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Tools
Table 1-4: Optional Power Tools
Drill Motors Saber Saws
9-1041 Craftsman Consumer Model 9-17211 Craftsman Consumer Model
9-27101 Craftsman Industrial Model 9-27251 Craftsman Industrial Model
Table 1-5: Supplied Tools
GE ELGEMS
Description
Part # Part #
2157435 560-3200-1804 10mm Allen wrench (custom length)
2157436 775-3200-6606 J6 Jumper Plug, Table E-Stop Override
2157437 775-3200-6408 Jumper Plug for Detector Collision Override
VL50036 1.75" (44.5 mm) Open end wrench
VL26081 Floor Plate Alignment tool
Table 1-6: Special Tools/Phantoms
GE ELGEMS
Description
Part # Part #
2146273-2 BR32000055A Spatial Linearity Kit

(Region/Country Level Only)
99155924 Pin Extractor
46-308109P2 Force Motor
2146256-2 BR32000056A NEMA Testing Kit

(Region/Country Level Only)
Grease Gun

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Introduction Glossary of Terms and Acronyms
1.20 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms
Group Term / Acronym Meaning
General Acquisition computer The CPU tower, mouse, keyboard, and monitor.
CUA Camera Uniformity Analysis
COR Center of Rotation
SOC Second order correction (Linearity)
Acquisition System AUI Acquisition User Interface
EUI Exerciser (Gantry/Table) User Interface
DUI Diagnostic User Interface
Gantry/Table HHC Hand-Held Controller connects on either side of the gantry, either
end of the table, or on the IPS.
IPS Integrated Power Supply, contained in the gantry base and

supplying all system power.
Detector MPS Multi-Purpose Square
MPR Multi-Purpose Rectangular
MG Multi-Geometry
PMT Photomultiplier tube
Dyncor Dynamic linearity correction
GEOCAL Geometric calibration of spatial position with reference to energy
I/N Input and Normalization
HV High Voltage

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 2 - Site Planning and Pre-Installation
The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that the room is fully prepared to
receive the complete system, and that the installation process may be
completed unhindered.
2.1 General Preparation

All site planning and pre-installation information can be found in the MG/MC
Site Preparation Manual, (G.E. # 2269387-100 / ELGEMS # MAN000426).
2.2 Pre-Installation Checks

Before the installation of the system, make sure to check various aspects of
the environment into which the equipment will be installed. If the
environment meets the criteria as defined in the MG/MC Site Preparation
Manual, there should not be any problems, but a check should be carried out
in any event.
Apart from the more obvious checks, verify the following:
• Has all building work been completed in the installation area?

• Are all corridors and doors to the installation area sufficiently wide to
allow proper access?
• Is mains power available along the route to the installation area?
• Have all criteria detailed in the Pre-Installation Check List been met
satisfactorily?

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Site Planning and Pre-Installation Pre-Installation Checks
2.2.1 Pre-Installation Checklist

Arrival/Installation Checklist Comment
Equipment Site name: ________________________________________________
Arrival/ When will the equipment arrive? Date: ___________________
Installation When will the equipment be installed? Date: ___________________
Site Preparation Checklist Yes No
Contact Is the primary field engineer identified? q q
Persons Is the primary field engineer trained on the equipment? q q
Is the sales representative identified? q q
Is the customer system administrator identified? q q
Is the customer facility coordinator identified? q q
General Access Is the route to the installation room clear, are corridor / elevator
q q
requirements met?
Room Power Is the room lighting adequate? q q
Requirements Are system power devices (1 phase) installed and is power available? q q
Is suppressor / filter installed? q q
Is one wall outlet (minimum) available for power tools? q q
Is power available along the delivery route? q q
Room Layout Is facility space identified by the customer? q q
Is room layout approved by the customer? q q
Are final room layout drawings signed by the customer? q q
Are final room layout drawings forwarded to the system vendor? q q
Does the room layout leave a free working space of 0.61 m (2'0'') around
q q
the equipment for servicing?
Room Does the room meets system vendor's environmental specifications for
Environments minimum size, HV AC system, telephone, network, temperature and
q q
humidity?
Has room construction been completed, and is the area free of dirt and q q
dust?
Are walls and ceiling support structures installed and painted? q q
Is the floor installed to level specifications? q q
Has the necessary cable routing/trunking been completed? q q
Equipment Is the receiving dock identified? q q
Receiving Is a pallet truck available locally? q q
Is a pallet truck supplied by forwarder? q q
Are customers and neighbors notified of need to use hammer drill q q
(noise issue)?
Is the equipment delivery route defined / accepted by GEMS and the q q
customer?
If necessary, is temporary storage area defined? q q
Are all conveying means and architectural changes required to facilitate
q q
equipment delivery done?
Radiation Is a radiation site license obtained for radiation source availability for
q q
License calibration of the equipment?
Waste Packing Is there facility for the disposal of empty wooden cases, foam blocks and
q q
large cardboard boxes?
Networking Is network established with site name, host name, ethernet addresses, and
q q
IP address?
Completion Pre-installation completed: _______________ Date: ___________ Comment
Sign off Customer: _________________________________
System Vendor Representative: _________________________________

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Site Planning and Pre-Installation System Shipping Dimensions
2.3 System Shipping Dimensions

The shipping dimensions are listed in the MG/MC Site Preparation Manual,
(G.E. # 2269387-100 / ELGEMS # MAN000426). Check that there is sufficient
space to unpack and to work on the units.
2.4 Technical Specifications
GE ELGEMS
Gantry
Part # 2184116 Part #
Operating Voltage 100-120 V AC, 50/60 Hz

220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
1.5 KVA
Note: The voltage is set at the factory and checked
during installation.
Heat Dissipation 4095 BTU/hr.
Weight 3,099.8 lb (1,406 kg), including detectors and IPS
Point Loading 175 lb/in2 (12.3 kg/cm2)
GE ELGEMS
Detector
Part # 2165972 Part # BR32000041A
Operating Voltage 24 V DC (powered by gantry)
Weight 523.6 lb (238 kg), each
GE ELGEMS
Table
Part # 2186646 Part # ASM000861
Operating Voltage 24 V DC and 65 V DC (powered by gantry)
Heat Dissipation N/A
Weight 836lb (380 kg)
Point Loading 205.4 lb/ in2 (14.4 kg/cm2)
Acquisition GE ELGEMS
Computer Tower Part # 2186560 Part #
Operating Voltage 115 V AC, 50/60 Hz (powered by gantry)
Weight 32 lb (14.5 kg)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Site Planning and Pre-Installation Packing List
2.5 Packing List
2.5.1 Gantry
The gantry is shipped in two containers. The first container holds the gantry,
and the second container holds equipment used for installation and assembly
of the gantry.
For USA shipments, the gantry and all components are on a shipping dolly.
Note
For international shipments, the gantry and all its components are enclosed in a
wooden box.
2.5.2 IPS
Each system uses one Integrated Power Supply (IPS). The IPS is shipped in
one container.
2.5.3 Collimators and Collimator Cart

Each system is shipped with at least one collimator cart which holds two
collimators. The entire unit is shipped in one container.
2.5.4 Patient Table

The table is shipped in two containers. The second container holds
miscellaneous equipment used for installation and assembly of the table.
For USA shipments, the table and all components are on a shipping dolly.
Note
For international shipments, the table and all its components are enclosed in a
wooden box.
2.5.5 Acquisition Computer

The computer (monitor, keyboard, tower, and mouse) is shipped in one
container.
2.5.6 Mobile Computer Cart

The cart is shipped in one container.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 3 - Installation
This chapter describes how to unpack and install the entire system, and
assumes the following:
• All equipment has been received.

• Any special tools and handling fixtures are on site and available. See
Chapter 1 and Section 3.1.
• The site has been prepared according to the requirements of the
MG/MC Site Preparation Manual, (G.E. Part # 2269387-100 / ELGEMS
Part # MAN000426).
• The Pre-Installation Checklist in Chapter 2 of this manual has been
completed, and no unresolved issues remain.
3.1 Equipment and Tools

In addition to the standard tool kit identified in Chapter 1, Table 3-1 below
lists additional items needed during installation.
Table 3-1: Special Installation Tools
Equipment Required for
Vacuum cleaner Cleaning after installation
Impact / Hammer Drill for 13 mm (1/2") Bolting the gantry to the floor; mounting
masonry drill the table locking pins
Spirit level (0.5 m) Checking /calibrating gantry and table
1/2" drive ratchet wrench with Removing/adjusting dollies

6" extension
14 mm Allen-head bit for 1/2" drive Removing/adjusting dollies

ratchet wrench (supplied with system)
15 mm socket Manual rotation of the gantry
150 mm extender Manual rotation of the gantry
19 mm socket Removing radial shipping brackets
Torque Wrench Correct tightening of bolts
If any of the shipping pallets must be moved before unpacking, a lifting cart
with the specifications listed in Figure 3-1, is recommended.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Equipment and Tools
521 to 740 mm
(20.0 to 29")
Minimum
100 mm (39")
Minimum Maximum
160 mm (6.3") 80 mm (3.15")
203 to 279 mm
(8 to 11")
Figure 3-1: Recommended Lifting Cart Dimensions
When moving the equipment, note the center-of-gravity sign and place the
lifting cart under the pallet, in line with the sign.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Equipment and Tools
3.1.1 Shipping Dollies

The shipping dollies are multiple-part, multiple-use tools. The gantry
shipping dolly is shown in Figure 3-2. It will be used in different
configurations and at different stages during the installation process.
Shipping
End-stand
Crossbar
Local Transit
Dolly (LTD)
Figure 3-2: Shipping Dolly for Gantry
3.1.2 Patient Table Shipping Crate
Figure 3-3: Patient Table Shipping Crate
The Patient Table is shipped fully assembled, inside a wooden crate.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation System Installation
3.2 System Installation

3.2.1 Overview
For a complete overview of the installation process of the system, including
pre-installation, refer to Figure 3-4.
Planning & Preparing the Site Computer System Connections

(Direction 2180596-100) (Section 3.2.10.3)
Completing & Approving Drawings Installing the Hand-held Controllers

(Direction 2180596-100) (Section 3.2.14)
Completing Pre-installation Checklist Powering Up the System

(Section 2.2) (Section 3.2.15)
Receiving & Inspecting Equipment Preliminary Installation of the Table

(Section 2.5) (Section 3.2.17)
System Configurations
Transporting the Equipment On Site
(Section 3.4)
(Section 3.2.2)
Installing the Gantry Installing the Collimators

(Section 3.2.3) (Section 3.5)
Unpacking & Positioning the Table Positioning the Gantry and Table
(Section 3.2.4) (Section 3.2.7)
Installing the Integrated Power Supply Gantry & Table Axes Calibration
Installing the Acquisition Computer Functional Checks

Figure 3-4: Installation Overview

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.1.1 Installation Timetable

Task Activity Day # of Eng. Est. Time Per Eng. Total Actual Time Comments
Installing the Gantry
1 Unpacking and moving to room location 1 2 1.00 2.00
2 Drilling anchor holes and final positioning 1 2 0.50 1.00
3 Leveling the gantry 1 2 0.25 0.50
4 Anchoring gantry 1 1 0.25 0.25
5 Installing IPS mounting brackets 1 1 0.50 0.50
6 Adjusting input voltage 1 1 0.25 0.25
7 Connecting the IPS & HHC to the gantry 1 1 0.25 0.25
Installing the Table
8 Unpacking and positioning the table 1 2 1.00 2.00
9 Installing the extender & IV-pole holder 2 1 0.05 0.05
10 Installing the table cables 1 1 0.25 0.25
Installing the Acquisition Computer & Mobile Cart
11 Unpacking and assembling the mobile cart 2 1 0.75 0.75
12 Unpacking the computer 2 1 0.10 0.10
Connecting System Cables
13 Connecting cables to the computer tower 2 1 0.25 0.25
14 Clamping and concealing the computer cables 2 1 0.25 0.25
15 Connecting cables to the IPS 2 1 0.25 0.25
16 Installing the modem (optional) 2 1 0.25 0.25
17 Powering up the system 2 1 0.25 0.25
Configuring the System
18 Assigning user names and default passwords 2 1 0.10 0.10
19 Configuring the software for the first time 2 1 0.50 0.50
20 Creating the database 2 1 0.10 0.10
21 Installing the PrServer license 2 1 0.10 0.10
22 Installing the software option licenses 2 1 0.10 0.10
23 Loading detector correction data 2 1 0.20 0.20
24 Rebooting the Acquisition computer 2 1 0.10 0.10
25 Contacting the on-line center for InSite access 2 1 0.30 0.30
26 Configuring other Starlink stations 2 1 0.10 0.10
Calibrating Gantry & Table Motion Axes
27 Aligning table to gantry 2 1 1.00 1.00
28 Running the table alignment program 2 1 0.25 0.25
Installing the Collimators
29 Unpacking the collimators 1 2 2.00 4.00
30 Aligning the collimator carts 2 1 3.00 3.00
Performing System Function Checks
31 Checking Image Quality Assessment (CUA) 3 1 1.00 1.00
32 Checking Center of Rotation Checks (COR) 3 1 0.50 0.50
33 Checking gantry/table operation 3 1 2.50 2.50
Cleaning Up the Site
34 Preparing & shipping the empty dollies 1 2 0.50 1.00
35 Disposing of packing materials 1 2 2.00 4.00
Day 1 installation time = 16 hours, 2 engineers
Day 2 installation time = 8 hours, 1 engineer
Day 3 installation time = 4 hours, 1 engineer
Total installation time = 28 hours

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.2 On-Site Equipment Transportation

As part of the pre-installation process and checklist, a full assessment of the
transit of the equipment from delivery point to the final destination should
have been completed. If there are no access limitations, the gantry and table
can easily be transported to the final destination on the shipping dollies.
Important The shipping dolly must be returned to the system vendor.

Section 3.11 explains the procedure.
3.2.2.1 International Shipments
Systems shipped long distances (air, boat, etc.) will have additional packing in
the form of underside pallets and external boxing. The shipping
end-stands will remain outside this packing but will be raised so that the
pallets can provide stability and support during transit. These pallets may be
removed at the point of unloading by supporting the weight on the shipping
end-stands. The external boxing may then be removed.
At this time, there are no established procedures for returning the ROW shipping
Note dollies.
3.2.2.2 Local Transit Dolly
The most critical factor in transporting the system to its final destination is the
size of the door openings. If at any point an opening is smaller than 1,260 mm
(49.6 inches), the gantry must be removed from the pallet. For openings
smaller than 914 mm (36 inches), you must manually rotate the gantry into its
minimum-width configuration. This procedure is described in Section 3.2.3.5.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.3 Installation of the Gantry

3.2.3.1 Unpacking
Important The detectors should remain wrapped and be kept at a constant temperature for at
least 24 hours before being unpacked.
1. Remove external boxing and packing material from around the gantry, but
do not remove the protective wrapping from the detectors.
See Figure 3-5.
End-stands with Lifting Mechanism
LTD
Caster
Pallet Bolts Shipping Pallet Pallet Bolts
Figure 3-5: Gantry on Shipping Dolly (packing removed)
2. Loosen and remove all yellow dolly parts from the shipping pallet.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.3.2 Moving the Gantry
CAUTION
To prevent accidents or damage, always monitor the position of personnel
and equipment for the entire duration of the move.
There are several possible methods of moving the gantry to the final
destination, depending on the width of doorways, hallways, or elevators:
• Very easy access, with doorways wider than 1,290 mm (50.8 inches).
Move the gantry using the blue shipping dollies. See Section 3.2.3.3.
• Easy access, with doorways wider than 91.4 mm (36 inches) but
narrower than 1,290 mm (50.8 inches). Move the gantry using the blue
shipping dollies and Local Transit Dollies (LTD). See Section 3.2.3.4.
• Narrow or restricted access. If any doorways are less than 91.4 mm
(36 inches), you must transfer the gantry to the LTD and then
manually rotate the detectors so the gantry can be manoeuvred around
corners and through narrow doorways. See Section 3.2.3.5.
3.2.3.3 Very Easy Access
Move the gantry to the final destination using the blue shipping dollies.
3.2.3.4 Easy Access
1. Remove the bolts holding the shipping pallet to the gantry.

2. Use the lifting mechanism on the blue shipping end-stands to raise the
gantry high enough to remove the shipping pallet. See Figure 3-5.
Lift Gantry Using

End-stands
Remove Pallet Bolts;

Remove Pallet
Figure 3-6: Removing the Pallet

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Use the lifting mechanism on the blue end-stands to raise the gantry high
enough to mount the four caster wheels onto the bottom of the LTD.
Use four M12 x 30 bolts for each wheel and tighten the bolts to 120 Nm
(88 lbs.ft.)
4. Lower the gantry until the wheels of the end stands are just off the ground,
and all weight is supported by the LTD casters. See Figure 3-5.
Lower Gantry Using

the End-stands
Figure 3-7: Lowering the Gantry onto the LTD
5. Remove the bolts connecting the end-stands to the LTD.

6. Remove the M12 X 30 bolts holding the blue end-stands to the gantry and
pull the end-stands, including the cross bar, away from the gantry.
CAUTION
Before removing the end-stand bolts, make sure that the entire weight of
the gantry is supported by the LTD, and no weight is on the blue end
stands.
7. Use the LTD to convey the gantry to its final destination. See Figure 3-8.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Local Transit Dolly (LTD)
Figure 3-8: Moving the Gantry using the LTD
8. Re-mount the blue end-stands to the LTD.

9. Use the blue end-stands to lift the gantry and remove the LTD wheels.
3.2.3.5 Narrow or Restricted Access
The gantry is shipped with Detector #1 located on top and Detector #2

directly below. (This is done to minimize the side-force on the PM-tubes
during transportation.) The following procedure explains how to rotate the
detectors 90° in order to maneuver the gantry through a 91.4 mm (36 inch)
doorway.
1. If present, remove the wrapping from the detectors, but do not remove the
protective plates.
Important The detector should remain at destination-room temperature for at least 24 hours
before the protective plates are removed.
2. Remove the rear protection cover from the gantry to gain access to the
cable chain.
3. Assemble the 15 mm box spanner, extender and crank-handle and insert it
into the opening shown in Figure 3-9.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Cable Chain
in Position 0o
Detector #1
Detector #1
Cable Chain
Rotated 90° in Position 90°
Gantry Side-View
Gantry Rear View
(Before rotation
of detectors)
Roll
Shaft
Crank
Opening
Figure 3-9: Manually Rotating the Gantry
4. Manually turn the crank CW approximately 300 revolutions to rotate the

detectors approximately 90° CW. No locking of the detectors in this
position is necessary. The detectors are locked by the roll motor and roll
motor brake.
CAUTION
• During rotation, the roll motor brake is engaged. Do not rotate the
gantry by means of a power drill. This may overheat the roll motor
brake.
• The roll motor has no mechanical limitation. Do not damage the cable
chain by rotating the gantry more than ± 90° from its 0° shipping
position
5. Move the gantry into the room as shown in Figure 3-10.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 3-10: Maneuvering the Gantry through a 36" Doorway

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.4 Unpacking and Positioning the Patient Table

1. Using a screwdriver, remove the clamps securing the top and side walls of
the crate.
Figure 3-11: Removing the Securing Clamps
2. Take the lid off the crate and then remove the side walls.
Figure 3-12: Removing the Top and Sides of the Crate

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Remove the sheet of plastic that is covering the table.
Figure 3-13: Table on Wooden Pallet with Plastic Sheet Removed
4. Pull out the rail located at the base of the unit (next to the wheels) until the
hole at the end of the rail is visible.
Figure 3-14: Pulling out the Rails

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Fit the hole (at the end of the rail) over the locating pin at the base of the
wooden platform (see A in Figure 3-15).
The plastic covering on the wheels should not be removed until the table reaches
Note its destination.
A Locating Pin
Figure 3-15: Fitting the Hole (at the end of the rail) Over the Locating Pin
Figure 3.15 Legend:
A Placing the rail on the locating pin
B Plastic covering on the wheels
C Directing the wheels toward rails

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the second rail.

7. Rotate the wheels so that they are in line with the rails (C in Figure 3-15).
8. Ensure that the two rails are parallel to each other - see Figure 3-16.
Figure 3-16: Verifying the Rails are Parallel
9. Cut and remove the bands holding the table in place on the pallet.
Figure 3-17: Removing the Securing Bands

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10. Using the 2 lifting mechanisms (supplied in the Table Accessory Box), lift
one side of the patient bed and remove the 2 wooden support blocks.
See Figure 3-18 below.
Figure 3-18: Removing the Wooden Support Blocks

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11. Carefully lower the table onto it’s wheels (using the lifting mechanisms,
as shown in Figure 3-19).
Figure 3-19: Lowering the Patient Table
12. Repeat the procedure (steps 10 - 11) for the opposite side.
13. Remove the lifting mechanism after the table is lowered.
14. Slowly guide the table on to the rails, making sure the wheels are aligned
with the rails - see Figure 3-20.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 3-20: Guiding the Table onto the Rails
15. Carefully roll the Patient Table off the rails.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.4.1 Moving the Table
1. To move the table through a doorway, a minimum width of 48 inches

(1220 mm) is required.
2. To rotate the table out of a hallway or other room, a minimum width of
49 inches (1250 mm) is required. See Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21: Maneuvering the Table through a Doorway

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.5 Unpacking the Collimators and Collimator Cart
CAUTION
The collimators and the collimator carts are very heavy. Take the following
precautions when moving a cart:
• Check that the pathway is clear.
• Always push the cart at a slow, careful speed.
• Use at least two people when moving the cart up or down an incline.
1. Remove the outer packaging and plywood ramp.

2. Remove the side covers and the base covers.
3. Remove the wooden frame and steel tubes that support the cart.
Save the lag screws since they will be used later.
CAUTION
The steel tubes are not attached to the wooden frame and will fall out when
the frame is removed.
4. Remove the cart's base covers.

5. Loosen the adjustment screws on the base and raise the cart off the
wooden frame of the skid.
6. Install the plywood ramp on the skid and insert the two lag screws
removed above.
7. Remove the blocks from behind the large front wheels.
8. Very carefully and slowly, roll the cart off the skid.
9. Remove the eight foam spacers from the collimator lock keys. Remove
the eight 10 mm shipping jackscrews labeled with yellow stickers. These
screws prevented the side plates from compressing during shipment.
10. Install the docking pin.
11. Move the cart out of the way until directed to install the collimators onto
the detectors in Section 3.5.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.6 Removing the Detectors' Shipping Brackets

1. Remove the thermal wrap, if present.
2. Use a 19 mm wrench to remove the sixteen M12 bolts from the detector
shipping brackets. Refer to Figure 3-22.
Detector Shipping Brackets (4 Pcs.)
Figure 3-22: Removing Detector Shipping Brackets

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.7 Positioning the Gantry and Table

Refer to the MG/MC Site Preparation Manual to determine the exact
placement of the Gantry and table. Drill the holes for the anchors using the
drill bits specified in Figure 3-23.
1. Using the templates provided, mark the locations of the anchor holes.
2. Using a 15 mm masonry bit, drill the holes for the anchors to a depth of at
least 90 mm.
Figure 3-23: Anchor Bolt Specifications
3. Remove the templates and clear the dirt from the holes. The use of a
vacuum cleaner is recommended.
4. Insert the anchors into the holes. Use a mandrel to hammer down the
wedge inside the plugs and lock the expansion plugs.
Drill Anchor Holes
Figure 3-24: Installing the Anchors
5. Position the gantry so the holes in the base align with the holes in the
floor. Make sure the gantry is oriented correctly.
6 Using the blue shipping end-stands, lower the gantry close to the floor.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7 Align the mounting holes in the gantry with the holes in the floor.
8 Insert the anchor bolts through the base into the holes in the floor to
correctly align the gantry.
Note Do not tighten the bolts at this time. The gantry still needs to be leveled.
9. Lower the gantry to the floor. Remove the end-stands and the LTD from
the gantry.
CAUTION
Before removing the end-stand bolts, make sure that the weight of the
gantry is supported by the gantry base only.
No weight should be on the end-stands.
10. Use a 5 mm Allen wrench on the leveling pads to level the gantry.
CW rotation will raise the gantry, CCW rotation will lower the gantry.
CAUTION
Before attempting to level the gantry, ensure that all leveling pads are
equally loaded.
11. Tighten the anchor bolts.
CW Rotation = Ï
CCW Rotation = Ð
Figure 3-25: Adjusting the Leveling Pads on the Gantry

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Vertical
Leveling
Side-to-Side
Leveling IPS Mounting
Screws Front-to-Back
Leveling
Front and Rear

Leveling Pads
Figure 3-26: Leveling the Gantry (Top View)
12. Position the front locking pin for the patient table over the mounting
holes. Insert the anchors through the holes in the pin and anchor the pin to
the floor.
Figure 3-27: Front Locking Pin
The table is supplied for left side installation. For the right side installation the
Note following steps need to be taken:
1. Move the table cable from its position along the table left side to the right
side above the front wall of the table base.
2. Fix the cable with two clamps (delivered in table accessories box) to the
front wall using the two existing M6 Allen head screws fastened to the
front side of the front wall.
3. Make sure that the cable lies on the top edge of the front wall and is
properly fixed by the clamps.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
13. Move the patient table into the gantry roll axis so that the docking plate
under the table fits over the locking pin.
Note The rear of the table will be accurately positioned and anchored later.
14. Remove the two lateral shipping brackets mounted on the lateral linear
guides under the table upper plate as shown in Figure 3-28.
15. Remove the longitudinal shipping stopper mounted on the right side rail.
Fit the supplied plug into the stopper aperture.
Longitudinal Shipping Stopper

Lateral Shipping Bracket
Figure 3-28: Shipping Brackets
3.2.8 Removing the Detectors' Protectors

Remove the thermal protectors from each detector.
CAUTION
The detectors need 24 hours to stabilize their temperature. Verify the
detectors have been at room temperature for at least 24 hours.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.9 Installing the Integrated Power Supply (IPS)

3.2.9.1 Setting the IPS's Main Power Voltage
1. Unpack the IPS and remove the unit from the shipping pallet.
WARNING
• The IPS weighs approximately 60 kg. (132 lbs). Do not attempt to lift
it by yourself. Roll the unit off the shipping pallet using its built-in
wheels.
• Do not pull the power supply with the handle on the front cover. Use
the handles at each side to move the unit.
2. Remove the two M4 screws next to the handle on the front cover and then
remove the IPS front cover.
3. Verify the voltage taps are set correctly and match incoming voltage. If
necessary adjust the taps on the isolation transformer. Table 3-2 defines
the input voltage and Figure 3-26 shows the location of the taps.
Table 3-2: Transformer Taps
Nominal
Input Voltage Circuit
Input TAP 1 TAP 2 TAP 3 TAP 4
Range Breaker
Voltage
100 V 90 V to 110 V 1 to 5 1 to 8 2 to 6 2 to 9 20 amp.
120 V 108 V to 132 V 1 to 5 1 to 8 2 to 7 2 to 10 20 amp.
200 V 180 V to 220 V 3 to 5 6 to 8 4 to 9 N/A 10 amp.
Circuit Breakers
CB2@10A
Main Input Power Voltage

Taps
CB1@20A
Figure 3-29: Transformer Tap Positions
4. Press the two circuit breakers on the connector panel (CB1 and CB2), to
ensure that the breakers are enabled.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.9.2 Installing and Connecting the IPS onto the Gantry
The IPS is shipped in two pieces on a separate pallet. To install the IPS
proceed as follows:
1. Install the two IPS mounting brackets on the rear of the gantry as shown
in Figure 3-30. Use four M8 countersunk screws and tighten.
Gantry Side View Gantry Rear View
4 Pcs. M8
Countersunk
Screws
IPS Bracket
Mounted
Figure 3-30: Installing the IPS Mounting Brackets
2. Loosen and remove the gantry cables tucked into the cavity at the rear of
the gantry.
3. Move the IPS close to the gantry so the gantry cables easily reach the
connector panel on the rear of the IPS.
4. Mount the protective ground wires of Detector #1, Detector #2, and the
gantry using a lock washer as shown in Figure 3-31.
WARNING
The safety of the system depends on grounding continuity.
When securing ground wires from the detectors and the gantry to the IPS,
you must use lock washers.
5. Install a cable tie to relieve pressure on the grounding wires as shown in

Figure 3-31.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Gnd. Stud
Nut
Ring Terminal
Locking Washer
Gantry Rear
Detector #1 & #2
Protective
Ground Wires
Gantry
Protective
Ground
Point
IPS Connector Panel
Cable Tie
Protective Ground
Wire Relief
IPS Ground for:

Gantry
Detector #1
Detector #2
Figure 3-31: Grounding the System
6 Connect the remaining gantry cables to the connector panel on the IPS as
shown inFigure 3-32. Additional information on the cables can be found
in Table 3-3. The markings on the gantry's cables corresponds to the
markings on the IPS connector panel.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Gantry Rear
Detectors 1 & 2
Grounding Wires
Gantry Grounding Wire
IPS Connector Panel

G7
G12
G8 G1 G2 G3
G1 G5 G6
G4 G4
G10
G7 G8 G9
G3
G6 G11
G9 G10
G2
G5 G12 G13
G11
G13
Figure 3-32: Gantry-to-IPS Connections

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 3-3: Gantry Cable Connections
IPS
Gantry Cable Connector Cable
Connector
Label Type Function
Marking
G1 DB15 Female HHC 1 and E-Stop 1 G1
G3 DB25 Female Detector #1 G3
G4 DB15 Female HHC 2 and E-Stop 2 G4
G5 DB9 Female Taxi, Detector #2 G5
G6 DB25 Female Detector #2 G6
G7 DB15 Male Roll limit G7
G8 DB9 Male Roll motor fan and brake G8
G9 DB25 Male Low voltage supply G9
G10 CPC14 Male Roll encoder G10
G11 CPC24 Male Radial encoders G11
G12 CPC9 Male Roll power G12
G13 CPC9 Male Radial power(s) G13
Yellow/Green Ring terminal Protective ground:

Wire Detector #1 to IPS

Wire Detector #2 to IPS

Wire Gantry to IPS
7. After all cables have been connected, position the IPS behind the gantry.
Before mounting the IPS on the gantry, organize the cables so they are not
pinched.
8. Loosen the IPS from the gantry as shown in Steps 1 to 4 of Figure 3-33.
Verify that no cables are pinched between the IPS and the gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
POSITION CABLES TO AVOID THEM BEING PINCHED

BETWEEN THE IPS AND THE GANTRY
f e d c
Gantry Side View Rotate Lock for Lift IPS Position IPS Open Lock
IPS and Insert at the Top at the Bottom for IPS
Lock Screw
Lock
Screw
Figure 3-33: Loosening the IPS from the Gantry
3.2.9.3 Preparing the Main Power Cable
One end of the main power cable supplied with the IPS is a HUBBEL Type
H320C plug for connection to the IPS. However, no wall outlet plug is
connected to the cable or supplied. The wall outlet plug must be procured
locally, meet local requirements, and the specifications listed in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Main Power Wall-plug Specifications
Rating USA Wall Plug European Wall Plug
Current 20 A 10 A
Voltage 125 V AC 250 V AC
Cable diameter 0.5 inch (12 mm) 12 mm
Approvals UL: "Hospital Grade" Meets local current and

or voltage ratings
UL: "Hospital Only"
WARNING
Only use the power cable supplied with the equipment.
Using another power cable could result in electrical shock injury to the
service provider, operator, or patient.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Connect the plug to the cable. Refer to Figure 3-34.
NEUTRAL: Blue
LIVE: Brown
Connections to Wall Plug

GROUND: NEUTRAL: Blue
Yellow/Green
GROUND: Yellow/Green
LIVE: Brown
Figure 3-34: Installing the Plug on the Power Cable
2. Check that the wall receptacle meets electrical requirements.
WARNING
In the USA, grounding reliability is only achieved when the equipment is
connected to a UL-approved receptacle marked "Hospital Grade" or
"Hospital Only."
Do not plug the main power cable into the power receptacle at this time.
Additional system connections still have to be made.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.10 Installing the GENIE Acquisition Computer
Important Computers are continuously being upgraded and the specifications are constantly
changing.
3.2.10.1 Unpacking and Assembling the Mobile Cart
Unpack the computer's cart and assemble following the directions provided in
the cart's packing materials.
3.2.10.2 Installing the Monitor, Keyboard, and Mouse on the Cart
CAUTION
Do not place any items on top of the monitor since they might block the
monitor's ventilation system.
1. Install the monitor, mouse, and keyboard on the computer cart, securing
the monitor with the hold-down sliders. Refer to Figure 3-35.
Monitor
Hold-down Sliders
Keyboard Mouse
Cart
Figure 3-35: Mobile Cart with Monitor, Keyboard, and Mouse
3.2.10.3 Installing the Acquisition Computer's Tower
Place the computer tower in a place where it is not likely to get knocked or
damaged.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.11 IBM xSeries 205 Computer System Connections
BCNT
IPS UNIT
ACQ 1 1 1 1
J7
0 0 0 0
Det
J5 J6
1
Det
2
GANTRY MOTION CONTROL

Monitor
Framing Board 1
Framing Board 2
ACQ. COMPUTER PC COMMUNICATION CBL000843
Legend
AC - Attenuation Control Mouse
BC - Body Contour
BC1-P1 Keyboard
Printer
USB
Network
Framing Board 1
P1
ECG Socket (BNC)
AC2-P2
P2
Framing Board 2
AC3-P3 P3
P4 Monitor
DIGI NEO I/O Card

63000183-02
Figure 3-36: System Connections - IBM xSeries 205 Computer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
CAUTION
Always plug the PC and Monitor into the power outlet on the IPS.
Never plug the PC directly into a wall receptacle.
WARNING
Do not plug the PC Tower or Monitor into any power source other
than the Isolated power on the IPS.
3.2.11.1 IDE Controller Cable Connections
1. Confirm that the Primary and Secondary Hard Drives are connected to
IDE Primary Controller flat cable.
2. Confirm that the CD ROM is connected to IDE Secondary Controller
flat cable.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.12 Installation of Boards/Cards

3.2.12.1 Removing the side cover
Complete the following steps to remove the side cover of the computer.
To remove the side cover, you might find it easier to lay the computer on its side. If
Note you do, move the stabilizing feet so that they do not break. See“Moving the
stabilizing feet”.
1. Turn off the computer and all attached devices.

2. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
3. Pull the cover-release latch away from the computer, and push the side
cover toward the rear of the computer.
Figure 3-37: Side Cover Lock

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.12.2 Installing a Board / Card
Important When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid damage from
static electricity.
1. Turn off the computer and all attached devices, and disconnect all external
cables and power cords; then, remove the side cover. See Section 3.2.12.1.
Check the instructions that come with the adapter for any requirements,
Note restrictions, or cabling instructions. It might be easier to route any cables before
you install the adapter.
2. Remove the frame-support bracket as follows:

a. Pull out on the rear end of the frame-support bracket approximately
150 mm (6in.).
b. Pull the rear end of the frame-support bracket away from the server
and place the bracket aside.
3. If you are installing a framing board, rotate the front board-retaining

bracket to the open position.
4. Rotate the rear board-retaining bracket to the open (unlocked) position,
and remove it from the computer.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. From the rear of the computer, press on the slot cover. Grasp it and pull
the expansion-slot cover out of the expansion slot. Store it in a safe place
for future use.
Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This maintains the
Note electronic emissions standards of the computer and ensures proper ventilation of
computer components.
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package, carefully grasp

theadapter by the top edge or upper corners, and align it with the
expansion slot guides; then, press the adapter firmly into the expansion
slot.
It is best to move the board or card directly from the static-protective package to the
Note slot. If this is not possible, set the board down on its static-protective package on a
hard surface. Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
board.
7. Replace the side cover by placing it into position on the computer. Be

certain the notches on the underside of the side cover match up to the
holes along the sides of the computer. Press down on the cover-release
latch button as you close the cover-release latch to lock the side cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.13 BIOS Configuration

It is important to confirm the BIOS settings before proceeding with the
installation.
3.2.13.1 Working in the BIOS Environment
Use the following keys to navigate and operate the BIOS menus:
Keyboard Command
↑ Move Up
↓ Move Down
→ Change
Option
← Change
Option
<Enter> Select
F1 Help
Esc Quit Menu
3.2.13.2 Verifying BIOS Settings
1. Open the Computer’s front door.

2. Press the Power ON button.
Note If the computer is already running, press <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> to restart the
computer
3. As soon as the IBM logo appears, press the <F2> key to enter the BIOS
setup program.
The computer will start loading the BIOS. After a few seconds a message
appears "Entering Setup now...." and the Configuration/Setup Utility
screen appears.
4. Press <Enter> to open the System Summary menu.

Make sure that the system specifications match the following:
• Processor speed: 2.8 GHz
• System memory: 128 MB
IDE Primary Master Device: Hard Disk, 40016 MB
IDE Primary Slave Device: None
IDE Secondary Master Device: CD ROM
IDE Secondary Slave Device: Hard Disk, 40016 MB

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Select the Devices and I/O Ports menu.

Make sure that the settings match the following:
• Mouse: Enabled
• Diskette Drive A: 1.44 MB 3.5"
• USB Floppy Drive: Used as Normal
• Floppy Disk Controller: Enabled
• IDE Controller: Both
• System Board Ethernet: Enabled
• System Board Ethernet PXE/DHCP:Disabled
• AST POST Function: Disabled
a. Select the Serial Port Setup sub menu (press <Enter>).
Serial Port A: Enabled

Serial Port A Address: 3F8h
Serial Port A IRQ: 4
Serial Port B: Enabled
Serial Port A Address: 2F8h
Serial Port A IRQ: 3
b. Select the USB Setup sub menu (press <Enter>).
USB Suport: Disabled

c. Select the Parallel Port Setup sub menu (press <Enter>).
Parallel Port: Enabled

Parallel Port Address: 378h
Parallel Port IRQ: 7
Parallel Port Extended Mode: Standard
Parallel Port Extended Mode DMA: Standard
d. Select the IDE Primary Master Device sub menu (press <Enter>).
Device Detection Mode: Auto

Hard Disk LBA Mode: Auto
Hard Disk Block Mode: Auto

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Hard Disk 32 Bit Access: Enabled

Advanced PIO Mode: Auto
DMA Transmitter Mode: Auto
e. Select the IDE Primary Slave Device sub menu (press <Enter>).

Hard Disk LBA Mode: Auto
Hard Disk Block Mode: Auto
Hard Disk 32 Bit Access: Enabled
f. Select the IDE Secondary Master Device sub menu
(press <Enter>).
g. Select the IDE Secondary Slave Device sub menu (press <Enter>).
6. Select the Start Options menu.

a. Select the Startup Sequence sub menu (press <Enter>).
Wake on LAN: Disabled

First Startup Device: Hard Disk 0
Second Startup Device: Diskette Drive 0
Third Startup Device: Disabled
Fourth Startup Device: Disabled
Other Startup options:
Fast power on self test: Auto

Select Active Video: On Board
Power On Logos: Enabled
Keyboard NumLock State: On

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Configuration Table: Disabled

Keyboardless Operation: Disabled
Disketteless Operation: Disabled
Displayles Operation: Enabled
Boot Fail Count: Enabled
Boot on POST BIOS Error: Enabled
b. Select the Date & Time sub menu (press <Enter>).
Make sure that the Date & Time settings are correct.
c. Select theSystem Security sub menu (press <Enter>).

Administrator Password:
Administrator Password: None

Disk Drive Control:
Floppy Drive: Normal

Hard Disk Drive: Normal
7. Select the Advanced Setup menu.
a. Select the Memory Cache Options sub menu (press <Enter>).
L1 Cache: Enabled
L1 Cache: Enabled
Memory at 15MB -16MB: Reserved for System
b. Select the PnP/PCI Options sub menu (press <Enter>).
PCI IRQ Setting: Auto

PCI Extender Card: View only
PCI IRQ Sharing: Yes
VGA Pallette Snoop: Disabled
Graphics Aperture Size: 8 MB
Plug and Play Operating System:No
Reset Resource Assignments: No
c. Select the CPU Frequency sub menu (press <Enter>).
CPU Frequency Multiple: Safe

Single Processor MP Table: Enabled

Direction 2414259-100 2019
MP Table Version: V1.4

d. Select the Chipset Settings sub menu (press <Enter>).
Display Transaction: Enabled

Spread Spectrum: Disabled
FAN PWM Control: Enabled
e. Select the Memory Settings Settings sub menu (press <Enter>).
Reset Memory DIMMS: Disabled

f. Select the Power Management sub menu (press <Enter>).
PCI Wake Up: Disabled

Automatic Power On: Previous State
g. Select the Error Logs sub menu (press <Enter>).
Use Port Error Log menus to clear Error Log Table if necessary.
h. Select the Save Settings sub menu (press <Enter>).

The message: "Current settings will be saved" appears.
Press <Enter> to continue.
OR
i. Select the Restore Settings sub menu (press <Enter>).

The message: "Current settings will be restored" appears
(to what they were before the changes).
Press <Enter> <Enter> to continue.
OR
j. Select the Default Settings sub menu (press <Enter>).

The message: "Load Default Values?" appears
(Press <Enter> <Enter> to continue.
k. Select the Exit Setup sub menu (press <Enter>).

The message: "Do you really want to exit the Setup Utility?" appears
Select <Yes> to exit the Setup utility
or <No> to return to Setup.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.13.3 Concealing the Cables
1. Secure with two plastic clips the cable concealment from the computer
tower to the bottom of the computer cart. Refer to Figure 3-38.
Cable Clamps
Cart Base Cable Concealment

(contains computer
cables)
Figure 3-38: Computer Cart Cables
2. Install an M4 flathead screw through a tie-wrap holder and then up

through one of the pre-drilled holes located at the rear right-side of the
monitor mounting platform. Refer to Figure 3-39.
3. Install the front tie-wrap holder to the right and front bottom of the
monitor mounting platform. Secure with a "P" clamp, washer, and nut. Do
not tighten the nut.
4. tie-wrap the monitor cables together every 152 mm (6 inches) until the
cables reach the "P" clamp. Make sure monitor has full tilt and left-right
movement.
5. Secure the monitor's power cable to the "P" clamp. Tighten the nut on the
"P" clamp.
Power Cable
"P" Clamp,
Washer and Nut Image
Monitor Cable
(located on top
of platform)
Tie-wrap
Front Ty-wrap Holder M4 Screw and Back Ty-wrap Holder

(located under the platform) (located under the platform)
Figure 3-39: Monitor Cables

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Secure mouse and keyboard cables to the front and back tie-wrap holders
with tie-wraps.
7. Attach the cables to the monitor's power cable (below monitor mounting
platform) with tie-wraps.
8. Using the release lever on the front of the cart, raise the cart mounting
platform to the up-most position.
9. Cut the monitor's cable concealment so it reaches from the bottom of the
mounting platform and overlaps by 76 mm (3 inches) the computer's cable
concealment.
10. Install the cables into the cable concealment.
11. Secure the top end of the cable concealment under the monitor platform
with a support clamp. Refer to Figure 3-40.
12. Slide the bottom end of the cable concealment about 51-76 mm
(2-3 inches) over the end of the computer's cable concealment and secure
with a tie-wrap. Refer to Figure 3-40.
Cable Clamp
Cable Concealment
Cable Ties
Figure 3-40: Installing Cable Concealment

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.14 Installing the Hand-Held Controller(s)

Plug the Hand-Held Controller (HHC) into a RJ45 jack. The system may have
more than one HHC. The HHC can be connected to any of the following
locations:
• Two jacks are located on each side of the gantry, near the base.
• Two jacks are located at the end of the table, near each red E-stop
button.
• One jack is located on the connector panel of the IPS.
3.2.15 Powering Up the System and Checking Motion

1. Use the supplied power cable to connect the IPS to the designated wall
receptacle.
2. Power up the system using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
3. Perform the gantry calibration and adjustment procedure as detailed in
Section 6.3.7.
4. If the calibration is successful, proceed with the installation.
5. If the calibration is not successful, refer to Chapter 11, Troubleshooting
and Diagnostics.
3.2.16 Adjusting the Monitor

For a detailed description of the monitor controls, refer to the monitor manual
shipped with the system.
CAUTION
• Do not place any items on top of the monitor since they might block
ventilation and damage the equipment.
• The monitor should be adjusted under the normal lighting levels used
in the department.
You should adjust the brightness and contrast so it matches the brightness and
contrast of other monitors in the same room. This way the same image will
appear the same on all monitors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.2.17 Preliminary Installation of the Table and the Rear Locator Plate
The table's front locator plate was installed in Section 3.2.7. You are now
ready to install the table's rear locator plate.
WARNING
Move all equipment and people away from the gantry. During the
following procedure, the gantry automatically rotates to a new position.
1. On the Acquisition computer, select the "Programmed Move" button.

Then select "Collimator Changeout Position." This will cause the
detectors to move to the 90° (vertical) position and maximum detector
radius.
2. If you have not done so, move the table so the front locking pin is over the
front locator plate. Lock the table into the front locator plate.
3. Use the Hand-Held Controller to fully extend the table.
4. Position the table so it is exactly between the detectors. Measure the
distance from the table top to the detector at the front and the rear of the
detector, as shown in Figure 3-41.
Equal Distances
Detector Rear Locking Pin
without
Collimator
Extended Table
Detector
without
Collimator
Figure 3-41: Patient Table - Top View
5. On the floor, mark the location of the rear locator plate. Figure 3-42
shows the location of the plates relative to the gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Front Locator Plate
Gantry
Rear Locator Plate
1,180 mm 1,820mm
(46.5 in.) (71.7 in.)
Figure 3-42: Installation of Locator Plates
6. Temporarily fasten the rear locator plate to the floor with tape. The plate
will be permanently mounted in Section 3.6.3.
7. Swing the table back into position and engage the front and rear locking
pins. Re-check the distance from the table top to the detectors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Software Configuration
3.3 Software Configuration
The Acquisition system is delivered with factory pre-loaded software.

Note However, system configuration must be performed after installation.
Should a software re-load be required, refer to the Chapter 9- Software

Installation.
CAUTION
Do not load non-system software onto the Acquisition computer. Running
non-system applications may interfere with Acquisition operations.
The following section describes how to configure the system. Configuration

is performed by running the st_config utility, which prompts the user for
site-specific information.
You can quit configuration at any time by pressing <Q> (Quit). If Quit is selected
Note (and you quit without saving), the configuration file will not be updated.
Refer to Figure 3-43 for an overview of the system configuration procedure.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
System Configuration
Network Configuration
InSite Configuration
P&R Gateway
Reboot
Contact On-Line Center for InSite
Figure 3-43: System Configuration Flowchart

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.3.1 User Names and Default Passwords

Table 3-5 lists the user names and passwords for accounts installed on every
Acquisition computer. You will use several of these accounts during
configuration by keying in the user name and password. (Section 3.3.2
explains how to change the passwords).
Important The user names and passwords are case-sensitive.

Enter the words exactly as shown.
Table 3-5: Acquisition Passwords
Account
Default Password
User Name
root root.genie
service service.
insite insite.genieacq (Do not change this password!)
admin admin.genie
reboot reboot
shutdown shutdown
3.3.2 Changing Passwords

You can change any of the account passwords with the following procedure.
Important Do not change the InSite password. Remote access will be disabled for InSite
support if the password is changed.
1. Log into the service account:

User name: service
Password: service.
2. Select the Go to UNIX Shell option. An X-term window appears.

In order to change account passwords you must set your user ID to "root."
(Prompt) su root
Password: root.genie
3. At the prompt, type: passwd <current user name> then press
<Enter>.
4. Follow the directions. The system will prompt you to enter the current
password and the new password, twice, for verification.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation System Configurations
3.4 System Configurations

The sections below explain how to configure the following:
• First Time Configuration - Section 3.4.2.
• Gantry Type, discussed in Section 3.4.2.1.
• Option Configuration - Section 3.4.2.2.
• Whole-Body Table Position, discussed in Section 3.4.2.3.
• Institution Name, discussed in Section 3.4.2.4.
• System Sound, discussed in Section 3.4.2.5.
• Units of Measure, discussed in Section 3.4.2.6.
• Processing Environment Selection, discussed in Section 3.4.2.7.
• Keyboard Support, discussed in Section 3.4.2.8.
• Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and Date/Time, discussed in

Section 3.4.2.9.
• User Interface theme, discussed in Section 3.4.2.11.
• Host Name and IP Address, discussed in Section 3.4.3.
• PostScript2TM and Secondary Capture Printer Configuration

discussed in Section 3.4.4
• Network Configuration, discussed in Section 3.4.5.
• InSite Configuration, discussed in Section 3.4.8
• External Internet (TCP/IP) Hosts, discussed in Section 3.4.3.1.
• Internet Routing, discussed in Section 3.4.6.2.
• Internet Network Mask, discussed in Section 3.4.6.3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.1 Configuring the Acquisition Computer

To begin with acquisition computer configuration, the computer must be
powered up and you must log into the service account.
1. Power up the computer. If necessary, press the power buttons on the

monitor and tower.
User name: service
Password: service.
3. Select the Go to UNIX Shell option from the menu. An Xterm window
appears. You want to set your user ID to "root."
(#): su root
4. At the UNIX command line prompt, in the xterm window, type the
following:
st_config
The system responds with the following message:
Would you like to proceed with the configuration?
5. Press <Enter> to answer Yes. The Configuration Main Menu appears:
Acquisition Computer Configuration Utility; Main Menu

*****************************************************************
1) System Configuration
2) Network Configuration
3) InSite Configuration
4) Database Configuration
5) Install Software Option License
6) Install Detector Correction Data
7) Printer Configuration
8) Serial Communication Configuration
F) First-Time(Installation) Configuration
S) Save Configuration Changes
Q) Quit Configuration
Enter Option:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If changes are made to one of the options, (not <F> First-Time

Configuration), select the option <S> to save the changes before quitting the
menu.
If performing configuration but not First-Time Configuration, choose option <1>

Note from the Main Menu.
3.4.2 First Time Configuration

1. With the Configuration Main Menu displayed (see previous section),
press < F >, "First-Time (Installation) Configuration." The following
menu appears:
First-Time (Installation) Configuration
This set of menus guides you through the first-time configuration of an Acquisition
system. You are presented with menus that allow you to configure the critical items for
a new system. You can use this menu at any time: but when configuring only specific
items, you should use the appropriate main menu items.
Note that you may exit the first-time configuration menus by backing all the way out or
continuing to the end of configuration.
Press Enter to continue, “R” to return to the main menu.
2. Press <Enter> and begin by configuring the vendor type.
3.4.2.1 Configuring the System Type

The screen defining the single and dual head systems is displayed. Press the
required gantry type. Press <Enter> to continue to the next configuration
menu.
3.4.2.2 Option Configuration
This option allows selection of options for Acquisition computer.
3.4.2.3 Configuring for Whole-Body Table Position
The position of the table, relative to the gantry, must be known for
whole-body acquisitions. For the system, there is only one option available.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Press <Enter> to acknowledge the selection and move to the next

configuration menu.
Whole Body Table Position Selection

This menu allows selection of the position of the table relative to
the gantry for whole body scans.
You can only set the whole body to table position to front (whole
body through the ring). This has been set for you.
Press Enter to continue.
3.4.2.4 Configuring the Institution's Name
You now enter the name of the institution. This name will appear prominently
on the Acquisition user interface.
Institution Name Menu
This menu allows the setting of the name of the institution.

This is the name the Acquisition Computer will display on its Main Screen.
Current Institution Name: “”
1) Enter a New Institution Name
C) Continue to Next Menu

R) Return to Previous Menu
Enter Option[C]:
1. Press < 1 > and then type the name of the institution, using upper and
lowercase letters.
Press <Enter>.
2. Press <Enter> to continue to the next configuration menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.5 Configuring the System for Sound
You can elect to have sound upon completion of an acquisition or occurrence

of an error.
1. Acquisition complete. Check to see if this feature is enabled or disabled.

If you want to change the setting, press < 1 >.
2. Error condition. Check the setting. If you want to change it, press < 2 >.
System Sound Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of the beeps that can be produced by the Acquisition
system computer.
There are two conditions that produce sound: 1) completion of an acquisition, 2) an error
condition. The sound (beep) can be enabled or disabled, for each condition separately,
through the use of this menu.
Current Acquisition Complete Beep Setting:disabled
Current Error Condition Beep Setting:disabled
1) Toggle Acquisition Complete Beep Setting

2) Toggle Error Condition Beep Setting

Enter Option[C]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.6 Configuring Units-of-Measure
You can specify either metric or imperial (English) units-of-measurement for

patient information.
1. Press < 1 > if you want metric units; press < 2 > if you want English units.
Then press <Enter>.
Units of Measure Selection
This menu allows selection of the units of measure type to be

used for data entry on Acquisition.
Current Units of Measure Type: Metric

1) Metric Units (meters, etc.)
2) English units (inches, etc.)

Enter Option[C]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.7 Processing Environment Selection
Processing Environment Selection
This menu allows for the selection of the primary processing

environment used in conjunction with Acquisition computer
If all processing will be done on a GENIE and/or Xpert P&R,
Select the GENIE/Xpert P&R environment.
If any processing will be done on a Starcom,
Select the Starcom environment
Selecting a processing environment is necessary in order to

setup the template scans, ensure unique dataset names for
Starcom, and to maximize the dataset name length for GENIE P&R.
Current Processing Environment: Not Set
1) Select Starcom environment

2) Select GENIE/Xpert P&R environment

Enter Option [C]:
3.4.2.8 Configuring Keyboard Language Support
1. Press <Enter> to acknowledge the selection of the default keyboard.

2. To select a different language support, specify the number associated with
the desired keyboard setup and then press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.9 Configuring Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and Date/Time
The correct date and time must be specified since this information appears on
all acquisitions. You must also specify the local time zone and daylight
savings method. The following sections explain the procedures.
Date / Time / Time Zone / Daylight Savings Configuration
This menu allows selection of the system date, time, time zone and
the daylight savings method in use at this location.
WARNING: Changes made to the date, time, time zone and the daylight savings
method are made immediately!
Current Time Zone:480 minutes

Current Daylight Savings Method:USA
Current Date:Monday July 15, 1996
Current Time:16:20
1) Set Time Zone and Daylight Savings Method

2) Set System Date and Time

Enter Option[C]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.10 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Savings Method
1. Press <1> and then <Enter> to define the time zone and daylight savings
method.
2. Specify the number of minutes west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
you are located. For example, Wisconsin, USA, is in the Central time
zone, six hours west of GMT. For a system in Wisconsin, you would enter
the number "360" (6 x 60 = 360). The screen shows the settings for the
four time zones in the USA.
Time Zone and Daylight Savings Menu
Time zone is specified in the number of minutes west of

Greenwich, England that the current time zone is located.
U.S. Time Zone Minutes West of Greenwich
Eastern 300
Central 360
Mountain 420
Pacific 480
Current Time Zone: 360 minutes

Enter minutes west of Greenwich, England [< Enter >=no change]: 360
3. Press <Enter> to display the daylight savings menu.

4. Press < 0 > if time does not change in spring and fall, no daylight savings
time. If daylight savings time is used, select the number that corresponds
to your location and then press <Enter>.
Daylight Savings Method Selections Available:
0) No daylight savings
1) USA
2) Australia
3) Eastern Europe
4) Central Europe
5) Western Europe
Enter Daylight Savings Method [< Enter >=no change]: 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Verify that the time information is correct.

6. Press < 2 > and then <Enter> to set the date and time.
7. Enter the year, month, day, hour, and minute as a 12-digit number and
then press <Enter>.
The following example shows how the 12-digit number is determined:
1996 07 15 18 21
Year Month Day Hour Minute
Date and Time Entry
Day and time are specified together in a string of characters

in the following format:
yyyymmddhhmm
| | | | |
| | | | +------> minute (00-59)
| | | +---------> hour (00-23)
| | +------------> day of month (01-31)
| +-----------------> month (01-12)
+----------------------> year (199x or 200x)
Current Date and Time (above format): 199607151821
Enter date and time [< Enter >=no change]:
8. After the time and date are specified, they are displayed. Press <Enter> to
continue to the next configuration menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.2.11 Selecting the User Interface Theme
Two optional themes are provided for the user interface look and feel:
• The CUI (Common User Interface) theme that has a blue color and
uses fonts and icons similar to those in the Xeleris workstation user
interface.
• The Classic theme. This is the original GENIE Acquisition look and
feel that has a green/gray overall color scheme.
Classic User Interface Common User Interface
Figure 3-44: User Interfaces
1. From the Acquisition Computer Configuration Utility main menu, press

< 2 > and then <Enter> to choose System Configuration.
2. From the System Configuration menu, press < 11 > and then <Enter> to
choose User Interface Theme.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The User Interface Theme menu appears:
User Interface Theme Selection

This menu allows selection of the User Interface theme used by the Acquisition
Computer. A Theme defines the set of colors, fonts and individual user interface
style elements that are used to define the appearance of the various screen
displays and dialogs.
If the Acquisition Computer is used at a site that uses a GENIE Processing and
Review station, the Classic theme is recommended.
The CUI (Common User Interface) theme is the most recent User Interface style
developed and should be selected when a site uses the Acquisition Computer
with an Xeleris station.
Current Theme: cui
1) classic
2) cui

Enter Option [R]:
3. Press <1> to choose the classic theme or <2> to choose the CUI theme
and then press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.3 Setting Host Names and Internet Protocol Address

The Acquisition host name (the name of the Acquisition computer) and the
Internet Protocol (IP) address for the system is defined in the following menu.
System Host Name and Internet Address Configuration
NOTE:Changing the host name and/or Internet address of this

system will make it impossible to run Acquisition
if the new name and/or address is different from that
provided on the Site Preparation worksheet.
The PrServer and Acquisition software option licenses are generated
based on the host name and Internet address.
Current Host Name:oooooo

Current Internet Address:ooo.o.o.o
1) Change System Host Name and Internet Address

Enter Option[C]: 1
Important You must enter the host name and IP address exactly as assigned during the site
preparation process. The host name must be entered exactly as specified, including
the use of upper/lowercase and underscores.
1. Press <1> and then <Enter> to display the menu used to change the host
name and address.
Enter Option[C]: 1
Enter new host name:ooooooo
Enter new Internet Address:oooooo
2. Type the new host name and then press <Enter> to move to the IP address
prompt.
3. Type in the new IP address, and then press <Enter> to complete the
process.
4. Press <Enter> again to continue to the next configuration menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.3.1 Configuring the Internet External Host
In this section you will add the names and addresses of all external Internet
hosts with which the Acquisition computer must communicate. (In most cases
this is a Processing and Review station that is acting as an InSite gateway.)
1. At the following menu, press <1>, "Add an Internet Host."
Internet External Host Configuration Menu
1) xxxx oooooo
2) xxxxxxxx oooooo
3) xxxxxxxxx oooooo IP Hosts
4) xxxx oooooo Already Configured
5) xxxxxxxxx oooooo
6) xxxxxxx oooooo
Press <1> to Add

1) Add an Internet Host
a New IP Host
2) Remove an Internet Host

Enter Option[C]: 1
2. On the following menu, enter the Internet host name and press <Enter> to
move to the IP address prompt. Enter the IP address of the host and press
<Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Add a New Internet Host
This menu allows for adding Internet protocol hosts to the

Acquisition Internet network configuration.
Enter new Internet host name, or...

Enter Option[R]: ooooo IP Host Name
Enter new host Internet address [<Q>to quit host add]: ooooooo IP Address
The Internet External Host Configuration Menu can be used to remove external
Note Internet hosts. You should not need to do this during first-time configuration.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.4 PostScript Printer and Secondary Capture Printer Configurations

1. If configuration is being performed, but not from the First-Time
(Installation) Configuration, option <F>, choose <7> on the Main Menu.

**************************************************************
8) Serial Communications Configuration
F) First-Time (Installation) Configuration

Enter Option:
2. On the Printer Configuration Menu, press < 1 > to select "Printer:
Printer Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of printer parameters. Below is the current printer
configuration:
Current Printer: None
Current Paper Size: None
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: 1
3. Determine what type of printer will be used and proceed to the

appropriate section:
• No printer. Press < 1 > and then <Enter> to end printer configuration.
• Local printer. Press < 2 > and then <Enter>. Go to Section 3.4.4.1.
• Remote printer. Press < 3 > and then <Enter>. Go to Section 3.4.4.2.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
• Network printer. Press < 4 > and then <Enter>. Go to Section 3.4.4.3.
• Secondary Capture printer. Press < 5 > and then <Enter>. Go to

Section 3.4.4.4
Printer Type Configuration
This menu allows selection of the specific printer

1) Set None
2) Set Local
3) Set Remote
4) Set Networked
5)Set Secondary Capture
Enter Option [R]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.4.1 Local Printer Configuration
1. Press <Enter> to return to "Printer Configuration Menu.

Then press < 2 > to select "Paper Size":
This menu allows for configuration of printer parameters.

Below is the current printer configuration:
Current Printer:
Current Paper Size:
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: 2
2. Press the number that corresponds to the paper that will be used. Then
press < R > to return to the previous menu:
Paper Size Configuration
This menu allows selection of the paper size.

Current Paper Size:
1) Letter
2) Legal
3) A4
4) A3
5) Any

Enter Option [R]:
3. Verify that the printer type and paper size are correct. Then press < R > to
return to the Main Menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Current Printer: Local
Current Paper Size: ooooo
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: R
4. Press <Enter> to continue to the next Configuration Menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.4.2 Remote Printer Configuration
1. Press <1> and then <Enter> to select "Change Remote Machine":
Remote Printer Configuration
This menu allows selection of the remote printer parameters

Current Remote Machine: REMOTE_MACHINE
Current Remote Queue: REMOTE_QUEUE
1) Change Remote Machine
2) Change Remote Queue

Enter Option [R]: 1
2. Key in the name of the remote machine and then press <Enter>:
Important The name and IP address of the remote machine must be listed on the external
Internet Host Table (see Section 3.4.3) before it will be accepted here.
Enter new remote machine name: ooooo
3. Press < 2 > and then <Enter> to select "Change Remote Queue".
4. Key in the name or identifier of the remote queue and then press
<Enter>. This will be the name or identifier of the target printer.
Enter new remote queue name: ooooo
5. Press < R >, <Enter>, < R >, <Enter> to return to the "Printer
Configuration Menu."
6. On the Printer Configuration Menu, press < 2 > to select "Paper Size":

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Current Printer:
Current Paper Size:
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: 2
press <R>, <Enter> to return to the previous menu:
This menu allows selection of the specific type of paper size.

Current Paper Size:
1) Letter
2) Legal
3) A4
4) A3
5) Any

Enter Option [R]:
8. Verify that the printer type and paper size are correct. Then press <R>,
<Enter> to return to the Main Menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Current Printer: Remote ooooo
Current Paper Size: ooooo
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: R

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.4.3 Network Printer Configuration
If performing configuration but not from option <F> First-Time

(Configuration, choose option <8> from the Main Menu.
1. Press <1> to select Change Network node name:
Network Printer Configuration
This menu allows selection of network printer parameters.

Only set an Ethernet Address for printers needing RARP.
Current Network Printer:
Current Ethernet Address:
1) Change Network node name
2) Change Ethernet Address

Enter Option [R]: 1
2. Key in the assigned name of the printer and then press <Enter>.
Enter new Network node name:ooooo
Important The name and IP address of the remote machine must be listed on the external
Internet Host Table as described in Section 3.4.3.1 before it will be accepted here.
For first time configuration, add the printer host name and address to the External
Host Table under option 2, Network Configuration, in the Main Menu, and then return
to the Network Printer Configuration, after saving the changes (by selecting option
<S> on the Main Menu).
3. Press <2> to select Change Ethernet Address.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Network Printer Configuration
This menu allows selection of network printer parameters.

Only set an Ethernet Address for printers needing RARP.
Current Network Printer:
Current Ethernet Address:
1) Change Network node name
2) Change Ethernet Address

Enter Option [R]: 2
4. Key in the Ethernet address of the printer and then press <Enter>. Refer
to the printer's documentation for information on RARP.
Enter new Ethernet Address: ooooo
5. Press <R>, <Enter>, <R>, <Enter> to return to the Printer

Configuration Menu.
Press <2> to select Paper Size.

Current Printer:
Current Paper Size:
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: 2
press <R> to return to the previous menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
This menu allows selection of the specific type of paper size.

Current Paper Size:
1) Letter
2) Legal
3) A4
4) A3
5) Any

Enter Option [R]:
7. Verify that the printer name and paper size are correct. Then press <R> to
return to the Main Menu.
This menu allows for configuration of printer parameters. Below is the current printer
configuration:
Current Printer: Networked οοοοο
Current Paper Size: οοοοο
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [R]: R

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.4.4 Secondary Capture Printer Configuration

(Installation) Configuration, choose option <7> from the Main Menu.
1. Press <1> to select Printer:
This menu allows for configuration of printer

parameters. Below is the current printer configuration
Current Paper Size: n/a
1) Printer
2) Paper Size

Enter Option [C]: 1
2. Press <5> to select Set Secondary Capture:
Printer Type Configuration
This menu allows selection of the specific printer
1) Set None
2) Set Local
3) Set Remote
4) Set Network
5) Set Secondary Capture

Enter Option [R]: 5

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Press <1> to select Change Secondary Capture Printer:
Secondary Capture Printer Configuration
This menu allows selection of secondary capture parameters.
Current Secondary Capture Printer:
1) Change secondary capture printer

Enter Option [R]: 1
4. The Secondary Capture Destinations window appears, containing a list

of all the DICOM remote stations that support the storage of Secondary
Capture images.
Important The name and IP address of the remote machine must be designated on the
Remote Station Configuration Table as Secondary Capture (see Section 3.4.5)
before it will be accepted here.
For first time configuration, add the Secondary Capture host name and address to
the Remote Station Configuration Table under Option 2, Network
Configuration, in the Main Menu, according to the instructions in Section 3.4.5.
Select Option <S> on the Main Menu to save the changes and then return to the
Printer Configuration.
5. Enter the number of the remote station, which should be used as

Secondary Capture destination, and press <Enter>.
Only one station may be configured as a Secondary Capture Printer at a time.

Note
The Secondary Capture Printer Configuration window appears (see

Step 3).
6. Make sure that the proper remote station name is displayed under
Current secondary capture printer.
7. Press <Enter> three times.
(Installation) Configuration, the Main Menu will be displayed. Press
<S> to save the changes.
Otherwise, the next Configuration Menu will be displayed.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.5 Network Configuration

Network configuration for SW version 4.0 includes configuration of three new
Note features:
• Storage Commit (see Step 11 below)
• Secondary Capture [SSC] (see Step 13 below)
• Send Processing Request [IGNITE option] (see Step 14 below)
1. On the Main Menu, press < 2 > to display the Network Configuration
Menu.
2. Press <1> to display the Remote Station Configuration Menu.
Remote Station Configuration Menu

************************************************************
This menu allows the configuration of network connectivity.
NAME ADDR PROTOCOL COMMENT
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. kayak:KayakD 190.0.11.191:104 DICOM:XPERT Room 1
2. george 190.0.11.81:2030 DICOM:GENIE Room 2
3. genie:GENIE 190.0.11.240:2030 DICOM:GENIE Room 3
4. genie_star Oxaffec4a0e3ee Starlink Room 5
1) Add new Station

2) Remove existing Station

Enter Option: R
3. Press <1> to add a station.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Add a New Remote Station

************************************************************
This menu allows adding of DICOM or Starlink stations to the Acquisition Computer
network configuration.
Adding a Starlink station involves specifying
- a station name (20 characters or less)
- a station address (a 12 hex character Ethernet address).
Adding a DICOM station involves specifying
- a station name
- AE title (by default is capitalized station name)
(19 characters or less both name and AE title)
- an internet address, a DICOM port number
- station type
Adding either DICOM or Starlink stations involves specifying
- Y or N to indicate if the station will be shown on the AUI
- Station services and service redirections)
Enter new station name, or:

Enter Option: [R]

Enter new host name [<ENTER>=no change]:
4. Enter the new host name and press <Enter>.
Important You may define one station to use both Starlink and DICOM but you should use
different names for it.
5. Enter the protocol (Q=quit station add: default is DICOM).

Press <Enter> to choose the default.
6. Enter new station AE title (default is hostname) press <Enter>.
Important It is important to specify the AE title exactly as it appears in the target machine. It is
case sensitive.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7. Enter new station type (XELERIS, ENTEGRA, GENIE, VISION,

XPERT, OTHER, Q = quit add: default is XELERIS) and press <Enter>.
8. Enter new station internet address (Q = quit add): X.X.X.X. and press
<Enter>.
The X’s represent your internet address.
9. Enter new station DICOM port. (Q = quit add: default is 104): for
ENTEGRA type 2030, for all other types, type 104 <Enter>.
10. Display new station on UI? (Y = yes, N = no, Q = quit add: default is Y):
press <Enter>.
11. The default services for this station are: S, SSC, SPR
[Send; Send Screen Capture; Send Processing Request (IGNITE)]
Accept default services (Y/N) [Y] and press<Enter>. If you chose Y, skip
to step 13.
12. Enable Send (Y/N) [N] and press <Enter>.

13. Enable Storage Commitment (Y/N) [N] and press <Enter>. If you
choose Y, enter redirection station for Storage Commitment [ press
<Enter> for none] and press <Enter>.
If you chose Y in step 11 (Accept default services) skip to step 16.
14. Enable Send Screen Capture (Y/N) [N] and press <Enter>.
If this option is enabled, follow the steps for printer configuration in
Section 3.4.5.
15. Enable Send Processing Request (IGNITE) (Y/N) [N] and press <Enter>.
16. Enable Query Worklist (Y/N) [N] and press <Enter>.
17. Enter new stations comments (Q = quit station add): press <Enter>.
18. At the Enter option [R]: type r <Enter>.
When the screen appears, press <Enter> again until Acquisition
Computer Configuration Utility: main menu appears.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.5.1 Printer Configuration
If the remote station is configured as a station that supports storage of

screencaptures, the following additional configuration steps must be
completed:
1. In the Acquisition Computer Configuration Utility main menu, press 7

to choose Printer Configuration and press <Enter>.
The Printer Configuration menu appears.
2. Select 1 (Printer) and press <Enter>.

The Secondary Capture Printer Configuration menu appears.
3. Select 1 (Change Secondary Capture Printer) and press <Enter>.

The Secondary Capture Destinations menu appears containing a list of
all the remote stations that support storage of screencaptures. These
stations were configured as remote DICOM stations with Service SSC
(Send Secondary Capture) in the previos section.
4. Enter the number of the designated remote station and press <Enter>.
Only one station can be configured as a Secondary Capture Printer at a time.

Note
The Secondary Capture Printer Configuration menu appears.
5. Make sure that the correct remote station name is displayed under
Current Secondary Capture Printer.
6. Press <Enter> a few times until the Acquisition Computer
Configuration Utility Main Menu appears. Press S to save the changes.
7. Press Q to quit configuration. When asked whether to reboot the
combuter, press y to reboot.
3.4.5.2 Configuring Genie Acq to Work with Vision and eNTEGRA P&R Stations
For configuration procedures for connecting Genie Acq to P&R stations, see:
• Appendix B - Genie Acq – Vision Connectivity.

• Appendix C - Genie Acq – eNTEGRA Connectivity.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.6 Configuring the Acquisition Computer's InSite Connection

Acquisition uses the TCP/IP protocol to communicate with InSite. The
system can be connected to InSite via an existing Processing and Review
station acting as a gateway:
3.4.6.1 Connecting to a Processing and Review Acting as a Gateway
You configure InSite connectivity through a modem attached to a Processing

and Review station located elsewhere on the network. In addition to
performing the procedure described in this section, you must also do the
following:
• Connect the Acquisition computer to the Processing and Review

station through an Ethernet cable. We assume this cable has already
been installed.
• Add the Acquisition computer's IP address to the Processing and
Review Internet external hosts database. This procedure is described
in the Processing and Review Station's operator manual.
• Add the Processing and Review station's IP address to the Acquisition
Internet External Hosts Database, discussed in Section 3.4.6.2.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Verify that the InSite Configuration Menu looks as shown below. If it

does, you are already properly configured.
2. From the Main menu, select <3> - InSite Configuration.
InSite Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of the system’s InSite connection.
InSite via: P&R
1) Select InSite via Acquisition (this computer)

Enter Option[C]:
3.4.6.2 Configuring Internet Network Routing
The Internet Protocol (IP) allows computers to communicate even if they are
not connected to the same cable or logical network. There may be several
computers (and several sub-networks) between the Acquisition computer and
the Processing and Review station which is acting as an InSite gateway. One
computer on each of these sub-networks must act as an IP router to re-direct
any communications addressed to hosts outside the current sub-network.
If the Acquisition computer and the Processing and Review station are not on
the same sub-network, you must contact the site network administrator to
determine the IP address of the device acting as the router.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Check the following menu to see if Internet routing is enabled or disabled.

If disabled, press <1> to enable Internet routing.
Internet Routing Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of Internet (TCP/IP) routing.
Internet Routing: disabled
1) Enable Internet Routing

Enter Option[C]:
2. On the following menu, press < 2 > to configure the router's IP address.
Key in the address.
Internet Routing Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of Internet (TCP/IP) routing.

Internet Routing: enabled
Current Route Address:o.oo.ooo.oo
1) Disable Internet Routing
2) Change Route Address

Enter Option[C]: 1
Enter Internet route address [xxxxx]: o.oo.ooo.oo
3. Press <Enter> to move to the next configuration menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.6.3 Configuring the Network Mask
If the Acquisition computer is on a private network with no other TCP/IP

nodes except the Processing and Review station, or if the pre-installation
survey indicates no netmask is used at this site, this section can be skipped.
Some sites with sophisticated networks use a network mask (netmask) to

reallocate the bits of the IP address between the network component of the IP
address and the host component of the IP address. If a netmask is used on the
network where the Acquisition computer will be connected, this netmask
must be set on all hosts, including the Acquisition computer and/or
Processing and Review station. If this is not done, Internet networking will
not work correctly.
Important You must find out if netmasking is used at this site, and if so, configure the
Acquisition computer accordingly. The site's network administrator will know this
information.
1. From the Main menu, select <2> and press <Enter>.

2. From the System Network Configuration menu, select <2> and press
<Enter>.
3. From the Internet Configuration menu, select <4> and press <Enter>.
4. On the following menu, check if the mask is enabled or disabled. If
disabled, press <1> to enable the Internet network mask.
Internet Network Mask Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of Internet (TCP/IP) network mask. The network
mask determines the number of bits in an Internet address that make up the network
portion of the address.
Current Network Mask Enable: disabled
1) Enable Internet network mask

5. On the following menu, to change the Acquisition netmask, press <2>,

Modify Internet Network Mask. At the prompt "Enter Internet
network mask", enter the desired netmask value and press <Enter>. The
new network mask appears on the menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Internet Network Mask Configuration Menu
This menu allows for configuration of Internet (TCP/IP) network mask.

Current Network Mask Enable: enabled
Current Network Mask: o.o.o.o
1) Disable Internet network mask

2) Modify Internet network mask

Enter Option[C]:
Enter Internet network mask [xxxxxx]:
3.4.7 Saving First-Time Configuration

At this point the first-time configuration is complete. You will now be
prompted to save the configuration. If the configuration is correct, press
<Enter> at the prompt "First-time configuration complete, save
configuration now?" This will save the current configuration.
If you are not satisfied with the settings, press < N > at the above prompt. The
configuration will not be saved, but it will not be erased. The Main
Configuration menu will be displayed. At this point you can quit
configuration altogether, and return to the defaults, or you can review the
modified but unsaved configuration menus and make changes.
After you review the last configuration menu, you will again be asked if you
want to save the existing configuration. Press <Enter> to save the
configuration.
Type <Q> and press <Enter> to quit configuration. Press <Y> at the reboot
prompt and then press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.8 Creating the Acquisition Database
Important You can perform this procedure only after the First-Time Configuration (Section
3.4.2) has been completed and saved. If the configuration has not been saved, you
will not be able to create a database.
1. If you create the database in the same session as restoring the site-specific
configuration information, proceed to Step 4.
Otherwise, log into the service account as follows:

2. User name: service <Enter>
3. Password: service. <Enter>
In case that Site Specific Configuration was not restored from the DAT tape, move
Note to step #5.
4. At the Authorized User? (y/n): prompt, type y <Enter>.

5. At the Enter Option prompt in the Service Menu select go to UNIX
shell.
6. Set your user ID to root, as follows:
7. At the prompt lynxdemo:/usr/service type su root and <Enter>.
8. At the Password prompt type: root.genie and <Enter>.
9. At the prompt lynxdemo# type: st_config and <Enter>.
10. At the prompt Would you like to proceed with configuration? (y/n), type
y and <Enter>.
11. At the Enter option prompt in the main menu select System
Configuration.
12. The System Configuration menu appears.
13. At the Enter option select your system type and press <Enter>.
The procedures listed in step 11 (above) must be performed even if Restore was
Note carried out.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
14. At the Enter Option type R twice to go to the System Configuration

menu.
15. Select a Time and Date and press <Enter>.
16. Select #1 - Set time zone and daylight saving method and update both.
17. Select #2 - Set system Date and Time, make the necessary changes and
press <Enter> twice.
18. Select the option entry by typing: 2 and press <Enter>.
Select the relevant option by typing the number that appears next to it
To cancel the selection, type the number again.
19. Press <Enter>.
The Acquisition Configuration Utility Menu appears.
20. At the Enter Option type S and <Enter> to save configuration changes.
21. At the Enter Option prompt in the Main Menu select #4 Database
Configuration option and <Enter>.
Select #1 - Create a new empty database and press <Enter>.
This takes several minutes.
22. At the prompt: Database create complete, press <Enter> to continue.
23. Type R and <Enter> to return to the Main Menu.
Type q <Enter> to exit from st_config.
24. Type exit <Enter> to exit to Service Account.

25. Type exit <Enter> to return to the Service Menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.9 Installing Software Option Licenses

3.4.9.1 Installation of IGNITE Software License
ON THE GENIE ACQ:

User name: service
Password: service.
2. Select the Go to UNIX Shell option from the menu. An Xterm window
appears. You want to set your user ID to "root."
(#): su root
following:
st_config

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Would you like to proceed with the configuration? (y/n) [y]
4. Press <Enter> to answer Yes. The Acquisition Computer Configuration

Utility; Main Menu appears:

*****************************************************************
8) Serial Communication Configuration
F) First-Time(Installation) Configuration
Enter Option:
5. Type <5> and then <Enter> . The system responds with the following
message:
Enter password follwed by <Enter> or <Enter> only to exit.
6. Enter the password "########"

(the correct password can be found on the NUC Support Central site:
Forums/Millennium Systems/Ignite Activation Password.
CAUTION
Please note that this password is highly confidential and is for the use of GE
employees only.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
After entering the password a legal notice will be displayed:
The software product described herein is protected by copyright laws

andinternational treaty provisions. All rights reserved. Copyright ) 2004 GE Medical
Systems (GEMS)
All software and accompanying documentation is copyrighted and owned by GE
Medical systems or its licensors.
Software and documentation ownership is not transferred to you. You are licensed to
use the software and documentation only upon purchase thereof.The use of the
software and documentation is subject to the terms of this license agreement. Please
read the license and indicate your agreement to
its terms prior to installation.
Be advised that installing the software license is a traceable action. Make sure you
have a valid purchase order reference number for the Software options you wish to
install. Note that it is a mandatory requirement to fill in the Installer Name when
requested during the installation process.
Do you accept these terms and wish to continue with Software license installation?
<Y/
7. Type <y> and then <Enter> . The system responds with the following
message:
Do you accept these terms and wish to continue with Software

license installation? <Y/N>
8. Type <y> and then <Enter> . The system responds with the following
message:
Enter Installer Name (First Name, Family Name):
9. Enter Installer name details and then <Enter>.The system responds with
the following message:
Enter PO (Purchase Order) number:
10. Enter PO number then <Enter>.The system displays the Licence Option
Choices:
License Option Choices

1) Millennium MG No
2) Ignite No
Select option number or type Q when fished:
11. Press <2> to choose Ignite which changes to Yes.

12. Type Q to exit.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
ACTION TO BE TAKEN ON THE XELERIS SIDE:
1. Verify that the Xeleris application is miniized (an icon appears on the
Desktop).
2. Open the Service folder on the Xeleris Desktop and double-click the
Create Infinia User icon.
3. Close the Service folder.
4. For Xeleris systems that serve GenieAcq AND REQUIRE AUTOMATIC
LAUNCHING, enable Auto-launch Auto-processing applications
as follows:
a. Click the [Xeleris] icon on the Desktop.
b. From Xeleris, click System Setup and select the
General tab.
c. Click the check box next to Auto-launch Auto-processing
applications (Figure 3-45).
Figure 3-45: Auto Launch

3.4.10 Reboot the Acquisition Computer
The Acquisition computer must be rebooted before the new configuration
takes effect. First you must save the new configuration. When the
Configuration Main Menu appears, press <Q> select Quit Configuration.
At the prompt "Do you wish to reboot the computer now?" press < Y > to
reboot the computer.
After a few minutes, the login menu appears. The system is now configured
for the site and ready for use.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.11 Updating a Remote Station Auto-Processing Application List

The list of auto-processing applications supported by the Xeleris station
should be imported only after system configuration is complete. This import
should be performed again whenever the list of the auto-processing
applications in a remote station has been changed and needs to be updated in
the GENIE Acquisition station.
GENIE Acquisition holds a common list of processing protocols for all

Xeleris stations to which it is connected. An Xeleris protocol can be imported
for use by all Xeleris stations or for the use of the particular station only.
The ppupdate command line is an interacitive tool used in order to fetch the
processing protocol list from the Xeleris station and prompts the user to
confirm fetching new and modified processing protocols.
To use the ppupdate command line utility follow the steps below for each
Xeleris station configured to work on your system:
1. In an Xterm window, type the following command:

ppupdate <remote Xeleris station name> and press <Enter>.
• If this is the first time that this Xeleris station is being configured then
its processing protocols list has not yet been imported and the
following message will be displayed:
Import <remote Xeleris station name> protocols for use with all
stations (Y/N) [Y]
If you are updating the list for a station which was previously

Direction 2414259-100 2019
configured, the following message appears:
A file matching the given details already exists.

It is dated “date + time”
Use existing protocol file (Y/N) [Y]
2. Choose Y or press <Enter> to continue the update. (If you choose N, the
utility will exit).
The following message appears:
Import <remote Xeleris station name> protocols for use with all
stations (Y/N) [Y]
3. Choose Y or press <Enter> to display all the protocols that will remain
unchanged for the specific Xeleris station. (If you choose N, the utility
will exit).
4. Press <Enter> to continue. If there are new protocols for the specific
Xeleris station, the screen displays all the new protocols that will be added
and the following message appears:
Add protocols (Y/N) [Y].
5. Choose Y or press <Enter> to add the new protocols . (If you choose N,
the utility will exit). The following message appears:
Write all changes to configuration (Y/N) [Y]
6. Choose Y or press <Enter> to write all changes to configuration. (If you

choose N, the utility will exit).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.12 Contact the On-Line Center for InSite Access

Contact the On-Line Center to have them complete the InSite setup by
remotely logging into this Acquisition computer. Be prepared to provide the
On-Line Center with the following information:
• IP address of the Acquisition computer:

____________________________________
• Host name and system ID for the Acquisition computer:
_______________________
• Modem phone number from the "Site Assignment Matrix" worksheet.
The modem will be connected to the Processing and Review station
acting as a gateway:
______________________________________________
3.4.13 Configuring Other Starlink Stations

Starcam and Processing and Review stations that receive data from or pull
data from the Acquisition computer over the Starlink network must be told the
Acquisition computer's name and Ethernet address.
3.4.13.1 Obtaining the Acquisition Computer's Ethernet Address
Use the ethaddr utility to determine the address of Acquisition:

User name: service
Password: service.
2. Select Go to UNIX Shell from the menu. This will cause an Xterm
window to appear.
3. In order to run the utility that displays the Ethernet address, you must set
your user ID to root:
(Prompt): su root
4. Run the ethaddr utility program by keying in the following and then press
<Enter>:
ethaddr
The utility will report the Ethernet address for this Acquisition node with
a response like: Ethernet address for xxxx is: ooooooo
An Ethernet address contains 12 hexadecimal digits displayed as 6 pairs
of digits, separated by spaces, like this example: 00 20 kh cb 42

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Record this Ethernet address on the "Site Assignment Matrix" worksheet

as the Acquisition LAN Address (Ethernet Address).
6. Type exit and then press <Enter>.
3.4.13.2 Obtaining the Acquisition Computer's Name
Refer to the System Host Name Alias entry on the "Site Assignment Matrix"
worksheet from the MG/MC Site Preparation Manual, (G.E. Part #
2269387-100/ ELGEMS Part # MAN000426).
Another way to find out the current host name setting is to type the following
in the service account xterm window and then press <Enter>:
hostname
3.4.13.3 Configuring Starcam - Starlink Communication
Any Starcam station with the network option can communicate with this
system's Acquisition computer. This means the Acquisition computer can
send data to a Starcam station as well as allowing the Starcam to query and
fetch data from the Acquisition computer.
Follow the instructions in Section N, "Network" of the Starcam Command

Reference Manual Direction 46-291028l for details on how to use the NAST
command to enter required information.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.4.13.4 Configuring Processing and Review Starlink Communication
Any Processing and Review station can communicate with this system's
Acquisition computer. This means the Acquisition computer can send data to
the Processing and Review station as well as allowing the Processing and
Review station to query and fetch data from the Acquisition computer.
Follow the instructions to re-run the RunMe script as described in Section

9.4, System Configuration Procedure of the GENIE Nuclear System Service
Manual (G.E. Part # 2118891/ELGEMS Part # 490-3200-13), or refer to the
PC Platform System Service Manual (G.E. Part # 2194024-100/ELGEMS
Part # 490-3200-61). Enter the Acquisition Ethernet address and station name
(host name) as described in Section 9.4.5 of that manual:
1. Log into the root account on the Processing and Review station, per
Section 9-3 of the GENIE Nuclear System Service Manual.
2. Re-run the RunMe script. Refer to Section 9-4. Accept all the currently set
values until you get to Section 9-4-5 "GenieLink Configuration."
3. Add a new Starlink node to the list for this system's Acquisition computer:
• For the Starcam system name, key in the Acquisition computer's host
name, per the Site Assignment Matrix worksheet.
• For the Ethernet Address value, key in the Acquisition computer's
Ethernet (LAN) address, per the Site Assignment Matrix
worksheet.
4. Complete the RunMe script.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Installing the Collimators
3.5 Installing the Collimators

3.5.1 Aligning the Collimator Cart
WARNING
Do not attempt to operate the gantry without a collimator installed on the
detector.
Collimators are made from a dense material and are very heavy. Make sure
you follow the collimator changing procedure exactly as described in this
section to avoid personal injury or damage to the equipment.
This procedure checks the locking and unlocking mechanisms on the cart,
collimators, and detectors. It also checks the height of the cart(s).
1. Select the "Programmed Move" button to move the detectors to the

collimator change-out position. The detectors will move to the 90°/270°
position (vertical) and maximum detector radius.
2. If the table is installed, unlock the table's front wheels and swing the table
about its rear locking pin to move it out of the way.
3. If this is not a first-time installation, remove the front bumper screws. Lift
off the two gray skirts at the bottom of the cart to expose the top of the
wheels. (If this is a first-time installation, these assemblies have not yet
have been installed.)
4. Use a 5 mm Allen wrench to loosening the two lock-set screws on the
cart-height adjusters. Refer to Figure 3-46.
Lock-set
Screws
Note: The cart is shown with the side and bottom

covers installed. For a first-time installation, these
covers will be off.
Figure 3-46: Collimator Cart

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Installing the Collimators
5. Use a 17 mm wrench to unlock the four height-adjuster locking nuts.

6. Loosen the front docking pin.
7. Roll the collimator cart about midway between the detectors.
8. Press the right-most radial motion button on the Hand-Held Controller to
bring the front of the detectors close to the collimators.
9. Use the 5 mm Allen wrench on top of the adjuster to adjust the cart height.
Align all eight (8) collimator locks to the eight locking pins on the
detectors.
10. When the cart is at the correct height, tighten the set screws to lock the
cart's height.
11. Verify that all four wheels on the cart are equally loaded.
12. Lock the adjusters to the correct height. Tighten the four lock-nuts using
the 17 mm wrench.
13. Adjust the two bumpers so all eight collimator locks engage the locking
pins on the detectors at the same time when the cart is pressed up against
the gantry. Lock the bumpers at the correct distance.
14. Adjust the docking pin so the cart is at the correct depth in the gantry.
Verify the docking pin engages the docking switch.
15. Use the Hand-Held Controller to verify that you cannot move the gantry
when the cart's docking pin is in the gantry's docking hole.
16. Install the collimators on the detectors by pushing the handles on the cart
forward. Press the left-most radial motion button on the Hand-Held
Controller to move the detectors to maximum radius.
17. Move the collimator cart away from the gantry. If this is a first-time
installation and the side cover on the cart must be installed, continue with
this step. Otherwise go to Step 18.
a. Remove the eight floating-plate studs.
b. Remove the spacers from the guide pins.
c. Install both side covers using six screws per cover.
d. Install the two plastic handles.
18. Install the base covers.
19. Use the Hand-Held Controller to verify full gantry functionality.
20. If the site has more than one cart, repeat the above procedure for all the
remaining carts.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Using the Table Alignment Program for Final Table Alignment
3.6 Using the Table Alignment Program for Final Table Alignment
The following process uses the Acquisition computer to align the rear of the
table. The procedure assumes you are standing at the end of the table, the end
furthest from the gantry. The procedure tells you how many millimeters to
move the end pin to the right or left to centrally locate the end pin socket.
Important The collimators must be installed before you perform the following procedures.
3.6.1 Image Acquisition

1. Check that the table's front pin is engaged and locked.
2. Acquire a static image with the parameters listed below.
Refer to "Performing an Acquisition" in the Operating Instructions of the
MG/MC Operator Manual.
• Max counts = 200 kcnt

• Isotope = Co or Tc
• Energy windows set to 20% width and no offset
• Co/Tc energy, spatial and PMT corrections
• Images must be 256 x 256
3. Rotate the detectors so one is facing the ceiling and the other is facing the
floor.
4. Secure a collimated point source at the end of table so it will not move.
Choose a source of suitable activity, approximately 1- 5 kcnts/sec.
5. Use the Hand-Held Controller (HHC), to move the table in or out so the
source is at one end of the Field-of-View (FOV).
6. Select START and be ready to stop at approximately 100 kcnts.
7. Press the longitudinal button on the HHC to move the table to the other
end of the FOV and select RESUME.
The image acquisition is completed and two points should be clearly
visible.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.6.2 Loading the Images

The images must be loaded into the following directory to complete the
alignment program:
/usr/genieacq/alignment
Transfer images to this directory in one of the two following ways:
• "Known Dataset Name", described in Section 3.6.2.1.

• "Unknown Dataset Name", described in Section 3.6.2.2.
3.6.2.1 Known Dataset Name
1. If you know the time the image was acquired, or how many images have
been taken since the acquisition, examine this file:
/usr/genieacq/dataf/Imageset.var
All the images are recorded here as a number with the time of acquisition.
2. Change the directory to "Imageset.var" by typing:

cd /usr/genieacq/dataf/Imageset.var
3. List the contents of the directory Imageset.var by typing:

ls
4. Note the filename (largest number) of the last file.

5. Identify the image file and copy it to the following directory using this
command:
cp <filename> /usr/genieacq/alignment
6. Change into the alignment directory by typing the following:

cd /usr/genieacq/alignment
7. Rename your image as something you can recognize:

mv <oldfilename newfilename>
8. To execute program, type:

st_align <newfilename>
9. Remove the tape holding the table's rear locator plate. Move the plate the
direction and distance specified by the program.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.6.2.2 Unknown Dataset Name
If you don't know where the image might be relative to other acquisitions, use
this procedure:
1. To search the database, type this command:

-type pcbrowse &
2. Select the series button. After several seconds a window will appear.
3. Look for patient/study/imageset.
4. Select using cursor.
5. Select imageset button.
6. Make a note of the file ID number that is displayed.
7. Select series button again if there are any more images.
8. Select file quit
9. Type the following:
cd dataf/Imageset.var
10. Look for the ID number(s) noted above in Step 6.

11. Follow instructions in Section 3.6.2.1 to copy images to the correct
directory.
3.6.3 Installing the Table's Rear Locking Plate

1. Affix the rear locking plate to the floor with adhesive backing.
2. Move the table away from the rear locking plate.
3. Drill and mount the plate using three anchors. Refer to Section 3.2.8 for
information on drilling the holes and installing the anchors.
3.6.4 Repositioning the Table Cables

Depending upon the layout of the room, you might have to reposition the
table's cables so they are not in the way when the table is rotated about its rear
locking pin and the collimator cart is rolled into position between the
detectors.
1. Remove the cover plate (see figure in Chapter 10) and cable clamp.
2. Flip over the cover plate and reinstall. This plate is reversible.
3. Reinstall the cable clamp on the other side of the table.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3.6.5 Installing the Table Extender
WARNING
The table extender will support a maximum weight of 20 kgs (44 lbs). Do
not stand or sit on the extender or load it beyond its 20 kg limit. Failure to
follow this warning may result in patient injury.
The table extender is not intended to support the head. It should only be
used to support the patient's feet and/or legs. Failure to follow this warning
may result in injury to the patient.
To install the table extender:
1. Fit the extender to the table.

2. Cut the velcro strips in half.
Note The strip with the adhesive backing is the loop strip, the other is the hook strip.
3. Remove the backing from one of the self adhesive velcro loop strips, and
stick firmly along the lower edge, starting in the middle on the extender
and continuing along the table top. See Figure 3-47.
4. Repeat the process for the other side.
5. Using a utility knife, carefully cut both the newly fitted strips at the point
where the extender meets the table.
6. Fit the two remaining (non-adhesive) hook strips over the newly glued
pieces.
7. To remove the extender, it is only necessary to pull half the non-adhesive
hook strip away.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Extender
EXTENDER
Velcro Loop
Strips
VELCRO LOOP STRIPS
VELCRO HOOK STRIP

Velcro Hook Strip
Figure 3-47: Installing the Table Extender and Fitting the Velcro Strips

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Gantry/Table Characterization
3.6.6 Installing the IV Pole Holder

1. Place the IV pole holder into the slot on either side of the table. Refer to
Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48: Installing the IV Pole Holder
2. Place the pole into the holder.

3. Verify that the holder and pole freely slide from one end of table to the
other without sticking.
3.7 Gantry/Table Characterization

Refer to Section 6.3, Table / Gantry Characterization.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Installing the ECG Monitor
3.8 Installing the ECG Monitor

Place the ECG monitor on a suitable stand (not supplied).
3.8.1 Setting up for Operation

1. Check the rear panel of the monitor to verify required voltage.
2. Plug the AC line cord into a power source providing the proper voltage.
3. Press the power switch.
4. Connect the patient cable to the ECG connector on the front panel of the
ECG monitor.
5. Connect the Trigger Output from the ECG monitor rear panel (BNC
output) to the framing board / ECG Board (located at the back of the
GenieAcq computer).
3.8.2 ECG Trigger signal verification
1. Turn on the power to the R-Wave Trigger unit.
2. Observe the trigger signal on the oscilloscope (about 12V signal,
750mSec. cycle time – for heart rate of 80 Beat/Min).
3. Determine the category of the signal (active high or active low) following
the diagram below:
• For Model GE3000, signal is always Active high.

Note • For Model GE3000, Signal width is 1msec
4. Verify that the “raising edge” check-box is set properly in the “Trigger”
card included in every acquisition protocol that uses ECG trigger (gated
tomo, dynamic).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Installing the ECG Monitor
Table 3-6 below defines the correct setting.
Table 3-6: ECG Rising Edge Setting
ECG Trigger Signal Rising Edge
Active low ON
Active high OFF
• Some ECG units (Accusync 4M) have a high/low switch for trigger output.
Note • For GE300 series, select Active High trigger.
• The correct setup should be explained to the customer after testing has been
completed.
WARNING
Incorrect setup may affect processing results!
3.8.3 Final connection and testing

1. Connect the Trigger Output BNC connector (12 V signal) to the
GenieAcq’s framing board or ECG Board, as described in the system
service manual, chapter 3.
2. Activate Gated acquisition and observe the correct “heart beat” reading
in the acquisition status area of the screen.
3. Have the operator perform Gated acquisition on a patient. Verify proper
acquisition completion and transfer the study to a P&R station.
4. Let the operator verify that the processing results of E.F and L.V. are
acceptable.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Functional Checks
3.9 Functional Checks

1. Perform the function checks described in Chapter 4.
2. Perform Customer Uniformity Analysis according to the instructions
given in the Quality Control chapter of the MG/MC Operator’s Manual.
3. Perform COR Calibration according to the instructions given in the
Quality Control chapter of the MG/MC Operator’s Manual.
3.10 System Backup

Create a backup tape using the information contained in Chapter 9, Software
Installation.
Complete the locator documentation and return it to the specified address.
3.11 Cleaning Up the Site and Removing the Shipping Dolly

3.11.1 Preparation
1. Contact one of the system vendor's contracted carriers to arrange for pick
up of the dolly.
2. Place all shipping dolly hardware on the skid and band material to the
skid.
3. Prepare a bill-of-lading, and present it to the carrier.
3.11.2 Disposing of Packing Materials

Dispose of all packing material, boxes, etc. as determined by site location.
Refer to the Site Preparation Checklist for the pre-determined location.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Marking the Floor Clearance Area Around the Camera
3.12 Marking the Floor Clearance Area Around the Camera
WARNING
The floor clearance area should be clearly marked off around the camera to
prevent obstacles (for example wheel chairs) getting too close and colliding
with the system during its automatic operation.
No items of any kind may be present within this area during the automatic
operation of the sytem.
1. On the floor, mark off the front and rear borders of the working area
around the installed system (see Figure 3-49).
Front marking border

Rear marking border
IPS
Patient Table
Detector
Figure 3-49: MG/MC Working Area
2. Clean the floor surface with alcohol before applying the tape.
3. Adhere the tape to the floor for the front and rear markings as shown in
Figure 3-49.
4. Instruct the operator that the system moves automatically within the
demarcated area and that it is prohibited to leave any item or obstacle
within this demarcated area.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Installation Post Installation Checklist
3.13 Post Installation Checklist
If NO,
indicate Reference
why and in System
Communication Yes No when it Service
will Manual
be (section#)
completed
1. The applications specialist has been included in all

updates on install progress, and notified of any issues
that may prevent complete installation by the
scheduled applications date.
• For damaged, lost, missing, stolen, or wrong parts,
call the appropriate contact in your area/country.
• For all installation issues (including eLicensing),
call the On Line Center in your Pole.
System Installation/Calibration
2. All hardware components have been shipped and
installed (including all collimators ordered).
3. All system calibrations are complete.
4. Functional checks and QC performance

measurements completed (including COR and
uniformity) are within specification.
4.1 CUA in spec

Acceptance Criteria
CFOV FFOV
Integral 7.5 8.5
Differential 5.5 6.5
4.2 COR in spec

Acceptance Criteria
COR value: </=5.0 mm,
COR variation: </=3.5 mm,
Y variation: </=3.5 mm)
Mean Y position [Det 1 (Y) - Det 2 (Y)]: <=2.0
4.3 SOC created for other isotopes than TC99m
5. Workstation(s) are loaded with the correct software

version.
5.1 Version:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If NO,
indicate Reference
why and in System
will Manual
be (section#)
completed
6. Licenses for all purchased software options are

installed.
6.1 Options installed:
7. Broadband is activated and InSite (if applicable) is

operational and system ID is generated.
7.1 Checkout completed by OLC
Peripherals/Accessories
8. All peripheral devices (MOD, printers, filmers, gate,

modem) have been installed and tested.
9. Hardcopy interface is setup and device calibrated

(laser imager, color printer, etc.)
Customer notified if not GE responsibility.
10. Operator Manuals are located.
Networking
11. All networking commitments are completed and

operational. Customer notified if networking to a
particular device is not GE responsibility.
Upon Completion of Install
12. Room and equipment are clean, orderly, and ready for
patient scanning during applications training.
13. Checklist has been reviewed with customer.

Date:
14. Final Voice-Mail Confirmation sent to Application

Specialist, Service Manager, and Sale Representative.
Outstanding install issues

(site, room, sales, equipment, etc.)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If NO,
indicate Reference
why and in System
will Manual
be (section#)
completed

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Site Name
System ID
Service Engineer
Date
Important Please record all exceptions during the installation period (Out in spec, DOI, Map
creation etc). All exceptions should be reported using the dispatch reporting tools
(Must or Cares).
In addition, please record the serial number of the system in the appropriate place
(in the dispatch tools). This is critical for modality analysis and manufacturing
improvements.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks
This chapter details a series of system-level functional procedures that ensure

the complete and safe operation of the entire system. The checks do the
following:
• Verify all safety-related functions operate correctly.

• Verify all equipment operates as specified.
• Provide setup information to support the verification checks.
• Provide information on what to do if the desired result does not occur.
This chapter assumes that the system is fully operational. If any further
information is required on the basic operation of the system, refer to the
MG/MC Operator's Reference Manual, (G.E. Part # 2269384-100 /ELGEMS
Part # MAN000424).
4.1 Tool List

The following special tools are required:
• CUA source holder.

• Quad resolution phantom.
• Spirit level, 0.6 m long, minimum.
• Tape measure, 750 mm long.
4.2 Shutting Down the System

The system receives electrical power from a single AC power line that
connects to the Integrated Power Supply (IPS) located in the base of the
gantry. The IPS distributes electrical power to the detector, patient table, the
Acquisition computer, and other peripherals.
The system has two power switches:
• The Power Saver switch removes power from the gantry,

Acquisition computer and monitor, patient table, and the outlets on the
IPS. Power is not removed from the detectors to maintain their
electronic stability.
• The Main Power switch removes power from the entire system,
including the detectors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Shutting Down the System
WARNING
Before performing any repair or replacement, other than software loading,
you should Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LO/TO) the line cords.
CAUTION
• You should use the following shutdown procedure when removing
power from the system. If you simply turn OFF a power switch or
press the reset switch on the Acquisition computer, the system may
take longer to power-up or data may be lost.
• After turning either the Main or Power Saver switch OFF, wait at least
one minute before turning the switch back ON. This delay allows all
the power supplies to discharge. Failure to wait may result in some
parts of the system starting in an unknown state.
• Do not load non-system software onto the Acquisition computer, since
this could interfere with Acquisition operations.
1. If the monitor is blank, move the mouse to activate the login screen. If the
software is running, log out by doing the following:
a. Display the Main Screen and select the <Shutdown> button located in
the upper right corner of the Main Screen:
b. If an acquisition or a quality control operation is in progress, a

message appears explaining that the system cannot be shutdown.
Either wait until the operation is complete or stop the task and then
shutdown the system.
c. If the system can be shutdown, a message asks for confirmation that
Acquisition should be shutdown. Select [Yes] to shutdown the
system.
d. Several minutes, the Shutdown Screen is displayed. Select [Yes]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Shutting Down the System
2. Log into the system as follows:

User name: shutdown
Password: shutdown
A message is displayed stating that the system will shut down in five
seconds. No other message is displayed. Wait five to ten seconds.
3. You now remove power from the entire system or part of the system by
pressing either the Power Saver switch or the Main Power switch, shown
in Figure 4-1.
• Press the Power Saver switch to remove power from the following:
gantry, Acquisition computer, monitor, table and power receptacles on
the IPS. Power is NOT removed from the detectors to ensure that their
fans continue to operate and the detectors remain electrically stable.
• Press the Main Power switch to the remove power from the entire
system, including the detectors and fans.
Important Before performing any repair work on the system, please read Section 8.3, Safety
Considerations.
Main Input
Power Switch
LED Indicator:
Power Saver
Input Power
Connector LED Indicator: Input Power Energy Saver
Switch
Figure 4-1: Power Switches and Indicators on the IPS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Starting Up the System
4.3 Starting Up the System

1. Check that the power cord is attached to the IPS and plugged into the
AC power outlet. Figure 4-1, above, shows the location of the Input
Power connector on the IPS.
2. Check that the Power Saver switch is OFF.
3. Switch ON the Main Power switch. The LED next to the switch
illuminates, and you will hear the system's cooling fans rotate.
4. Switch the Power Saver switch ON. The cooling fans rotate faster. The
Power Saver's LED will go OFF.
5. Check that the power indicator light on the front of the computer tower is
lit. If not, press the power switch on the front of the tower.
6. Check that the monitor's indicator light, located below the screen, is lit. If
not, press the power switch on the front of the monitor.
7. After a few minutes, the login screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Welcome to Acquisition Computer
User name
Password
Figure 4-2: Login Screen
8. If necessary, adjust the monitor's brightness and contrast. The controls are
below the monitor.
9. Check that the cursor (a single vertical line) is in the login screen. If it is
not, press <Enter> once.
10. Enter the following:
User name: genieacq
Password: genieacq
If your login name and password are valid, the main Acquisition User
Interface (AUI) appears. If the login is invalid or includes an error, an
error message appears. You should re-enter your user name and password
and try again.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The login screen appears automatically when you start the system and whenever it
Note is not in use. When a valid login name and password are entered, the Acquisition
software starts and the Acquisition User Interface (AUI) screen appears. The login
screen allows only authorized users access to the system.
You can obtain a login name and password from the person at your site who is
responsible for the system. If the login name and password are lost, contact your
service representative for a replacement.
Since power was removed from the gantry and table, they must be recalibrated.
Refer to Section 4.3.1.
4.3.1 Calibrating the Gantry and Table

Since the Main Power switch was turned OFF and power was removed from the
Note detectors, the gantry and table must be recalibrated. If only the Power Saver switch
was used to remove power, recalibration is not needed since power to the
detectors was never removed.
When the detectors are powered ON, you must calibrate the gantry and table
to ensure that they are operating correctly and that each axis is accurately
positioned. The gantry must be calibrated before you can acquire whole body
tomo and gated tomo scans.
To calibrate the table and gantry, follow these steps:
1. Unlock the table and move it away from the gantry to prevent the
possibility of a collision. Make certain no other obstructions are near the
gantry.
2. The Gantry/Table Calibration pop-up window appears in the top left
corner of the screen. Refer to Figure 4-3. Select [Yes].
Figure 4-3: Calibration Menu

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The calibration sequence automatically moves each axis a small distance

to establish each axis' position. After the system has calibrated an axis, its
position appears in the acquisition status area at the top of the display.
Refer to Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4: Acquisition Status Window
3. Move the table into position and lock it to the floor.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking the Gantry and Hand-Held Controller
4.4 Checking the Gantry and Hand-Held Controller

This section describes how to use the Hand-Held Controller (HHC) to check
movement of the gantry and table. Other HHC functions will be checked.
The Acquisition screen will not display accurate detector/table settings until the
Note detector/table comes to a complete stop. There may be a short delay between the
time the detector/table stops and the time the setting is displayed.
You will need the following equipment:

• Spirit level, 0.6 m. (23 inches) long, minimum.
• Tape measure, 750 mm (30 inches).
Refer to Figure 4-5, and locate the following buttons on the HHC:
• Detector Radius Moves the detector(s) closer to or further
from the center of rotation of the roll axis.
• Detector Rotate Rotates the detector clockwise or
counterclockwise as seen when standing in
front of the system and facing the gantry.
• Table Longitudinal Moves the table in and out of the ring. This is
called the longitudinal axis.
• Table Vertical Moves the table up and down.
• Table Lateral Moves the table left and right as seen when
standing in front of the system, facing the
gantry.
• Detector Selection Toggles between radially moving one or
other detector.
• Clear Image Display Clears acquired image from the display.
• Acquisition Start Starts a new acquisition or stops an
in-progress acquisition.
• Speed Selection Moves table/gantry faster when pressed with
one of the other motion control buttons.
For more detailed information on the HHC, refer to the MG/MC Operator's
Reference Manual, (G.E. Part # 2269384-100 / ELGEMS Part # MAN000424).
The HHC may be plugged into one of five strategically-positioned RJ45 jacks:
• Two jacks are located one on each side of the gantry, near the base.
• Two jacks are located at the end of the table, one near each red E-stop
button.
• One jack is located on the connector panel of the IPS - refer to "Q" in
Figure 4-16 on page 4-18.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector Rotate Buttons
Detector Radius Buttons
Table Vertical Buttons
Table Longitudinal Buttons
Table Lateral Button
DET
Detector Selection Buttons Clear Image Display Button
DET
Acquisition Start Button
ACQ Start
Set Button (OK) Cancel Button
Speed Selection Button
Figure 4-5: Hand Held Controller (HHC)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.4.1 Checking the Detector Rotate Buttons

The detector buttons rotate the detectors from -270° to +270°.
1. With the HHC, press the right-most detector rotate button to rotate the
detectors CW.
2. Next, press the left-most detector rotate button to rotate the detectors
CCW.
The CW and CCW direction assumes you are standing on the table side of the
Note gantry, facing the gantry.
4.4.2 Checking the Detector Radius Buttons

The detector radius buttons moves the detectors closer to or further from the
table.
1. Press the left-most radius button to move the detectors away from the
table.
2. Press the right-most radius button to move the detectors toward the table.
4.4.3 Checking the Table Longitudinal Move Buttons

The table longitudinal button moves the table in and out of the gantry.
1. Press the right longitudinal button to move the table away from the gantry.
2. Press the left longitudinal button to move the table toward the gantry.
4.4.4 Checking the Table Vertical Move Buttons

The table vertical move buttons move the table up and down.
1. With the HHC, press the upper button to move the table up.
2. Next, press the lower button to move the table down.
4.4.5 Checking the Table Lateral Move Buttons

The table lateral button moves the table left or right. These directions assume
you are standing on the table side of the gantry and facing the gantry.
1. With the HHC, press the left-most lateral button to move the table left.
2. Next, press the right-most lateral button to move the table right

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.4.6 Checking the Radial Detector Selection Button

The detector selection buttons allow you to radially move the detectors one at
a time. Proceed as follows:
1. With the HHC, press and hold the Detector #1, the top button.
2. While still depressing the Detector #1 button, press and hold the left-most
radius button to move Detector #1 fully out.
3. Now press and hold the right-most radius button to move Detector #1
fully in.
4. Repeat the above procedure with Detector #2, the bottom button.
Pressing the radius buttons without pressing and holding a detector selection
Note button causes both detectors to move simultaneously
4.4.7 Checking the Clear Image Display Button

The clear image display button clears the image display area on the monitor
and allows the operator to remain close to the patient. Clear is normally used
during acquisition setup. The button is only active when the acquisition card
is displayed, and "Camera on" has been selected.
4.4.8 Checking the Acquisition Start Button

The acquisition start button allows the operator to start and stop the
acquisition while remaining close to the patient. The button becomes active
once a study has been selected and "Camera on" has been selected.
To check this function, press the acquisition start button after selecting a study
and turning ON the camera. After a period of time, press the button again to
manually pause the acquisition. Press the button again to resume acquisition.
To terminate the acquisition, store the data.
For details on how to start and terminate an acquisition, refer to the MG/MC
Operator's Reference Manual, (G.E. Part # 2269384-100 / ELGEMS
Part # MAN000424).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.4.9 Checking the Speed Selection Button

The speed selection button speeds up the movement of the detectors and table.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press one of the rotation buttons and note the slow speed at which the
detectors rotate.
2. While holding down the rotate button, press and hold the speed button.
Note that the detectors rotate much faster.
4.4.10 Checking Detector Rotation

This section describes how to check detector rotation. The detectors are
rotated around the table by means of a servo motor and gearbox located in the
gantry's base. The motor controller activates the rotate motor based on signals
received from the Acquisition computer or the HHC.
Rotation is measured from 0°. At this setting, Detector #1 is on top, facing

downward. The gantry can rotate between -270° and +270°. The location of
the detectors is displayed on the monitor.
Important This check is performed without collimators. If collimators are installed, refer to
Section 4.7, to move them onto the collimator cart.
1. With the HHC, press the clockwise (CW) rotate button to position
Detector #1 at the home position of 0ο (Figure 4-6 shows the status
display on the monitor),
Or for MC Systems:
Move to the collimator exchange position.
Figure 4-6: Detector #1 Status
2. Using the spirit level, verify that the Detector #1 is level at 0° ± 2°. Refer
to Figure 4-7.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector #1 at 0o + 2o
Spirit Level
Note: This view is from

the table side of the gantry
Figure 4-7: Detector #1 at 0° Position
3. With the HHC, press the clockwise (CW) gantry rotate button to position
Detector #1 at 180°.
4. Using the spirit level, verify that the Detector #1 is level at 180° ± 2°.
5. Refer to Chapter 6 if the detectors needs to be aligned.
Spirit Level
Detector #1 at 180o + 2o
Note: This view is from

the table side of the gantry
Figure 4-8: Detector #1 at 180° Position

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.4.11 Checking Detector Radius Motion

This section checks detector radius. Figure 4-9 shows the minimum and
maximum distances.
1. With the HHC, press the right detector radius button to position the
detectors at minimum radius.
2. Measure the distance between the surface of the two detectors. This
measurement should be 285.75 ± 2 mm.
3. With the HHC, press the left radius button and position the detectors at
maximum radius. Measure the distance between the detectors. This
measurement should be 647.7 ± 2 mm.
4. Refer to Chapter 6 if the readings are not as specified.
Minimum Distance = 285.75 + 2mm

Maximum Distance = 647.7 + 2mm
Figure 4-9: Minimum/Maximum Radius

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking the Patient Table
4.5 Checking the Patient Table

This section describes the procedure for checking the table motion:
longitudinal, lateral, and vertical. All table motion is motor driven; the table
cannot be moved manually. You must use the HHC or the Acquisition
computer to move it.
CAUTION
Unlock the table and roll it away from the gantry. Make sure the detectors
will not interfere with the movement of the table.
The screen will not display accurate detector/table settings until the detector/table
Note has come to a complete stop. There may be a short delay between the time the
detector/table stops and the time the setting is displayed.
4.5.1 Checking Longitudinal Motion

The longitudinal motion of the table is driven by a servo motor. The motor
controller activates the longitudinal drive based on signals received from the
Acquisition computer or the HHC. The total travel distance is 1,570 mm.
1. With the HHC, fully retract the table cradle to the minimum longitudinal
position.
2. Verify that the status display on the monitor reads 0 ± 2 mm for table
longitudinal position.
Figure 4-10: Table Longitudinal Status
3. Press the left longitudinal button to extend the table cradle to its furthest
position and measure the distance traveled with a tape measure. Refer to
Figure 4-11. Verify the following:
• Distance measured is 1570 ± 0.5 mm.
• Display reads 1570 ± 2 mm.
4. Refer to Chapter 11, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics, if the readings are
not as specified.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Cradle Fully Extended

1570 mm
0 mm
Figure 4-11: Table Longitudinal Position Check
4.5.2 Checking Lateral Motion

Lateral table movement is driven by a bi-directional motor. The motor
controller activates the lateral drive based on signals received from the
Acquisition computer or the HHC. The total side-to-side travel distance is
218 - 228 mm. Proceed as follows:
1. With the HHC, move the table laterally until the status display on the
monitor reads 0 mm. Refer to Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12: Table Lateral Status
2. With the HHC, move the table laterally all the way to the left until it stops.
Refer to the center figure in Figure 4-13.
3. Verify that the status display reads -116 mm, minimum.
4. Move the table laterally all the way to the right until it stops as shown in
the right-most figure in Figure 4-13.
5. Verify that the AUI display reads +116 mm, minimum.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
TABLE CENTERED TABLE MOVED FULL LEFT TABLE MOVED FULL RIGHT
Detector #1 Detector #1 Detector #1
- 116 mm, min. + 116 mm, min.
Detector #2 Detector #2 Detector #2
Figure 4-13: Table Lateral Position Check
4.5.3 Checking Vertical Motion

The vertical motion for the table is driven by a servo motor. The motor
controller activates the vertical drive based on signals received from the
Acquisition computer or the HHC. Proceed as follows:
1. With the HHC, press the vertical motion button until the table is at it
lowest position. Check the following:
• Status display on monitor reads 0 ± 2 mm. Refer to Figure 4-14.
• Distance from cradle to floor is 610 mm ± 0.5 mm. Refer to
Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-14: Table Vertical Status

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table at
Maximum Height
863 mm
Table at
Minimum Height 610 mm
FLOOR
Figure 4-15: Table Vertical Position Check
2. With the HHC, move the table to its highest position. Verify the following
(refer to Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15):
• Distance measurement is 863 ± 0.5 mm.
• Status display on monitor reads 253 ± 2 mm.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.5.3.1 Visually Checking System Cables
The Integrated Power Supply (IPS) provides power to the servo motor,
brakes, detectors, motor controller, computer, and peripherals. Ensure that all
cables are securely fastened to the IPS, computer tower, monitor, and table.
Figure 4-15 shows the connectors, switches, and LEDs located on the IPS's
connector panel.
D L Q
0 H U
A 1 E S
J M N
B F P
R T
C G
K
Item Description Item Description
A Main input power: ON/OFF switch. K Auxiliary communication connector.
B Peripheral power connector. L Three circuit breakers:

C.B.1 = 20 A
C.B.2 = 10 A
C.B.3 = 5 A
C Main input power connector. M Gantry reset button.
D LED for main input power. LED is lit N Connector for TAXI Link 1 for Detector #1.
when switch is ON.
E Power Saver switch. P Connector for TAXI Link 2 for Detector #2.
F Connector for 120 V AC input power to Q Connector for Hand-Held Controller.

Acquisition computer's monitor.
G Connector for 120 V AC input power to R Connector for patient table.

Acquisition computer's tower.
H LED indicator for Power Saver feature. S Connector for patient table.
LED is lit when power saver is OFF.
J Gantry motion control connector. T Connector for patient table.
U Four (4) LED indicators for collision and

E-stop buttons.
Figure 4-16: IPS Connectors and Indicators
4.5.3.2 Checking the IPS Fans
Check operation of the two cooling fans located on bottom of the IPS chassis.
Fans should be blowing out, toward the floor.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking the HHC Jacks
4.6 Checking the HHC Jacks

This section describes the procedure for verifying the five RJ45 jacks for the
Hand-Held Controller (HHC) operate.
You do not have to perform this procedure on the jack that was used above to
Note check the operation of the HHC.
4.6.1 Checking the Gantry Jacks

Two jacks are located on each side of the gantry base. Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the HHC to one of the RJ45 jacks on the gantry and initiate any
table or detector motion.
2. Move the cable to the RJ45 connector located on the other side of the
gantry and repeat Step 1.
4.6.2 Checking the Patient Table Jacks

Two jacks are located at the end of the table, one by each red E-stop button.
Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the HHC to one of the RJ45 jacks on the table and initiate any
table or detector motion.
2. Move the cable to the other side of table and repeat Step 1.
4.6.3 Checking the IPS Jack

One jack is located on the IPS chassis. Connect the HHC to the RJ45 jack on
the IPS chassis and initiate any table or detector motion.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking the Collimator Exchange
4.7 Checking the Collimator Exchange

This procedure verifies the collimators can be transferred to and from the
collimator cart. The cart is shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17: Collimator Cart with Collimator
WARNING
• When changing collimators, verify that the locking handles are fully
engaged before moving the cart away from the detectors. Failing to
lock the collimators could result in them falling, causing serious
injury.
• Collimators are large and heavy. They should be moved using the
collimator carts provided and care should be taken to follow the
collimator changing procedure described in this section.
• Each detector should always have a collimator mounted on its face.
This protects the detectors from accidental damage and minimises the
effects of temperature changes on the detectors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Unlock the front locking pin of the table, the side closest to the gantry, and
rotate the table out of the way.
2. Select the gantry icon on the Acquisition and Review Screen to start the
collimator changing procedure:
3. Select the "Collimator Changeout" option on the Gantry Positioning

pop-up menu. The collimator warning message appears:
WARNING
The gantry moves automatically to the change out position. Be sure the
table is not in the way and the area around the gantry is clear before starting
the procedure.
4. Select the [Yes] button to begin gantry movement. The detectors will
move to the changeout position from any current position. Refer to
Figure 4-18.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 4-18: Changeout Position
5. Select the [OK] button to confirm.
6. Check that both locking handles on the empty collimator cart are
unlocked and pushed fully forward as shown in Figure 4-19.
Locking Handles
Figure 4-19: Locking Handles
7. Position the empty cart between the detectors. Carefully push the empty
cart forward, checking that the guide pin on the cart aligns and engages
with the guide hole on the gantry. Refer to Figure 4-20.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Handles in
Unlocked Position
Guide Hole
Guide Pin
Figure 4-20: Aligning Cart to Gantry
8. Once the guide pin is engaged, push the cart firmly towards the gantry so
that the cart is fully docked against the gantry.
9. Use the Hand-Held Controller to slowly close the detectors onto the cart
while carefully watching to make sure the collimator guide holes align
with the locking pins on the collimator cart.
10. When the detectors are fully closed onto the collimator cart, pull the
locking handles toward you. The collimators are removed from the
detectors and become attached to the cart. Each of the locking handles has
a built-in safety lock which will block the handle if the cart is not in the
correct position. If either of the handles are blocked, return to Step 7 and
try aligning the cart again.
11. Use the Hand-Held Controller to slowly move the detectors away from
the cart.
12. Carefully roll the cart away from the gantry, taking care not to hit the
collimator or cart against the exposed detectors. Figure 4-21 shows the
collimators locked on the cart.
Follow the on-screen instructions for Collimator Collision Testing.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking Safety Features
Collimator
Locked onto Cart
Figure 4-21: Collimator on Cart
13. Select the next cart to be checked. Repeat the above procedure, starting at
Step 7, and install the collimators onto the detectors. The only difference
will be the position of the locking handles on the cart. You must push the
handles forward to transfer and lock the collimators onto the detectors.
14. Repeat the above procedure for all carts at the site, installing and
uninstalling the collimators.
4.8 Checking Safety Features

This system has built into it both collision sensors and E-stop buttons. The
following sections describe how to check both systems.
To prevent injury to the patient or operator and prevent damage to the

equipment, collision sensors stop all gantry and table motions when activated.
After a collision sensor is activated, motion can be restarted at slow speed by
simultaneously pressing a collision override button and any motion button on
the Hand-Held Controller. Figure 4-21 shows the location of the collision
sensors on the gantry and the table and the override buttons.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Collision Override Buttons

on Rear of Detector
E-Stops on Both
Sides of Gantry
Collision Sensors
located on Both
Collimator Faces
(not visible)
E-Stops on Both
Sides of Table
Collision and E-Stop LEDs

on IPS Connector Panel
Figure 4-22: Location of E-Stops, Collision Sensors, and Override Buttons

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.8.1 Checking the Emergency-Stops (E-Stops)

This section describes procedures for checking the E-stops with and without
table/detector motion. Refer to Figure 4-22 for location of E-stops and
override buttons.
4.8.1.1 Static Check of E-Stop Buttons
1. Check that the E-stop's green LED, located on the IPS connector panel, is
ON:
RUN RUN

COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{ {
STOP STOP
2. Press one of the E-stops on the gantry and verify the following:
• The red E-stop LED turns ON and the green LED goes OFF:
RUN RUN
{
COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{
STOP STOP
• The monitor displays the message: E-stop Depressed. Select [OK] to

delete the message from the screen.
• No motion is possible. Use the Hand-Held Controller to verify this is
true.
3. Pull out the E-stop and verify that the red LED is OFF and the green LED
is ON, as in Step 1.
4. Press one of the motion buttons on the HHC to verify motion is possible.
5. Repeat the above steps for the other E-stop on the gantry and for both of
the E-stops on the table.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.8.1.2 Dynamic Check of E-Stop Buttons
1. Rotate the detectors until they are in the home position, with Detector #1
at 0° as shown in Figure 4-23.
Detector #1 at 0o
Note: This view is from the

table side of the gantry
Figure 4-23: Detector #1 at 0°
2. Using the HHC, press the right-most radius button so that the detectors
start to move inward. With your free hand, press one of the E-stops
located at the side of gantry. Verify that the following events occur:
• Detector motion stops.
• Other table/detector motions cannot be initiated by the HHC.
• The E-stop's red LED illuminates.
RUN RUN
{
COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{
STOP STOP
• The monitor displays the message: E-stop Depressed. Select [OK]

to delete the message from the screen.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Pull out the E-stop and verify that green LED is ON and the red LED is
OFF.
RUN RUN

COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{ {
STOP STOP
4. Press the right-most radius button on the HHC to restart motion.

5. Repeat the above steps for the other E-stop on the gantry and for both of
the E-stops on the table.
4.8.2 Checking Collision Sensors on the Detectors

This subsection describes the procedure for checking the collision sensors
located between the collimator and the detector. Pressure on the collimator
activates this sensor.
4.8.2.1 Static Check
1. Press your hand against one of the collimators and verify the following:
• Both red LEDs turn ON and remain ON as long as you apply pressure
on the collimator:
RUN RUN
{ {
COLLI- E-STOP
SION

STOP STOP
• The monitor displays the message: Table/Gantry In Collision.

Select [OK] to delete the message from the screen.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2. Remove your hand from the collimator and verify that the green LEDs are
ON:
RUN RUN

COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{ {
STOP STOP
3. Repeat the previous step for the collision sensor on the other collimator.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.8.2.2 Dynamic Check
1. Rotate the detectors so that Detector #1 is at 0° as shown in Figure 4-23.

2. Using the Hand-Held Controller (HHC), press the right-most radius
button so that the detectors move inward.
3. Press your other hand against one of the collimators as it is moving. Verify
that the following events occur:
• Detector motion stops.
• Motion does not start after you remove your hand from the collimator.
• Other table/detector motions cannot be initiated by the HHC.
• Both red LEDs illuminate:
RUN RUN
{ {
COLLI- E-STOP
SION

STOP STOP
• The monitor displays the message: Table/Gantry In Collision.

Select [OK] to delete the message from the screen.
4. Let go of the HHC and use that hand to press the override switch
(Figure 4-22). The red collision LED stays ON, but the E-stop LED is
now green and will remain green as long as you press the override switch:
RUN RUN
{
COLLI- E-STOP
SION
{
STOP STOP
5. Repeat the previous step for the collision sensor on the other collimator.
6. Rotate Detector #1 to 180° as shown in Figure 4-24.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector #1 at 180o
Note: This view is from the

table side of the gantry
Figure 4-24: Detector #1 at 180°
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 5, with the detectors in this position.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.8.3 Check Collision Override

Two small collision override buttons are located on the back of each detector,
as shown in Figure 4-22. This important safety function allows detector
motion, using the HHC, when a collision sensor has been actuated and held in
the actuated state.
1. Move the detector to the home position, with Detector #1 at 0°, as shown
in Figure 4-23.
2. Perform the following functions simultaneously:
a. With one hand, press and hold your hand on the face of the collimator
to activate the collision sensor.
b. With the other hand, press and hold the radius button on the HHC. The
detectors will not move since the collision sensor has been activated.
c. While pressing the radius button on the HHC, press and hold the
collision override button with the knuckle of the same hand holding
the HHC. Verify that detector radius motion occurs, but at slow speed.
d. Press the Cancel button on the HHC, to release the "collision state".
4.8.4 Checking the Collimator ON/OFF Sensor

The collision sensor activates when the collimator is removed from the
detector. This feature can be used to detect the presence/absence of a
collimator.
Remove the collimator as described in Section 4.7. When the collimator is

removed from the detector, verify the red collision and E-stop LEDs on the
IPS are ON. When the collimator is re-installed on the detector, verify both
green LEDs are ON.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking Accessories
4.9 Checking Accessories

Use the procedures in this section to check the functionality of the
accessories.
4.9.1 Checking the Bar Phantom

Verify that the bar phantom shown in Figure 4-25 can be easily installed on
the detector. Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the collimator from the detector as discussed in Section 4.7.

2. Install the bar phantom on the detector with the raised surface of the
phantom toward the detector. Align the four corner holes of the phantom
with the four collimator support pins on the detector. Press the phantom
against the detector face.
3. Secure the phantom in place with the phantom holder hardware shown in
Figure 4-25:
a. Insert the thin black threaded screw through the center of the large
silver threaded lug.
b. Insert the unthreaded end of lug, with the thin screw in the center of
the lug, into the two center mounting holes on the detector.
c. Screw the silver lug in place with the thin black screw.
d. Secure the phantom with the knurled nuts.
Raised Side Toward Detector
Phantom Holder (2 sets)
Bar Phantom
Figure 4-25: Bar Phantom and Holder

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.9.2 Checking the IV Pole Holder

Verify that the pole (not supplied) and holder, shown in Figure 4-26, can
freely slide from one end of the table to the other without sticking.
Figure 4-26: IV Pole and Holder
4.9.3 Checking the Table Extender
WARNING
• Failure to follow this procedure may damage the extender and cause
patient injury.
• The table extender is designed to support a maximum weight of
20 kgs. Do not stand or sit on the extender or load it beyond its 20 kg
(44 lbs.) limit.
Failure to follow this warning may damage the extender.
1. Inspect the table extender (refer to Figure 4-27) for cracks, peeling, or
other defects.
2. Slide the table extender over the end of the table cradle. Be sure the table
extender fits tightly onto the table.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table Extender
Table
Figure 4-27: Table Extender
4.9.4 Checking the Head Holder
WARNING
• Failure to follow this procedure may result in patient injury.
• You must support the head holder ring and the two grooved spacers as
these will be free when the spindle is fully removed.
• Do not lubricate the head holder adjustment assembly.
1. Inspect the head holder for cracks, peeling, and other defects.
2. Slide the head holder over the end of the table cradle. Be sure that the
head holder fits tightly onto the table. Refer to Figure 4-28.
Head Holder Installed

on End of Table
Figure 4-28: Head Holder

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4.9.5 System Functional Checks

This section describes how to use the Acquisition User Interface (AUI) for the
system functional check. For detailed information on the AUI, refer to the
MG/MC Operator's Reference Manual, (G.E. Part # 2269384-100 / ELGEMS
Part # MAN000424).
The system's Acquisition and Display screen appears approximately two

minutes after you log in. It occupies the entire screen, as shown in
Figure 4-29. The Acquisition, Review, and Quality Control Cards appear in a
stack on the left side of the screen. To bring one card to the front of the stack,
select any visible part of it.
Quality Control Card
Review Card
Acquisition Card
Figure 4-29: Acquisition and Display Screen

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Acquiring a Test Scan and Checking Image Quality
4.10 Acquiring a Test Scan and Checking Image Quality

The MG/MC Operator's Reference Manual (G.E. Part # 2269384-100 / ELGEMS
Part # MAN000424) explains how to acquire a test scan and check image quality.
Refer to Chapter 5 of that manual and perform the following:
• “Daily Floods”
• “System Resolution”
• “Center of Rotation (COR)”
• “Camera Uniformity Analysis (CUA)”
4.11 Checking the Network

The Network Card transfers data from the Acquisition computer to a
Processing and Review station or to a Starcam station for processing, review,
archiving, or filming.
1. If the Main screen is not displayed, select the Main screen button in the
upper left corner. The Patient Selection/Network cards appear as shown in
Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30: Main Screen and Network Card

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Functional Checks Checking the Network
2. Select a patient study from the list on the left side of the screen.
3. On the right of the screen, select the name of the station where you want
to send the data.
4. Select the [Send] button to send the selected entries to the specified
station.
5. Sending data can take considerable time, depending on the size of the
study and the number of other workstations on the network. While the
system is sending data, the Active sub-card shows the progress of the data
transfer. When the transmission is complete, the system displays
information on the log sub-card.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 5 - Theory of Operation
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides a general overview of the entire system and then
describes the theory of operation of the sub-systems.
Figure 5-1 shows the block diagram for the system.
HAND-HELD
CONTROLLER
(GANTRY BUS)
PATIENT TABLE (MAIN AC INPUT)
(TABLE INTERCONNECT)
GANTRY
(COLLISION
(24V DC)
SENSORS)
MOBILE
COMPUTER CART DETECTOR #2
Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse DETECTOR #1
(COLLISION
SENSOR)
(COLLISION
SENSOR)
(TAXI LINK 1) COLLIMATOR
ACQUISITION TOWER
(RS-232C) (ETHERNET)
P&R EKG COLLIMATOR

MODEM
TRIGGER CART
STARCAM
3000
(PHONE LINE) 4000
40001
Figure 5-1: System Overview Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Theory of Operation Acquisition Hardware
5.2 Acquisition Hardware
WARNING
• The PC always uses 110V power supplied by the IPS.
• Always plug the PC into the gantry IPS. Never plug the PC directly
into a wall receptacle.
The Acquisition Computer provides hardware and software for the following:
• Scan prescription definition and capture

• Real-time acquisition setup and control
• Table and gantry control
• Calibration and tuning control
• A local database of acquired data
• A library of system vendor pre-defined and user-defined acquisition
templates
• Simple review/display of local data
• Networking to other StarCam or Processing and Review workstations
• InSite connection to the On-Line Center
• Diagnostic and executive user interface
The Acquisition computer extends the computer family and provides an

enhanced Graphical User Interface (GUI) which includes the Patient Selector
Card, Review Card, and AutoTab concepts. Acquisition is based on real-time
UNIX, X-windows, and Motif UI software platforms. Unlike Processing and
Review, a real-time Operating System (OS) facilitates complete detector and
table/gantry control.
All user interactions are performed with the aid of a 17" color monitor. These
include: database listing; acquisition setup; real-time camera (persistence) and
acquisition mode displays of acquired data; review of previously-acquired
data; and gantry status information. Typing on the part of the user is
minimized, since most interactions are performed with the mouse (commonly
called "point-and-click").
The Acquisition computer receives power from the gantry's IPS and runs on
standard power (110V AC, 10A). It communicates with the detectors via
high-speed TAXI link cables and connections. Each detector has its own
TAXI link cable back to the PC and its own framing board for event framing.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table/gantry commands are communicated via either a serial line or

multiplexed on the TAXI link, depending on the product. An Ethernet
connection is provided for network communications out of the Acquisition.
Within the PC is a high speed SCSI disk, RAM, high performance video
controller (1280x1024 resolution, 70+ Hz), DAT tape drive, CD-ROM, the
framing boards, an Ethernet board for networking, a multi I/O card to provide
up to 4 serial ports, and a SCSI controller.
All computer-driven diagnostics for each sub-system can be invoked from the
Diagnostics User Interface executive and their results captured and displayed
to the user. This interface provides a consistent and automated mechanism to
select and execute diagnostics. Remote access for InSite is provided through
the local network to another computer having a modem back to the On-Line
Center. InSite Engineers can utilize the same graphical diagnostic user
interface as the on-site Field Engineer.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.2.1 General Description for IBM XSeries 205 Computer
Important Because the computer is constantly being updated, the following specifications may
vary according to current model availability.
Table 5-1: IBM XSeries 205 Computer - Hardware Specifications
Function Specification
Computer Internal Disk 2 x 40GB 7200 rpm IDE Hard Drives

Tower Drives Removable Drawer for Second Hard Drive
3.5” Flopy Drive
CPU Pentium 4 2.8 GHz Front Side Bus 533 MHz

Motherboard
128 MB PC2100 DDR SDRAM 266MHz
Graphic Card On-board Graphic Card

ATI RAGE XL 4MB SDRAM
I/O Card I/O Digi Neo Card
Network Card On-board NIC Broadcom BCM 5702 10/100/

1000 Gb
EIDE CD-ROM x48
Monitor Type Color
Resolution 1280 x 1024 x 256, 72 Hz
User Keyboard English / Standard USA

Interfaces
Mouse Scroll Intel Mouse
5.2.2 IBM xSeries 205 Components

The IBM xSeries 205 computer is fitted with an Intel Pentium 4 2.8 GHz
processor, and supplied with a monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
Important Computers are continuously being upgraded and the specifications are constantly
changing.
5.2.2.1 PC Motherboard
The PC Motherboard holds the Central Processing Unit (CPU), the Random
Access Memory (RAM), on-board video adapter, the physical PCI buses and
the serial I/O ports. The CPU performs all software and user interface
operations required by the user.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.2.2.2 Processor
The CPU is a Intel Pentium™4 2.8 GHz processor. The Operating System
(OS) used to interface between applications code and the chip instruction set
is a real-time UNIX system called LynxOS.
5.2.2.3 Memory
The RAM is used for temporary storage of instructions and data. The standard
configuration provides 128 MB of memory. There is also 512 KB of
Level 2 cache.
5.2.2.4 PCI Bus
The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) is a 32/33-bit high-performance

internal local bus which also allows optional devices to be interfaced to the
computer and communicate quickly with the CPU and RAM. The PCI bus is
used to support the video adapter card and the main CPU and the framing
board(s).
5.2.2.5 IDE Disk Controller
The IDE-1 and IDE-2 input sockets are located on the motherboard. The IBM
xSeries 205 System Service Manual provides full details.
5.2.2.6 Hard Disk/Diskette
Two hard disk (40 GB each) are mass storage devices for storing application
code and data. The data is stored using traditional magnetic recording
techniques. The second hard drive is removable and is used for system backup
purposes. The diskette drive is used for loading some corrections files and
licenses.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.2.2.7 Core I/O
The Acquisition computer provides I/O ports for the following items:
• Graphics Adapter located on the mother board. The Graphics Adapter

module relieves the CPU of performing some of the computations
required to keep track of colours and shapes as items are moved and
rotated on the monitor. The standard configuration provides an
8-plane, high-resolution (1280x1024) colour graphics control. It has a
3-row 15-pin D-shell connector.
• LAN (Ethernet 802.3), located on the Ethernet card. Standard
IEEE802.3 LAN controller with ThickNet AUI (15-pin D-shell)
connector interface. Used to provide network connection to Starlink
and TCP/IP (DICOM) networks. DICOM application is not available
on the Acquisition at this time.
• Keyboard, located on the motherboard.
• Serial ports 1 and 2, located on the motherboard. Two EIA RS232
serial ports, via 9-pin male connectors, are provided on the
motherboard for the mouse and gantry communication interface.
• Serial ports 3 and 4, located on the multi-I/O card. Two more serial
ports are provided on the EISA Multi-I/O card for other future serial
devices.
• Parallel Interface, located on the motherboard. A Centronics type
parallel port, via a 25-pin female connector, is provided on the
motherboard. It is not currently used by the Acquisition application.
5.2.2.8 Monitor
The computer comes with a 17 in. (432 mm) high resolution (1280x1024),
multi-sync color monitor. It provides non-interlaced, flicker-free, screen
refreshes at over 70 Hz. A variety of digital adjustments (brightness, contrast,
size, geometric shaping) are available via the on-screen menus.
5.2.2.9 Mouse
A scroll mouse is provided for all user manipulations of the graphical user
interface.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.2.2.10 Keyboard
The keyboard is used for entry of patient or scan-specific information. It is

also used during installation or troubleshooting of the system. The system will
not boot without an attached keyboard.
5.2.2.11 Framing Boards
The system uses two framing boards, one for each detector. The framing
boards are located in the Acquisition computer and are controlled from the
PCI bus. The framing board communicates with an I/N board located in the
detector. It controls the setup for acquisition and control parameters and
performs linearity and energy correction. The on-board processed data is
passed on to the PC via the internal EISA bus for display or storage.
The following framing board description refers to Figure 5-2 (see next page).
Data to be transmitted to the I/N board is sent via the PCI PC bus to the event
transmission latch via the linearity and energy correction DSP (Digital Signal
Processor). The data is latched into the TAXI transmitter and is transmitted to
the differential serial data output terminals SEROUT+ and SEROUT-. Data
received are serial data. Two types of data are received from the TAXI
receiver: 1) event data and 2) parameters. Both types of data are transmitted
via a twisted-pair cable and are fed to the TAXI receiver as a differential
signal. The TAXI receiver converts the data into parallel data. The event data
is passed on to the event reformatting circuit, and parameters are send to the
character receiver FIFO.
The linearity and correction DSP handles the linearity and energy corrections
based upon data in look-up tables. Both corrections are supported
simultaneously. During initialization, correction data are loaded into the
look-up tables.
The framing DSP converts accepted events into physical memory addresses in
the framing memory. The framing memory is divided into two physical
banks: Bank A and Bank B. During multi-gated acquisitions, frames are
acquired in Bank A, and when accepted added to the contents of Bank B.
The framing DSP also handles the X-Y masking based upon data in look-up
tables. The data is stored in the X-Y masking RAM. The framing DSP look-up
event addresses and the accepted addresses are passed onto the PC bus.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Transm.
TAXI Event
Transm.
SEROUT Latch Framing Board
+ - interconnection
Taxi
Link
Event Double Double

FIFO Reformatting Event Event FIFO
Buffer Buffer
2x2
Twisted
pair + -
SERIN
FIFO
Receiv. Char.
TAXI Receiv.
Linearity &
Energy Corr.
Buffer Buffer DSP
Level Timing
Shifter Controle
Trigger input Linearity & Energy PCI Bus
Corr. Tables Interface
PCI PC Bus
I/F PCI Bus PCI Bus

Register Interface Interface
Framing
Cntr. Memory FIFO
Data Register
Serial
Commu-
Adr. nication
Blank A FIFO
ALU
Framing FIFO
Cntr. Memory Framing
Data Register FIFO
Adr. DSP
Blank B
A B Energy
Max Discr.
Event Pixel SRAM
Framing FIFO Double Double
Memory Event Event
Buffer Buffer
Timing/ Command
Control X-Y Mask Register
done SRAM
FIFO
Figure 5-2: Framing Board Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.2.3 TAXI Communication

The communication between the detector and the Acquisition console is
achieved by a high speed TAXI (Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter
/Receiver Interface) link between the I/N board and the framing board. Refer
to Figure 5-3. The system provides data transmission of parallel data by
means of a serial link and can transmit and receive data simultaneously via a
double twisted pair cable.
Two types of messages are transmitted via the TAXI link; data and
commands. Commands occur at a relatively infrequent rate but have priority
over data.
Examples include communication commands such as Request-to-Send or

Clear-to-Send; or application commands such as Retransmit, Error or Halt.
DETECTOR PC ACQUISITION
CONSOLE
I/N BOARD FRAMING BOARD
TAXI TAXI
OUT IN
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER
TAXI TAXI
2X2 TWISTED PAIR CABLE
IN OUT
RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
Figure 5-3: Bi-Directional Taxi Communication Link

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Theory of Operation Acquisition Software
5.3 Acquisition Software
CAUTION
• DELETING DATA REMOVES IT FROM THE DATABASE. IT
CANNOT BE RECOVERED AFTER IT IS DELETED.
• Do not load non-system software onto the Acquisition Computer.
Running non-system applications may interfere with Acquisition
operations.
• You should follow the specified system shutdown and start-up
procedures before switching the power supply OFF. Turning OFF the
power or pressing the reset switch without following shutdown
procedure causes the system to take longer to power up and may cause
data to be lost.
• The monitor should be adjusted under the normal lighting levels used
in the department.
Table 5-2: Software Specifications
Operating Platform UNIX

System
Compiler ANSI-C compliant
Interface POSIX 1003.1 compliant
Graphic User System server and libraries X Windows (X11R5)

Interface
Windows manager Motif version 1.2
Networking InSite, DICOM TCP/IP Ethernet
Vendor's nuclear devices Starlink/GENIELink OSI

TP4 / IEEE802.3

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.1 UNIX Operating System Software

The Acquisition is based on a real-time version of the UNIX operating
system. It handles creation, storage, and access to all the files on the hard
disk. UNIX is a multi-tasking/processing operating system allowing multiple
processes to be active. It effectively manages the order, priority, and
sequencing of CPU time given to each process. Given the timing-critical
nature of activities such as table/gantry motion and detector event processing,
it is important that the operating system correctly handle these tasks above
others.
UNIX provides virtual memory, allowing a smaller amount of physical RAM

to be more effectively utilized by swapping recently unused data and code out
of physical memory and onto the disk until it is needed. UNIX also provides
and manages the software interface to all the hardware devices within the PC,
including the network.
5.3.2 General Description

The following are some common UNIX concepts, terms, and commands.
• UNIX. UNIX is a very flexible and well-established operating system
that supports multiple users and processes simultaneously. It was
originally developed by Bell Laboratories. The term UNIX usually
implies an operating system that acts like the one that Bell Lab's
developed. UNIX is also a portable operating system, meaning it
works across multiple hardware platforms.
• Kernel. This is the master program that controls the operation of all
other programs. The kernel is responsible for loading programs into
memory, controlling their execution and controlling the programs'
access to peripheral devices. Unlike other programs, once the kernel is
loaded into memory during system start-up, it remains in memory
running continuously until the system is shutdown.
• Shell. The shell is the UNIX system's command interpreter. It is the
interface between the user and the operating system. There are many
UNIX shells available but the three main ones used are the Bourne, C,
and Korn. On Acquisition, the C shell is most frequently used. Shells
are used to directly interact with the UNIX operating system, rather
than through the Acquisition User Interface. Shells will typically be
brought up to access some of the service tools. It can be accessed via
the "Exit to UNIX Shell" option on the Service Menu.
• Process. A program or script that is, essentially, a series of commands
sent to the operating system. Processes may run in the foreground
(with the user waiting until the task is completed) or the background
(allowing the user to go onto another task while the first completes).
Processes may start other processes.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
• Script. A collection of commands put into a file with the intention of

executing them within a shell. The file must have execution
privileges.
• Swap space. In a multitasking environment, the CPU divides its time
among all the processes that are active at any given time. When a
program has received its share of CPU time, or when it reaches a point
where the next instruction cannot be executed immediately, the
process might be swapped out of main memory. All or part of the
process is moved from main memory to a reserved area on the disk.
This area is know as the swap space. The current state of the data and
programs swapped out are preserved when swapped out and can be
quickly restored for further processing when the process gets swapped
in for its next slice of CPU time.
The swap space occupies an area on the disk reserved expressly for
swapping purposes. It is configured into the system's kernel during a
load from cold. The Acquisition Computer currently reserves 96MB
of disk space for swapping.
• UNIX commands. A command is an alphanumeric string that tells the
shell what to do. Every command entered under the UNIX system has
a similar format. The first word is the command itself, which is the
name of the utility or user program to be executed. The remaining
words are command options or switches and arguments. An option
controls how the command is to be performed. An argument, usually a
file name, indicates on which file (or other items) the command will
operate. Refer to Figure 5-4.
COMMAND NAME: Tells the shell what to do.
OPTION: Controls how the command works.
ARGUMENTS: Defines which files the command works on.
ls -l /users/Genie/licenses
Figure 5-4: Unix Command Syntax

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.3 Common UNIX Commands

Table 5-3 lists some of the more basic, commonly-used UNIX commands.
Table 5-3: Unix Commands
Command Description
man Get details on how to use a command. For example, "man ls" will
provide details on the ls command.
ls List files in directories.
more Browse through a text a page at a time.
cp Copy a file.
mv Move or rename a file.
rm Delete or remove a file.
cd Change current working directory.
pwd Display path of current working directory.
mkdir Create a new directory.
rmdir Remove or delete a directory.
cat Concatenate files, display the contents of a file or create a text file.
chmod Used to change file access permissions.
chown Used to change file owner.
chgrp Used to change group.
df Reports free disk space and summarizes disk usage.
du Reports disk usage per file.
ln Creates file or directory links.
ps -ax Displays current processes running and their PID's.
kill Used to terminate a process.
vi Visual Interactive line editor. Used to create and modify text files.
ping Tests network connection to an IP node.
find Finds a specific file.
reboot -a Reboot the computer.
reboot -ah Shutdown (halt) the computer for power down.
ethaddr Lists information (physical address) for the local network configuration.
fsck Check the disk for file corruption.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.4 GENIE Acquisition Commands

Table 5-4 lists GENIE Acquisition commands.
Table 5-4: Acquisition Commands
Name Description
listerr <entries> List last <entries> lines of the error log. Default is last 100 lines.
dbverify Database integrity checker. Finds lost references, empty pointers.
dbfix Correct database integrity issues. Cannot be run until Dicom Server and all acquisition
processes are stopped. Dicom Server must be stopped manually using the “kill”
command.
check_procs List and report status of all GENIE Acquisition software processes
check_lic Checks Acquisition and PrServer license key against current computer ID and reports
licenses found.
check_prslic Checks PrServer license and validates it for this machine.
check_prs Checks that PrServer is running and reports Server statistics.
check_rel <proc> Check the version of a software processes (cap, ncp, ni, aui, fep)
ethaddr Lists information (physical address) for the local network configuration.
st_config Run menu-driven installation/configuration script
st_bru Backup/restore utility (full disk backups, or config data only)
setup_pcadb Create a new empty database.
st_align Table alignment utility.
st_axis Manufacturing utility to set up the axes as existent or not for Exerciser tests without a
table.
st_cor Extracts all the Center of Rotation values from the database.
st_exp <uid> Extracts the entire set of patient records for a given patient UID value from the database,
concatenates all the files into one file, and compresses the output. Used when retrieving a
patient's scan from a customer site.
fdf 0 b c Boots the corrections DSP on the first Framing Board. Also useful test for comms from
Acquisition to the Framing Board.
fdf 0 b f Boots the framing DSP on the first Framing Board. Also useful test for comms from the
Acquisition software to the Framing Board.
fdf 0 b p Boots the pileup DSP on the I/N Board. Also a useful test for comms from Framing Board
to the I/N board.
fdf 0 b n Boots the normalization DSP on the I/N board. Also a useful test for comms from Framing
Board to the I/N board.
fdf 0 b o accode.exe Boots the Optima gantry, manually. Should be done after powering up the Optima gantry
and waiting 30 seconds. Must be run from the /usr/ Acquisition/config directory.
pca_state Put information about all the system and acquisition processes in file /tmp/pca_date.psl
st_update Upgrade software version 2.0, 2.1 and 2.3 to version 2.3.1
tar cvf /dev/rfd1440.0 Copy to floppy.
tar cvf /dev/rst2940.2 Copy to DAT.
tar -xvf /dev/rst2940.2 Extract all files from the DAT tape.
tar xvf /dev/rfd1440.0 Extract all files from the disk
starping <node> Test network connection to StarLink node. <node> is the Ethernet address or configured
station name.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.5 Acquisition System File Structure

Figure 5-5 portrays the hierarchical structure used to organize files within the
Acquisition computer system. Table 5-5 contains brief descriptions of the
contents of each of these main directories.
bin dev net etc src lib Lost + sys usr tmp
found
genieacq
Figure 5-5: Acquisition File System Structure
Table 5-5: Acquisition File System Descriptions
Directory Name/Symbol Description
/ Root directory. Ancestor of all files in the file system.
/bin Contains the bulk of the UNIX utility programs and other executable files
required to run UNIX. (bin=binary files).
/dev Contains special files that make it possible to access hardware devices and
OS facilities as files.
/net Contains network configuration files.
/etc Stores various configuration files, directories, executables, and system

administration databases that are specific to a system.
/src GENIE acquisition system files.
/lib Contains program libraries and various architecture dependent databases.
/lost+found UNIX directory that contains any files not properly closed.
/sys System files.
/usr Contains the home directory of the various users of the system, namely
Acquisition.
adm Contains messages and error log files.
genieacq Directory that contains Acquisition software, database, scripts, utilities,

correction files and licenses.
man Contains on-line UNIX manual pages.
/tmp Temporary file repository.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.6 Acquisition Network Capabilities

The Acquisition computer has a built-in IEEE802.3 compatible, Ethernet
controller with a standard AUI 15-pin connector. Using this connector and a
transceiver, connections to 10BaseT, ThinNet, Fiber, or ThickNet can be
made from the Acquisition computer.
There are two separate network protocols provided in the Acquisition

software:
• GENIELink (Starlink) - a customized network protocol suite based on

the OSI model. It allows the Acquisition system to communicate over
the Starlink network.
• TCP/IP - a standard network protocol suite included with many UNIX
computers. It allows DICOM based communication between
Acquisition and other DICOM compatible systems. TCP/IP is also
used for network connectivity to InSite.
The InSite connection is made via a modem attached to Processing and

Review, which acts as an InSite gateway. Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual
for additional information.
5.3.6.1 GENIELink/StarLink
GENIELink is a customized network protocol suite based on the OSI model

and IEEE802.3 Ethernet standard which allows the Acquisition computer to
communicate over the Starlink Network.
The following are the known compatibility issues and limitation of

GENIELink for Acquisition Release 1.0.
• GENIELink cannot receive data from another system on the Starlink

Network. It is an acquisition node or source of new data, not a receiver
for post-processing.
• Due to hardware limitations, Starport systems can not be upgraded to
Starlink Version 4. Therefore the Starport system will not be directly
compatible with either the Acquisition system or StarCam systems
upgraded to Starlink Version 4. A Starport Gateway was developed to
address this problem.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.7 TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a protocol suite
developed by the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA). It
is an alternative to the Open System Interface (OSI) protocol and has been
around longer than OSI.
TCP/IP can be run on a variety of hosts or platforms and is used on most

UNIX systems.
TCP/IP is transparent to the user. The user communicates with the computer's
operating system and applications. These in turn communicate to the different
protocols of the TCP/IP suite. TCP/IP then handles the interface with the
network hardware. Two users on different networks can communicate
transparently since the IP layer interfaces to several different types of
networks, for example, Ethernet, X.25.
Each computer using TCP/IP must have a unique identifier assigned to it.
This unique identifier is the Internet Protocol Address or IP Address.
The IP Address is a 32 bit number usually represented as four 8-bit (byte)
numbers in decimal format separated by decimal points. The following is an
example:
3.231.44.56
An IP Address must be assigned to the Acquisition system. It is the
responsibility of the site to provide this value for system vendor devices
connected to the site's network. Refer to the MG/MC Site Preparation Manual
(G.E. Part # 2269387-100 / ELGEMS Part # MAN000426). Refer to Chapter 3 of
this manual on how these network addresses will be used.
5.3.8 Acquisition Application and TCP/IP

TCP/IP is used for communications with the On-Line Center for InSite access
and is used to send data to other DICOM compatible systems on the hospital's
network.
InSite uses two forms of TCP/IP for communications over a serial line and
modem called the Point to Point Protocol (PPP) and the Serial Line Interface
Protocol (SLIP). PPP is used by Processing and Review to communicate with
InSite, and SLIP is used by Acquisition to communicate with InSite. They
provide roughly the same functionality. In the case where a single modem
connected to either a Processing and Review or Acquisition is shared by
several systems, these systems all communicate via TCP/IP on the local area
network before going over the phone line via either PPP or SLIP.
For additional information on TCP/IP and other networks issues, refer to the
Network Service Documentation, Direction 46-021650.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.9 Aquisition Processes and Hardware

Figure 5-6 shows the relationship between the Acquisition application
software processes and the hardware.
AUI = Acquisition User Interface

CAP = Control Acquisition Process
CDP = Control Detector Process
FEP = Framing Event Process
GIP = Gantry Interface Process
NCP = NEMA Cal Process
SAD = Store Acquired Data
TGC = Table Gantry Control
Graphical Interface:
AUI - Display Status
- Acqu. Selection
NCP
-Network
Action
Sequencing - Calibration Routine
- Software Control of Process
CAP
Common Gantry
Control (Hi-level)
Framing Board
TGC Control Detector
Control - Decouples Data Collection
FEP CDP SAD - Writes to Disk
KERMIT
- CAP Breaks Data into Pieces
GIP
Customize Per
PCA Software Gantry (Lo-level)
PCA Internal SERIAL FRAMING RESERVED DISK

Hardware COM CHANNEL BOARDS Trig MEMORY
External RS232 TAXI(S)

Hardware
WEML DETECTORS
ECG
GANTRY VIA I/N
Pixel
Shift
SERVICE
PC
Figure 5-6: Acquisition Software Process Organization

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.10 Software Processes

Following is a list of the Acquisition processes and their functions.
• AUI - Acquisition User Interface is the main user interface for all of
the Acquisition.
• CAP - Control Acquisition Process controls and sequences all
acquisition activities of the table, gantry, detectors, and
framing boards based on the acquisition prescription specified.
• CDP - Control Detector Process controls the specific detector through
the framing boards, including masks and corrections. Specific
for each detector type.
• FEP - Frame Events Process controls framing of events on the
framing boards.
• GIP - Gantry Interface Process performs low-level control of the
specific gantry/table involved. Understands motion control
commands and capabilities of the gantry/table.
• NCP - NEMA Cal Process performs calibration and tuning of
detectors.
• SAD - Store Acquired Data provides interface to the database and
off-loads data from the framing boards when buffers are full or
frame is complete.
• TGC - Table/Gantry Control provides high-level (gantry-independent)
control of table/gantry motions.
Figure 5-7 shows the organization of the Acquisition software application.
Acquisition User Interface and Application Software (AUI)
Acquisition Control (CAP)

Review Application
Camera Display Application
Network Application NCP SAD TGC
ISG PrServer Display Library FEP GIP

DB Access
Motif UI Toolkit Libraries
Framing Motion
OSI/TP4 PPP X-Windows Libraries Board Database Control
TCP/IP Library Library Library
LynxOS Real Time Unix Operating System
Figure 5-7: Acquisition Software Application

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.11 License Keys

There is one software license key for the Acquisition system: pr.base. This
key controls access to the proprietary servers in the Acquisition software, and
restricts use of the Acquisition software to a specific computer.
The "pr.base" is the PrServer license used to display images on the

Acquisition Card and Review Card.
Whenever logging into AUI, the software automatically checks the license
key and, if this is not present, the AUI software cannot be loaded.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.3.12 Diagnostics
The Acquisition provides a general-purpose, flexible Diagnostics User
Interface (DUI) and executive engine for defining, selecting, and invoking
any diagnostic routines that provide a software interface. The DUI test suites
are arranged in a hierarchical manner from system, to sub-system, to
component, and finally to specific test. Selections can be made at any level of
the hierarchy and set up to run once or repeatedly.
An off-the-shelf PC diagnostics software package is provided and loaded on a

DOS partition to check the PC motherboard, disk, RAM, serial ports, and
peripheral cards. The PC FRU level is fairly high (PC, keyboard, monitor,
mouse), so field troubleshooting of the PC should be minimized.
Through the technology of UNIX and the X-window system, parts of the
Acquisition User Interface can be run as easily from the On-Line Center as
from the customer site. Due to bandwidth limitations across the modem, it is
not practical to run the entire UI across the phone lines, but all the diagnostic
routines, including the DUI, can easily and quickly be run from the OLC.
Field diagnostics and remote diagnostics become the same, with the exception
of any routines generating table/gantry motion, which are locked out from
remote usage.
5.3.13 Acquisition Database

The Acquisition system uses a custom database. The Acquisition application
accesses the database via a set of database access commands. There currently
are no tools available to access the database outside the Acquisition
application.
The database resides on the internal system disk, in the directory

$PCACQDB/dataf. It is saved in an internal binary form. The database is
comprised of a set of files, one for each logical table in the database (patient,
study, series, dataset, corrections, collimator, energy session, etc.).
The Acquisition templates are created at the time the database is initialized,
and they are loaded as a part of the start-up procedure. The raw database
template definitions are created from definitions in the $PCACQCFG/dbl.
Important These templates should not be edited or changed as they have a very specific
format demanded by the database creation procedure.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Theory of Operation Printing
5.4 Printing
You have the ability to capture all or a portion of the Acquisition screens,
including CUA and image displays, and send these images to a PostScript2™
printer or a DICOM Remote Station which was designated as a Secondary
Capture destination. The printer can be directly connected to Acquisition or
accessed through an Ethernet network. Printers directly connected to a remote
computer are also accessible through Ethernet network.
Many different PostScript2 printers are available with a wide variation in

print quality. The speed, quality, resolution, and color of the hard copy depend
upon the type of PostScript printer selected. Table 5-6 lists several printers we
tried during the development of the print feature.
Table 5-6: Postscript Printers
Printer Type Connection Type Notes
HP 1600CM DeskJet Printer Networked Ink jet printer with 22MB RAM
Lexmark Optra R+ Networked
Important Acquisition may not be used to adjust/enhance print quality.
Three different printer topologies are possible:
• Local. Printer is directly connected to Acquisition via the parallel

port. Refer to Section 5.4.1.
• Networked. Printer is accessed via a network, with the print queue
managed by Acquisition. Refer to Section 5.4.2.
• Remote. Printer is accessed via another computer, with the printer
either directly connected to the remote computer or accessed via a
network. Refer to Section 5.4.3.
• Secondary Capture. The captured images are sent to a DICOM
Remote Station that was designated as Secondary Capture for printing
or archiving. Refer to Section 5.4.6.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.4.1 Using a Local Printer

In this scenario, the printer is directly connected to the parallel port of
Acquisition (Figure 5-8). This configuration is relatively easy to setup and
wire. However the printer is dedicated to Acquisition and cannot be used by
any other device, such as a P&R station.
Important If the PostScript printer does not have network capabilities, you must use this
configuration.
ACQUISITION
PRINTER
Parallel Parallel
Port Port
Figure 5-8: Local Printer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.4.2 Using a Network Printer
Important Acquisition currently will access only one printer.
Printers with network capabilities can be accessed by Acquisition through an

existing or dedicated network. This topology provides maximum flexibility
and access to the printer. Both Acquisition and P&R station(s), as well as
other networked devices, can share the same printer.
Several network configurations are possible, including the following two:
• If Acquisition is stand-alone, used for acquisition only and not

networked to a P&R or any other device, a simple network can be
implemented, using a minimum amount of network hardware
(Configuration A, Figure 5-9).
• In a more typical network configuration, the printer is shared by
Acquisition, one or more P&R stations and other networked devices.
In this case, the networking capability of the printer must be
compatible with the existing or proposed network infrastructure. For
example, if the network is a 10BaseT (twisted pair), the printer needs
to be 10BaseT compatible. If the network is Thinnet (coax), the
printer needs to be Thinnet compatible. See Configuration B in
Figure 5-9.
CONFIGURATION A - PRIVATE PRINTER CONFIGURATION B - SHARED PRINTER
10BaseT HUB
Printer Printer
Acquisition HP Deskjet 1600CM Acquisition HP Deskjet 1600CM P&R
Figure 5-9: Networked Printers

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.4.3 Using a Remote Printer
Important Acquisition will currently output to only one printer.
The remote printer topology uses a print queue to store print jobs before they
are sent to the printer. Many operating systems, including Lynx OS, can
process print commands faster than they can be transferred to a printer. In
addition, operators often want to print multiple images without waiting for
each one to print. By using a print queue, the print files can be stored on a
remote computer until they can be transferred, in the order requested, to the
printer. The queue is located on the hard disk of the remote computer. See
Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11.
Lynx OS uses the lpd (line printer daemon) command to start the process of
communicating with a remote printer.
A daemon is a process that runs continuously, providing an operating system

Note function.
In the topologies discussed above (Section 5.4.2) the print queue was located
on the Acquisition computer. With a remote printer, the lpd process uses a
queue on another computer. This computer could be maintained or controlled
by the institution's system administrator.
When the print queue is located on another computer, it is referred to as a

remote queue and the computer that contains it, the remote machine or remote
computer. In Figure 5-10, the remote computer accesses the printer through a
direct connection (parallel port). Figure 5-11 shows a remote computer
accessing the printer through a network connection.
ACQUISITION REMOTE
COMPUTER
PRINTER
REMOTE
PRINT QUEUE
Figure 5-10: Remote Printer: Parallel Port Connection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
REMOTE
ACQUISITION HP DESKJET 1600CM COMPUTER *
REMOTE
PRINT QUEUE *The remote computer could be an acquisition
machine located in a department with multiple
acquisition-based systems.
Figure 5-11: Remote Printer: Network Connection
If an Acquisition computer is used as the remote computer, two of that

computer's files must be updated: 1) hosts.lpd and 2) hosts. These files are
found in the /etc directory. You must add the host names of the systems that
will be using the print queue to these files. The st_config script can be used to
modify the hosts file. You manually edit the hosts.lpd using vi or a similar
editor.
In configuring Acquisition to print to a remote queue, you must know the IP

address of the remote computer and the name of the remote queue on that
machine. You may need to contact the site's system administrator to determine
this information. The IP address and host name of the remote computer must
be entered into the Acquisition host table using st_config. The host name of
the remote computer and the name of the remote queue are asked for by
st_config in setting up a remote printer. If the remote machine is another
Acquisition, "lp" can be used as the remote queue.
5.4.4 Software Configuration

When the printer is accessed through a direct connected parallel port (local
printer), no custom site-specific configuration is necessary. The Acquisition
configuration only needs to be set to use the dedicated parallel port.
For a network or remote printer, more extensive software configuration is

necessary.
Just like Acquisition or any other device on the network, the local system
administrator needs to assign the network printer a unique IP address. This
address is programmed into the printer so it will know when it is being
accessed and when to respond. Systems and computers on the network that
want to send output to the printer also need know the address.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
In the case of an existing network printer, the IP address of the printer must be
determined and then programmed into Acquisition. In the case of a new
printer, first an IP address must be assigned and then programmed into both
the printer and Acquisition.
Some printers, like the HP 1600CM, for example, do not have a front panel.
Instead they employ a technique known as "RARP" in order to learn its own
IP address. Upon power-up, the HP1600CM broadcasts a message on the
network, asking if any host computer knows its (the printer's) IP address. One
computer on the network (this can be Acquisition) must be programmed to
answer with the address of the printer. Details of the configuration of the host
system are given below.
Other printers have a front panel for programming in the IP address. Each
front panel printer will be different. Consult the printer's documentation to
determine the method for programming the IP address.
5.4.5 /etc/printcap
The printcap file specifies the details of the connection of the printer to
Acquisition. Each entry is a list of printer aliases (separated by a "|"),
followed by a list of parameters (separated by a ":"), which describe the
printer and its connections.
The following excerpt from the /etc/printcap file configures Acquisition for a
parallel port connected printer. The print queue has three aliases, and any of
these three aliases ("lp", "pcacq_default", "Parallel_Printer") can be used by
Acquisition or Lynx OS to access the printer. (Acquisition uses the
"pcacq_default" while Lynx OS print commands uses the "lp" alias as their
default). The rest of the printcap script specifies printer and print queue
parameters.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
To display a complete list of printcap parameters, type the following

command:
man printcap
#1) local
#
#lp|pcacq_default|Parallel_Printer:\
# :lp=/dev/ptr0:\
# :sd=/usr/spool/lynxpptr:\
# :sh:\
# :pw#80:pl#66:\
# :mx#0:
Where º
lp Specifies the Lynx OS device (e.g. parallel port)
sd Spool directory
sh Suppress printing of burst page header
rp Print queue name for remote printer (use with rm)
rm Host name for remote printer
pw# Page width in characters (n/a for Postscript)
mx# Maximum file size (in blocks) to print
lpq Displays the queue of print jobs
a2ps Converts text to PostScript format for printing
Once a printer is set up for printing from the Acquisition AUI, it can also be
used to print files using Lynx OS commands. This facility is useful for
printing configuration files, records, or to create a printout to FAX for
troubleshooting purposes. For example, the following command will print
the tgp.cfg.phoenix file.
a2ps tgp.cfg.phoenix | lpr -P lp
The a2ps command converts a text file to PostScript. Since Lynx OS uses the "lp"
Note queue as the default, the "-P lp" can be dropped from the command.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.4.6 Using a Secondary Capture Printer
Important Acquisition will currently output to only one printer.
In this scenario, the captured images are sent to a DICOM remote station that
was designated as Secondary Capture and can be printed to the printer that is
connected to this remote station.
The secondary capture feature was developed as part of the requirement of
CUA to enable printing of the CUA images, results and trends to a hard copy
printer so as to to comply with regulatory requirements.
The original requirement was only the CUA area of the GUI was captured,
but since the implementation enables various user interface areas the
implementation was extended to enable printing from additional user
interface areas.
The GENIE Acquisition print facility was extended to allow the Quality
Control (QC) results display and trend graph to be sent as a DICOM
secondary capture image to a remote DICOM station such as eNTEGRA/
Xeleris/Vision/GenieP&R/Xpert or PACS system.
The DICOM remote station is used to print the captured image to an attached
printer or to archive it.
If a Secondary Capture printer was configured (see Section 3.4.4.4), every

print action in the Acquisition station will create a screen capture that will be
sent automatically to the DICOM remote station that was designated as
Secondary Capture destination and will be saved in a study with the following
fields:
• Patient Name = “!Screen Capture”

• Patient ID = [The name of the acquisition station]
• Study Name = “!SCREEN CAPTURE”
All the captured images will be saved in the same study
REMOTE
DICOM
STATION
Figure 5-12: Secondary Capture Printer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Theory of Operation Gantry/Table
5.5 Gantry/Table
This section discusses the theory of operation and functionality of the gantry
/detectors and table assemblies through block diagrams and interconnects.
5.5.1 Electronics Hardware

The electronics of the gantry/detectors and table are shown in Figure 5-13
through Figure 5-15.
J16: HANDSET BUS 4

G16: HANDSET BUS 7
J15: HANDSET BUS 3
CAN BUS CJ 1 G17: HANDSET BUS 8
J14: HANDSET BUS 2 P6
CNTRL CJ 2 P4 MEC BOARD
J6: TABLE P5
Sw3: RESET
J13: HANDSET BUS 1 G12: ROLL POWER
DJ 6
J11: HANDSET
DRIVE DJ 1
DCL 1091 DJ 4
J1: MAINS IN CONTROLLER SB 7: Y # 1 ENCODER G10: ROLL ENCODE
LAMP1: MAINS DJ 5 SB214 SB 5: T # 1 ENCODER G11: RADIAL ENCODE

Sw1: MAINS SWITCH SB 6: Z # 1 ENCODER
F1: MAINS FILTER TRANSFORMER SB 8: Y # 1 ENCODER SB 3: Y AXIS
CB1: 20A VSE MAINS VOLTAGE SELECT SB 9: T # 2 ENCODER SB 2: Z AXIS
CB2: 10A SB 10: Z # 2 ENCODER SB 1: T AXIS
J10: ACQ COMP SB 11: COMM SB 14: OUTPUTS
J5: TABLE SB 12: DRIVERS BOX SB 17: INPUTS G7: ROLL LIMIT
LED1: COLLISION RUN SB 18: AC POWER SB 19: SAFETY IN G6: DETECTOR 2
LED2: COLLISION STOP
G3: DETECTOR 1
REAR G15: HANDSET BUS 6
CONNECTOR FAN POWER BE 2
PSU BOARD BE 16: E-STOP
PANEL G4: HANDSET/E-STOP 2
JUNCTION FPJ BE 20
BE 18: COLLISION SWITCHES
LED3: E-STOP RUN G1: HANDSET/E-STOP 1
BE 4 BE 23: LOW VOLT SUPPLIES
LED4: E-STOP STOP
G14: HANDSET BUS 6
BF 21: BACKPLANE PWR BE 24: MUX BOARD
J2: 120VAC OUT

CB3: 5A BF 2: LIMIT SWITCHES BF 8: PSU BOARD GANTRY
CONNECTOR
F2: OUTPUT FILTER BF 7: SB214 SAFETY IN PANEL
J4: 120VAC PWR SAVE 2 MOTOR BJ 7
MUX BOARD BF 6: SB214 IN/OUT
J3: 120VAC PWR SAVE 1 AMPLIFIER BJ 3
BF 3: RADIUS G13: RADIAL POWER
LAMP2: POWER SAVE BACKPLANE BJ 4
BF 5: Z/T AMPLIFIER
BF 1: LOW VOLT SUPPLIES G9: LOW VOLT SUPPLIES
SW2: POWER SAVE BJ 1 BJ 5
J17: PWRSAVE RLY BF 4: TABLE G8: FAN+BRAKE
J7: TABLE
J8: DET.1 TAXI G2: TAXI 1
Figure 5-13: Gantry Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
IPS
Theory of Operation
CHASSIS G1 G4 CHASSIS G2 G3 G5 G6 G9 G11 G13 CHASSIS G8 G10 G12 G7
DOCKING
CBL000904
SWITCH
PROT. GND
2189889
BD1
CBL000892_01
ROLL
FAN
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual

CBL00520_03
FAN LIMIT
BOARD
ENCODER
BOARD
E-STOP 1 E-STOP 1 BD2
BRAKE
HANDSET 1 HANDSET 1
5-31
ROLL SW2
MOTOR BOARD
ASM000872
POWER/BRAKE POWER/BRAKE
OB5 IB5 RADIAL
RADIAL
MOTOR 1 ENCODER ENCODER MOTOR 2
OB4 IB4
Figure 5-14: IPS Block Diagram

OUTER INNER
BRACKET BRACKET
(2184441) (2184441)
CBL00891 OB2 LOCK MOTOR IB2 CBL00890
OB1 ASSEMBLY IB1
DETECTOR DETECTOR
1 2
GANTRY
Gantry/Table
2019
Rev. 2
5.5.2 Table Block Level
Figure 5-15: Table Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.3 Overview of Motion Control
The system has six independent motions, as follows:
1. Gantry roll
2. Detector Radius 1
3. Detector Radius 2
4. Table longitudinal
5. Table lateral
6. Table vertical
All motions are initiated with the either Hand Held Controller (HHC) or the
Acquisition computer.
5.5.3.1 Hand-Held Controller
The Hand-Held Controller (HHC) is a detachable and can be plugged into any
one of the four jacks on the gantry/table table or the one jack on the Integrated
Power Supply (IPS). Only one motion is allowed at a time. The motion occurs
as long as the key is pressed and stops when the key is released.
Multiple HHCs can be installed on the system since they are connected in
parallel to the controller. The key pressed first is recognized by the controller
until that key is released.
5.5.3.2 Emergency Stop Switches
There are four Emergency Stop (E-Stop) switches on the system: two on the
gantry, and two on the table. If an E-Stop switch is pushed , the safety circuit
is opened, power to the servo motors is disabled, and brakes on the vertical
and pitch axes are engaged.
The E-Stop switch is released by twisting or pulling its red button, depending
upon the type.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.3.3 Collision Pads
Pressure-sensitive pads cover the entire front surface of each collimator.

These pressure-sensitive pads guard against inadvertent collision between
obstacles (the patient or patient table) and the detector, during normal imaging
procedures.
Contact with an obstacle causes a buzzer to sound, and the collision activator
latches in the active state. Power to all motors is immediately interrupted, and
the brakes on the motors engage, halting all motion.
When the collision activator is active it will remain in this state - even after the
Note obstacle has been removed - until the system has been returned to the idle state,
as described below.
Before any motorized motion can proceed, the obstacle must be removed
from the path of the detector.
Pressing the cancel button on the HHC will silence the buzzer, however the
system will only return to idle state when the obstacle has successfuly been
removed from the path of the collision sensor.
5.5.3.4 Collision Override Switches
There are two override switches on the rear of each detector (the side of the
detector closest to the gantry). In the event of a collision, power to the servo
motors is interrupted. Pressing and holding the override switch enables the
operator to use the Hand-Held Controller to move the gantry and table.
5.5.3.5 Motion Controller and the Acquisition Computer
The system has a smart motion controller. It communicates with the

Acquisition Computer via an RS-232 serial link. The Hand-Held Controller
(HHC) is connected directly to the controller.
When the Acquisition computer is not connected to the system, turned OFF,
or not operating, the controller becomes the "master". The controller directly
executes the motion requested by the HHC.
When the Acquisition computer is connected to the system, all motions are
under computer control. Acquisition computer is the "master" and the
controller the "slave." The controller receives the motion request from the
HHC and communicates the request to the computer. The computer
acknowledges the request and authorizes the motion. The controller then
executes the motion. If a computer acknowledgment is not received, the
motion request is ignored.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.3.6 Motion Controller
The system has a 4-axis smart motion controller. The axes are referred to as
X, Y, Z, and T drives. Each drive has a primary encoder port. In addition, the
Z and T drives have secondary encoder ports. The primary and secondary
encoders are multiplexed. This allows the 4-axis controller to drive 6 servo
motors. The drive allocations are as follows:
Drive Primary Secondary
X Longitudinal -
Y Roll -
Z Radius 2 Lateral
T Radius 1 Vertical
Either the primary or secondary motor on a drive can be operated at any one
time. Motors on different drives can be operated simultaneously at any time
under computer control.
The controller implements the following transfer function:
D(Z) = (GA*2GF)*{(Z-ZE/4096)/(Z+PO/4096)}*{(Z-Z1/4096)/(Z-1)}
Z1=4095*(ZE/4096)(KZ/100)
5.5.4 Drive Amplifiers and Motherboard

There are 3 drive amplifiers in the system. These amplifiers are mounted on a
motherboard inside the Integrated Power Supply (IPS). The motherboard
interfaces with the controller's Multiplexer board to multiplex the Z and T
servo motors, and directly with the X servo motor. The roll axis (Y) uses a
different drive amplifier.
The drive amplifiers are rated for maximum 12A instantaneous current. All
the amplifier cards are identical and can be interchanged. The cards slide into
a card cage mounted on top of the motherboard. The torque output of the
servo motors is limited by the controller TL (torque limit low) and TO (torque
limit) parameters, as follows:
• TL limits the motor current output when the motor is not moving.
• TO limits the maxim torque output.
The motor stalls if the motor torque requirement exceeds TO, and the
controller disables the motor drive. The TL and TO parameters are set by the
gantry interface program.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.5 Integrated Power Supply
5.5.5.1 Input Voltage
The power supply has a shielded isolation transformer. The primary has two
windings with taps for 100V and 120V. The two windings are connected in
series for 200V, 220V, and 240V utility inputs. The windings are connected in
parallel for 100V, and 120V utility inputs.
Site voltage is selected by orienting the fuse block in the power entry module
for 120V or 240V and adjusting connections at terminal block TB1 as per
instructions on top of the transformer.
5.5.5.2 Output Voltage
The isolation transformer has 5 secondary windings, mutually isolated. The

secondary windings are as follows:
Voltage Device
120 V AC Acquisition computer monitor
230 V AC Roll drive amp
22 V AC Detector #1 and #2
22 V AC Add-on power
36 V AC Drive amplifiers

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.6 Circuit Breakers and Fuses
The input and 120 V AC outputs of the transformer windings are protected
with fuses and circuit breakers, as shown below:
Overcurrent
Input/Output Circuit Description
Protection
Inputs 110 - 120 V AC 20A, 250 V Circuit breaker CB1
200 - 240 V AC 10A, 250 V Circuit breaker CB2
Outputs 120 V AC, computer monitor 5A, 250V Circuit breaker CB2
25 V DC, Detector #1 6A Multifuse F1 on IPS Power Supply Board
25 V DC, Detector #2 6A Multifuse F2 on IPS Power Supply Board
25 V DC , add-on power 6A Multifuse F4 on IPS Power Supply Board
22 V DC, board power 6A Multifuse F3 on IPS Power Supply Board
65 V DC unregulated, servo drive 6A, 250 V Fuse F5 slow-blow on IPS Power Supply
Board
25 V DC, AC Scanner 1 1.6A Multifuse F9 on IPS Power Supply Board
25 V DC, proximity sensor 2 1.6A Multifuse F10 on IPS Power Supply

Board
5.5.7 Surge Suppression

There are two MOVs (metal oxide varistor) connected across the
transformer's line terminals. The MOVs are rated for a maximum continuous
operating voltage of 150 V AC. The MOVs are connected in parallel for
100 V AC and 120 V AC inputs, and connected in series for 200 V AC,
220 V AC, and 240 V AC inputs. Each MOV is rated for 300 joules of energy.
MOVs fail in short circuit mode. When this happens, the circuit breaker opens
and the MOV has to be replaced.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.8 Power Supply Board

This section describes the function of the Power Supply Board in the
Integrated Power Supply (IPS).
The Power Supply Board delivers low voltage DC power to the following:
• 25V, 96 watts to each of the two detectors,

• 22V, 81 watts to the motor brakes and MUX Board,
• 25V, 24 watts to each of the four add-on modules: two proximity
sensors and two attenuation correction scanners, and
• 65V, 264 watts to the motor amplifiers.
For reasons of simplicity, the Power Supply Board also holds the relay for the
Power Saver function and the relays for two safety functions: Emergency
Stop and Collision. Each power supply consists of a power factor correcting
input circuit, followed by a step-down regulator.
Refer to the following sections to view the Power Supply Board schematics.
• Detector #1 Power Supply: Section 7.4.9.

• Detector #2 Power Supply: Section 7.4.9.
• Board Power Supply: Section 7.4.10.
• Add-on Modules Power Supply: Section 7.4.10.
• Servo Amplifier Power Supply: Section 7.4.11.
• Relays and Connectors: Section 7.4.12.
5.5.8.1 Power Factor Correction
Refer to Section 7.4.9 to see the power schematics for Detector #1 and #2.
In order to comply with harmonics standard EN61000-3-2, "Harmonic

Currents Injected into the Public Supply System", and EN61000-3-3,
"Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker Impressed on the Public Low-Voltage
System", the IPS low voltage supply includes power factor correction. This
correction was needed since the motor controller and roll drive include large
capacitors at the input. A traditionally-designed low voltages IPS power
supply would generate and conduct harmonic currents into the mains, causing
EMC problems.
The circuit is built around a power-factor correction IC U1. Input voltage is

22 V AC nominal with a 6A Multifuse (a kind of a PTC-resistor) brought to a
bridge rectifier (four double diodes: D1, D2, D3, D4).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Instead of an electrolytic charging capacitor of several thousand µF, two small

MKT capacitors of one µF each (C5,C87) charge the capacitor at high
frequencies. The rectified AC is brought to a 10µH (L1) choke which acts as
energy storing element. L1 is charged when FET transistor T1 is ON, and L1
is discharged via double-diode D7 into output capacitors C7 and C8 (1000µF
each). The charging and decharging of L1 is controlled by U1 and sensed as a
voltage across R2 (0.02Ω).
The output is filtered by L2 (ferrite beads) and drives the step-down regulator.
U1 is powered from the rectified AC. Since Vccmax for UC3852 is 30V, a
simple regulator consisting of T11, D27, D5, C6, R63 and R129 is
implemented. The circuit is protected by a 0.2A Multifuse MF2 and gives a
Vcc of approximately 22V, well above the UC3852 turn-on voltage of 17.5V.
U3852 operates in non-fixed frequency mode. Instead it operates with

maximum T1-ON-time, tmax which is set by C3 and R5. During ON-time,
current rises in L1, obeying the formula i(t) = V*t/L, where V is the rectified
input voltage to L1. V is considered fixed during the few µsec it takes to
charge L1.
L1 discharges during T1-OFF-time into the output capacitors C7, C8 and

U3852 monitors the discharge at its ISNS input. When discharge is complete,
current close to zero, a new cycle is initiated. In this way input current is
proportional to input voltage at any instant, when seen from a mains
frequency perspective, thereby creating a power factor close to one.
ISNS input is a dual function input. The other function is a current limit
function that will terminate T1-ON-time if Ipeakmax is reached. In this way,
T1 is protected during an error situation (input overvoltage etc.). The output
voltage of a boost converter must be higher than the input voltage.
The maximum input voltage at 10% overvoltage is
22V*1.1*1.414 ≅ 34V.
Therefore, the output voltage is set to 40V.
The efficiency of this circuit is approximately 90%.
5.5.8.2 Step-Down Regulator
The 40V output of the power factor correction input circuit supplies power to
the step-down switching regulator U2. This is a monolithic 5A PWM
regulator, switching at constant frequency. It features slow start and current
limit and has also high temperature protection and an input voltage rating of
50V. It is configured in a standard topology with L3 (180µH) as energy
storing element and double diode D8 as a free-wheeling diode. The output can
be adjusted between 20V and 30V and is filtered through L4 and L5 (ferrite
beads). An LED (D54) on the output visually signals that voltage is ON.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The efficiency of the step-down regulator is approximately 85%, resulting in

a total efficiency of approximately 76%.
The Detector Power Supplies and the Add-on Power Supply are adjusted to
25V. The Board Power Supply is adjusted to 22V to save power and to lower
the temperature of the motor brakes.
5.5.8.3 Servo Amplifier Power Supply Schematic
Section 7.3.11 shows the Servo Amplifier Power Supply and a small PSU for
the ventilating fans. The Servo Amplifier Power Supply circuit is a power
factor correcting circuit like the one described above. However, it handles
more than twice the power and therefore contains the switching elements of
two paralleled FET transistors (T5, T10). Input voltage is 36 V AC and output
voltage is adjusted to 65 V DC on R143- This output is also filtered and has
an LED (D66) for diagnostic purposes.
The FAN_PWR supply is a small step-down converter, taking its input from the
Board Power Supply. It delivers power to two 12V fans in the EIPS. In normal
operation mode, the output voltage is 11V and in power-save mode, 9V.
5.5.8.4 Add-On Modules Power Supply Schematic
All input and output connectors are shown in Section 7.3.12 as well as relays
for power saver, emergency stop and collision.
Connector BE4 is interface to the power saver switch. Closing the switch
between pin 1 and pin 3 gives power to the relays (RELAY_PWR), the
normal mode. In this mode everything is powered if the emergency chain in
BE16 is unbroken and if the collision chain in BE18 is unbroken.
An emergency stop situation or a collision situation removes power to motors

(V220AC_OUT and V36AC_SUPP), to the attenuation correction scanners
(ACSCAN_PWR) and to the MUX Board (BOARD_PWR to BE24) where
motor brake (no-power brakes) control is situated.
The power saver relay, when deactivated, removes power from the motor
controller (V120AC_OUT) and the proximity detectors (V22AC_SUPP).
This leaves power to the two detectors only and the ventilating fans at low
speed.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.9 MUX Board

This section describes the function of the Multiplexer (MUX) Board in the
Integrated Power Supply (IPS).
The MUX Board is powered from the Power Supply Board and has the
following functions: VG-lock control, brake control, multiplexing of input
signals to the motor controller and multiplexing of the brake power and motor
power.
5.5.9.1 Lock Control Schematic
Section 7.4.14 shows the VG-Lock Control. The VG-lock itself is a

heavy-duty metal bolt that interlocks the two detector rings of the main ball
bearing so the detectors are in either angled (Variable Geometry-VG) position
or in opposing (Dual Head-DH) position. The bolt is driven by a small DC
motor with high gearing to an eccentric drive. When the motor is powered,
the bolt will alternately be driven into the locked and unlocked positions.
U10 (LM338) is programmed by R31 and R32 to power the 12V lock's motor.
Power FET T4 (BUK455-100) must be set ON via opto-coupler U5 (LM_ENA)
before the lock motor can get power when relay K11 is energized by the Drive
Control (U7). K11 also ensures that the lock-motor stops quickly by
short-circuiting the motor when the relay is de-energized.
The VG-lock assembly is equipped with five switches of which two are used
to signal the locked and unlocked positions. In the locked position, one switch
is ON (input signal is low) and the other is OFF (input signal is high). In
unlocked position, it is the opposite. In any position in between, both switches
are ON. The two signals drive the transistors Q1 and Q2, so optocoupler U9 is
OFF when the VG-lock is in the locked or unlocked position.
Drive Control U7 and Time-out Control U6 are both one-shots (ICM7555).

U7 is set for approximately 0.5 seconds and U6 is set for approximately
2.7 seconds. When a change in the VG-lock status is desired (locked to
unlocked or vice versa), power FET T4 is set ON by issuing LM_ENA. Then
both one-shots are triggered via optocoupler U8 by issuing LM_TRIG. Relay
K11 is energized whenever U7 is triggered and the lock motor starts running.
This forces both switch signals go low and this in turn sets the optocoupler U9
ON, which keeps U7 triggered until a change in the switch status happens.
A normal lock/unlock shift takes approximately 1 second. Since U7 times out
after 0.5 seconds, the switch status change resets U7 and thereby immediately
stops motion. Then the signal LM_ENA is removed to prevent spurious
triggering from electrical noise.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Since U10 is not equipped with a heat sink and thus not able to continuously
supply power to the lock motor, the time-out control U6 has been added. If for
some reason the VG-lock change session has not been terminated within
2.7 seconds after triggering, U6 times out and resets U7.
Optocoupler U1 has nothing to do with the VG-lock circuit. It signals an

Emergency Stop situation to the motor controller.
5.5.9.2 Signal Multiplexer Schematic
The signal multiplexer schematic is shown in Section 7.4.15. A multiplexer is

used because the motor controller must read more signals than it has inputs.
Many of the signals are 24 V DC logic signals, so the multiplexer is
implemented by means of relays which are driven directly by the motor
controller's outputs. Note that there are no free-wheeling diodes on the relays;
they are inside the motor controller.
5.5.9.3 Motor/Brake Multiplexer
This system, shown in Section 7.4.16, features motion in six axes:

1) longitudinal; 2) vertical; 3) lateral motion of the table top; 4) radial motion
of Detector #1; 5) radial motion of Detector #2; and 6) rotational motion of
the two detectors together. Since the motor controller supports six encoder
feed-backs but controls only four motors, the motors and their brakes and
limit switch signals are multiplexed.
The radius1 motor and brake are multiplexed with vertical motor and brake
by means of relay K7. The fourth contact of K7 drives K9 that multiplexes the
limit switch signals of the two axes. Power FET T1 controls brake power for
the multiplexed axes. The radius2 motor and brake are multiplexed with the
lateral motor and brake by means of relay K8. For the time being, there is no
brake on the lateral axis. The fourth contact of K8 drives K10 that multiplexes
the limit switch signals of the two axes. Power FET T2 controls brake power
for the multiplexed axes. Power FET T3 controls brake power for rotational
motion.
There is no brake on the longitudinal axis.
5.5.9.4 Connectors
Section 7.4.17 shows all connectors carrying power and signals in and out of
the board.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.10 Safety Circuits
EMERGENCY
STOP. K2
ROLL DRIVE
TO ROLL DRIVE
POWER SUPPLY
SERVO AMPLIFIER TO SERVO

POWER SUPPLY AMPLIFIER
ADD-ON TO ATTENUATION
POWER SUPPLY CORR. SCANNER
BOARD TO MUX BOARD

POWER SUPPLY AND BRAKES
COLLISION OVERRIDE SWITCHES
DETECTORS SERVICE COLLIMATOR
CART
RELAY SHOWN
UNPOWERED
EMERGENCY STOP SWITCHES:

RELAY GANTRY TABLE
COLLISION K15
POWER
RELAY SHOWN
UNPOWERED
COLLISION SWITCHES:
DETECTOR #1 DETECTOR #2
MEC BOARD
(ELECTRONIC SWITCH)
ULTIMATE
LIM. ROLL
Figure 5-16: Safety Circuit

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The safety circuit disables power to all servo motors when an emergency stop
button or a collision pad is pushed. At an emergency stop, the relay K2 in the
power supply opens. This disconnects the power to the motors (V220AC_out
and V36AC_supp), to attenuation correction (ACSCAN_PWR), and to the
MUX board (BOARD _PWR to BE24) where the motor brake
(no-power-brake) is located. The relay switches are all NC switches, which
means that even if a relay itself fails, motion stops.
Emergency stop buttons are normally-closed switches and are located on each
side of the gantry and table. Collision pads are located at the detectors and on
the transmission scanner. They are converted into an equivalent
normally-closed switch on the power supply board. These normally-closed
switches are connected in series with the K2 relay coil. This circuit is
energized from RELAY_PWR output terminal.
Fail safe brakes are used for the roll and radial drives. The brakes engage
when the +24 V DC unregulated voltage is removed from its terminals.
When the safety circuit opens, the controller emergency stop input is set high
(+24V) which instantaneously disables all the motor drives. The controller
monitors the states of its inputs to discriminate between an emergency stop or
a collision condition, as follows:
Inputs
System Status ES IN9 IN14
Normal Operation 0V +24V +24V
E-Stop Button +24V +24V 0V
Collision +24V 0V +24V
Collision + E-Stop +24V 0V +24V
Controller 24V DC fuse open +24V +24V 0V
The safety circuit shuts down the system by opening the collision or E-STOP
circuits so that power to the motor drives and clutch/brake are interrupted. A
contact closure, COLLISION OVERRIDE, restores the system to its normal
state without the need to remove AC input power from the system. The other
power supplies remain operating when the safety circuit is enabled.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.11 Motion Control

Motion control is built around the 4-axis motor controller, which consists of
the following main components:
• One 4-axis motor controller.

• One 4-slot motor amplifier backplane.
• Three brush motor amplifiers.
• One 3-phase motor drive.
• Three brush motors located in the table.
• One induction motor located in the gantry.
• Two brush motors located in the gantry.
• Backplane power supply, safety circuit (emergency-stop and
collision), motor/brake/end-stop multiplexer.
The backplane power supply delivers 65 V DC to the three brush motor

amplifiers mounted in the amplifier backplane. The 3-phase motor drive is
powered from a 230 V AC secondary winding on the mains transformer.
All motors have an encoder attached. The encoder has two phases in
quadrature with 1000 pulses/rev. and one home pulse per rev. All outputs are
differential. Four motors are fitted with an electric brake; the table
longitudinal and lateral motors do not have brakes. When the motors are
unpowered, the brakes are activated.
The longitudinal axis of the table has a dedicated axis of motion. This is the
X-axis of the motor controller. Also gantry roll has a dedicated axis of
motion, the Y-axis of the motor controller.
The motor controller has inputs for six encoders but only four outputs. Since
six axes of motion are needed (not simultaneously) the two remaining axes
(Z and T) are multiplexed, that is, motor power, brake power, and limit signals
(end-stop signals) are multiplexed.
The multiplexers are implemented by means of relays, a power relay for the
motor/brake and a signal relay for the limit signals. There is a set of relays for
each axis. The two multiplexers are driven by output 1 and 2 of the motor
controller. The Z-axis supports gantry radius 2 and table lateral motions. The
T-axis supports gantry radius 1 and table vertical motions.
At power-up (multiplexers unpowered), the two radii are supported.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The motor controller communicates with the motor amplifiers by means of

the following signals:
• ENABLE signal: enables power to the motor.

• V0 signal: an analog control voltage governing the motor
current (+/- 10V max).
• FAULT signal: a feed-back signal issued by the motor
amplifier at a fault condition (overcurrent,
overtemp, etc.).
Since all motor amplifiers are of switch-mode type, all cables carrying motor
current are shielded to avoid EMC problems. All encoder cables are shielded
to assure correct position feed-back.
All table motions and both gantry radius motions have hard mechanical
end-stops. Besides this, they have electromechanical limit-switches which
prevent hitting the end-stops hard.
WARNING
The mechanical end stop activates the limit switch of the Detector and
mechanically stops the Detector if the limit switch fails. Removal of the
mechanical end stop is prohibited under all circumstances! It is not
required for any service procedure or maintenance activity.
Gantry roll motion has no mechanical end-stop. Since the rotating detectors
are connected to the gantry by means of cables, rotational motion must be
limited prevent damage to the cables. The electronic circuit that limits roll
motion receives input from a number of optical switches activated by the
output shaft of the roll gearbox and the intermediate gear wheel. The right
combination of switches activates a latching relay which gives a limit signal
to the motor controller. The relay is reset when detectors are rotated
15 degrees in the opposite direction. The switch position must be
mechanically adjusted to make this circuit function as intended.
The Hand-Held Controller (HHC) features a membrane keypad and is

connected to the controller via a RJ45 jack. Circuits inside the HHC encode
each key press and transmits it to the appropriate input channels in the
controller RTNF (0V). The HHC cable has 8 lines connected to the following
controller input channels:
Controller
Line Description
Input
1 Interrupts the controller to handle a request from the HHC IN1

2 Used in conjunction with a motion key to select fast speed IN2
3 Codes the key requests as shown in Table 5-7. IN13

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Controller
Line Description
Input

7 Controller RTNF
8 - 5V
Table 5-7: Input Codes
IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13
Table Lateral, Right z
Radial Ina z
Table Down z z
Roll, CCW z
Table Longitudinal, Out z z
Table Lateral, Left z z
Acquisition Start z z z
Radial, Outa
z
Table Longitudinal, In z z
Cancel z z z z
Roll, CW z
Set z z z
Table Up z z z
Clear Persistence z z z z
Radius Select 1a
Radius Select 2a
a. Pressing the radial key on the Hand-Held Controller causes a

quick code to be sent to the inputs for differentiating between
single or dual detector movement.
The system includes five RJ45 jacks: one at IPS, two at the gantry, and two at
the table. These jacks are connected in parallel to the controller. If a system
has multiple HHCs installed, one and only one motion command is executed
at a time. The controller ignores key presses while a motion is in progress.
New motion requests must be preceded with a release of all keys.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.5.12 Service Adjustments

5.5.12.1 Controller Parameters
The controller servo parameters are programmable and can only be changed
in the gantry interface program.
When the controller is the "master", the controller's parameters can be

changed with a laptop computer connected to the RS232 port at the IPS.
However, these parameters are overwritten when the Acquisition computer
takes over the system. The gantry interface program checks the software
version and controller program checksum. If these are found incorrect, the
program code resident in the Acquisition computer is downloaded into the
controller.
5.5.12.2 Limit Switches - ON
Table 5-8 shows the type of stop that occurs when a limit switch is activated.
Table 5-8: Limit Switches
Limit Hard Soft

Axis
Switch Stop Limits
Longitudinal Yes Yes No
Lateral Yes Yes No
Vertical Yes Yes No
Roll Yes No Yes
Radial 1 Yes Yes No
Radial 2 Yes Yes No
The limit switch positions can be adjusted so that a hardstop is not

encountered during overtravel at fast speed. When a hardstop is encountered,
the servo motor stalls and the controller disables the drive.
The roll limit-switch is an optical switch. The switch is located opposite the
roll limit board on the roll drive.
The radial limit-switch is based on three micro switches placed on a circuit

board and activated by two actuators. One actuator defines the VG-mode
radius and releases SW1 when the end of the actuator hits the other stop plate.
Because the VG radius is a few centimeters less than maximum radius, an
oblong slot in the board ensures that this actuator moves freely when the
radius is between the VG mode and maximum radius. When the radius is
between the VG mode and minimum radius, the actuator depresses SW1 by
the force of a spring pulling a wire over a pulley.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The other actuator is kept in its idle position by a spring rod. When the end of
this actuator hits either stop plate, it depresses SW2 or SW3.
The limit-switch circuit board also carries a total of six connectors. Besides
supporting the limit-switches, the board serves as an interconnecting panel for
various circuits in the detector:
BH1: Detector cable IN
BH2: 24v and collision signal to the detector
BH3: Proximity detecting option
BH4 & BH6: Illuminated override switches
BH5: Service override switch

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Theory of Operation Detectors
5.6 Detectors
The detectors introduce a new approach to signal handling in gamma camera
detectors. When dealing with isotopes, which are commonly used clinically,
the level of light from a scintillation crystal is so low that the laws of statistics
are the dominating factor in determining the accuracy of the acquired data. It
is therefore important that as many photons as possible be collected, both for
energy and position determination. The design features the following:
• The rectangular field-of-view of the detectors uses square PM-tubes

(PMTs) mounted in rows and columns.
• PMTs located far from a scintillation generate poor position signals
and are excluded by applying thresholds to the signals. However,
PMTs in a particular row or column give correlated signals adds to the
accuracy of the position signal. The row and column principle makes
it possible to separately apply thresholds to position signals for two
perpendicular directions. This leads to better linearity performance
and improves the statistics of the acquired data.
• The rectangular detector has outside dimensions of 690 x 590 mm and
a FOV of 520 x 370 mm. Both the I/N board and the detector's power
supply are located inside the detector, one on each side of the detector
housing.
• The position and energy signals from the matrix board are passed to
the I/N board through a 16-way ribbon cable. The I/N board converts
the analog signals to digital data, and the data is passed on to the
framing board in the acquisition computer via the TAXI link cable.
• The communication between the detector and the Acquisition
computer is achieved by a high speed TAXI link. The data
communication is bi-directional and provides simultaneous
transmission and receiving of data via a double twisted-pair cable.
• The complete detector is powered from a 24 V DC power supply
located in the IPS (Integrated Power Supply) on the gantry base. The
detector's power supply converts the 24 V DC into low voltage for
both the detector and the I/N board and provides high voltage for the
PMTs.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Dyn

amp amp amp amp amp amp mod. EDI BOARD
DAC LOAD
Pre- Dyn
amp mod. DAC CLOCK
PC
LED SAMPLE
Pre- Dyn INTERFACE
amp mod. LED DRIVE
Pre- Dyn
amp mod.
From PMT WORKPOINT
Pre-amps
Pre- Dyn SERIAL DATA OUT
amp mod.
SERIAL DATA IN
Pre- Dyn
amp mod.
X+, X-
Y+, Y- AND E
Dyn Dyn Dyn Dyn Dyn Dyn
mod. mod. mod. mod. mod. mod.
Dyn
driver
HIGH VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE PSU

DIAG
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY + 24V
UNCORRECTED POSITION SIGNAL SUMMED ENERGY SIGNAL
CORRECTED POSITION SIGNAL DYNCOR SIGNAL
Figure 5-17: Detector Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.1 PM-Tube Array

The imaging detectors use 3" square Photomultiplier (PM) tubes. The tubes
are aligned in a rectangular grid of rows and columns on the crystal. Refer to
Figure 5-18. The signal output from the PMT pre-amps are summed from the
physical tube position: 6 by 8 (48) for the rectangular detector. These summed
signals are subsequently processed in Dyncor and threshold circuits and
finally fed into a resistor matrix for 2-dimensional positional weighting. This
means that not only events coming from a single tube but contribution from
all other tubes in the row/column are corrected.
This design offers a number of advantages:
• Improved position information when applying row/column

thresholding
• Improved signal to noise ratio
• Reduced MTBF for the detector due to reduced number of PMTs
• Reduced cost due to reduced number of PMTs and Dyncor circuits
Dyncor
driver
module
Y bus
X/Y position
signal bus
Dyncor Dyncor Dyncor
module module module
Dyncor
module
X bus
Position signals flow

Dyncor signal flow
Nal CRYSTAL
Figure 5-18: Functional Block Diagram Rows and Column Detector

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.2 Autotune
To increase the long term stability of the detectors, all PMTs are equipped
with an autotune facility. A built-in reference LED is turned on every
10 milliseconds by the LED drive signal. The signal is generated by a
common oscillator on the I/N board, with an ON time of approximately
3 microseconds. The light-pulse response height is sampled and compared
with the output from the 12 bit DAC for gain control. Any gain drift in the
PMTs is seen in the LED pulse response and is continuously corrected.
5.6.3 Detector Mechanics

Refer to Figure 5-19 as you read the following description of the detector.
The detector contains the following assemblies:
Assembly No. of Parts

PM tubes 48
Pre-amplifiers 48
Dyncor driver module 1
Dyncor module 14
Matrix board 1
Detector power supply 1
I/N board 1
The rectangular detector comprises a steel-reinforced lead casing containing a

NaI scintillation crystal at the base, with two flanges for installation on the
gantry. Four locking pins are mounted on the front of the casing to lock the
collimator onto the detector by means of a fast-locking mechanism integral to
the collimator cart.
An optical couplant is used to mount the forty-eight square PM-tubes onto the
crystal. The PM-tubes are aligned in rows and columns and are supported at
the top by a 48 hole support plate. The holes provide access for electrical
connections to the PM-tubes and hold the PM-tubes in the right position on
the crystal. A spring element on top of each PM-tube firmly presses the
PM-tubes against the crystal, regardless of the detector's position.
Two lead shields are mounted on top of the casing to form a light-tight
shielded box with the PM-tubes inside. The detector's power supply and the
I/N board are located on the outside of the casing, one on each side.
The collision sensors are located on the front of the collimator. The sensors
are electrically connected to the gantry and table's motor controller by means
of a connector board located at the corner of the detector's casing.
Aluminum housing forms the outside of the detector. This covers the casing
and the outside mounted boards.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector Cover
Power Supply I/N Board
Top Lead-Shielding
Assembly
Matrix Board
PM Tube
NaI Crystals
Detector Flange Detector Flange
Lead Casing
Collimator Locking Pin Collimator Locking Pin
Collimator
Collision Switch on Collimator Collision Switch on Collimator
Figure 5-19: Detector Assembly Components

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.4 Detector Electronics

Figure 5-20 shows the electronic components in the detector.
Power Supply I/N Board
Part No. of Parts

PM-tubes 48
Pre-amplifiers 48
Preamplifier Dyncor driver module 1
Dyncor module 14
Matrix board 1
Dyncor Driver
Detector power supply 1
I/N board 1
Dyncor Module
Matrix Board
PM Tube
NaI Crystals
Detector Flange Detector Flange
Lead Casing
Figure 5-20: Electronic Detector Parts
5.6.5 Photomultiplier Tubes

The PM tubes used in the imaging detectors are 8 dynode 76 mm square
PM tubes. The tubes operate with a negative HV on the photocathode.
HV and GND are taken from the matrix board via spring contacts, and the
anode signal and gain control signals are interfaced from the pre-amplifier via
a 10-pin connector. The only gain regulating circuit that is situated on the
PM-tube bleeder board is the optocoupler and the regulator transistor for the
dynode voltage.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.6 Daisy Chain Circuits

The detector's output signals coming from the X- and Y-position matrix are
communicated to the I/N board via a 16-pin ribbon cable. All other
communication between the I/N board and the detector is controlled by four
daisy chains, constructed as follows (see also Figure 5-21):
• One chain for loading PM-tube tune values and for enabling reading
of PM-tube working points. The chain includes U3 on all PM-tube
pre-amps.
• One chain for loading offset and gain values for all Dyncor signals.
The chain includes U6, U7, U8, U9, and U10 on the Dyncor driver
module.
• One chain for reading/writing detector related parameters. The ID
EEPROM (U4) on the matrix board is included in the chain and
reserved for future use.
• One chain for setting of the HV on the detector power supply.
Pre-amp Pre-amp Pre-amp PMT Data in

3 2 1 Working
Control Bus
Point
PMT Working Point
Chain ADC
PMT Data out
Pre-amp Pre-amp
4 36/48
Dyncor Dyn. Data in

Driver Output
Module
Dyncor Control Bus Register
Driver
Chain
Dyn. Data out
EEPROM
Chain Data in
EEPROM
Control Bus Input
MATRIX BOARD Data out Register
HV Data in
HV Set NRD Bus
Chain Control Bus
Data out
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY I/N BOARD
Figure 5-21: Daisy Chains

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The sequence of events to program a multi-DAC daisy chain is as follows

(refer to Figure 5-22):
1. Serial data is presented as a number of 12-bit words on the SDIN line on

the first DAC. Each time the SCLK is enabled, the data advances one bit
in the input shift register. In this way, data is clocked through the chain.
2. When all input shift registers in the chain contain the appropriate data, the
LDAC line is enabled. This updates all analog output in the chain
simultaneously.
LDAC
SCLK
INPUT SHIFTREGISTER INPUT SHIFTREGISTER INPUT SHIFTREGISTER

SDIN SDIN SDC SDIN SDC SDIN SDC
SCLK SCLK SCLK
LDAC LDAC LDAC

DAC LATCH DAC LATCH DAC LATCH
DAC DAC DAC
AD 7243 AD 7243 AD 7243

V out V out V out
Figure 5-22: Daisy Chain Principle

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.7 Pre-Amplifier and the PM Tubes

The pre-amplifier board contains a high speed op-amplifier (U1) that feeds
the amplified signal to three summing buses on the matrix board (refer to
Figure 5-23):
• The row corresponding to the PMT position

• The column corresponding to the PMT position
• The energy bus
During tuning of the PM-tubes, digital tuning values are sent to a DAC (U3)
on each preamplifier via the daisy-chain.
The autotune circuit is controlled by the LED drive signal and the LED
sample signal. The autotune LED (in the PM-tubes) is lit for 3 microseconds
every 10 milliseconds when the LED drive signal turns Q1 ON. The response
value is stored on C6.
The sampled value is compared with the analog tune value and any gain drift
in the PM-tubes is corrected and reflected on the output of U2 (Pin 7).
PM TUBE PRE-AMPLIFIER
T1 Energy
Coiumn
U1 Row
LED Sample
1 Q5
U2
C5
C6
T2
7
U2 Serial out
DAC
U3 Serial in
+ 15V
PMT
Working Point
LED Drive
Q1
Figure 5-23: Pre-amplifier Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.8 Dyncor Driver Module

Events that fall between PM-tubes have a tendency to be displaced towards
the center of the tubes. If this is not accounted for, a distinct tube pattern will
appear in the image. The pattern can be reduced by suppressing high
amplitude signals coming from the center of the tubes in favor of lower
amplitude signals coming from neighboring tubes.
The Dyncor driver module has been added to generate these energy
independent correction signals. Refer to Figure 5-24. The correction is done
in two levels: the high Dyncor and low Dyncor signals. In addition, a
threshold signal is applied to eliminate low level noise and signals that are too
low to provide useful positional information.
A common energy signal ( E) is generated by summing the energy

signal from all pre-amps. This signal is presented via the I/N board to
the Dyncor driver module input. From this signal, op-amp U2
generates the high Dyncor signal, op-amp U3 generates the low
Dyncor signal via analog multipliers controlled from U7 and U8. Op-
amp U1 generates the threshold signal controlled from U10. The
correction signals are send to the row/column Dyncor modules via the
matrix board. Gain and offset values for the op-amps are via a daisy
chain loaded into five DACs on the module through a daisy chain.
Low Dyncor Gain Daisy Chain

Serial out
Low Dyncor Offset V out DAC
E-in
U6 Serial in
From U3
I/N V out DAC Serial out
Board
Analog U7 Serial in
Multipliers High Dyncor Gain
High Dyncor Offset V out DAC Serial out

U8 Serial in
U2
V out DAC Serial out
U9 Serial in
Threshold Offset
V out DAC Serial out

U1 U10 Serial in
Lower Dyncor
Upper Dyncor To Dyncor
Modules
Dynamic Threshold
Figure 5-24: Dyncor Driver Module Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.9 Dyncor Module

The Dyncor module is inserted in each row and column to provide the Dyncor
and threshold function that optimizes linearity and spatial resolution. A block
diagram of the Dyncor module is shown in Figure 5-25.
The energy signals coming from the PMT amplifiers in each row/column are
summed in the sum amplifier (U2), and the signal compensates for base-line
shift (offset). The after-glow time in the NaI scintillation crystal, especially at
high count rates, makes the crystal luminous resulting in a baseline shift of the
energy signal. A baseline restore circuit (U1A, B) is build around the
summing amplifier U2A to compensate for this.
The baseline compensated signal is applied to the lower and the upper Dyncor
op-amp (U4 and U5). A diode on the output ensures that only the positive part
of the signal is amplified.
From row
or column
U2
Baseline
Restore
circuit
UIA UIB
IA-BI
U4
D-IA-BI
IA-CI
D-IA-CI
U5
U3
To signs
matrix
B C D
Lower Upper Dynamic
Dyncor Dyncor Threshold
Figure 5-25: Dyncor Module Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Depending on the signal amplitude, the lower and upper or just the lower
Dyncor signal is subtracted from the energy signal. Refer to Figure 5-26. This
illustration shows the corrected output signal level from the Dyncor module
as a function of the uncorrected input energy signal. The signal levels are
shown for two different energies, E1 and E2.
The lower and upper corrected signals are finally applied to the threshold
op-amp (U3) where only positive signals higher than the threshold level are
amplified.
Output
Signal
E2
E1
E1 Input Signal
Threshold
E2 E
E1
Lower Dyncor
E2
E1
Upper Dyncor
E2
Figure 5-26: Output Function of the Dyncor Module

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.10 Matrix Board

The matrix board is a multi-layer board mounted on top of the support plate.
Refer to Figure 5-27. The board provides power and signal distribution
among the PM-tube's and associated pre-amps. The soldered side distributes
the HV and GND connections for the PM-tubes. All PM-tubes are connected
to HV through a 1 kΩ resistor, this is done for diagnostic purpose in case of
HV shorts in the PM-tubes. In addition to connectors for all daughter boards
(pre-amps, Dyncor module, and Dyncor driver), the matrix board contains
buffers for the LED sample/drive signal (U1, U2, and U3) and the resistor
matrix network for applying the position signals to the X and Y signal bus.
Furthermore the matrix board holds the ID EEPROM which stores detector
relevant parameters
Pre-amp with Pre-amp with Pre-amp with

row/column and row/column and row/column and
energy resistors energy resistors energy resistors
Dyncor
Module
Dyncor
Module
Dyncor
Module
Dyncor Y+
Module Y-
Low Dyncor Dyncor

Y-Position
High Dyncor Driver Matrix
Threshold Module
Dyncor Dyncor Dyncor

Module Module Module
X-Position
Matrix X+
X-
Figure 5-27: Matrix Board Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.11 Power Supply

The Magellan detector power supply is a switch mode supply powered from
24 V DC. Refer to Figure 5-28. The input is isolated from the outputs and the
individual outputs are mutually isolated. The isolation is obtained by using
isolating transformers and optocouplers. The power supply provides three
overload protected secondary circuits: ± 15 volt, ±5 volt and -HV.
The matrix board is supplied with ± 15 volts for the pre-amps and the Dyncor
modules and with HV for the PM-tubes. The HV can be controlled from the
I/N board by means of a serial 12-bit DAC (one element daisy chain).
The I/N board is supplied with ± 5 volts.
For diagnostics, all voltage outputs can be monitored visually by means of

LED`s showing HIGH, GOOD, or LOW voltage. The output voltages can be
monitored remotely via a connection to the I/N board.
5.6.11.1 ± 15 Volt Power Supply
The input power for the ± 15 volt power supply is filtered by L1, L2, C1, and
C2. The power is switch mode regulated by U1 and input isolation is obtained
by the power converter consisting of transformer T1 and U2. The regulating
feed-back loop is formed by U3A with optocoupler U4 providing input
opto-isolation.
5.6.11.2 HV Power Supply
T1 also provides isolated power for the High Voltage (HV) step-up
transformer T2. From the associated rectifier circuit U10A, U12A and Q3
form the HV regulating circuit. The HV is controlled from the I/N board via
the serial DAC U20, U19B, and U10B. The power output from T2 marked
"±15B" is an internal power supply only. For diagnostic and testing purposes
U11 enables remote HV turn off and the jumper LOCAL/REMOTE (normally
in remote) enables the HV to be set to a fixed value (R105).
Important Maximum HV should be 13,000 V DC set at a digital setting of 4,095 V DC.
5.6.12 ± 5 Volt Power Supply

The input power for the ± 5 volt power supply is filtered by L7, L8, C46, and
C47. The regulated and isolated output is obtained by U16 and U17 and their
associated output filters. The power output from U16, marked "±15C", is an
internal power supply only.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
F1
Input +15Volt
20-28 Volt filter
15V Ret.
input L1, L2,
-15Volt
C1, C2
6 Pcs. LED
U1, U2, U3A, U4

U7A and T1
- HV
HV Ret
U10A, U10B, U12A,
Q3 and T2
3 Pcs. LED
Rem. Local
Input
+5Volt
filter
+5Volt
L1, L2,
C1, C2
U16
Rem. HV set
5V Ret.
3 Pcs. LED
Rem. HV off
To +15Volt Good
I/N -15Volt Good

-5Volt
Board HV Good U17
+5Volt Good 3 Pcs. LED
-5Volt Good
Figure 5-28: Detector Power Supply Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5.6.13 I/N Board

The purpose of the I/N board is to convert the analog position and energy
signals coming from the detector into digital data and transfer these to the
PC acquisition console. The detector signals are passed to the I/N board via a
16-pin ribbon cable.
The following I/N board description refers to Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29: I/N Board Block Diagram
Each of the X-Y analog position signals are digitized in an input circuit which
integrates the digitized signal during an event so that the output signal from
the circuit is proportional to the energy of the analog current pulse from the
matrix board. A 10-bit A/D flash converter samples the input signal at
40 MHz rate before it is stored in the raw event buffer.
The input circuit for the energy signal is similar to the ones for position
signals but includes detection of signal slopes and events. Furthermore, the
circuit records the interval between the events (separation time) and the event
duration (integration time), which is 64 clock cycles (1.6 µsec.) if the event is
not interrupted by another event (pile-up).
The raw event buffer holds up to 64 events presented as four position signals,
the energy signal, the separation time from the previous event and the
integration time. The buffer circuit consists of two data FIFOs.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If the event buffer determines from the separation time(s) that two or more
events overlap, event pile-up occurs. Refer to Figure 5-30. The events are
separated and stored in the pile-up correction memory during pile-up
correction. The correction is done by looking up correction factors depending
on the integration time of each event. Only the energy data are pile-up
corrected. After pile-up correction, the data is latched to the normalization
memory.
The purpose of normalization of the detector signals is to convert these

signals into energy independent values and is done by looking-up
normalization factors depending on the exact X and Y position of the event.
The data is send to the TAXI link circuit where it is serialized and transmitted
to the framing board.
A: Area accumulated until pile-up occurs
B: Percentage of first event found in pile-up

fraction look-up table. This fraction is added
to A to complete the first event.
This fraction is subtracted from (B+C) to
complete the pile-up event.
B+C: Area accumulated from the 2nd
integration cycle.
Figure 5-30: Pile-up Correction
A: area accumulated until pile-up occurs
B: percentage of first event found in pile-up fraction look-up table.

This fraction is added to A to to complete the first event. This fraction is
subtracted from (B + C) to complete the pile-up event.
B + C: area accumulated from the 2nd integration cycle

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 6 - Calibration and Adjustments
This chapter details general calibration and gantry characterization tasks.
WARNING
• The four casters on the mobile computer cart should be kept locked
whenever the cart is not being moved.
• To prevent injury or equipment damage, always be aware of the
position of the interconnect cables when people are present or
equipment is being moved.
6.1 Adjusting the Gantry Roll Limit-Switch

The gantry is calibrated at the factory. At the site, you must verify that the
limit-switches are operating correctly and will prevent the gantry from
rotating too far, breaking the gantry's chain cable. Figure 6-1 shows the gantry
cable and how rotation of the gantry affects it.
HOME POSITION DETECTORS ROTATED FULLY CW DETECTORS ROTATED FULLY CCW
Detector #1 at 0 o Detector #1 at +270o Detector #1 at -270o
GANTRY’S CHAIN CABLE

(REAR OF GANTRY)
Figure 6-1: Gantry Cable (Rear View)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Adjusting the Gantry Roll Limit-Switch
In the following procedure, you will observe five LEDs, located on the Roll
Limit Board, to verify the limit-switches are operating correctly.
The LEDs cycle ON/OFF many times during rotation of the detectors. It is
when an LED is ON in combination with another LED that a specific
condition occurs. The combinations are as follows:
• LEDs 2 and 3 are ON. This combination indicates Detector #1 is at its

left-most position, -270°. When this occurs, the detectors have to be
rotated at least 15° in the opposite direction before they reset and
you're allowed to rotate the detectors in the original direction.
• LEDs 2 and 4 are ON. This combination indicates Detector #1 is at its
right-most position, +270°. Just like above, the detectors have to be
rotated at least 15° in the opposite direction before they reset.
• LEDs 1 and 2 are ON. This combination indicates the detectors have
reached their ultimate endstop, ±300° and are locked. This situation is
not normal since the system automatically stops when the detectors
are at ±270°. When LEDs 1 and 2 illuminate, the detectors cannot be
moved in either direction with the Hand-Held Controller. You must
then place a jumper between the points of J1 on the Roll Limit Board
shown in Figure 6-3.
• LEDs 2 and 5 are ON. This combination indicates Detector #1 is at 0°.
You observe these LEDs to calibrate the system, as described in the
following procedure. The system is operating correctly when LED 2 is
ON the entire time LED 5 is ON. See Figure 6-2.
IMPORTANT: LED 2 MUST BE ON THE ENTIRE TIME LED 5 IS ON
ACCEPTABLE READINGS
ON ON ON
LED 2 OFF LED 2 OFF LED 2 OFF
ON ON ON
OFF LED 5 LED 5 OFF
LED 5 OFF
UNACCEPTABLE READINGS
ON ON
LED 2 OFF LED 2 OFF
ON ON
LED 5 OFF LED 5 OFF
Figure 6-2: LED 2 and LED 5: Detector #1 at 0o

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 6-1 shows the status of the LEDs with Detector #1 at different
positions.
Table 6-1: Detector Roll Limit Board LED's
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5
Detector #1 at ± 300° ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Detector #1 at -270° OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Detector #1 at 0° OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Detector #1 at +270° OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Note Refer to Figure 6-3 as you perform this procedure.
1. Remove the cover at the front of gantry to gain access to SW2 assembly.
2. Position Detector #1 at 0° (Detector #2 will be at 180°.) Use a spirit level
to verify the detectors are level.
3. Loosen the M10 bolt and rotate the SW2 assembly until LED 2 on the
Roll Limit board illuminates. Triggering occurs when the logic switch on
the assembly passes the trigger screw.
4. Tighten the screw.
Important If the trigger screw is not positioned within the adjusting range of the SW2 assembly,
you may need to move the screw to the alternate position. To move the screw,
proceed to Step 5.
5. Remove the screw.

6. Rotate the detectors until the alternate position is accessible.
7. Install the screw. Tighten the screw until the height of the screw is
sufficient to trigger the logic switch.
8. Rotate the detector until Detector #1 is at 0°. Verify by using a spirit level.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
DETECTOR #1
GANTRY Spirit Level GANTRY

Rear View Front View
DETECTOR #2
Alternate Position
for Trigger Screw
Adjust SW2 Assy

Screw for
Photo Eye Disk
Trigger Screw
LED3 M10 x 25
SW2 Bolt
LED5
GND Assembly
LED1 LED4
Disk for Photo Eye
J1
LED2
Roll Limit Board LED6
Figure 6-3: Gantry Roll Calibration
6.1.1 Adjusting the Photo Eye Disk

Refer to Figure 6-3 as you perform this procedure.
1. Detector #1 should still be at 0° from the previous procedure.

2. Loosen the set screws for the disk for the photoeye logic switch.
3. Rotate the disk until LED 5 illuminates.
4. Tighten the screws.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Table
5. Rotate the gantry to verify that LED 2 is ON the entire time LED 5 is ON.
If LED 2 is not ON the entire time, repeat the procedure in Section 6.1.
6. Place the probes of an oscilloscope on Pins 5 and 7 to verify proper opto
sensor timing. Pins 5 and 7 are located at "U1" on the roll limit board:
LED 2: IC "U1", Pin 5
LED 5: IC "U1", Pin 7
CAUTION
If you do not correctly set the opto switches, the system may experience
intermittent limits and cable damage.
6.1.2 Radial Limit-switch

No adjustment needed.
6.2 Table
WARNING
Do not move the table to the full extent of the cables. This may damage the
cables.
6.2.1 Adjusting the Longitudinal Cradle Limit-switch

1. Set the limit-switches for the cradle so that the cradle stops smoothly,
even when the cradle is moved longitudinally at fast speed.
2. Verify total travel length from limit to limit is greater than or equal to
1570 mm (61.8 inches).
6.2.2 Adjusting the Lateral Cradle Limit-switch

1. Set the limit-switches for the cradle so that the cradle stops smoothly,
even when the cradle is moved laterally at fast speed.
2. Verify total travel length from limit to limit is greater than or equal to
232 ± 116 mm (9.1 ± 4.6 inches).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Table
6.2.3 Adjusting the Vertical Limit-switch

All measurements are made at the lowest point of the table top.
1. Place a load on the table to force the table top to contact the forward roller.
2. Set the lower limit-switch so that the lowest measured distance from table
top to floor is equal to or less than 6l0 mm (24 inches).
3. Set the upper limit-switch so that the highest measured distance from
table top to floor is equal to or greater than 863 mm (33.9 inches).
Each of the above limits must be verified by approaching the limits in fast
speed.
Load Table with

18.2 Kgs (40 Lbs) Minimum
Place Tape Measure at

Centerline of Table
Tape Measure
Figure 6-4: Vertical Limit-Switch Measurements

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Table / Gantry Characterization
6.3 Table / Gantry Characterization

Table 6-2 describes when the table characterization procedure is performed.
Table 6-2: Table/Gantry Characterization
Assembly Description
System After initial system installation.
Table After replacing drive motor, limit-switches, or encoder.
Gantry After replacing drive motor, limit-switches, or encoder.
6.3.1 Setting the System for Slow Speed

To perform an accurate characterization, slow speed must be used during the
installation and customized calibration.

User name: service
Password: service.
2. On the Service Menu, select Set JOG Speeds for Characterization

and press <Enter>. The Axis Jog Slow Speed Utility Menu appears.
3. Select Slow Speed and press <Enter>. The screen jogs up and down as
the system updates to the new speed.
4. Verify the system is at slow speed by selecting View Settings and press
<Enter>. The Current Speed Menu appears and displays the slow speed.
5. Quit the Speed Selection Menu and return to the Service Menu.
6.3.2 Starting the Characterization Program

1. Select Start AUI from the Service Menu.
2. Click the Characterize button located on the Quality Control Card. A
menu appears listing the characterization choices. You can sequentially
characterize all six of the motion parameters or you can characterize each
parameter separately:
• Characterize All Axes in the System (described in Section 6.3.3).
• Characterize Table Longitudinal Axis (described in Section 6.3.4.)
• Characterize Table Vertical Axis (described in Section 6.3.5.)
• Characterize Table Lateral Axis (described in Section 6.3.6.)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
• Characterize Gantry Roll Axis (described in Section 6.3.7).

• Characterization of Detector #1 Radial Axis (refer to Section 6.3.8).
• Characterization of Detector #2 Radial Axis (refer to Section 6.3.9).
• Final Characterization (refer to Section 6.3.10).
6.3.3 Characterizing All Axes in the System

1. Position the detectors as shown in Figure 6-5.
2. Use the Hand-Held Controller to fully extend the detectors.
WARNING
Make sure the table can move freely in and out of the gantry. Otherwise
damage to equipment may occur.
Detector #1 at -90o Detector #2 at +90o
FULLY EXTENDED
Front of Gantry
Figure 6-5: Detector #1at -90o
3. Unlock the table and move it away from the gantry. From the menu listing
described in Section 6.3.1, select Characterize All Axes In the
System. Click [OK].

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The following message appears on the screen:
Ensure that table is completely away from gantry.
4. Click [OK] to begin the characterization process. Go to Section 6.3.4.
6.3.4 Table Longitudinal Characterization

1. From the previous step, the following message appears:
The longitudinal axis will fully retract and appear to calibrate.

It will then move to its fully extended position and appear to calibrate.
2. Click [OK] to start longitudinal motion. When the table extends all the
way, the following message appears:
Wait for the move to finish and the data to be saved.

This dialog will be removed by the system and another displayed when the
function has completed.
3. Once the longitudinal motion stops, the following message appears:
The table will move to its lowest position and appear to calibrate.
4. Proceed to Section 6.3.5.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.3.5 Table Vertical Characterization

1. After the table longitudinal characterization has been completed per
Section 6.3.4, the following message appears:
The table will move to its lowest position and appear to calibrate.
2. Click [OK]. The table moves to its lowest position. Wait until the vertical
motion has stopped before proceeding to the next step.
3. The following message appears on the screen:
Fully retract the table and manually move the vertical axis so that the top, center of
the table depression measures 750 millimeters from the floor.
4. Use the HHC to fully retract the table and then place a 18.2 kg (40 lb.)
load onto the table, as shown in Figure 6-6. Extend a metal tape measure
from the centerline of the cradle's depression to the floor. With the
Hand-Held Controller in your free hand, move the table cradle vertically
until the centerline of the cradle's depression is 750 mm from the floor.
Load Table with

18.2 Kgs (40 lbs) Minimum
Place Tape Measure

at Centerline of Table
Tape Measure
Figure 6-6: Loading the Table
5. Click [OK]. The following message appears:
The table will move to its highest position and appear to calibrate.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Click [OK]. Table moves upward. Wait until table motion stops before
going to the next step. When table characterization is complete, the
following message appears:

This dialog will be removed by the system and another displayed when the function
has completed.
7. Once the vertical motion stops, the following message appears:
The table will move to its left most position and appear to calibrate.
6.3.6 Table Lateral Characterization

1. After the table vertical characterization has been completed per Section
6.3.5, the following message appears:
The table will move to its left most position and appear to calibrate.
2. Click [OK]. The table moves laterally to the left (when facing the gantry).
Wait for the lateral motion to stop before going to the next step. The
following message appears on the display:
Manually move the lateral axis so that it is near center.
3. With the Hand-Held Controller, move the table laterally so that it is near
the center of its travel.
4. Mark the center of the table top edge (gantry side) and table base. With a
string taped to the center on the table top edge, put a weight on the string
so that the weight is just below the table base. The center of the table top
is aligned with the table base when the string is aligned with the mark on
the table base.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Please lock the table in the SPECT position.
6. Lock the front and rear of the table.

Extend the table past the detector, but not into the ring and move the table down
until level with the center of the detector.
8. Using the Hand-Held Controller, move the table past the detector, but not
into the gantry ring.
9. Using the Hand-Held Controller, adjust the vertical height as directed.
Manually move the roll axis so that it is at 90 degrees.
11. Use the spirit level to verify the detectors are vertical. Refer to Figure 6-7.
You don't have to use the spirit level if you have already characterized the gantry
Note roll function. Instead, use the roll value on the AUI.
Spirit Level
Front of Gantry
Figure 6-7: Detector #1 at -90o

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12. After you have verified the detectors are vertical, click [OK]. The
following message appears:
Manually move the radius axis to position detector #1 50 millimeters from the table top.
13. With the Hand-Held Controller, adjust the radial axis so Detector #1 is
50 mm from the top of the table (refer to Figure 6-8). Measure the
distance with a rigid ruler.
50MM
Roll Axis at +90o
Table
Figure 6-8: Detector #1 at +90o for Lateral Table Characterization

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Manually move the roll axis so that it is at -90 degrees.
15. Using the Hand-Held Controller, rotate Detector #1 to the -90° position.
Use the spirit level to verify Detector #1 is vertical.
Measure the distance between the table top and detector #1 and solve the
equation X mm = (distance - 50) /2.
17. Measure the distance in millimeters between the top of the cradle and
Detector #1. Calculate the variable X per the equation in Figure 6-9.
Note "X" is the lateral distance required to center the table in the gantry ring.
Within 50 mm Measure
Distance (d)
Roll Axis at -90o

X (mm) = (d-50) /2
LATERAL DISTANCE
FORMULA
Table
Figure 6-9: Detector #1 at -90o for Lateral Table Characterization

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If X is positive, manually move the lateral axis X mm toward detector #1.

Otherwise, manually move the lateral axis X mm away from detector #1.
19. Using the Hand-Held Controller, move the table laterally the distance
calculated in Step 15. Click [OK]. The following message appears:
Retract the table from between the detectors.

The table will move to its right most position and appear to calibrate.
20. Using the Hand-Held Controller, fully retract the table from between the
detectors and click [OK]. Lateral motion starts. Wait for the motion to
stop when the following message appears:

has completed.
21. Once the lateral motion stops, the following message appears:
Manually move the roll axis to Zero Degrees.
6.3.7 Gantry Roll Characterization

1. After the table lateral characterization has been completed per Section
6.3.6, the following message appears:
Manually move the roll axis to Zero Degrees.
2. Using the Hand-Held Controller, rotate the detectors until they are at the
home position as shown in Figure 6-10. Use a spirit level to verify that the
Detector #1 is at 0°.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector #1 at 0o
Spirit Level
(Table Side of Gantry)
Figure 6-10: Detector #1 at 0o for Gantry Characterization
The roll axis will move clockwise for a short distance and then counterclockwise for
a short distance.
4. Click [OK]. This starts the gantry characterization for the roll parameter.

has completed.
5. The data has been saved when gantry motion stops, and the following
message appears:
Ensure That Table Is Completely Away From Gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.3.8 Characterization of Detector #1 Radial Axis

1. Rotate the gantry to 0° with head #1 in upper position.
2. From the Quality Control card, select Characterize.
Ensure that Table is Completely Away From Gantry
3. Select Characterize Detector-1 Radial Axis and click <OK>.

The Detector-1 Radial Axis will move to it’s

maximum radius and appear to calibrate
4. Click <OK>.
Detector #1 moves radially to the fully extended position, and backs off
slightly as it calibrates.
5. Click <OK>.
The following message appears on the display:

minimum radius and appear to calibrate
6. Click <OK>.
Move the Radial 1 Axis so that the top of the plates align.
7. Using the Hand-Held Controller, and viewing the Gantry from the side,
move Detector #1 radially until the lower section of the detector plate is
aligned precisely with the top of the gantry bracket.
Use a straight edge to verify alignment. Refer to Figure 6-11.
Important The alignment procedure (described above and shown in Figure 6-11) is critical for
accurate operation of the Gantry with the ABC Option.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Point of Alignment
Figure 6-11: Detector # 1 Plate/Gantry Bracket Alignment
8. Click <OK>.
After a short delay the following message appears:
Characterization Complete
OK
9. Click <OK>.
The data is saved.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.3.9 Characterization of Detector #2 Radial Axis

1. Rotate the gantry 180° so that head #2 is in the upper position.
2. From the Quality Control card, select Characterize.
Ensure that Table is Completely Away From Gantry
3. Select Characterize Detector-2 Radial Axis and click <OK>.


maximum radius and appear to calibrate
4. Click <OK>.
Detector #1 radially moves to the fully extended position and backs off
slightly as it calibrates.
5. Click <OK>.
The Radial 2 Axis will move to the

minimum radius and appear to calibrate
6. Click <OK>.
Move the Radial 2 Axis so that the top of the plates align.
7. Using the Hand-Held Controller, and viewing the Gantry from the side,
move Detector #2 radially until the lower section of the detector plate is
aligned precisely with the top of the gantry bracket.
Use a straight edge to verify alignment. Refer to Figure 6-11.
Important The alignment procedure (described above and shown in Figure 6-11) is critical for
accurate operation of the ABC Option.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8. Click <OK>.
Characterization Complete
OK
9. Click <OK>.
The data is saved.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.3.10 Resetting System Speeds to Normal

1. After successful characterization, shutdown the AUI.
2. Select Set Job Speeds for Characterization from the Service Menu.
3. Select Set Normal Speeds and verify setting by selecting View
Settings.
4. Exit and proceed to Section 6.3.11.
6.3.11 Final Calibration

1. After resetting the job speeds to normal (Section 6.3.10), select Start AUI
from the Service Menu.
2. Press the Reset button on the IPS.
3. Click [Yes]. The table and gantry will move through the calibration
sequence. The system is now characterized.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Imaging Detector Calibration and Adjustments
6.4 Imaging Detector Calibration and Adjustments
WARNING
Collimators are made from a dense material and are very heavy. You must
use the collimator carts to move or change them.
To avoid injury to yourself or damage to the detectors, you should follow
the collimator changing procedure exactly as described in this section.
6.4.1 Introduction
The following sections describe all possible calibration and adjustment
procedures for the imaging detector that can be performed by service
personnel, with available tools and test equipment. If necessary, additional
test equipment may be ordered from the local GEMS service office.
Procedures required for on-site installation, calibration, or out-of-tolerance

re-adjustment, are also described in this chapter.
6.4.2 Prerequisites
The prerequisites for perfoming detector calibrations are isted below:
• Quality assurance – You need to perform image evaluation prior to

any tuning or recalibtaion and ensure quality control before
performing calibrations. The procedure for performing image
evaluation is described in detail in the following sections.
• Check detector – For tuning and calibration to succeed, the detector
must be functioning correctly. Ensure that all faults have been repaired
before attempting to tune or calibrate the detector.
• Survey environment – Ensure that the environment is free of any
contamination. Remove the collimator. In the camera mode, open the
window for 50-400 KeV. Switch to energy and ensure that
nosignificant energy peaks are observed.
• Archive all current tuning parameters/corrections – Use the st_bru
utility to archive Options 1, 3, and 4 before commencing any tuning or
calibration.
• Order sources – Decide which sources will be required and order
them from the technologist as early as possible.
• Read the Diagnostics chapter – While tuning the detector, reading
about the diagnostics will give you a good idea of when to abort
tuning and revert to fault-finding, if necessary. Some faults may only
be detected during tuning and/or calibration. Look out for indications
that suggest that the tuning or calibration is going wrong.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
• Identify procedures to carry out – Assuming that all the faults have
been repaired on the detector, find out which procedures are required
to tune or calibrate the detector depending on the repair you have
carried out.
6.4.3 Equipment Required
The following equipment is required to perform the calibration and
adjustment following a major detector repair, exchange of PM-tubes, fitting
of new matrix board, etc.
• Point sources: See Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes

• Bipod assembly.
• Source Holder Set (4), GeoCal (46-3003964-G1)
• Linearity Phantom Set, X-dir, Y-dir (regionally held)
• Flood Phantom.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 6-3 shows the preferred isotopes for all calibrations.

Table 6-3: Calibration Isotopes
Strength
(µCi/Mbq)
Isotope Press this Approx. values Normal choice for
Calibration type Isotope type
type button for correct count isotope
rates if using
Bipod
A PM Tune PMT tuning Single peak 250/15 Tc99m

(new or update)
A Dyncor Dyncor adjust Single peak 250/15 Tc99m
B Ecal Energy calibration Dual peak 250/15 Ga67
(or Tc99m + TI201)
B (X4) GeoCal GeoCal adjustment Dual peak 250/15 Ga67
(or Tc99m + TI201)
A ECor Acquisition of Single peak 250/15 TC99m
energy correction
data
C LinCor Acquisition of Single peak 5000/200 Tc99m
primary (phantom-
based) spatial
correction data
D SOC Second order Peaks 250/15 Must be done for all
spatial correction chosen as isotopes used by
data per customer customer
application
• Do not run 2nd order correction for isotope used with phantom acquisition of
Note linearity.
• If Tc-99m was used for tuning, 2nd order must be done for Co-57.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
• When doing all calibrations, they must be done in sequence from 1 - 8

as indicated.
Important If Tc-99m was used for tuning, a second order correction must be done for Co-57.
Table 6-4 shows the alternative isotopes that may be used for calibrations.
The main energy peak for the individual isotopes is indicated in bold.
Table 6-4: Alternative Isotopes
Isotope Energy Peak(s)
Thallium: Tl-201 72, (135,) 167
Gallium: Ga-67 93, 185, 300, (400)
Indium: In-111 171, 245
Iodine: I-123 159
Iodine: I-131 284, 365
Xenon: Xe-133 81
Technetium: Tc-99m 140
Cobalt: Co-57 122
Barium: Ba-133 81, 356
Americium: Am-241 60
Gadolinium: Gd-153 47, (70), 100 (97 and 103

peaks merge together)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 6-5 shows the calibratiions needed after any detector repair. When the
repair is done the calibrations are performed in the sequence from left to right
as indicated.
Table 6-5: Calibrations
Total Calibration Time

PM - Tune Update
EnCor (Update)
PM - Tune New
EnCor (New)
GeoCal.
Dyncor
Lincor
SOC
Ecal
Type of Repair
One PM-Tube / Preamp 20 minutes
Several PM-Tubes / Preamp E E 3½ hours
All PM-Tubes / Preamp / Recouple 4½ hours
Matrix Board 3 hours
Dyncor Driver E 4 hours
I/N Board E E E 4½ hours
Scintillation Crystal 5 hours
Detector Power Supply E No calibration

time
No Backup of Files 5 hours per

detector
1. A typical system requires 2nd Order Spatial Correction to be performed on 3

Note isotopes.
2. E = Evaluate image before performing procedure, using image analysis process,
primarily CUA.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.4 Using the Bipod

This section describes the procedure for assembling and attaching the bipod
to the detector. The complete bipod assembly is shown in Figure 6-12 below.
Brass Knobs
Source Holder
(including Vial)
Bipod Legs
Protection Plate
Screws and Nuts
(for locking legs)
Figure 6-12: Bipod and Source Holder
1. Unfold the 2 bipod legs and lock them by means of the 2 screws and nuts.
Mount the source holder at the top of the bipod and lock it using the set
screw.
2. Position the protection plate on top of the detector - see Figure 6-13 on the
following page.
3. With the bipod standing on the floor place the vial with activity in the
source holder.
4. Position the assembled bipod on top of the protection plate and lock the
complete bipod assembly to the detector using the 2 knurled brass knobs.
The complete bipod assembly attached to the detector is shown in
Figure 6-13.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 6-13: Bipod Assembly Mounted onto the Detector

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.5 Calibration Flow with No Major Repair

This section details the flow of detector calibrations for a detector that is not
giving optimum image quality, but does not require a major repair.
FULL TUNING
PM TUNING NEW GEOMETRY CALIBRATION

(Section 6.4.7.2) (Section 6.4.7.14)
PM TUNING UPDATE
DYNCOR ADJUSTMENT (Section 6.4.7.3)
(Section 6.4.7.10)
(Only after crystals or Dyncor
module replacement)
ENERGY CORRECTION NEW
(Section 6.4.7.16)
PM TUNING UPDATE
(Section 6.4.7.3) SPATIAL CORRECTION
(primary phantom-based)
(Section 6.4.7.18)
ENERGY CALIBRATION
(Section 6.4.7.13)
SPATIAL CORRECTION
Second Order for all isotopes
(Section 6.4.7.19)
Figure 6-14: Full Tuning Process
UPDATE TUNE
PM TUNING UPDATE
(Section 6.4.7.3)
ENERGY CALIBRATION
(Section 6.4.7.13)
ENERGY CORRECTION UPDATE

(Section 6.4.7.16)
Figure 6-15: Update Tune
Important When the Primary, phantom based, spatial corrections are recreated, 2nd order
corrections “MAPs” may need to be repeated.
Image quality of commonly-used isotopes should be tested to determine the needs.
Energy Calibration and/or Energy Correction alone should not create a need to
Note acquire 2nd order corrections.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.6 Corrections Naming Convention

The standard PMT, energy, and spatial corrections naming conventions are
listed in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6: Corrections Naming Convention
Isotope Energy Spatial PMT
Tc-99m ECOR Tc99m PMT
Tc-99m 15% ECOR Tc99m PMT
Co-57 ECOR Co57 PMT
Tl-201 1 peak ECOR Tl201 PMT
Tl-201 2 peak ECOR Tl201 PMT
In-111 ECOR In111 PMT
Ga-67 ECOR Ga67 PMT
I-123 ECOR I123 PMT
I-131 ECOR I131 PMT
Xe-133 ECOR Tl201 PMT
Kr-81m ECOR Kr81m PMT
Tl-201/Tc-99m ECOR Tc99m PMT
Tc-99m/In-111 ECOR Tc99m PMT
WARNING
Names are case sensitive and must exactly match the above convention.
Failure to do so will impact Image quality. Make sure not to duplicate any
names.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7 Detector Calibration
WARNING
Do not place high activity sources close to a detector without a collimator.
Sources greater than 0.5 mCi (18.5 Mbq) placed within 0.5 m of an
uncollimated detector may cause long term image quality effects.
6.4.7.1 The Quality Control Card

• User name: service
• Password: service.
2. Select the Quality Control card. Selecting the individual calibration
buttons activates the calibrations. Refer to Figure 6-16 and Table 6-5.
Status Area
Quality Control Card
System Calibration
Selection Area
Detector Calibration
Selection Area
NEMA Test
Selection Area
Gantry Characterization Control Area Result Display Help Window

Selection Area
Figure 6-16: Quality Control Card

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 6-7: Quality Card Functions
Status Area • The acquisition status area is displayed at the top the Quality Control Card. It
shows the status of the calibration or test in progress.
• The status area always shows the status of the scan that is in progress, even if
the acquisition card is not at the front of the stack.
• When "Camera On" is selected or when an acquisition is in progress, the status
area displays the type of scan that is being performed and detector count
information.
During an acquisition the elapsed time and estimated time to the end of the scan
are displayed.
• The "Stop" button on the right can be used to manually terminate the acquisition.
Quality Control Card This area is divided into four calibrations:
System Calibrations Detector Calibrations NEMA Tests Gantry

1. Uniformity 1. PM Tune 1. Lin, & Spatial 1. Characterise
2. COR 2. Dyncor 2. Uniformity
3. Blank Scan 3. Ecal 3. Energy
4. Source Profile 4. GeoCal 4. MWSR
5. CUA 5. Ecor
6. Lincor
7. SOC (Second Order
Corrections)
Result Display The acquired calibration or test data is displayed in this area. This may be
displayed as one or two images and /or combined with alphanumeric data. This
area is erased when exiting the test.
Control Area In this area text and commands for executing tests and calibrations are entered.
Also provided in this area is a window displaying instructions for the next action to
take to proceed in the selected test/calibration procedure.
Help Window Having selected a calibration or test help, text relevant for the selection will be
displayed in this window Use the scroll bar or the up/down arrows to scroll the text
up and down.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.2 PMT Tuning: New Tubes
As a first step, a basic alignment of the PMTs is necessary . The PM Tune

program always starts out by loading previous tuning values. However, if it is
a first-time tuning of a particular detector, default values will be loaded.
The High Voltage is adjusted in steps, going from a relatively low value and
upwards. For each HV step, 10 seconds are allowed for the autotune to lock in
on tubes that have reached their working limit. Also for each HV step, the
Working Point for each PMT is monitored. The HV continues to step upwards
until all PMT Working Point values are higher than 3. From that step the HV
is increased by another 50 volts, and that HV is stored in the tuning file.
A series of iterative flood images are now acquired as dual-energy

acquisitions with two energy windows around the specified isotope energy.
The images are spatially subdivided into regions, each representing the
outline of a PMT. For each iteration, the count rate for all PMT regions in
both the low and the high energy window are compared individually and, if
not equal, that tube gain is adjusted accordingly.
When equilibrium has been reached for all tubes, the PMT tuning file is stored
with the final tuning values under a user specified file name in the pmt directory.
The PM tune table (PMT) generated using Tc-99m, 140 keV is normally
named PMT in the protocols available for Millennium system.
6.4.7.3 PMT Tuning Procedure
1. Remove the collimator from the detector. No masking of the detector is

needed for this procedure.
2. Position the detectors and bipod as indicated in Figure 6-17. Place point
source “A” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source holder. Check
that the source exposes the entire detector FOV and that the count rate is
<100 Kcnts/s.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Bipod
Source Holder
Figure 6-17: Setup for PMT Tuning
3. Select the Quality Control Card.

4. Click the [PM tune] button.
5. Enter the detector number (1 or 2). and click the [OK] button.
6. Enter the energy peak (see Table 6-4 - Alternative Isotopes) and click the
[OK] button.
7. Either update an existing PM tune table (PMT) or create a new table.
8. If updating is selected, select PM tune table (PMT) and click the [OK]
button.
9. The computer takes 2 - 3 minutes to prepare for the acquisition. At this
point, HV is adjusted. Refer to Section 6.4.6.
To observe the tuning process Press <Alt> <F9> and restore the [Startup]
icon to see the values.
10. Return to the AUI by restoring the minimsed Icon.
11. Start the acquisition by clicking the [Yes] button.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12. After acquisition ends, verify that the PMT values in the Startup window
are between 2700 and 3300.
• If the PMT gain values are inside this range, perform steps 13 and 14
and then continue with Section 6.4.7.5.
• If the PMT gain values are NOT inside this range, go to
Section 6.4.7.4 PMT First Tuning.
13. Enter the name of the PM tune table (PMT) created. The PM tune table is
normally named PMT. Refer to Section 6.4.6. The name is entered in the
Control Area.
14. Click the [Yes] button to save the data and exit.
6.4.7.4 PMT First Tuning
This procedure is only needed if the PMT gain values are NOT within the 2700 to
Note 3300 range.
1. Start the AUI.
Important Do NOT proceed unless the Detector has been on for at least two hours.
2. Position a Co57 or Tc99 source to achieve a maximum of

<100Kcounts/sec. Make sure that the source covers the entire Detector FOV.
Figure 6-18 shows an example of a Detector being calibrated. The
positioning of the source must comply with site-specific Hospital
regulations.
Detector being
calibrated
Source
Figure 6-18: PMT Tuning Setup

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Run PM Tune>New Tuning from the Quality Control tab (see

Figure 6-16.)
4. Make sure that the PMT gain values after two iterations are all within the
2700 to 3300 range.
The PMT gain values may be viewed in the Startup window
(see Figure 6-16).
PMT Tube
numbers
PMT Gain
Values
Figure 6-19: PMT Gain Values Table
5. Change the gain for PMTs not within acceptable gain values as follows:
a. Stop PM Tune by clicking the [Stop] button.
Figure 6-20: Stop Button

Direction 2414259-100 2019
b. Access the PMT Matrix Board and locate the Pre-amp board that
needs to be adjusted. The PMT numbers are written on the Matrix
board next to each Pre amp board (Figure 6-21).
Pre amp board
PMT
number
PMT Matrix
Board
Figure 6-21: Matrix Board with Pre-amp Boards
c. To increase the PMT gain, turn the screw slightly clockwise

(less than 10º).
d. To Decrease the PMT gain, turn the screw slightly counter-clockwise
(less than 10º).
The screw is accessed through the hole in the relevant Pre-amp board
(Figure 6-22).
THIN flat screwdriver

inserted into PMT
Adjustment Hole
Figure 6-22: PMT Gain Adjustment

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The screwdriver must be inserted through the hole in the board and into the slot in
Note the PMT Gain Adjustment nut below (Figure 6-23). You may need to “play’” with
the screwdriver until it slips into the slot
PMT Gain
Adjustment Slot
Figure 6-23: PMT Gain Adjustment Slot
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all PMT gains are within acceptable limits.
Important During the tuning process, the PMT gain values of neighboring PMTs may be
changed. Check these in the PMT Gain Values Table and adjust them if they are not
within acceptable limits.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.5 Dyncor Setting
To perform any Dyncor adjustments, it is necessary to remove the detector

cover. Refer to the procedure described in Section 8.6.2.
6.4.7.6 Dyncor Setting Description
All DynCor parameters are set from the system software and stored in the
Correction directory as a file named dyn_cor. The file is an ASCII file that
can be edited directly from the Quality Control Card by selecting the
[DynCor] button. However, editing the dyn_cor file does not change the
current DAC settings. The setting in the file can easily be loaded to the DACs
by clicking the [Camera Off] and [Camera On] button.
6.4.7.7 Dyncor Setting Procedure
6.4.7.8 Initial Default Settings
Before starting, check the settings are set as defaults as shown in Table 6-8
below. If necessary, correct the settings by entering the values into the table.
Table 6-8: Default Dyncor Settings
Parameter Setting Default Setting
Threshold offset 2048
High Dyn offset 2048
High Dyn Gain 2300
Low Dyn Gain 1150
Low Dyn offset 2048

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.9 Offset Adjustments
1. Remove all radiation sources and adjust the offset settings using a
voltmeter connected to the test points on the Matrix Board marked
Threshold, High Dyn, and Low Dyn, respectively (refer to Table 6-9).
Table 6-9: Dyncor Driver Test Points
Test Point Test Signal
TP 1 Upper Dyncor Offset
TP 2 Upper Dyncor Gain
TP 3 Lower Dyncor Offset
TP 4 Lower Dyncor Gain
TP 6 Threshold Offset

3. Click on the [DynCor] button.
4. Enter the detector No. and click the [OK] button.
Table 6-8 will now be displayed.
5. Adjust all 3 offset values one at a time:

• Threshold offset: 6mV
• High Dyn offset: 0mV
• Low Dyn offset: 0mV
on the respective test pins, by entering new settings directly into the
table.
6. For each new setting select Save and then click the [Quit] button.
7. Switch to the Acquisition Card; click the [Camera Off] and then the
[Camera On] button.
This will load the new setting.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to adjust all 3 offset values to zero.
The response settings are inverted - higher setting values give a more negative
Note offset.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.10 Dyncor Gain Adjustments
1. Setup the detectors as indicated in Figure 6-24.

2. Place the source holder so it is faces the upright detector. The holder
should be 0.9 m (35 inches) high and a minimum of 3 m (118 inches) from
the detector.
Point Source
0.9 m (35 inches)
3 m, min.
(118 inches)
Figure 6-24: Gantry Set-up for Dyncor Gain Adjust
3. Place point source “A” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source
holder. Check that the source exposes the entire detector FOV and that the
count rate is 20 - 50 Kcnts/s.
4. Acquire a number of uncorrected 256 * 256 flood images in a 25% energy
window, 5 million counts in each. For each image, change the High Dyn
Gain and the Low Dyn Gain adjustment in steps. Enter the new setting
(High Dyn Gain and Low Dyn Gain ) directly into the tablet and click the
<Camera Off> and <Camera On> button. The range and recommended
step size for setting of the High Dyn Gain and the Low Dyn Gain is shown
below:
Table 6-10: Dyn Gain Range and Recommended Step Size
Parameter Range Step Size

High Dyn Gain 2000 - 2600 150
Low Dyn Gain 900 - 1300 100
5. The best uniformity is decided by visual assessments. Note that with hot
tubes, a faint tube pattern is to be expected. Other faint patterns are also
acceptable as long as they appear soft without sharp edges.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. When the best combination is found, a sequence of images is acquired

with settings around the apparent optimum and a step size of 50 on both
High and Low Dyn Gain.
6.4.7.11 Final Offset Adjustments
1. Remove all sources for offset adjustment.

Having adjusted the High and Low Dyn Gain, the offset setting has to be
re-adjusted.
2. Repeat the Offset Adjustments procedure in Section 6.4.7.9 for High Dyn
and Low Dyn only.
6.4.7.12 Detector Covers Installed
Before continuing with the calibration procedures, make sure the detector
lead rear covers have been installed.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.13 Energy Calibration
Energy calibration ensures that the digital representation of the energy

spectrum matches window selections and the spectrum display. The
calibration is based on a number of known isotope peaks exposing the
detector. The result is stored in a correction file named "e_cal".

2. Position the detectors and bipod as indicated in Figure 6-25. Place 2 of the
point source “B’s” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source holder.
Check that the source exposes the entire detector FOV and that the count
rate is <100 Kcnts/s.
Bipod
Source Holder
Figure 6-25: Energy Calibration Setup

4. Click the <Ecal> button.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Specify the detector number (either 1 or 2) and click the [OK] button.
6. Select the desired PM tune table (PMT).
7. Enter low energy peak (see Table 6-4 - Alternative Isotopes) and select
the [OK] button. The computer will now setup for the acquisition.
8. Click the [Yes] button to start the acquisition.
9. Proceed acquiring the high energy. Enter the energy peak and click the
[OK] button.
10. Start the acquisition by clicking the [Yes] button. The acquisition will
stop and exit automatically.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.14 Geometry Calibration (GeoCal)
GeoCal adjusts the image geometry for symmetry and uniform spatial
registration over the energy range. Four multiple energy point sources are
placed on the outer calibration marks on the crystal surface and two images
are acquired in a dual energy setup. The position of the images of the point
sources are then calculated for both of the two energies. Based on the result,
the normalization table is modified to correct for any mismatch.
With this new normalization table applied, another iteration of acquisition and
calculation is run to check the result. The process is repeated typically three or
four times until numbers are within specification. The result is stored in the
correction file named "geo_cal".

needed during this procedure.
2. Use the Hand-Held Controller to position the detectors as shown in
Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26: GeoCal Procedure Setup
3. Install the GeoCal template which is located in the Spatial Linearity Kit.
4. Position four collimated point sources “B” in Table 6-3 - Calibration
Isotopes through the four outer calibration marks on the template.
6. Click the <GeoCal> button.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7. Enter the low energy peak (see Table 6-4 - Alternative Isotopes) and click
the [OK] button.
8. Enter high the energy peak (see Table 6-4 - Alternative Isotopes) and click
the [OK] button.
9. Select the desired PM tune table (PMT).
10. Start acquisition by clicking the [Yes] button.
11. The acquisition will stop and exit automatically.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.15 PMT Tuning Update
After Dyncor, GeoCal and Ecal calibration, the current PMT tuning file is no
longer valid. The update tuning must be updated before running the energy
and spatial corrections. The PM tune table generated using Tc99m, 140 keV is
normally named "PMT" in the protocols.

needed during the PM-tube update tuning.
2. Position the detectors and bipod as indicated in Figure 6-27. Place point
source “A” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source holder. Check
that the source exposes the entire detector FOV and that the count rate is
<100 Kcnts/s.
Bipod
Source Holder
Figure 6-27: PMT Tuning Setup

4. Click the <PM> tune button.
5. Enter detector number (either 1 or 2) and click the [OK] button.
[OK] button.
7. Select updating of an existing PM tune table (PMT) and click the [OK]
button.
8. The computer will now setup for the acquisition. HV is set at this time.
9. Start acquisition by clicking the [Yes] button.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10. After the acquisition ends, enter the name of the PM tune table (PMT)
created. The PM tune table is normally named "PMT". Refer to Section
6.4.6. The name is entered in the Control Area.
11. Click the [OK] button to save the data and exit.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.16 Energy Correction
Energy correction is a spatially related energy correction map in a 256 x 256

format. The map is generated based on relative count rate information in two
energy windows, one on each side of the chosen isotope peak. The map
generation is an iterative process, like PM tune. Once generated, each address
in the map contains a correction factor that is applied to the energy signal
during acquisitions. The file is stored under a user specified file name in the
"ecorr" directory.
Energy correction generated using Tc-99m, 140 keV is normally named

"Tc-99m" in the protocols.

2. Position the detector and bipod as indicated in Figure 6-17.
Place point source “A” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source
holder. Check that the source exposes the entire detector FOV and that the
count rate is between 20-30 Kcnts/s.
4. Click the <ECOR> button.
5. Specify the detector number (either 1 or 2) and click the [OK] button.
6. Select PM tune table (PMT) and click the [OK] button.
[OK] button.
8. Either update an existing Energy Correction table or create a new table.
9. The computer will now setup for the acquisition.
11. After first correction is completed, the Display Area will show the
previous used correction. Use the tabs in the upper-left of the display area
to switch between current and previous corrections.
12. After acquisition ends, enter the name of the Energy Correction table
created. The ECOR table is normally named "ECOR". Refer to Section
6.4.6. The name is entered in the Control Area.
13. Click the [OK] button to save data and exit.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.17 Linearity Correction
Linearity correction consists of two spatial related position correction maps,

one for the X direction and one for the Y direction. The maps are generated
from two images acquired with X- and Y-linearity phantoms respectively. The
phantoms have a number of very precisely located slits that are identified by
the computer program and all spatial distortions are calculated. The result
translates to the correction maps that are stored under a user specified file in
the "lincorr" directory.
Linearity correction generated using Tc-99m, 140 keV is normally named

"Tc-99m" in the protocols.
1. Remove the collimator from the detector (see Figure 6-17).

2. By means of the Hand-Held Controller, position the detectors as shown in
Figure 6-28. Place the source holder so that it is faces the upright detector.
The holder should be 0.9 m (35 inches) high and a minimum of 3 m
(118 inches) from the detector.
Point Source
0.9 m (35 inches)
3 m, min.
(118 inches)
Figure 6-28: Linearity Correction Setup
3. Install the phantom to acquire X-data. Figure 6-29 on the next page,
shows the phantoms.
WARNING
Do not place high activity sources (such as 3 mCi Co-57) close to an
uncollimated detector.
If exposed, long-term image quality effects may result.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Phantom for
Acquisition of Y Data
Phantom for
Acquisition of X Data
Figure 6-29: Detector Setup for Acquisition of Linearity Correction Data

5. Click the <LinCor> button.
6. Specify detector number (either 1 or 2) and click the [OK] button.
[OK] button.
8. Click <PMT> in the correction button.
9. Click <Energy Correction> in the correction button.
10. Check that the position of the phantom is to acquire X-data and then click
the [OK] button.
11. Position point source “C” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source
holder. Check that the source exposes the entire phantom, less than 40
Kcnts/s.
13. After the acquisition ends, place the phantom to acquire Y-data on the
detector.
Note Requires 80 million counts per termination.
14. Start the acquisition by clicking the [Yes] button

15. After acquisition ends, enter the name of the Linearity Correction table
created. The Linearity Correction table is normally named "Tc-99m". The
name is entered in the Control Area.
16. Click the [OK] button to save data and exit.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.18 Second Order Corrections (SOC)
The detector is always calibrated with a basic isotope, such as Tc-99m or

Co-57. Application of additional isotopes requires a specific spatial correction
for each additional isotope. The spatial corrections for these isotopes are
referred to as Second Order Corrections (SOC). They can be generated
without the use of the linearity phantoms.
The procedure is as follows:
A flood image is acquired with the alternative isotope using the Basic Spatial
Corrections. The calibration program then analyzes the image for
non-uniformities and generates appropriate delta corrections to the Spatial
Corrections, saving it in the lincorr directory as a new Spatial Correction,
with a user-specified name.
CAUTION
Source position is CRITICAL. It must be 3m, 20-25 Kcnts/s, with the
detector at least 89 cm (35 inches) from the floor.
6.4.7.19 Second Order Correction for Co-57
Although Technetium and Cobalt are close in terms of photopeak energy, the
detector shows some non-uniformity when acquiring Cobalt floods with
Technetium corrections. The difference is associated with the spatial
corrections. To get around that problem, it has been decided to make
dedicated Cobalt spatial corrections available for the user.
If the detector is not supplied with dedicated linearity corrections for Co-57,
then they should be made on the site after installation. Co-57 linearity
corrections can easily be made as Second Order Corrections (SOC). This
would normally require a Co-57 point source, but since it is not commonly
available, a detuned Tc-99m spectrum will work as a substitute. Applying a
special PM tune table will make Tc-99m appear as Co-57 to the camera
system.
This type of PM tune table is generated by running an update PM tuning using

a Tc-99 point source, but typing 122 keV for isotope energy. The resulting
PM tune table must be stored under a unique name, such as "Tc-122 keV".
The "Tech.122" file is selected as PM tune table during the SOC generation
together with Technetium Energy Correction and Technetium Linearity
Correction.
Use a Tc-99m point source in front of the detector.
Resulting linearity file should be named "Cobalt".

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6.4.7.20 Alternate Method for Generating Simulated Isotope Peaks
A script in the PMT directory offers a quick method to generate PM tuning

files for artificial energies.
1. Open an Xterm window.

2. Enter the PMT directory, and type movepeak .The following guide
appears:
use: movepeak <filename> <root of new cor> <old peak> <new peak>
3. Fill in the variables as follows:

• In <filename>, type the name of the latest basic tuning file, as shown
in the PMT directory.
• In <root of new cor>, type tech, or any other name.
• In <old peak>, type 140, if the available source is Tc-99m.
• In <new peak>, type 122, if you want to simulate Co-57 using
Tc-99m.
Once these variables have been filled in, a new PM tune file is generated and
appears in the isotope window on the AUI. With the variable listed in Step 3,
the file appears as "tech.122. Selecting file "tech.122" will make Tc-99m
appear as Co-57 in the energy spectrum.
Important If the command "movepeak" is to be repeated (for example, following a PM update

tuning), the previous simulation file must be deleted first.
This can be done by entering the PMT directory: type pcbrowse, enter
<corrections> and delete the file.
6.4.7.21 Second Order Correction (SOC) Procedure
1. Setup as shown in Figure 6-16.

2. Position point source “D” in Table 6-3 - Calibration Isotopes in the source
holder. Check that the count rate is less than 40 Kcnts/s.
4. Click the <SOC> button.
5. Enter the detector's number (either 1 or 2) and click the [OK] button.
6. Enter the additional isotope energy peak (see Table 6-4 - Alternative
Isotopes) and click the [OK] button.
7. Click the [Yes] button to proceed the calibration or click [No] to add a
new window for the second additional isotope energy peak. A total of

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Calibration and Adjustments Acquisition Console
three windows for additional isotope energy peak can be entered. Click
the [OK] button to proceed.
8. Select corrections table, each time clicking the [OK] button:
• Click PMT for tuning corrections
• Click ECOR for energy corrections
• Click Base Spatial correction (i.e., Tc-99m or Co57)
9. Click the [Yes] button to start acquisition.
10. After completing the acquisition, enter the name(s) of the SOC table(s).
This is done in the Control Area.
11. Click the [Yes] button to save data and exit.
6.5 Acquisition Console

Refer to the MG/MC Operator's Reference Manual, Direction 2403797-100
for proper adjustments. Refer to original monitor user's manual, included with
the system, for proper operation and maintenance of the monitor.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 7 - PWB Configuration and Interconnects
7.1 System Overview, Block Diagram

For additional information on how the system operates, refer to Chapter 5, Theory
Note of Operation.
HAND-HELD
CONTROLLER
(GANTRY BUS)
PATIENT TABLE (MAIN AC INPUT)
(TABLE INTERCONNECT)
GANTRY
(COLLISION
(24V DC)
SENSORS)
MOBILE
COMPUTER CART DETECTOR #2
Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse DETECTOR #1
(COLLISION
SENSOR)
(COLLISION
SENSOR)
ACQUISITION TOWER
(ETHERNET)
MODEM
RS-232C
eNTEGRA EKG COLLIMATOR
TRIGGER CART
STARCAM
3000
(PHONE LINE) 4000
40001

Direction 2414259-100 2019
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Gantry
7.2 Gantry
7.2.1 Gantry Block Diagram
J16: HANDSET BUS 4

G16: HANDSET BUS 7
J15: HANDSET BUS 3
J6: TABLE P5
Sw3: RESET
DJ 6
J11: HANDSET
DRIVE DJ 1
DCL 1091 DJ 4

G3: DETECTOR 1
JUNCTION FPJ BE 20
LED4: E-STOP STOP
G14: HANDSET BUS 6
J2: 120VAC OUT

CONNECTOR
BF 5: Z/T AMPLIFIER
J7: TABLE

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.2 Gantry Wiring Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.3
TO Docking Switch
B11
CON DB9F
5
9
4
8
3
2
7
6
1
PWB Configuration and Interconnects

CON DB9M
(G.E. Part # 2193904).
5
9
4
8 6mm SLEEVING Length = 1200mm
VIOLET AWG24
7-4
3
BROWN AWG24
7
YELLOW AWG24
2 AWG24
BLACK
6
Cart Docking and Roll Brake Wiring
1 RED
ORANGE
C8 2 x AWG24
Stripped Wire Ends
to Roll Fan Board
+22v
RED
BLACK 22vRET
Gantry
2019
Rev. 2
7.2.4 Docking Switch Wiring

(G.E. Part # 2187881 / ELGEMS Part # SP320000134).
6 NC B3
2 NO A2
5 NO B2
2 NC A3
DUAL PUSH
SW1
C A1
C 81
Wire Length = 100mm

AWG24
AWG24
AWG24
AWG24
ORANGE
YELLOW
BROWN
VIOLET
1
2
6
5
9
4
8
7
3
CON DB9M
B11

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.5 Roll Lock Assembly

(G.E. Part # 2184438).
SW1
NC
CHANGE 1
POSITION
NO 2
GRAY AWG24
MICROSW
IB 6
SW2
UNLOCK 1
NC
POSITION 1 6
NO 2 2
YELLOW AWG24 7
3
MICROSW VIOLET AWG24 8
BLACK AWG24 4
SW3
9
LOCK NC
1 6
POSITION
NO 2
CON / DB9M
MICROSW
GRAY WHITE
SW4 AWG 20 AWG 20
DETECTORS NC 1 BROWN AWG24
AT H-MODE
NO
2
MICROSW
SW5
WHITE AWG 24
NC
- +
DETECTORS 1
AT L-MODE DC MOTOR
NO
2
MICROSW

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.6 Roll Limit-Switch Board Assembly


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.7 Roll Limit-Switch Board: Logic


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.8 Encoder Assembly, Logic, and Timing

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.9
CABLE LENGTH = 1100mm
HAND SET 1 G1
or or G4
HHC1
HAND SET 2
AWG 24 x 8
1 BLACK BLACK 1
2 BROWN BROWN 9

3 RED RED 2
4 ORANGE ORANGE 10
(G.E. Part # 2193485).
5 YELLOW YELLOW 3
6 GREEN GREEN 11
7 BLUE BLUE 4
8 VIOLET VIOLET 12
RED 5
7-10
BLACK 13
RJ45 / SHLD /F
AWG 24 x 2
1 RED
2 BLACK
CON / DB15M
Wiring for E-Stops and Hand-Held Controller
CABLE LENGTH = 2200mm

Gantry
2019
Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.10 Roll Limit-Switch Connector, SW2

ROLL LIMIT
BOARD
TO
DB9 Male
802M-3
802M-6
802M-7
802M-8
802M-9
802M-5
802M-2
802M-4
802M-1
This (45Cm Wire and Connector) is not part of PBW

C1L100M
-
S
+
C1
R2
GND
RIL 3K01
2
+ 4
-
OP8625
SW2
5
R1L3K01
R1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.11
ROLL MOTOR
WIRED FOR LOW
VOLTAGE
Roll Motor Cable

CONNECTOR
SHELL U1 W2
G12 1
7-13
SCREEN
2 RING_TERM
1 2 3 3 YELLOW / GREEN VI U2
4 BLACK 2 PHASE R 1
4 5 6 5 BLACK 3
6 PHASE T
BLACK 1
8 9 7 RING_TERM
7 V2
8 W1
CABLE 4-WAY SHIELDED, AWG18 800mm LONG
PHASE S 1
9
RING_TERM
TRIAD9
Gantry
2019
Rev. 2
7.2.12 Roll Drive Encoder, Wiring List
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Red +5V G10M.1
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Pink Phase A+ G10M.2
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Grey Phase A- G10M.3
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Green Phase B+ G10M.4
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Yellow Phase B- G10M.5
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 White Index+ G10M.6
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Brown Index- G10M.7
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Blue 5V return G10M.8
Roll Encoder 8-way shielded/AWG24 Shield Shield G10.Shield

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.13 Cable Chain Assembly

(G.E. Part # 2184441 / ELGEMS Part # SP320000043)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.14 Cable Chain Assembly Wiring List
7.2.14.1 Connections for Common Cable, Inner and Outer Ring
Gantry End Cable ID/AWG Color Signal EIPS End, G9

Connector DB25, male
IB5M.5 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Brown A BRAKE- RADIUS 2 G9M.1
IB5M.4 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Red A BRAKE+ RADIUS 2 G9M.14
IB3F.2 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Orange A 24V RET ACSCAN 1 G9M.2
IB3F.1 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Yellow A +24V ACSCAN 1 G9M.15
IB1F.4 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Green A 24V RET,PROX. SENS. 2 G9M.3
lB1F.3 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Blue A +24V PROX. SENS. 2 G9M.16
IB1F.2 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Violet A 24V RET. DETECTOR #2 G9M.4
lB1F.1 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Grey A +24V DETECTOR #2 G9M.17
IB6F.7 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O White A VG-LOCK MOTOR - G9M.5
IB6F.8 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Black B VG-LOCK MOTOR + G9M.18
OB5M.5 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Brown B BRAKE - RADIUS 1 G9M.6
OB5M.4 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Red B BRAKE + RADIUS 1 G9M.19
OB3F.2 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Orange B 24V RET ACSCAN 2 G9M.7
OB3F.1 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Yellow B +24V ACSCAN 2 G9M.20
OB1F.4 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Green B 24V RET,PROX SENS. 1 G9M.8
OB1F.3 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Blue B +24V PROX SENS. 1 G9M.21
OB1F.2 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Violet B 24V RET, DETECTOR #1 G9M.9
OB1F.1 20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Grey B +24V DETECTOR #1 G9M.22
20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O White B - spare - G9M.10
20 Way Ribbon/AWG2O Black B - spare - G9M.23

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.14.2 Connections for Outer Ring Devices, Detector #1
Bracket End Cable ID/AWG Color Signal LIPS End, G3

Connector DB25, Female
OB1F.7 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown A COMM I, PROX.SENS 1 G3F.1
OB1F.8 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red A COMM 2, PROX.SENS 1 G3F. 14
OB1F.9 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange A COMM 3, PROX.SENS 1 G3F.2
OB1F.lO 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow A COMM 4, PROX.SENS 1 G3F.I5
OB1F.I I 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green A COMM 5, PROX.SENS 1 G3F.3
OB3F.3 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue A COMM 1, ACSCAN 2 G3F. 16
0B3F.4 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Violet A COMM 2, ACSCAN 2 G3F.4
OB3F.5 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Grey A COMM 3, ACSCAN 2 G3F. 17
OB3F.6 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 White A COMM 4, ACSCAN 2 G3F.5
OB3F.7 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Black A COMM 5, ACSCAN 2 G3F.18
OB1F.20 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown B COLLIS 1, DETECTOR #1 G3F.6
OB1F.21 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red B COLLIS 2, DETECTOR #1 G3F.19
OB1F.22 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange B COLL. OVR 1, DET #1 G3F.7
OB1F.23 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow B COLL,OVR 2, DET #1 G3F.20
OB1F.25 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green B RADIUS 1 MIN. LIMIT G3F.8
OB1F.I2 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue B RADIUS 1 MAX. LIMIT G3F.21
OB1F.24 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Violet B RADIUS 1 VG POSITION G3F.9
OB1F.13 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Grey B RTNF G3F.22
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 White B - spare - G3F.10
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Black B - spare - G3F.23
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown C - spare - G3F.11
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red C - spare - G3F.24
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange C - spare - G3F.12
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow C - spare - G3F.25
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green C - spare - G3F.13
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue C CUT
DB9, female, G2
OB2M.1 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Red DET #1 TAXI, COMM 1 G2F.1
OB2M.2 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Black DET #1 TAXI, COMM 2 G2F.2
OB2M.SHIELD 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Shield SHIELD G2.SHIELD
OB2M.8 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 White DET #1 TAXI, COMM 3 G2F.8
OB2M.9 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Black DET #1 TAXI, COMM 4 G2F.9
24 pins TRIAD, G11
OB4F.1 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Shield RADIUS 1 ENC. SHIELD G11.SHIELD
OB4F.2 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Black RADIUS 1 ENC. 5V RET G11M.1
OB4F.3 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Brown RADIUS 1 ENC. INDX- G11M.2
OB4F.4 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Orange RADIUS 1 ENC. INDX+ G11M.3
OB4F.5 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Blue RADIUS 1 ENC. PHS B- G11M.4
OB4F.6 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Green RADIUS 1 ENC. PHS B+ G11M.5
OB4F.7 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Yellow RADIUS 1 ENC. PHS A- G11M.6
OB4F.8 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 White RADIUS 1 ENC. PHS A+ G11M.7
OB4F.9 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Red RADIUS 1 ENC. +5V G11M.8
9 pins TRIAD, G13
OB5M.1 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Black 1 MOTOR +, RADIUS 1 G13M.1
OB5M.2 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Black 2 MOTOR -, RADIUS 1 G13M.2
OB5M.3 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Yellow/Green GRND RADIUS 1 G13M.3
Shield MOTOR SHIELD GI3.SHIELD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.14.3 Connections for Inner Ring Devices, Detector #2
Bracket End Cable ID/AWG Color Signal LIPS End, G3

Connector DB25, Female
IB1F.7 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown A COMM I, PROX.SENS 2 G3F.1
IB1F.8 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red A COMM 2, PROX.SENS 2 G3F. 14
IB1F.9 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange A COMM 3, PROX.SENS 2 G3F.2
IB1F.10 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow A COMM 4, PROX.SENS 2 G3F.I5
IB1F.11 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green A COMM 5, PROX.SENS 2 G3F.3
IB1F.3 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue A COMM 1, ACSCAN 1 G3F. 16
IB1F.4 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Violet A COMM 2, ACSCAN 1 G3F.4
IB1F.5 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Grey A COMM 3, ACSCAN 1 G3F. 17
IB1F.6 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 White A COMM 4, ACSCAN 1 G3F.5
IB1F.7 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Black A COMM 5, ACSCAN 1 G3F.18
IB1F.20 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown B COLLIS 1, DETECTOR #2 G3F.6
IB1F.21 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red B COLLIS 2, DETECTOR #2 G3F.19
IB1F.22 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange B COLL. OVR 1, DET #2 G3F.7
IB1F.23 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow B COLL,OVR 2, DET #2 G3F.20
IB1F.25 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green B RADIUS 2 MIN. LIMIT G3F.8
IB1F.12 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue B RADIUS 2 MAX. LIMIT G3F.21
IB1F.24 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Violet B RADIUS 2 VG POSITION G3F.9
IB1F.13 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Grey B RTNF G3F.22
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 White B - spare - G3F.10
IB6F.1 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Black B VG LOCK, SW1 SIGNAL G3F.23
IB6F.2 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Brown C VG LOCK, SW2 SIGNAL G3F.11
IB6F.3 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Red C VG LOCK, SW3 SIGNAL G3F.24
IB6F.4 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Orange C VG LOCK, SW4 SIGNAL G3F.12
IB6F.5 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Yellow C VG LOCK, SW5 SIGNAL G3F.25
IB6F.9 26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Green C VG LOCK, RTNF G3F.13
26 Way Ribbon/AWG28 Blue C CUT
DB9, female, G5
IB2M.1 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Red DET #2 TAXI, COMM 1 G5F.1
IB2M.2 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Black DET #2 TAXI, COMM 2 G5F.2
IB2M.SHIELD 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Shield SHIELD G5.SHIELD
IB2M.8 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 White DET #2 TAXI, COMM 3 G5F.8
IB2M.9 2-TWP, Shielded/AWG24 Black DET #2 TAXI, COMM 4 G5F.9
24 pins TRIAD, G11
IB4F.1 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Shield RADIUS 2 ENC. SHIELD G11.SHIELD
IB4F.2 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Black RADIUS 2 ENC. 5V RET G11M.11
IB4F.3 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Brown RADIUS 2 ENC. INDX- G11M.12
IB4F.4 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Orange RADIUS 2 ENC. INDX+ G11M.13
IB4F.5 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Blue RADIUS 2 ENC. PHS B- G11M.14
IB4F.6 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Green RADIUS 2 ENC. PHS B+ G11M.15
IB4F.7 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Yellow RADIUS 2 ENC. PHS A- G11M.16
IB4F.8 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 White RADIUS 2 ENC. PHS A+ G11M.17
IB4F.9 8 Way Shielded/A WG24 Red RADIUS 2 ENC. +5V G11M.18
9 pins TRIAD, G13
IB5M.1 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Black 1 MOTOR +, RADIUS 2 G13M.7
IB5M.2 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Black 2 MOTOR -, RADIUS 21 G13M.8
IB5M.3 3 Way Shielded/AWG18 Yellow/Green GRND RADIUS 2 G13M.9
Shield MOTOR SHIELD GI3.SHIELD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15 IPS Wiring List

• Male/female connectors have "M" or "F" as the last letter in the name:
for example, G8M.1 and J5F.2.
• MNL plugs are coded with key pins as follows:
BE2: 2 BF3: 2 BJ1: 1
BE4: None BF4: 4 BJ3: 7
BE20: None BF5: None BJ4: 1
BE21: 6 BF8: 1 BJ4: 1
BE24: 1 BF8: 1 BJ5: 3
BE24: 1
• CPC connectors are coded with key pins as follows:

J5: 10,20,30 J6: 9,18 J7: 9
• Thomas & Betts connectors are coded with key pins as follows:
G10: None G11: None G12: 1 G13: 5
• Connections:
Item Designation Section
Connections on PSU Board BE2, BE4, BE16, 7.2.15.1

BE18-BE21, BE23-BE24
Connections on MUX Board BF1-BF8 7.2.15.2

Connections on Motor Amplifier Backplane BJ1-BJ5, BJ7 7.2.15.3
Grounding connections EIPS.CHASS, RCP.CHASS, 7.2.15.4
BOX.CHASS
Circuit breakers on IPS CB1-CB3 7.2.15.5

Connections on CAN Bus Controller CJ1, CJ2 7.2.15.6
Connections on Drive DCL1091 DJ1-DJ6 7.2.15.7
Filters on IPS F1, F2 7.2.15.8
Connections on Gantry Connector Panel G1-G17 7.2.15.9
Connections on IPS Connector Panel J1-J17 7.2.15.10
AC lamps on IPS LAMP1, LAMP2 7.2.15.11
LEDs on IPS LED1, LED2 7.2.15.12
Connections on Controller SB214 SB1-SB19 7.2.15.13
Switches on IPS SW1, SW2 7.2.15.14
Junction for fan power FPJ 7.2.15.15
Voltage selector on transformer VSE 7.2.15.16
Connections on MEC Board P4, P5, P6 7.2.15.17

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.1 Connectors on PSU Board (BE2, BE4, BE18-21, BE23-BE24)
Conn. AWG Color Cable ID Conn. Signal. Name I Comments
BE2.1 I8 Black 2+GND - 6CBL0058 DJ5F.L POWER L FOR DCL1O91

BE2.2 NO CONNECTION
BE2.3 NO CONNECTION
BE2.4 I8 White 2+GND - 6CBL0058 DJ5F.N POWER N FOR DCL1091
BE4.1 24 Blue J17F.1 POWER SAVE RELAY 1

BE4.2 NO CONNECTION
BE4.3 24 Blue SINGLE - 6CBL0181 J17F.6 POWER SAVE RELAY 2
BE4.4 NO CONNECTION
BE4.5 NO CONNECTION
BE4.6 NO CONNECTION
BE4.7 16 Blue SINGLE - 6CBL0181 CB3.1 SEC. 120V 2
BE4.8 NO CONNECTION
BE4.9 I8 Black 2+GND - 6CBL0058 SB18.1 SB AC-
BE4.10 NO CONNECTION
BE4.13 16 Blue SINGLE - 6CBL0168 F2.LOAD1 SEC. 120V 1
BE4.14 NO CONNECTiON
BE4.15 18 White 2+GND - 6CBL0058 SB18.2 SB AC+ (POWER SAVE)
BE16F.1 24 Blue SINGLE - 6CBL0181 G1M.5 E-STOP GTRY LFT 1

BE16F.2 24 Yellow SINGLE - 6CBL0492 G4M.5 E-STOP GTRYRGT 1
BE16F.3 24 Red SINGLE - 6CBL0182 J6F.3 E-STOP TBL LFT 1
BE16F.4 24 Grey SINGLE - 6CBL0512 J6F.24 E-STOP TBL RGT 1
BE16F.5 24 Grey SINGLE - 6CBL0512 BE16F.13 E-STOP SPARE
BE16F.6 NO CONNECTION
BE16F.7 24 Black SINGLE - 6CBL0489 LED3- E-STOP RUN LED-
BE16F.8 24 Brown SINGLE - 6CBL0384 LED4- E-STOP STOP LED-
BE16F.9 24 Green SINGLE - 6CBL0493 G1M.13 E-STOP GTRY LFT 2
BE16F.10 24 Orange SINGLE - 6CBL0490 G4M.13 E-STOP GTRY RGT 2
BE16F.11 24 Black SINGLE - 6CBL0489 J6F.31 E-STOP TBL LFT 2
BE16F.12 24 Brown SINGLE - 6CBL0384 J6F.25 E-STOP TBL RGT 2
BE16F.13 24 Grey SINGLE - 6CBL0512 BE16F.5 E-STOP SPARE
BE16F.14 24 Red SINGLE - 6CBL0182 LED3+ E-STOP RUN LED+
BE16F.15 24 Violet SINGLE - 6CBL0494 LED4+ E-STOP STOP LED+

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Conn. AWG Color Cable ID Conn. Signal Name/Comments
BE18M.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G3M.6 COLLISION DET1 1
BE18M.2 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLL. OVERRIDE DET1/DOCK 1
G3M.7 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1 1
G8F.9 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK 1
BE18M.3 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G6M.6 COLLISION DET2 1
BE18M.4 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G6M.7 COLLISION OVERRIDE DET2 1
BE18M.5 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 G7F.11 ULT. ROLL LIMIT1
BE18M.6 NO CONNECTION
BE18M.7 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 LED1- COLLISION RUN LED-
BE18M.8 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 LED2- COLLISION STOP LED-
BE18M.9 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G3M.19 COLLISION DET1 2
BE18M.10 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLL OVERRIDE DET1/DOCK 2
G3M.20 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1 2
G8F.8 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK 2
BE18M.11 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G6M.19 COLLISION DET2 2
BE18M.12 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G6M.20 COLLISION OVERRIDE DET2 2
BE18M.13 24 White Single - 6CBL0431 P6-2 COLLISION LATCH 2
BE18M.14 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 LED1+ COLLISION RUN LED+
BE18M.15 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 LED2+ COLLISION STOP LED+
BE19.1-2 NO CONNECTIONS
BE20.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 FPJ.1 FAN POWER
BE20.2 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 FPJ.2 FAN POWER RETURN
BE21.3 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.1 +65V, BACKPLANE
BJ3.3 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.1
BE21.4 20 Black Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.2 65V RETURN, BACKPLANE
BE21.6 Key Pin NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BE23M.5 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 G9F.9 24V RETURN, DETECTOR #1
BE23M.6 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 G9F.8 24V RETURN, PROXIM.SENS. 1
BE23M.7 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 G9F.7 24V RETURN, A.C.SCANNER 2
BE23M.10 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 G9F.4 24V RETURN, DETECTOR #2
BE23M.11 20 Brown Single - 6C8L0485 G9F.3 24V RETURN, PROXIM.SENS. 2
BE23M.12 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 G9F.2 24V RETURN, A.C.SCANNER 1
BE23M.17 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 G9F.22 +24V, DETECTOR #1
BE23M.18 20 Yellow Single - 6CBL0123 G9F.21 +24V, PROXIM.SENS. 1
BE23M.19 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 G9F.20 +24V, A.C.SCANNER 2
BE23M.22 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 G9F.17 +24V, DETECTOR #2
BE23M.23 20 Yellow Single - 6CBL0123 G9F.16 +24V, PROXIM.SENS. 2
BE23M.24 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 G9F.15 +24V, A.C.SCANNER 1
BE24.1 Key Pin NO CONNECTION
BE24.2 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF8.2 SB RTNF
BE24.3 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BF8.3 +24V
BE24.4 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF8.4 /COLLISION
BE24.5 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BF8.5 24V RETURN

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.2 Connectors on MUX Board (BF1-BF8
BF1M.1 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 G8F.5 BRAKE +, ROLL
BF1M.2 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 J7F.3 BRAKE +, VERTICAL
BF1M.3 NO CONNECTION
BF1M.8 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 G9F.6 BRAKE -, RADIUS 1
BF1M.9 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 G9F.18 LOCK MOTOR +
BF1M.13 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 G9F.1 BRAKE -, RADIUS 2
BF1M.14 20 Brown Single - 6C8L0485 G8F.6 BRAKE -, ROLL
BF1M.15 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 J7F.4 BRAKE -, VERTICAL
BF1M.20 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 G9F.19 BRAKE +, RADIUS 1
BF1M.21 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 G9F.5 LOCK MOTOR -
BF1M.25 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 G9F.14 BRAKE +, RADIUS 2
BF2F.1 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BF2F.4 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G3M.22 RTNF FOR RAD 1 LIMITS

BF2F.5 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 J6F.20 LATERAL MIN. LIMIT
BF2F.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J6F.22 VERTICAL MIN. LIMIT
BF2F.7 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G7F.8 SW2 ROLL LIMIT
BF2F.8 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G6M.12 VG LOCK DH POSITION (SW4)
BF2F.9 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G6M.11 VG LOCK/LOCK (SW2)
BF2F.10 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 J6F.23 RTNF FOR VERT/LAT LIMITS
BF2F.10 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G6M.13 RTNF FOR VG LOCK
BF2F.10 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G6M.22 RTNF FOR RAD 2 LIMIT
BF2F.11 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G6M.21 RADIUS 2 MAX. LIMIT
BF2F.12 24 Green 3 Way - 6CBL0467 G3M.9 RADIUS 1 VG POSITION
BF2F.13 24 Black 3 Way - 6CBL0467 G3M.8 RADIUS 1 MIN. LIMIT
BF2F.16 24 Violet Single - 6C8L0494 G8F.3 DOCK POSITION
BF2F.17 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 J6F.19 LATERAL MAX. LIMIT
BF2F.18 24 Green Single - 6C8L0493 J6F.21 VERTICAL MAX. LIMIT
BF2F.19 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G7F.9 SW5 ROLL LIMIT
BF2F.20 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G6M.25 VG LOCK VG POSITION (SW5)
BF2F.21 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G6M.24 VG LOCK /UNLOCK (SW3)
BF2F.22 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G6M.23 VG LOCK /T POSITION (SW1)
BF2F.23 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G6M.9 RADIUS 2 VG POSITION
BF2F.24 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G6M.8 RADIUS 2 MIN. LIMIT
BF2F.25 24 Red Single - 6CBL0467 G3M.21 RADIUS 1 MAX. LIMIT
BF3.1 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13F.1 MOTOR +, RADIUS 1

BF3.2 Key Pin NO CONNECTION
BF3.3 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13.CHASS GND/SHIELD, RADIUS 2a
G13F.9 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 G13.CHASS GND, RADIUS 2
BF3.4 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13F.2 MOTOR -, RADIUS 1
BF3.5 NO CONNECTION
BF3.6 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13F.8 MOTOR -, RADIUS 2
BF3.7 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13.CHASS a
GND/SHIELD, RADIUS 1
BF3.8 NO CONNECTION
BF3.9 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13F.7 MOTOR +, RADIUS 2
a. The shield is soldered to both ends of the Yellow/Green wire before the wire is connected.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BF4.1 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.1 MOTOR +, VERTICAL

BF4.2 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.2 MOTOR +, VERTICAL
BF4.3 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7.CHASS GND/SHIELD, VERTICALa
BF4.4 Key Pin NO CONNECTION
BF4.5 NO CONNECTION
BF4.6 NO CONNECTION
BF4.7 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7-CHASS a
GND/SHIELD, LATERAL
BF4.8 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.6 MOTOR -, LATERAL
BF4.9 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.5 MOTOR +, LATERAL
BF5.1 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ4.1 Z AMP +, LAT/RAD 2

BF5.2 NO CONNECTION
BF5.3 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ5.4 T AMP +, LAT/RAD 1
BF5.4 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 NC GND/SHIELD, LAT/RAD2a
BF5.5 NO CONNECTION
BF5.6 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 NC a
GND/SHIELD, VERT/RAD1
BF5.7 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ4.7 Z AMP -, LAT/RAD 2
BF5.8 NO CONNECTION
BF5.9 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ5.7 T AMP -, VERT/RAD 1
BF5.10 NO CONNECTION
BF6M.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.16 24VF1 FOR RELAYS

G7F.1 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB17.16 24VF1 FOR ROLL LIMIT
BF6.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB14.2 OUT2, DRIVES LAT/RAD2 RELAY
BF6.3 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 SB14.4 OUT4, SPARE 1
BF6.4 NO CONNECTION
BF6.5 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 SB14.9 OUT8, LOCK MOTOR ENABLE
BF6.6 NO CONNECTION
BF6.7 NO CONNECTION
BF6.8 NO CONNECTION
BF6.9 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 SB2.6 Z_EN+
BF6.12 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 SB17.5 IN4, /T POS OR SPARE 1
BF6.13 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 SB17.8 IN6, /LOCK OR SPARE 2
BF6.14 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB17.10 IN8, /UNLOCK OR SW2 ROLL

Direction 2414259-100 2019

BF6M.15 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 SB17.12 1N9, /COLLISION
P5.13 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 SB17.12 COLLISION IN
BF6M.18 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SB17.19 IN15, DH POS OR RAD 1 VG
BF6M.19 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 SB14.5 RTNF
G7F.15 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB14.5 RTNF FOR ROLL LIMITS
BF6M.20 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB14.1 OUT1, DRIVES VERT/RAD 1 RELAY
BF6M.21 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SB14.3 OUT3, DRIVES MUX RELAY 1
BF6M.23 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 SB14.8 OUT7, LOCK MOTOR TRIG\
BF6M.27 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 SB3.5 Y_EN- (ROLL - ACTIVE LOW)
BF6M.28 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 SB1.6 T_EN+
BF6M.32 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 SB17.9 IN7, SPARE 3 OR SW5 ROLL
BF6M.36 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 SB17.18 E-STOP
P5.2 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0494 SB17.18 ES IN
BF6M.37 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 SB17.20 IN16, VG POS OR RAD2 VG
BF7M.2 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SB19.3 LLT, LEFT LIMIT T-AXIS
BF7M.3 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 SB19.5 LLZ, LEFT LIMIT Z-AXIS
J5F.33 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB19.2 RTNF FOR LONGITUD. LIMITS
BF7M.7 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB19.4 RLT, RIGHT LIMIT T-AXIS
BF7M.8 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 SB19.6 RLZ, RIGHT LIMIT Z-AXIS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BF8.1 KEY PIN NO CONNECTION

BF8.2 24 BLUE Single - 6CBL0181 BE24.2 SB RTNF
BF8.3 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 BE24.3 +24V
BF8.4 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BE24.4 /COLLISION
BF8.5 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BE24.5 +24V RETURN
BF8.6 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.3 Connectors on Motor Amplifier Backplane (BJ1-BJ5, BJ7)
BJ1.1 24 Key Pin NO CONNECTION
BJ1.2 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.3 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.4 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.7 X_AMP+, LONGITUDINAL
BJ1.5 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.6 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.7 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 J7F.8 X_AMP-, LONGITUDINAL
BJ1.8 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.9 NO CONNECTION
BJ1.10 NO CONNECTION
BJ2.1-15 NO CONNECTIONS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BJ3.1 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BE21.3 +65V, BACKPLANE

BJ3.1 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.3
BJ3.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BE21.4 65V RETURN, BACKPLANE
BJ3.3 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.1 +65V, BACKPLANE
BE21.3 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BJ3.1
BJ3.4 NO CONNECTION
BJ3.5 NO CONNECTION
BJ3.6 NO CONNECTION
BJ3.7 Key Pin NO CONNECTION
BJ3.8 NO CONNECTION
BJ3.9 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.1 Key Pin NO CONNECTIONS

BJ4.2 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.3 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.4 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF5.1
BJ4.5 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.6 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.7 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF5.7
BJ4.8 NO CONNECTION
BJ4.9 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.1 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.2 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.3 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.4 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF5.3 T_AMP+, VERT/RAD 1
BJ5.5 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.6 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.7 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF5.9 T_AMP-, VERT/RAD 1
BJ5.8 NO CONNECTION
BJ5.9 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
BJ7F.1 24 Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.1 X-EN, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.2 24 Orange 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.2 X-PWM0 (0-5V)
BJ7F.3 24 Blue 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.3 X-STL
BJ7F.4 NO CONNECTION
BJ7F.6 24 White 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.6 5VF
BJ7F.7 24 Green 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.7 RTNF
BJ7F.8 24 Black 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.8 -12VF
BJ7F.9 24 Red/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.9 Z-FLT, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.10 24 Red/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.10 Z-PWM1 (0-5V)
BJ7F.11 24 Red/Grn 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.11 T-EN, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.12 24 Ora/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.12 T-PWM0 (0-5V)
BJ7F.13 24 Ora/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.131 T-STL
BJ7F.14 24 Blu/Wht 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.14 X-FLT, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.15 24 Blu/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.15 X-PWM1 (0-5V)
BJ7F.16 24 Blu/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.16 Y-ENABLE, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.19 24 Wh/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.19 +12VF
BJ7F.21 24 Wh/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.21 Z-EN, ACTIVE LOW
BJ7F.22 24 Grn/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.22
BJ7F.23 24 Grn/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.23
BJ7F.24 24 Blk/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.24
BJ7F.25 24 Blk/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.25

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.4 Grounding Connections
EIPS.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 BUTT PROT. GND FOR DCL1091

SPLICE
DJ5F. GND 18 Green Single - 6CBL0058 BUTT

SPLICE
EIPS.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 BUTT PROT. GND FOR SB214

SPLICE
SB18.3 18 Green Single - 6CBL0058 BUTT

SPLICE
EIPS.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0510 RCP.CHASS PROT. GND
RCP.CHASS 14 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0510 EIPS.CHASS PROT. GND
BOX.CHASS - - Soldered F1.GND GROUND, MAINS FILTER
BOX.CHASS - - Soldered F1.GND GROUND, 12V FILTER
BOX.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J1F.GND PROTECTIVE GROUND, MAINS
BOX.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J2M.GND PROTECTIVE GROUND, 120V OUT
BOX.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J3M.GND PROTECTIVE GROUND, 120V

POWER SAVE
J4M.GND 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J3M.GND -

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.5 Circuit Breakers (CB1-CB3)
CB1.1 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB2.1 MAINS L (AFTER FILTER)
CB1.1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 F1.LOAD1
CB1.2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 VSE.2 PRM1 L
CB1.3 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB2.3 MAINS N (AFTER FILTER)
CB1.3 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 F1.LOAD2
CB1.4 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 VSE.1 PRM1 N
CB2.1 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB1.1 MAINS L (AFTER FILTER)
F1.LOAD1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 CB1.1
CB2.2 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 VSE.4 PRM2 L
CB2.3 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB1.3 MAINS N (AFTER FILTER)
F1.LOAD2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0334 CB1.3
CB2.4 16 Black Single - 6CBL0410 VSE.3 PRM2 N
CB3.1 16 Blue Single - 6CBL0168 BE4.7 SEC. 120V 2
CB3.2 16 Blue Single - 6CBL0168 F2.LOAD2 SEC. 120V 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.6 Connectors on CAN Bus Controller (CJ1, CJ2)
CJ1F.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G17M.4 CAN_GROUND
CJ1F.2 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G17M.5 CANH
CJ1F.3 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G17M.6 CANL
CJ1F.4 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G17M.3 CAN POWER
CJ1F.5 NO CONNECTION
CJ2F.1 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 P4.1 LGND
CJ2F.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 P4.6 HANDSET 1
CJ2F.3 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 P4.2 HANDSET 2
CJ2F.4 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 P4.7 HANDSET 3
CJ2F.5 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 P4.3 +5V DC
CJ2F.7 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 P4.4 HANDSET 4
CJ2F.8 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 P4.9 HANDSET 5
CJ2F.9 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 P4.5 HANDSET 6
CJ2F.10 24 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.7 Connectors on Drive DCL1091 (DJ1-DJ6)
DJ1F.1 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.6 EN-ON DCL1091
DJ1F.2 NO CONNECTION
DJ1F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 SB19.8 RL-
G7F.13 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB19.8 RLY, ROLL MAX. LIMIT
DJ1F.8 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB19.7 LL-
G7F.14 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 SB19.7 LLY, ROLL MIN. LIMIT
DJ1F.9a 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7 RTNF
a 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7 RTNF

DJ1F.11
a 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7 RTNF

DJ1F.24
a Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7 SHIELD

DJ1F.25
BF6M.24 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 SB3.7 RTNF
G8F.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB3.7 RTNF FOR DOCK POSITION
DJ1F.12 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.9 V0
DJ1F.14 24 Black 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB14.10 24VF1 FOR EN+ ON DCL1091
DJ1F.20 24 Green 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB14.10 24VF1 FOR RL+ ON DCL1091
DJ1F.21 24 Red 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB14.10 24VF1 FOR LL+ ON DCL1091
SB14.10 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BUTT SPLICE 24VF1 FOR DCL1091
a. The three wires are soldered to the shield, which is then connected to SB3.7

Direction 2414259-100 2019
DJ2F.1-9 NO CONNECTIONS
DJ3M.1-9 NO CONNECTIONS
DJ4F.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.2 PHASE A+ ROLL ENCODER
G10F.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.2
DJ4F.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.3 PHASE A- ROLL ENCODER
G10F.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.3
DJ4F.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.4 PHASE B+ ROLL ENCODER
G10F.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.4
DJ4F.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.5 PHASE B- ROLL ENCODER
G10F.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6
DJ4F.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 DJ4F.15 MTMP MOTOR TEMP.SENSE
DJ4F.9 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6 INDEX+ ROLL ENCODER
G10F.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6
DJ4F.10 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6 INDEX- ROLL ENCODER
G10F.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.7
DJ4F.11 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6 5VRET ROLL ENCODER
G10F.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.8
DJ4F.12 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.9 SHIELD ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.15 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 DJ4F.6 MTMP MOTOR TEMP.SENSE
DJ5F.L 18 Black 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BE2.1 POWER L FOR DCL1091
DJ5F.N 18 White 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BE2.4 POWER N FOR DCL1091
DJ5F.GND 18 Green 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BUTT SPLICE PROT. GND FOR DCL1091
EIPS.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 BUTT SPLICE
DJ6.MR 19 Black_2 3+GND - 6CBL0496 G12F.4 PHASE_R, ROLL MOTOR
DJ6.MS 19 Black_3 3+GND - 6CBL0496 G12F.5 PHASE_S, ROLL MOTOR
DJ6.MT 19 Black_1 3+GND - 6CBL0496 G12F.6 PHASE_T, ROLL MOTOR
DJ6.EGND 19 Yel/Grn 3+GND - 6CBL0496 G12.CHASS GND/SHIELD, ROLL MOTORa
a. The shield is soldered to both ends of the yellow/green wire before the wire is connected.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.8 Filters (F1, F2)
F1.LINE1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 SW1.5 MAINS L (AFTER SWITCH)
LAMP1.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW1.5
F1.LINE2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 SW1.2 MAINS N (AFTER SWITCH)
F1.LOAD1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 CB1.1 MAINS L (AFTER FILTER)
CB2.1 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB1.1
F1.LOAD2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 CB1.3 MAINS N (AFTER FILTER)
CB2.3 16 Black Single - 6CBL0310 CB1.3
F1.GND Soldered BOX.CHASS GND, MAINS FILTER
F2.LINE1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J2M.N 120V OUT 1
F2.LINE1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J4M.N 120V POWER SAVE 1
J3M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J4M.N
J3M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP2.1
F2.LINE2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J2M.L 120V OUT 2
F2.LINE2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW2.2 120V POWER SAVE 2
F2.LOAD1 16 Blue Single - 6CBL0168 BE4.13 SEC. 120V 1
F2.LOAD2 16 Blue Single - 6CBL0168 CB3.2 SEC. 120V 2
F2.GND Soldered BOX.CHASS GND, 120V FILTER

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.9 Connectors on Gantry Connector Panel (G1-G17)
G1M.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G14F.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G1M.2 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G14F.3 CAN_POWER
G1M.3 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G14F.5 CANH
G1M.4 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G14F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G1M.5 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BE16F.1 E-STOP GANTRY LFT 1
G1M.6 NO CONNECTION
G1M.6 NO CONNECTION
G1M.8 NO CONNECTION
G1M.9 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G14F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G1M.10 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G14F.4 CAN_GROUND
G1M.11 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G14F.6 CANL
G1M.12 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G14F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
G1M.13 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BE16F.9 E-STOP GANTRY LFT 2
G1M.14 NO CONNECTION
G2M.1 24 Red 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J8F.1 TAXI1 - COM1
G2M.2 24 Black 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J8F.2 TAXI1 - COM2
G2M.3 NO CONNECTION
G2M.4 NO CONNECTION
G2M.5 NO CONNECTION
G2M.6 NO CONNECTION
G2M.6 NO CONNECTION
G2M.8 24 White 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J8F.8 TAXI1 - COM3
G2.CHASS Shield 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J8F.CHASS TAXI1 - SHIELD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G3M.1 NO CONNECTION
G3M.2 NO CONNECTION
G3M.3 NO CONNECTION
G3M.4 NO CONNECTION
G3M.5 NO CONNECTION
G3M.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BE18M.1 COLLISION DET1 1
BE18M.2 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1/DOCK1
G8F.9 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK1
G3M.8 24 Black 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BF2F.13 RADIUS1 MIN. LIMIT
G3M.9 24 Green 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BF2F.12 RADIUS1 VG POSITION
G3M.19 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BE18M.9 COLLISION DET1 2
BE18M.10 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1/DOCK2
G8F.8 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK2
G3M.21 24 Red 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BF2F.25 RADIUS1 MAX. LIMIT
G3M.22 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF2F.4 RTNF FOR RAD1 LIMITS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G4M.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G15F.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G4M.2 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G15F.3 CAN_POWER
G4M.3 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G15F.5 CANH
G4M.4 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G15F7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G4M.5 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BE16F.10 E-STOP GANTRY RGT 1
G4M.6 NO CONNECTION
G4M.7 NO CONNECTION
G4M.8 NO CONNECTION
G4M.9 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G15F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G4M.10 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G15F.4 CAN_GROUND
G4M.11 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G15F.6 CANL
G4M.12 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G15F7 HANDSET SPARE 4
G4M.13 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BE16F.2 E-STOP GANTRY RGT 2
G5M.1 24 Red 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J9F.1 TAXI2 - COM1
G5M.2 24 Black 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J9F.2 TAX2 - COM2
G5M.3 NO CONNECTION
G5M.4 NO CONNECTION
G5M.5 NO CONNECTION
G5M.6 NO CONNECTION
G5M.7 NO CONNECTION
G5M.8 24 White 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J9F.8 TAXI2 - COM3
G5.CHASS Shield 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 J9.CHASS TAXI2 - SHIELD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G6M.1 NO CONNECTION
G6M.2 NO CONNECTION
G6M.3 NO CONNECTION
G6M.4 NO CONNECTION
G6M.5 NO CONNECTION
G6M.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BE18M.3 COLLISION DET2 1
G6M.7 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BE18M.4 COLLISION OVERRIDE DET2 1
G6M.8 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BF2F.24 RADIUS2 MIN. LIMIT
G6M.9 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BF2F.23 RADIUS2 VG POSITION
G6M.10 24 NO CONNECTION
G6M.11 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BF2F.9 VG LOCK /LOCK (SW2)
G6M.12 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BF2F.8 VG LOCK DH POSITION (SW4)
G6M.13 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB14.15 RTNF FOR VG LOCK
G6M.22 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 SB14.15 RTNF FOR RAD2 LIMITS
G6M.19 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BE18M.11 COLLISION DET2 2
G6M.20 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BE18M.12 COLLISION OVERRIDE DET2 2
G6M.21 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF2F.11 RADIUS2 MAX. LIMIT
G6M.22 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF2F.10 RTNF FOR RAD2 LIMITS
G6M.13 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BF2F.10 RTNF FOR VG LOCK
G6M.23 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF2F.22 VG LOCK /T POSITION (SW1)
G6M.24 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF2F.21 VG LOCK /UNLOCK (SW3)
G6M.25 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BF2F.20 VG LOCK VG POSITION (SW5)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G7F.1 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB17.16 24V1 FOR ROLL LIMIT

BF6M.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.16 24V1 FOR RELAYS
G7F.2 NO CONNECTION
G7F.3 NO CONNECTION
G7F.4 NO CONNECTION
G7F.5 NO CONNECTION
G7F.6 NO CONNECTION
G7F.7 NO CONNECTION
G7F.8 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BF2F.7 SW2 ROLL LIMIT
G7F.9 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BF2F.19 SW5 ROLL LIMIT
G7F.10 NO CONNECTION
G7F.11 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 BE18M.5 ULT. ROLL LIMIT 1
G7F.12 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 P6.1 COLLISION LATCH 1
G7F.13 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB19.8 RLY, ROLL MAX. LIMIT
DJ1F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 SB19.8 RL-
G7F.14 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 SB19.7 LLY, ROLL MIN. LIMIT
DJ1F.8 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB19.7 LL-
G7F.15 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB14.5 RTNF FOR ROLL LIMITS
G8F.1 NO CONNECTION
G8F.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB3.7 RTNF FOR DOCK POSITION
DJ1F.9a 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7 RTNF
a 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7

DJ1F.11
a 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7

DJ1F.24
a Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB3.7

DJ1F.25
G8F.3 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 BF2F.16 DOCK POSITION
G8F.4 NO CONNECTION
G8F.5 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 BF1M.1 BRAKE+, ROLL
G8F.6 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BF1M.14 BRAKE-, ROLL
G8F.7 NO CONNECTION
G8F.8 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK 2
BE18M.10 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1/ DOCK 2
G8F.9 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DOCK 1
BE18M.2 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BUTT SPLICE COLLISION OVERRIDE DET1/ DOCK 1
a. The three wires are soldered to the shield, which is then connected to SB3.7

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G9F.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BF1M.13 BRAKE-, RADIUS 2
G9F.2 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BE23M.12 24V RETURN, A.C. SCANNER 1
G9F.3 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BE23M.11 24V RETURN, PROXIM. SENS. 2
G9F.4 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BE23M.10 24V RETURN, DETECTOR #2
G9F.5 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BF1M.21 LOCK MOTOR-
G9F.6 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BF1M.8 BRAKE-, RADIUS 1
G9F.7 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BE23M.7 24V RETURN, A.C. SCANNER 2
G9F.8 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BE23M.6 24V RETURN, PROXIM. SENS. 1
G9F.9 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 BE23M.5 24V RETURN, DETECTOR #1
G9F.14 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BF1M.25 BRAKE+, RADIUS 2
G9F.15 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 BE23M.24 +24V, A.C. SCANNER 1
G9F.16 20 Yellow Single - 6CBL0123 BE23M.23 +24V, PROXIM. SENS. 2
G9F.17 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BE23M.22 +24V, DETECTOR #2
G9F.18 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BF1M.21 LOCK MOTOR+
G9F.19 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BF1M.20 BRAKE+, RADIUS 1
G9F.20 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 BE23M.19 +24V, A.C. SCANNER 2
G9F.21 20 Yellow Single - 6CBL0123 BE23M.9 +24V, PROXIM. SENS. 1
G9F.22 20 Red Single - 6CBL0486 BE23M.17 +24V, DETECTOR #1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G10F.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.1 +5V ROLL ENCODER Y#1
G10F.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.2 PHASE A+ ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.2
G10F.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.3 PHASE A- ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.3
G10F.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.4 PHASE B+ ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.4
G10F.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.5 PHASE B- ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.5
G10F.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6 INDEX+ ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.9 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.6
G10F.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.7 INDEX- ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.10 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.7
G10F.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.8 5VRET ROLL ENCODER
DJ4F.11 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB7.8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G11F.1 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.8 5VRET RAD.1 ENCODER T#1
G11F.2 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.7 INDEX- RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.3 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.6 INDEX+ RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.4 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.5 PHASE B- RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.5 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.4 PHASE B+ RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.6 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.3 PHASE A- RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.7 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.2 PHASE A+ RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.8 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.1 +5V RAD.1 ENCODER
G11F.11 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.8 5VRET RAD.2 ENCODER Z#1
G11F.12 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.7 INDEX- RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.13 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.6 INDEX+ RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.14 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.5 PHASE B- RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.15 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.4 PHASE B+ RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.16 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.3 PHASE A- RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.17 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.2 PHASE A+ RAD.2 ENCODER
G11F.18 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB5.1 +5V RAD.2 ENCODER
G12F.3 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 G12.CHASS GND, ROLL MOTOR
G12F.4 19 Black_2 3+GND - 6CBL0496 DJ6.MR PHASE R, ROLL MOTOR
G12F.5 19 Black_3 3+GND - 6CBL0496 DJ6.MS PHASE S, ROLL MOTOR
G12F.6 19 Black_1 3+GND - 6CBL0496 DJ6.MT PHASE T, ROLL MOTOR
G12.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 3+GND - 6CBL0496 DJ6.EGND GND/SHIELD, ROLL MOTORa
G12.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 G12F.3 GND, ROLL MOTOR

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G13F.1 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.1 MOTOR+, RADIUS 1
G13F.2 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.4 MOTOR-, RADIUS 1
BF3.7 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13.CHASS GND/SHIELD, RADIUS 1a
G13F.7 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.9 MOTOR+, RADIUS 2
G13F.8 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.6 MOTOR-, RADIUS 2
BF3.3 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 G13.CHASS a

G13.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.3 a

G13.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF3.7 a

G13.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 G13F.3 GND, RADIUS 1
G13.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 G13F.9 GND, RADIUS 2
G14F.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G1M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G14F.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G1M.9 HANDSET SPARE 2
G14F.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G1M.2 CAN_POWER
G14F.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G1M.10 CAN_GROUND
G14F.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G1M.3 CANH
G14F.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G1M.11 CANL
G14F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G1M.4 HANDSET SPARE 3
G14F.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G1M.12 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G14M.1 28 Brown G15M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G14M.1 28 Brown G15M.1
G14M.1 28 Brown G17F.1
G14M.2 28 Orange G15M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G14M.2 28 Orange G15M.2
G14M.2 28 Orange G17F.2
G14M.3 28 Green G15M.3 CAN_POWER
G14M.3 28 Green G15M.3
G14M.3 28 Green G17F.3
G14M.4 28 Violet G15M.4 CAN_GROUND
G14M.4 28 Violet G15M.4
G14M.4 28 Violet G17F.4
G14M.5 28 White G15M.5 CANH
G14M.5 28 White G15M.5
G14M.5 28 White G17F.5
G14M.6 28 Red G15M.6 CANL
G14M.6 28 Red G15M.6
G14M.6 28 Red G17F.6
G14M.7 28 Yellow G15M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G14M.7 28 Yellow G15M.7
G14M.7 28 Yellow G17F.7
G14M.8 28 Blue G15M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
G14M.8 28 Blue G15M.8
G14M.8 28 Blue G17F.8
G15F.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G4M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G15F.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G4M.9 HANDSET SPARE 2
G15F.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G4M.2 CAN_POWER
G15F.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G4M.10 CAN_GROUND
G15F.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G4M.3 CANH
G15F.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G4M.11 CANL
G15F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G4M.4 HANDSET SPARE 3
G15F.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G4M.12 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G15M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G15M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.1
G15M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G15M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.2
G15M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.3 CAN_POWER
G15M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.3
G15M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.4 CAN_GROUND
G15M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.4
G15M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.5 CANH
G15M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.5
G15M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.6 CANL
G15M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.6
G15M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G15M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.7
G15M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
G15M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.8
G16F.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J16M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G16F.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 J16M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G16F.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 J16M.3 CAN_POWER
G16F.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J16M.4 CAN_GROUND
G16F.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 J16M.5 CANH
G16F.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 J16M.6 CANL
G16F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 J16M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G16F.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 J16M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G16M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G16M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.1
G16M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G16M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.2
G16M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.3 CAN_POWER
G16M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.3
G16M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.4 CAN_GROUND
G16M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.4
G16M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.5 CANH
G16M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.5
G16M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.6 CANL
G16M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.6
G16M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G16M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.7
G16M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G15M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
G16M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G17F.8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
G17F.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
G17F.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
G17F.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.3 CAN_POWER
G17F.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.4 CAN_GROUND
G17F.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.5 CANH
G17F.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.6 CANL
G17F.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G14M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
G17F.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 G16M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
G17M.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 CJ1F.4 CAN_POWER
G17M.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 CJ1F.1 CAN_GROUND
G17M.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 CJ1F.2 CANH
G17M.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 CJ1F.3 CANL

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.10 Connectors on Rear Connector Panel (J1-J17)
J2M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE2 120V OUT 2
SW2.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE2 120V POWER SAVE 2
J2M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE1 120V OUT 1
J4M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE1 120V POWER SAVE 1
LAMP2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.N
J2M.GND 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 BOX.CHASS PROT. GND, 120V OUT
J3M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J4M.L 120V POWER SAVE 2
J3M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW2.1
J3M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP2.1 120V POWER SAVE 1
F2.LINE1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J4M.N
F2.LINE1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J2M.N 120V OUT 1
J3M.GND 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J4M.GND PROT. GND, 120V POWER SAVE
J3M.GND 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 BOX.CHASS
J4M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.L 120V POWER SAVE 2
SW2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.L
SW2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP2.2
J4M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE1 120V POWER SAVE 1
J4M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.N 120V POWER SAVE 1
LAMP2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.N
J4M.GND 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J3M.GND PROT. GND, 120V POWER SAVE
BOX.CHASS 18 Yel/Grn Single - 6CBL0511 J3M.GND

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J5F.1 NO CONNECTION
J5F.2 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.8 5VRET LONG. ENCODER X#1
J5F.3 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.7 INDEX- LONG. ENCODER
J5F.4 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.6 INDEX+ LONG. ENCODER
J5F.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.5 PHASE B- LONG. ENCODER
J5F.6 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.4 PHASE B+ LONG. ENCODER
J5F.7 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.3 PHASE A- LONG. ENCODER
J5F.8 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.2 PHASE A+ LONG. ENCODER
J5F.9 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB8.1 +5V LONG. ENCODER
J5F.10 NO CONNECTION
J5F.12 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.8 5VRET LAT. ENCODER Z#2
J5F.13 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.7 INDEX- LAT. ENCODER
J5F.14 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.6 INDEX+ LAT. ENCODER
J5F.15 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.5 PHASE B- LAT. ENCODER
J5F.16 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.4 PHASE B+ LAT. ENCODER
J5F.17 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.3 PHASE A- LAT. ENCODER
J5F.18 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.2 PHASE A+ LAT. ENCODER
J5F.19 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB10.1 +5V LAT. ENCODER
J5F.22 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.8 5VRET VERT. ENCODER T#2
J5F.23 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.7 INDEX- VERT. ENCODER
J5F.24 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.6 INDEX+ VERT. ENCODER
J5F.25 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.5 PHASE B- VERT. ENCODER

J5F.26 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.4 PHASE B+ VERT. ENCODER
J5F.27 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.3 PHASE A- VERT. ENCODER
J5F.28 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.2 PHASE A+ VERT. ENCODER
J5F.29 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 SB9.1 +5V VERT. ENCODER
J5F.31 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SB19.9 LLX, MAX. LIMIT LONGITUD.
J5F.32 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB19.10 RLX, MIN. LIMIT LONGITUD.
J5F.33 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 SB19.2 RTNF FOR LONGITUD. LIMITS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J6F.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J14F.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
J6F.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 J14F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2

J6F.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 J14F.3 CAN_POWER
J6F.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J14F.4 CAN_GROUND

J6F.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 J14F.5 CANH
J6F.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 J14F.6 CANL

J6F.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 J14F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J6F.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 J14F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4

J6F.9 NO CONNECTION



J6F.19 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 BF2F.17 LATERAL MAX. LIMIT
J6F.20 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF2F.5 LATERAL MIN. LIMIT
J6F.21 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BF2F.18 VERTICAL MAX. LIMIT
J6F.22 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF2F.6 VERTICAL MIN. LIMIT

J6F.23 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BF2F.10 RTNF FOR VERT/LAT LIMITS
J6F.24 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 BF2F.4 E-STOP TBL RGT 1
J6F.25 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BF2F.12 E-STOP TBL RGT 2
J6F.30 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BE16F.3 E-STOP TBL LFT 1

J6F.31 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BE16F.11 E-STOP TBL LFT 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J7F.1 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.1 MOTOR+, VERTICAL

J7F.2 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.2 MOTOR-, VERTICAL
J7F.3 20 Violet Single - 6CBL0487 BF1M.2 BRAKE+, VERTICAL
J7F.4 20 Brown Single - 6CBL0485 BF1M.15 BRAKE-, VERTICAL
J7F.5 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.9 MOTOR+, LATERAL
J7F.6 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.8 MOTOR-, LATERAL
J7F.7 19 Black_1 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ1.4 X_AMP+, LONGITUDINAL
J7F.8 19 Black_2 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BJ1.7 X_AMP-, LONGITUDINAL
J7F.9 NO CONNECTION
J7.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.3 GND/SHIELD, VERTICALa
J7.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 BF4.7 a
GND/SHIELD, LATERAL
J7.CHASS 19 Yel/Grn 2+GND - 6CBL0495 NC a
GND/SHIELD, LONGITUDINAL
J8F.1 24 Red 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G2M.1 TAXI1-COM1

J8F.2 24 Black 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G2M.2 TAXI1-COM2
J8F.3 NO CONNECTION
J8F.4 NO CONNECTION
J8F.5 NO CONNECTION
J8F.6 NO CONNECTION
J8F.7 NO CONNECTION
J8F.8 24 White 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G2M.8 TAXI1-COM3
J8.CHASS Shield 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G2.CHASS TAXI1-SHIELD
J9F.1 24 Red 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G5M.1 TAXI2-COM1

J9F.3 NO CONNECTION
J9F.4 NO CONNECTION
J9F.5 NO CONNECTION
J9F.6 NO CONNECTION
J9F.7 NO CONNECTION
J9F.8 24 White 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G5M.8 TAXI2-COM3
J9.CHASS 24 Shield 4 Pairs - 6CBL0388 G5.CHASS TAXI2-SHIELD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J10F.2 24 Red 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB11.3 RS232 SB214 TRANSMIT
J10F.3 24 Green 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB11.2 RS232 SB214 RECEIVE
J10F.5 24 Black 3 Way - 6CBL0467 SB11.1 RS232 COMMON

J11F.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J13F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J11F.3 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 J13F.3 CAN_POWER
J11F.4 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 J13F.4 CAN_GROUND
J11F.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J13F.6 CANL
J11F.7 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 J13F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J11F.8 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 J13F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
J121F.1-78 NO CONNECTIONS

J13F.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J11F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J13F.3 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 J11F.3 CAN_POWER
J13F.4 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 J11F.4 CAN_GROUND
J13F.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J11F.6 CANL
J13F.7 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 J11F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J13F.8 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 J11F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J13M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
J15M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.1
J15M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.1
J13M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J15M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.2
J15M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.2
J13M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.3 CAN_POWER
J15M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.3
J15M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.3
J13M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.4 CAN_GROUND
J15M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.4
J15M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.4
J13M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.5 CANH
J15M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.5
J15M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.5
J13M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.6 CANL
J15M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.6
J15M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.6
J13M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J15M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.7
J15M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.7
J13M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
J15M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J14M.8
J15M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.8
J13M.9 NO CONNECTION
J14M.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J6F.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
J14M.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 J6F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J14M.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 J6F.2 CAN_POWER
J14M.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J6F.4 CAN_GROUND
J14M.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 J6F.5 CANH
J14M.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 J6F.6 CANL
J14M.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 J6F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J14M.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 J6F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J16F.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.1
J16F.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.2
J16F.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.3
J16F.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.5
J16F.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.6
J16F.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.7
J16F.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J15M.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.1
J15M.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.2
J15M.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.3
J15M.4 28 Violet RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.4
J15M.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.5
J15M.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.6
J15M.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.7
J15M.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J16F.8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J16F.1 28 Brown RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
J16F.2 28 Orange RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J16F.3 28 Green RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.3 CAN_POWER
J16F.5 28 White RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.5 CANH
J16F.6 28 Red RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.6 CANL
J16F.7 28 Yellow RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J16F.8 28 Blue RIBBN. - 6CBL0499 J15M.8 HANDSET SPARE 4
J16M.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 G16F.1 HANDSET SPARE 1
J16M.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G16F.2 HANDSET SPARE 2
J16M.3 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 G16F.3 CAN_POWER
J16M.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G16F.4 CAN_GROUND
J16M.5 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G16F.5 CANH
J16M.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 G16F.6 CANL
J16M.7 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 G16F.7 HANDSET SPARE 3
J16M.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 G16F.8 HANDSET SPARE 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
J17F.1 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BE4.1 POWER SAVE RELAY 1
J17F.6 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BE4.3 POWER SAVE RELAY 2
J17M.1-5 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SW2.5 POWER SAVE RELAY 1
J17M.6-9 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 SW2.4 POWER SAVE RELAY 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.11 AC Lamps (LAMP1, LAMP2)
LAMP1.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW1.2 MAINS N (AFTER SWITCH)
F1.LINE2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 SW1.2
LAMP1.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW1.5 MAINS N (AFTER SWITCH)
F1.LINE1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 SW1.5
LAMP2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.N 120V POWER SAVE 1
J4M.N 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE1
LAMP2.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW2.1 120V POWER SAVE 2
J3M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 SW2.1
J3M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J4M.L
7.2.15.12 LEDs (LED1-LED4)
LED1+ 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BE18M.14 COLLISION RUN LED+
LED1- 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BE18M.7 COLLISION RUN LED-
LED2+ 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 BE18M.15 COLLISION STOP LED+
LED2- 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BE18M.8 COLLISION STOP LED-
LED3+ 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BE16F.14 E-STOP RUN LED+
LED3- 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BE16F.7 E-STOP RUN LED-
LED4+ 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 BE16F.15 E-STOP STOP LED+
LED4- 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BE16F.8 E-STOP STOP LED-

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.13 Connectors on Controller SB214 (SB1-SB19)
SB1.1 NO CONNECTION
SB1.2 NO CONNECTION
SB1.3 NO CONNECTION
SB1.4 NO CONNECTION
SB1.5 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB1.7 T_EN- TO RTNF
SB1.6 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BF6M.28 T_EN+
SB1.7 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB1.5 T_EN- TO RTNF
SB1.8 NO CONNECTION
SB1.9 NO CONNECTION
SB2.1 NO CONNECTION
SB2.2 NO CONNECTION
SB2.3 NO CONNECTION
SB2.4 NO CONNECTION
SB2.5 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB2.7 Z_EN- TO RTNF
SB2.6 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF6M.9 Z_EN+
SB2.7 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB2.5 Z_EN- TO RTNF
SB2.8 NO CONNECTION
SB2.9 NO CONNECTION
SB3.1 NO CONNECTION
SB3.2 NO CONNECTION
SB3.3 NO CONNECTION
SB3.4 24 Green Single - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.22 FLT
SB3.5 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BF6M.27 Y_EN- (ROLL - ACTIVE LOW)
SB3.6 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.1 EN- ON DCL1091
SB3.7 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.9a RTNF
SB3.7 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.11

SB3.7 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.24
SB3.7 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.25
SB3.7 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 G8F.2 RTNF FOR DOCK POSITION
SB3.8 NO CONNECTION
SB3.9 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ1F.12 V0
a. The three wires are soldered to the shield, which is then connected to SB3.7.
SB4.1-9 NO CONNECTIONS

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SB5.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.8 +5V RAD.1 ENCODER T#1

SB5.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.7 PHASE A+ RAD.1 ENCODER
SB5.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.6 PHASE A- RAD.1 ENCODER
SB5.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.5 PHASE B+ RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB5.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.4 PHASE B- RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB5.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.3 INDEX+ RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB5.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.2 INDEX- RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB5.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.1 5VRET RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB5.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 NC SHIELD RAD. 1 ENCODER
SB6.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.18 +5V RAD.2 ENCODER Z#1

SB6.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.17 PHASE A+ RAD.2 ENCODER
SB6.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.16 PHASE A- RAD.2 ENCODER
SB6.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.15 PHASE B+ RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB6.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.14 PHASE B- RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB6.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.13 INDEX+ RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB6.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.12 INDEX- RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB6.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G11F.11 5VRET RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB6.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 NC SHIELD RAD. 2 ENCODER
SB7.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.1 +5V ROLL ENCODER Y#1

SB7.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.2 PHASE A+ ROLL ENCODER
SB7.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.2
SB7.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.3 PHASE A- ROLL ENCODER
SB7.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.3
SB7.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.4 PHASE B+ ROLL ENCODER
SB7.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.4
SB7.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.5 PHASE B- ROLL ENCODER
SB7.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.5
SB7.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.9 INDEX+ ROLL ENCODER
SB7.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.6
SB7.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.10 INDEX- ROLL ENCODER
SB7.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.7
SB7.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.11 5VRET ROLL ENCODER
SB7.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 G10F.8
SB7.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 DJ4F.12 SHIELD ROLL ENCODER

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SB8.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.9 +5V LONG. ENCODER X#1

SB8.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.8 PHASE A+ LONG. ENCODER
SB8.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.7 PHASE A- LONG. ENCODER
SB8.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.6 PHASE B+ LONG. ENCODER
SB8.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.5 PHASE B- LONG. ENCODER
SB8.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.4 INDEX+ LONG. ENCODER
SB8.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.3 INDEX- LONG. ENCODER
SB8.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.2 5VRET LONG. ENCODER
SB8.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 NC SHIELD LONG. ENCODER
SB9.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.29 +5V VERT. ENCODER T#1

SB9.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.28 PHASE A+ VERT. ENCODER
SB9.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.27 PHASE A- VERT. ENCODER
SB9.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.26 PHASE B+ VERT. ENCODER
SB9.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.25 PHASE B- VERT. ENCODER
SB9.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.24 INDEX+ VERT. ENCODER
SB9.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.23 INDEX- VERT. ENCODER
SB9.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.22 5VRET VERT. ENCODER
SB9.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 NC SHIELD VERT. ENCODER
SB10.1 24 Red 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.19 +5V LAT. ENCODER Z#1

SB10.2 24 Orange 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.18 PHASE A+ LAT. ENCODER
SB10.3 24 Yellow 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.17 PHASE A- LAT. ENCODER
SB10.4 24 Green 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.16 PHASE B+ LAT. ENCODER
SB10.5 24 Blue 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.15 PHASE B- LAT. ENCODER
SB10.6 24 White 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.14 INDEX+ LAT. ENCODER
SB10.7 24 Brown 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.13 INDEX- LAT. ENCODER
SB10.8 24 Black 8 Way - 6CBL0497 J5F.12 5VRET LAT. ENCODER
SB10.9 Shield 8 Way - 6CBL0497 NC SHIELD LAT. ENCODER
SB11.1 24 Black J10F.5 RS232 COMMON

SB11.2 24 Green J10F.3 RS232 SB214 RECEIVE
SB11.3 24 Red J10F.2 RS232 SB214 TRANSMIT
SB11.4 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SB12F.1 24 Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 SB12F.1 X-EN, ACTIVE LOW

SB12F.2 24 Orange 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.2 X-PWM0 (0-5V)
SB12F.3 24 Blue 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.3 X-STL
SB12F.4 NO CONNECTION
SB12F.6 24 White 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.6 5VF
SB12F.7 24 Green 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.7 RTNF
SB12F.8 24 Black 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.8 -12VF
SB12F.9 24 Red/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.9 Z-FLT, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.10 24 Red/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.10 Z-PWM1 (0-5V)
SB12F.11 24 Red/Grn 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.11 T-EN, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.12 24 Ora/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.12 T-PWM0 (0-5V)
SB12F.13 24 Ora/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.131 T-STL
SB12F.14 24 Blu/Wht 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.14 X-FLT, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.15 24 Blu/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.15 X-PWM1 (0-5V)
SB12F.16 24 Blu/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.16 Y-ENABLE, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.19 24 Wh/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.19 +12VF
SB12F.20 Shield NC SHIELD
SB12F.21 24 Wh/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.21 Z-EN, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.22 24 Grn/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.22 Z-PWM0 (0-5V)
SB12F.23 24 Grn/Blk 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.23 Z-STL
SB12F.24 24 Blk/Wh 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.24 T-FLT, ACTIVE LOW
SB12F.25 24 Blk/Red 20 Way - 6CBL0498 BJ7F.25 T-PWM1 (0-5V)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SB14.1 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BF6M.20 OUT1, DRIVES VERT/RAD1 RELAY

SB14.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BF6M.2 OUT2, DRIVES LAT/RAD2 RELAY
SB14.3 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF6M.21 OUT3, DRIVES MUX RELAY 1
SB14.4 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BF6M.3 OUT4, SPARE 1
SB14.5 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF6M.19 RTNF
SB14.5 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 G7F.15 RTNF FOR ROLL LIMITS
SB14.8 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF6M.23 OUT7, LOCK_MOTOR TRIG\
SB14.9 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BF6M.5 OUT8, LOCK_MOTOR ENABLE
SB14.10 20 Red 3 Way - 6CBL0486 BUTT SPLICE 24VF1 FOR DCL1091
DJ1F.14 24 Black 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BUTT SPLICE 24VF1 FOR EN+ ON DCL1091
DJ1F.20 24 Green 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BUTT SPLICE 24VF1 FOR RL+ ON DCL1091
DJ1F.21 24 Red 3 Way - 6CBL0467 BUTT SPLICE 24VF1 FOR LL+ ON DCL1091

Direction 2414259-100 2019

SB17.1 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 P5.8 LGND
SB17.1 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 SW3.1 RTNF, GANTRY RESET
SB17.2 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 P5.14 HANDSET 1
SB17.3 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 P5.10 HANDSET 2
SB17.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SW3.2 IN3, GANTRY RESET
SB17.4 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 P5.5 MEC RESET
SB17.5 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 BF6M.12 IN4, /T POS OR SPARE 1
SB17.6 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB17.11 +5VF TO INPUT LOGIC
CJ2F.5 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.11 +5V DC
SB17.8 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF6M.13 IN6, /LOCK OR SPARE 2
SB17.9 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF6M.32 IN7, SPARE 3 OR SW5 ROLL
SB17.10 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BF6M.14 IN8, /UNLOCK OR SW2 ROLL
SB17.11 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 P5.1 +5V DC
SB17.11 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 SB17.6 +5VF, INPUT LOGIC
SB17.12 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 BF6M.15 IN9, /COLLISION
SB17.12 24 Violet Single - 6CBL0494 P5.13 COLLISION IN
SB17.13 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 P5.12 HANDSET 6
SB17.14 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 P5.4 HANDSET 5
SB17.15 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 P5.11 HANDSET 4
SB17.16 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BF6M.1 24VF1 FOR RELAYS
SB17.16 24 Grey Single - 6CBL0512 G7F.1 24VF1 FOR ROLL LIMIT
SB17.17 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 P5.3 HANDSET 3
SB17.18 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 BF6M.36 E-STOP
SB17.18 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 P5.2 ES-IN
SB17.19 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF6M.18 IN15, DH_POS OR RAD1_VG
SB17.20 24 Black Single - 6CBL0182 BF6M.37 IN16, VG_POS OR RAD2_VG
SB18.1 18 Black 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BE4.9 SB_AC-

SB18.2 18 White 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BE4.15 SB_AC+ (POWER SAVE)
SB18.3 18 Green 2+GND - 6CBL0058 BUTT SPLICE PROT. GND FOR SB214
EIPS.CHASS 18 Grn/Yel Single - 6CBL0511 BUTT SPLICE
SB18.4 18 NO CONNECTIONS

Direction 2414259-100 2019

SB19.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 P5.6 E-STOP
SB19.2 24 Yellow Single - 6CBL0492 BF7M.6 RTNF
SB19.2 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 J5F.33 RTNF FOR LONGITUD. LIMITS
SB19.3 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 BF7M.2 LLT, LEFT LIMIT T-AXIS
SB19.4 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 BF7M.7 RLT, RIGHT LIMIT T-AXIS
SB19.5 24 White Single - 6CBL0491 BF7M.3 LLZ, LEFT LIMIT Z-AXIS
SB19.6 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BF7M.8 RLZ, RIGHT LIMIT Z-AXIS
SB19.7 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 DJ1F.8 LL-
SB19.7 24 Orange Single - 6CBL0490 G7F.14 LLY, ROLL MIN. LIMIT
SB19.8 24 Brown Single - 6CBL0384 DJ1F.7 RL-
SB19.8 24 Green Single - 6CBL0493 G7F.13 RLY, ROLL MAX. LIMIT
SB19.9 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J5F.31 LLX, MAX. LIMIT LONGITUD.
SB19.10 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 J5F.32 RLX, MIN. LIMIT LONGITUD.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.14 Switches on IPS (SW1-SW3)
SW1.1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 J1F.N MAINS N

SW1.2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 F1.LINE2 MAINS N (AFTER SWITCH)
SW1.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP1.1 MAINS LAMP 1
SW1.3 NO CONNECTION
SW1.4 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 J1F.L MAINS L
SW1.5 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 F1.LINE1 MAINS L (AFTER SWITCH)
SW1.5 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP1.2 MAINS LAMP 2
SW1.6 NO CONNECTION
SW2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 LAMP2.2 120V POWER SAVE 2

SW2.1 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.L
J4M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 J3M.L
SW2.2 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE 120V POWER SAVE 2
J2M.L 20 Black Single - 6CBL0488 F2.LINE 120V OUT 2
SW2.3 NO CONNECTION
SW2.4 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J17M.6-9 POWER SAVE RELAY 2
SW2.5 24 Blue Single - 6CBL0181 J17M.1-5 POWER SAVE RELAY 1
SW2.6 NO CONNECTION
SW3.1 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 SB17.1 RTNF, GANTRY RESET

CJ2F.1 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 SB17.1 LGND, CAN BUS CTRL
SW3.2 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.4 IN3, GANTRY RESET
SW3.3 NO CONNECTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.2.15.15 Junction for Fan Power (FPJ)
FPJ.1 24 Red Single - 6CBL0182 BE20.1 FAN POWER

FPJ.2 24 Black Single - 6CBL0489 BE20.2 FAN POWER RETURN
7.2.15.16 Voltage Selector on Transformer (VSE)
VSE.1 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 CB1.4 PRM1 N

VSE.2 14 Black Single - 6CBL0434 CB1.2 PRM1 L
VSE.3 16 Black Single - 6CBL0489 CB2.4 PRM2 N
VSE.4 16 Black Single - 6CBL0489 CB2.2 PRM2 L
7.2.15.17 Connections on MEC Board (P4, P5, P6)
P4.1 24 BLACK Single - 6CBL0489 CJ2F.1 LGND

P4.2 24 WHITE Single - 6CBL0491 CJ2F.3 HANDSET 2
P4.3 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 CJ2F.5 +5VDC
P4.4 24 BLUE Single - 6CBL0181 CJ2F.7 HANDSET 4
P4.5 24 YELLOW Single - 6CBL0492 CJ2F.9 HANDSET 6
P4.6 24 ORANGE Single - 6CBL0490 CJ2F.2 HANDSET 1
P4.7 24 BROWN Single - 6CBL0384 CJ2F.4 HANDSET 3
P4.8 NO CONNECTION
P4.9 24 GREEN Single - 6CBL0493 CJ2F.8 HANDSET 5
P5.1 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.11 +5VDC

SB17.6 24 GRAY Single - 6CBL0512 SB17.11 +5VF, INOPUT LOGIC
P5.2 24 BROWN Single - 6CBL0384 SB17.18 ES-IN
BF6M.36 24 BROWN Single - 6CBL0384 SB17.18 E-STOP
P5.3 24 BROWN Single - 6CBL0384 SB17.17 HANDSET 3
P5.4 24 GREEN Single - 6CBL0493 SB17.14 HANDSET 5
P5.5 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.4 MEC RESET
SW3.2 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 SB17.4 IN3 GANTRY RESET
P5.6 24 RED Single - 6CBL0182 SB19.1 E-STOP

Direction 2414259-100 2019
P5.7 NO CONNECTION
P5.8 24 BLACK Single - 6CBL0489 SB17.1 LGND
SW3.1 24 BLACK Single - 6CBL0489 SB17.1 RTNF GANTRY RESET
P5.9 NO CONNECTION
P5.10 24 WHITE Single - 6CBL0491 SB17.3 HANDSET 2
P5.11 24 BLUE Single - 6CBL0181 SB17.15 HANDSET 4
P5.12 24 YELLOW Single - 6CBL0492 SB17.13 HANDSET 6
P5.13 24 VIOLET Single - 6CBL0494 SB17.12 COLLISION IN
BF6M.15 24 VIOLET Single - 6CBL0494 SB17.12 IN9, /COLLISION
P5.14 24 ORANGE Single - 6CBL0490 SB17.2 HANDSET 1
P5.15 NO CONNECTION
P6.1 24 GRAY Single - 6CBL0512 G7F.12 COLLISION LATCH 1

P6.2 24 WHITE Single - 6CBL0491 BE18M.13 COLLISION LATCH 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3
7.3.1
9CBL331
Detector
9CBL0329 BH4 BH6 9CBL0329

TO CONNECTOR
BRACKET LIMIT SWITCH BOARD
INSIDE GANTRY BH1 BH2 9CBL0328
9CBL0365
IB1 AND 1B2

OR

OB1 AND OB2
DETECTOR PLATFORM ON GANTRY RING
7-71
Detector Wiring Block Diagram
AT1 AT2
AV9
9CBL0349 9CBL0348
9CBL0360
MATRIX BOARD DETECTOR PSU
EDI BOARD
9CBL0351 9CBL0359
9CBL352
9CBL353 COLLIMATOR CONTACT

PIN BOARD
DETECTOR
Detector
2019
Rev. 2
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Detector
7.3.2 Radial Limit-Switch Board

Connection to illuminated Connection to service switch

switch collision override (left) collision override
Connection to
illuminated switch collision
override (right)
Connection to Detector
Connection to Detector cable chain (I/O)
power supply

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.3 Internal Detector Cable

(G.E. Part # 2193901).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.4 Service Cable, Collision Override


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.5 Illuminated Switch, Collision Override


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.6 Detector Cable Assembly (1 of 2)

DETECTOR 1: G.E. PN 2187882 / ELGEMS PN CBL000891 Length = 0.38m
DETECTOR 2: G.E. PN 2189779 / ELGEMS PN CBL000890 Length = 0.46m
DETECTOR END
GANTRY END

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.7 Detector Cable Assembly (2 of 2)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.8 Detector Cable, Breakdown Diagrams

7.3.8.1 Detector Cables
Note: AT1M: 24V Power: Connector Type - MNL 350777-1: 2 Pin
Pin Name In/Out Level (V) min/max Description
1 +24V INPUT +24V Power

2 +24 GND INPUT 0V Power GND
Note: AT7M: Collision Sensor: Connector Type - HEADER STRAIGHT: 2 Pin
1 DET_COLL OUTPUT Open/+24V Collision Sensor
2 DET_COLL OUTPUT Open/+24V Collision Sensor
Note: AY9 (AY8M): Detector Data: Connector Type - DB9M: 9 Pin
1 Host RX - INPUT 0.5V/2.5V @ RS 232 Data Receive
2 Host RX + INPUT 0.5V/2.5V @ RS 232. Data Receive
5 SHLD n/a
8 Host TX - OUTPUT 0.5V/2.5V @ RS 232 Data Transmit -
9 Host TX + OUTPUT 0.5V/2.5V @ R 232 Data Transmit +
7.3.8.2 Power Cable, I/N - PSU

Note: AT2M: Power I/N Board: Connector Type - MNL 350809-1: 5 Pin
1 +5V OUTPUT +5V +5V Power
3 5V GND n/a DGND
4 5V GND n/a DGND
5 -5V OUTPUT -5V -5V Power

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.8.3 HV Control Cable, 26 Way, I/N - PSU

Note: AT5M: High Voltage Control: Connector Type - Wiremount soc. .1x.1: 26 Pin
1 /HVOFF INPUT 0V/5.5V HV ON/OFF
2 GND n/a DGND
7 -15V OUTPUT -15V Power
8 -15V OUTPUT -15V Power
9 +15V OUTPUT +15V Power
10 +15V OUTPUT +15V Power
15 SDO OUTPUT 0V/5.5V Serial data out
16 SCLK INPUT 0V/5.5V Serial data clock
17 SDIN INPUT 0V/5.5V Serial data in
19 LDAC INPUT 0V/5.5V Load serial data
20 GND n/a DGND
21 P15GOOD OUTPUT 0V/5.5V +15V PS Good
22 M15GOOD 0V/5.5V -15V PS Good
23 HVGOOD OUTPUT 0V/5.5V HV PS Good
24 P5GOOD OUTPUT 0V/5.5V +5V PS Good
25 M5GOOD OUTPUT 0V/5.5V -5V PS Good
26 GND n/a DGND
7.3.8.4 Power Cable, PSU - Matrix
Note: AT3M: Power Matrix Board: Connector Type - MNL 350779-1: 4 Pin
2 15V GND n/a GND2
3 15V GND n/a GND
4 -15V GND OUTPUT -15V Power

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.8.5 HV PSU Cable - Matrix
Note: AT4M: High Voltage Matrix Board: Connector Type - MNL 350766-1: 3 Pin
1 -HV OUTPUT -1200- -800V - HV Power
2 N/C
3 -HVGND n/a
7.3.8.6 Control Cable, 26 Way I/N - Matrix
Note: AY5M: I/N Board Control: Connector Type- Wiremount soc. .1x.1: 26 Pin
Pin Name In/Out Level (V) Description
1 PMTSDI OUTPUT 0V/5.5V PMT Serial data in
2 PMTSDO INPUT 0V/5.5V PMT Serial data out
3 /PMTLDAC OUTPUT 0V/5.5V Load Serial PMT data
4 GND n/a
5 PMTSCLK OUTPUT 0V/5.5V PMT Serial data clock
6 GND n/a
7 PMTWP INPUT PMT working point
8 GND n/a
9 DYNSDI OUTPUT 0V/5 5V Dyncor Serial data in
10 DYNSDO INPUT 0V/5.5V Dyncor Serial data out
11 /DYNLDAC OUTPUT 0V/5.5V Load serial Dyncor data
12 GND n/a
13 DYNSCLK OUTPUT 0V/5.5V Dyncor Serial data clock
14 GND n/a
20 MXEECS OUTPUT EEPROM select
21 MXEECLK OUTPUT 0V/5.5V EEPROM Ser. data clock
22 MXEESDI OUTPUT 0V/5.5V EEPROM Serial data in
23 MXEESDO INPUT 0V/5.5V EEPROM Serial data out
24 GND n/a
25 /LEDSAMPLE OUTPUT 0V/5.5V LED pulse sample control
26 LEDDRIVE OUTPUT LED pulse driver signal

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.8.7 Signal Cable, 16 Way I/N - Matrix

Note: AY4M: I/N Board Data: Connector Type - Wiremount soc. .1x.1: 16 Pin
1 GND n/a
2 E INPUT Energy signal
3 GND n/a
4 Y+ INPUT Y + signal
5 GND n/a
6 Y- INPUT Y - signal
7 GND n/a
8 X+ INPUT X + signal
9 GND n/a
10 X- INPUT X - signal
11 GND n/a
12 EFB OUTPUT
13 GND n/a
14 GND n/a
15 GND n/a
16 GND n/a
7.3.8.8 HV Resistor Board

Note: High Voltage to Crystal Frame
1 -HV OUTPUT 1000V High Voltage
7.3.8.9 Collision Detection Cable

Note: AT6M - Collision Detector: Connector Type - HEADER STRAIGHT (2 Pin)
1 DET_COLL INPUT Open/+24V Collision Sensor
2 DET_COLL INPUT Open/+24V Collision Sensor

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.9 Detector I/N Board

Pin 2: Ground (+5V)

Pin 1: +5V Pin 3: -5V
AY1M
AY9 (AY8M) to Detector
Detector Cable Power Supply
Connection Data
AY6M Ground
to Detector
Power Supply
AY5M
to Matrix Board
Note: There are no jumper

AY4M settings on this board
to Matrix Board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.10 Detector Power Supply Board
AT3M AT4M
to Matrix Board to Matrix Board
Low Voltage Power High Voltage Power
ATM6
to Collision Sensor
ATM7
Detector Cable
Connection
(Collision Sensor)
ATM8
to Power on LED
Fuse on Side Detector
(5A/250V)
AT1M
Detector Cable
Connection
(+24V)
Jumper 5
Should be set to Remote
(permanently)
AT5M
to I/N Board AT2M
(High Voltage Control/Diag) to I/N Board (Low Voltage)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.11 Detector Matrix Board
AU4M AU1M
to I/N Board to Detector Power Supply
(Control) (High Voltage)
AU 3M AU2M
to I/N Board to Detector Power Supply
(X, Y, E Data) (Low Voltage)
TP: COL 1
SIGNAL
+15V -15V -HV

GND
GND
TP: COL 2
SIGNAL TP: GND
TP: GND TP: GND
TP: ROW 6 TP: ROW 5 TP: ROW 4 TP: ROW 3 TP: ROW 2 TP: ROW 1
SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL
TP: COL 3
SIGNAL
TP: LOW DYN
TP: COL 4
SIGNAL
TP: HIGHDYN TP: THRESHOLD
TP: COL 5
SIGNAL
TP: GND
TP: GND TP: GND
TP: COL 6
SIGNAL
TP: COL 7
SIGNAL
TP: COL 8
SIGNAL
Note: There are no jumper settings on this board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.12 Detector Pre-Amp Board
Test Point T1
7.3.13 Detector Dyncor Module
Test Point T1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.3.14 Detector Dyncor Driver Module
Low DYN
Threshold High DYN
TP1 TP3 TP6 Threshold Setting
TP2 TP4
7.3.14.1 Dyncor Driver Test Points
Test Point Test Signal Digital Value Range Analog Value Range
TP 1. Upper Dyncor offset 0-4095 -5V to +5V
TP 2. Upper Dyncor gain 0-4096 0V to +5V
TP 3. Lower Dyncor offset 0-4096 -5V to +5V
TP 4. Lower Dyncor gain 0-4096 0V to +5V
TP 6. Threshold offset 0-4096 -5V to +5V

Direction 2414259-100 2019
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Integrated Power Supply IPS
7.4 Integrated Power Supply IPS
7.4.1 Total IPS Cabling Survey (1 of 7)
J16: HANDSET BUS 4

G16: HANDSET BUS 7
J15: HANDSET BUS 3
J6: TABLE P5
Sw3: RESET
DJ 6
J11: HANDSET
DRIVE DJ 1
DCL 1091 DJ 4

G3: DETECTOR 1
JUNCTION FPJ BE 20
LED4: E-STOP STOP
G14: HANDSET BUS 6
J2: 120VAC OUT

CONNECTOR
BF 5: Z/T AMPLIFIER
J7: TABLE

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.2 IPS Main External and Internal Power (2 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.3 Cabling for HHCs, E-stops, & PC RS232 Communication (3 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.4 IPS Cabling for Table Motion (4 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.5 IPS Cabling for Radial Motion and Roll Lock (5 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.6 IPS Cabling for Roll Motion and Collision (6 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.7 IPS Cabling for TAXI Links and Detector Power (7 of 7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.8 IPS Assembly Drawing

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.9 IPS Detector Power (1 of 4)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.10 Board and Modules Power Supply (2 of 4)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.11 Backplane and Fan Power Supply (3 of 4)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.12 Relays and Connectors ( 4 of 4)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.13 MUX Assembly Drawing


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.14 EIPS MUX Board, Roll Lock Control; 1 of 4


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.15 EIPS MUX Board Inputs, Multiplexers; 2 of 4


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.16 EIPS MUX Board, Radius/Table MUX; 3 of 4


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.17 EIPS MUX Board, Connectors; 4 of 4


Direction 2414259-100 2019
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Integrated Power Supply
7.4 Integrated Power Supply

7.4.18 CAN Handset Control Board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.19 Handset CAN Control Board Logic


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.20 Handset CAN Control Board Logic


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.21 MEC Board
Reset Button Collision State LED Power-ON LED Fuse (1 Amp)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.22 IPS Motor Amplifier Board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.4.23 Transformer Wiring

• Transformer wires are called: TRAFO.
• Voltage selector connection points are called: VSE.
• Overload protection is called: OP1, OP2.
• MNL plugs have female connectors and are coded with following key
pins: BE1, BE3, BE5-BE7.

TRAFO.1 16 Black Single Wire VSE.5 PRIM.OV 1
TRAFO.2 16 Black Single Wire VSE.6 PRIM.10OV 1
TRAFO.3 03 Red Single Wire VSE.7 PRIM.120V 1
TRAFO.4 16 Black Single Wire VSE.8 PRIM.OV 2
TRAFO.5 16 Black Single Wire VSE.9 PRIM.10OV 2
TRAFO.6 03 Orange Single Wire VSE.10 PRIM.12OV 2
TRAFO.7 16 Yel/Grn Single Wire EIPS CHASSIS SHIELD
TRAFO.8 18 Black Single Wire BE1.1 SEC. 230V 1

BE1.2
Key Pin BE1.3

BE3.2
BE3.3
Key Pin BE3.4
BE3.5

Key Pin BE5.2
TRAFO.14 16 Black Single Wire BE6.1 SEC. 22V A1

TRAFO.15 16 Black Single Wire BE6.2 SEC. 22V A2
Key Pin BE6.3
Key Pin BE7.1

TRAFO.16 16 Black Single Wire BE7.2 SEC. 22V B1
TRAFO.17 16 Black Single Wire BE7.3 SEC. 22V B2
TRAFO.18 18 Black Single Wire NC SEC. 14V 1

TRAFO.19 18 Black Single Wire NC SEC. 14V 2
VSE.5 20 Yellow Single - 6CBL0123 MOV1.1 MOV 1


Direction 2414259-100 2019
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Acquisition Computer
7.5 Acquisition Computer

7.5.1 Acquisition Computer Cables
For additional cable information, refer to Section 10.2.1 regarding the
following:
• Keyboard cable
• Mouse cable
• Monitor cable
• 120 V AC input to monitor
• 120 V AC input to tower

Direction 2414259-100 2019
PWB Configuration and Interconnects Patient Table
7.6 Patient Table
GE Part # Elgems Part # Name/Description Quantity Refer to
- Table Interconnect Diagram - <Arial 9pt

blue>Sectio
n 7.6.1
CBL001521 Table to IPS Harness 1 <Arial 9pt
blue>Sectio
n 7.6.2
CBL001429 Table HHC Box Left Cable 1 <Arial 9pt
blue>Sectio
n 7.6.3
CBL001430 Table HHC Box Right Cable 1 <Arial 9pt
blue>Sectio
n 7.6.4
CBL001433 Table Internal Lim SW Cable 1 <Arial 9pt
blue>Sectio
n 7.6.5

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.1 Table Interconnect Diagram
Note The table does not use the Longitudinal motorized axis.
Patient Table
RT E-Stop -
RT E-Stop +
RT Reset +
RT Reset -
LT E-Stop -
LT E-Stop +
LT Reset +
LT Reset -

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.2 Table to IPS Harness

(G.E. Part # / ELGEMS Part # CBL001520)

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.3 Table HHC Box Left Cable

(G.E. Part # / ELGEMS Part # CBL001429)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.4 Table HHC Box Right Cable

(G.E. Part # / ELGEMS Part #CBL001430)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.5 Table Internal Lim SW Cable


Direction 2414259-100 2019
7.6.6 Table Long Lim SW Cable


Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 8 - Repair Procedures
The general repair philosophy for the system and its Field Replaceable Unit
(FRU) is to repair hardware and software at a unit level. This system
conforms to standard FRU policies and uses as many common parts as
possible. Faults may be isolated to the FRU level with the use of this manual,
imbedded InSite capabilities, and internal diagnostics. We assume you have
enough knowledge of the UNIX environment to perform basic software and
network troubleshooting.
After replacing an FRU, do the following:
• Protect the replaced unit against electrostatic discharge by packing it

in the static shielded bag that was used to ship the new unit. Reuse the
packing material.
• Fill out a failure report.
8.1 System Power-Off

The system receives electrical power from a single AC power line that
connects to the Integrated Power Supply (IPS) located in the base of the
gantry. The IPS distributes electrical power to the detector, patient table, the
Acquisition computer, and other peripherals.
The system has two power switches:
1. The Power Saver switch removes power from the gantry, Acquisition
computer and monitor, patient table, and the outlets on the IPS.
Power is not removed from the detectors.
2. The Main Power switch removes power from the entire system, including
the detectors.
WARNING
Before performing any repair or replacement other than software loading,
Lock-Out or Tag-Out (LO/TO) the power input cables.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures System Power-Off
CAUTION
After turning OFF either the Main or Power Saver switch, wait at least one
minute before switching the power back ON. This delay allows all the
power supplies to discharge.
If you simply turn OFF a Power switch (or press the reset switch on the
Acquisition computer), the system may take longer to power-up, data may
be lost, and some parts of the system may start in an unknown state.
8.1.1 Computer Shutdown

1. If the monitor is blank, move the mouse to activate the login screen. If the
software is running, log out by doing the following:
a. Display the Main Screen and select the < Shutdown > button located
in the upper right corner of the Main Screen:
b. If an acquisition or a quality control operation is in progress, a

message appears explaining that the system cannot be shutdown.
c. If the system can be shutdown, a message asks for confirmation that
the Acquisition computer should be shutdown. Select [Yes] to
d. After several minutes, the Shutdown Screen is displayed:
e. Select [Yes].

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures System Power-Off
2. Log into the system as follows:

User name: shutdown
Password: shutdown
A message is displayed stating that the system will shut down in

5 seconds. No other message is displayed. Wait 5 to10 seconds.
3. You can now remove power from the entire system or part of the system
by using either the Power Saver switch, or the Main Power switch, shown
in Figure 8-1.
• Use the Power Saver switch to remove power from everything except
the detectors. Power is not removed from the detectors to ensure that
their fans continue to operate and the detectors remain electrically
stable.
• Use the Main Power switch to the remove power from the entire
system, including the detectors and fans.
Before performing any repair work on the system, please read Section 8.3, Safety
Important Considerations.
Power Saver Switch
Input Power Indicator LED Power Saver Indicator LED
MAIN INPUT Input Power

POWER SWITCH Connector
Figure 8-1: IPS Power Switches and Indicators

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures System Start-Up
8.2 System Start-Up

1. Check that the power cord is properly attached to the IPS and plugged into
the AC power outlet. Figure 8-1 shows the location of the Input Power
connector on the IPS.
2. Check that the Power Saver switch is OFF.
3. Switch ON the Main Power switch. The LED next to the switch
illuminates, and you will hear the system's cooling fans rotate.
4. Switch the Power Saver Switch ON. The cooling fans rotate faster. The
Power Saver's LED will go OFF.
5. Check that the power indicator light on the front of the computer tower is
lit. If not, press the power switch on the front of the tower.
6. Check that the monitor's indicator light, located below the screen, is lit. If
not, press the power switch on the front of the monitor.
7. After a few minutes, the login screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Welcome to Acquisition Computer
User name genieacq
Password
Figure 8-2: Login Screen
8. If necessary, adjust the monitor's brightness and contrast. The controls are
below the monitor.
9. Check that the cursor (a single vertical line) is in the login screen. If it is
not, press <Enter> once.
10. Enter the following information in lowercase letters:
User name: genieacq
Password: genieacq
If your login name and password are valid, the main Acquisition User
Interface (AUI) appears.
If the login is invalid or includes an error, an error message appears, you

should re-enter your user name and password and try again.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Safety Considerations
The login screen appears automatically when you start the system and whenever it
Note is not in use. When a valid login name and password are entered, the Acquisition
software starts and the Acquisition User Interface (AUI) screen appears. The login
screen allows only authorized users access the system.
You can obtain a login name and password from the person at your site who is
responsible for the system. If the login name and password are lost, contact your
system vendor service representative for a replacement
11. Since power was removed from the Gantry and Table, they must be
recalibrated. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
8.3 Safety Considerations

The products involved are highly sophisticated and special engineering
competence is required. The purchaser of system vendor equipment shall only
utilize qualified personnel (i.e., system vendor's field engineers, personnel of
third-party service companies with equivalent training) to perform electrical
servicing on the equipment.
WARNING
Adhere strictly to the procedures in this manual.
Some repair/replacement procedures require the removal of protective
covers, exposing parts which may be heated to a high temperature, or
potential pinch points.
To prevent burns or other injuries, read the safety/warning labels.
WARNING
Most repair procedures direct you to remove power from the system.
However, some repair/replacement procedures require the detectors be
placed in a particular position which requires power to be maintained.
To prevent unexpected motion and prevent injury or damage to equipment,
disconnect or restrict access to all Hand-Held Controllers, as well as the
Acquisition computer.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Removing the IPS
8.4 Removing the IPS

Refer to Figure 8-3 for guidance on removing the IPS.
1 2 3
Remove Lock Screw Lift IPS Lift IPS from
and Rotate Lock from Top Bottom Support
LOCK
SCREW
Figure 8-3: Removing the IPS
Once unfastened, swing the IPS to the side so that the cable connections can
be accessed.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Gantry/IPS Repair Procedures
8.5 Gantry/IPS Repair Procedures
8.5.1 Replacing the Circuit Breakers

Circuit Brakers CB1, CB2, and CB3.
(GE Part # 2187887, 2187888, 2187890 / ELGEMS Part # S09062100A,

S09062200A, S09061050A).
CB1: 250V, 10A @200-220V

CB2: 250V, 20A @100-120V
CB3: 120V, 5A
Figure 8-4: Location of Circuit Breakers on IPS
The following procedure assumes the breaker malfunctioned and needs to be

replaced. Figure 8-4 shows the location of the main power circuit breakers on
the IPS.
Circuit Breaker ratings:
• CB1: 250V, 10A protects main power 200-240V.

G.E. Part # S09062100A / ELGEMS Part # 2187887.
• CB2: 250V, 20A protects main power 100-120V.
• CB3: 120V, 5A protects the outlets located on the connector panel,
including the outlet used to supply power to the Acquisition
computer.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Turn OFF all power to the system.

Refer to Section 8.1 for the correct shutdown procedure.
2. Remove the IPS's outer protective cover.
3. Remove the inner IPS cover.
4. Remove the rear connector panel.
5. Disconnect all cables to the breaker.
6. Replace the breaker.
7. Reconnect all cables to the breaker.
8. Remount the rear connector panel.
9. Remount the inner IPS cover and the outer cover.
10. Restore power to the system. Refer to Section 8.2.
11. Verify full functionality. Refer to Chapter 4 for functional checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.2 Replacing the Metal Oxide Varistors

(GE Part # 2193843/ELGEMS Part # RV000213032).
The Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) are mounted across the main input wires
going to the main transformer. The varistors protect sensitive electronics
against damages caused by high current surges coming from the main input
power.
The following procedure explains how to replace the MOVs, in the event that
they malfunction.
1. Turn OFF all power to the system. Refer to Section 8.1 for the correct
procedure.
2. Remove the IPS outer cover.
4. Remove the protection plate from the mains transformer.
Protection
Plate
MOV Terminals
MOVs
Figure 8-5: Location of Metal Oxide Varistors

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Remove the protection plate's four standoffs to gain access to the two
MOVs.
6. Disconnect all cables to the MOVs.
7. Replace the MOVs.
8. Refit the standoffs for the protection plate and replace the protection plate.
9. Remount the inner IPS cover and the outer cover.
11. Verify full functionality. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
8.5.3 Replacing the Fuse F5 on the Power Supply Board

(GE Part # 2187897 / ELGEMS Part # F00050100A).
Refer to Figure 8-6 for location of fuse F5, which protects the 65 V DC
supply to the motor amplifier backplane.
Value of fuse F5 = 10A, 250V.
Power Supply Board
Power
Supply
Board
F5: 250V, 10A
Figure 8-6: Location of Power Supply Board and F5 Fuse

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Refer to .
2. Remove the IPS's outer cover.
3. Remove inner IPS cover.
4. Replace the fuse F5: 10A, 250V.
5. Reassemble the IPS.
7. Verify full functionality. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
8.5.4 Replacing the Power Supply Board

(UGP001275).

Refer to Section 8.1.
2. Wait 5 minutes.
3. Remove the IPS covers (see Figure 8-7).
PS Board
Figure 8-7: IPS Unit with Covers Removed
4. Disconnect all cables and connectors from the Power Suply Board. The
connectors are key coded so that when reconnecting them to the
replacement board, each connector will fit only into its designated socket.
5. Remove the damaged PS board, and its mounting frame from the IPS
chassis by unfastening the M4 nuts and screws (see Figure 8-8).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2 Power SupplyFrame
M4 Screws x 2
Screws x 2
4
3
Power Supply Board
Figure 8-8: Power Supply Board and Mounting Frame
6. Place the board with the frame on an ESD protective surface.

7. Unfasten the ten M3 screws and stand-offs holding the Power Supply
Board to the frame (see Figure 8-9).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2 Power SupplyFrame
3
Standoffs
1
M3 Screws x 10
4
Power Supply Board
Figure 8-9: Removing the Power Supply Board From the Frame
8. Remove the damaged PS board and replace with the new board,
PCA000416.
9. Using the original ten M3 screws and stand-offs that were removed,
remount the frame on the IPS chassis.
10. Reconnect all cables and connectors to the new Power Suply Board. The
connectors are key coded so that each cannector will fit only into its
designated socket.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
From Transformer From Transformer

wire no. 15 Bridge wire no. 14
Connector Plug
Top View CBL000948
E F G H
Connector Socket
Terminal Connector
Base
A B C D
Mounting Rail
Red Green
PS Board
Not Used
Solder
1 2 3
Figure 8-10: Fitting the New Connector
11. Cut the existing BE-6 plug from the cable leading to the transformer and
fit the new connector plug (CBL000948) to the cable (wires no. 14 &15 in
Figure 8-10). Do not remove the two bridges.
12. Insert the new connector plug into the socket on top of the terminal
connector fasten the securing screws.
13. Replace the IPS covers.
14. Connect all the IPS power supplies.
15. When power is reconnected, 5 LEDs will light on the Power Supply
Board and are visible through the covers.
16. Restore power to the system as described in Section 8.2.
17. Test functionality of the system. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.5 Replacing the MUX Board

(GE Part # 2184462 / ELGEMS PCA000049).
Refer to Figure 8-11 as you carry out this procedure.
CAN Bus Board
MUX Board
Figure 8-11: Location of MUX and IF Boards
1. Turn OFF all power to the system. Refer to Section 8.1.

3. Remove the two M4 screws from the top cover of the IPS.
4. Disconnect all cables to the MUX. board.
5. Remove the six M3 screws holding the board to the IPS and then remove
the board.
6. Install the new board.
7. Reconnect the cables to the board.
8. Replace the top cover of the IPS.
9. Replace the outer cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.6 Replacing the Handset CAN Bus Board

(GE Part # 2168930 / ELGEMS BR320068930).
Refer to Figure 8-11 as you read this procedure.

4. Disconnect all cables to the IF board.
5. Remove the four M3 screws holding the board and then remove the board.
11. Test functionality of the system Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
8.5.7 Replacing the MEC Board

(GE Part # / ELGEMS PCA000377).
Refer to Figure 8-11 as you read this procedure.

4. Disconnect all cables to the MEC board.
5. Remove the four M3 screws holding the board and then remove the board.
11. Test functionality of the system Chapter 4, Functional Checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.8 Replacing the 4-Axis Controller

(GE Part # 2186881 / ELGEMS B01020214A).
4-Axis Controller
Figure 8-12: 4-Axis Controller

3. Remove the IPS. Refer to Section Section 8.4.
4. Rotate the IPS to gain access to the rear of the IPS. Do not disconnect any
cables.
5. Remove the two M4 screws from the top cover of the IPS.
6. Remove the four M4 screws from the back cover plate of the IPS.
7. Disconnect all cables connected to the 4-Axis Controller.
8. From the rear, remove the four M4 screws on the Controller.
9. Replace the Controller.
10. Replace the screws removed above.
11. Reposition the IPS on the gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.9 Replacing the Motor Amplifier Backplane

(GE Part # 2186883 / ELGEMS B010200164).
Motor Amplifier
Backplane
Figure 8-13: Motor Amplifier Backplane

Refer to Section 8.1.
3. Remove the two M4 screws from the top cover of the IPS and remove the
cover.
4. Remove the lock for the motor amplifiers and remove the amplifiers.
5. Remove the eight M3 screws holding the backplane and then remove the
board.
6. Install the new backplane.
7. Reposition the lock for the motor amplifiers and the amplifiers.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.10 Replacing the Amplifier Drive Boards

(GE Part # 2146498 / ELGEMS # B01020612).
Refer to Figure 8-13 as you conduct this procedure.
CAUTION
An anti-static wrist strap should be used during this operation.
AMPLIFIER DRIVE BOARDS
Figure 8-14: Replacing the Amplifier Drive Boards

4. Remove the lock for the motor amplifiers and remove the amplifier board.
5. Install the new amplifier board:
• P1 = X axis: table longitudinal
• P2 = Y axis: (open)
• P3 = T axis: vertical and radial 1
• P4 = Z axis: lateral and radial 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Reposition the lock for the motor amplifiers and the amplifiers.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.11 Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly

(GE Part # 2184454/ ELGEMS B010259507).
The specific procedure for replacing the radial motor drive assembly depends
upon whether the drive is still functioning and can be used to position the
detectors in a radial position:
• If the drive is still functional and can move the detectors, go to:
Section 8.5.11.1, Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly: Motion
Capabilities Exist.
• If the detectors cannot be moved, go to:
Section 8.5.11.2, Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly: No
Motion Capabilities Exist.
WARNING
Before performing any repair on the radial drive, position the
detectors as shown in Figure 8-19. Do not, under any circumstances,
attempt to roll the gantry after removing one of the radial drives.
Failure to follow this warning may cause the detectors to move in an
uncontrolled manner to maximum or minimum radial position. This
movement may result in serious injury to you or other service
personnel.
Figure 8-15: Detectors in 180° Opposed Mode - Heads Vertical

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.11.1 Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly: Motion Capabilities Exist
1. Remove the gantry rear cover to allow access to the radial drives.
2. Position the detectors in the opposed mode (180°) with the detectors
vertical. Use a spirit level to verify the detectors are exactly vertical.
See Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16: Verify that Detectors are Vertical
3. To prevent accidental movement of the detectors, install one of the

shipping brackets during the change-out procedure. Refer to Figure 8-17
for installation options. Do not tighten the four bolts - this will leave
sufficient backlash to enable removal and remounting of the drive.
Top View of Shipping Bracket
Install One of these

Shipping Brackets
REAR VIEW
Figure 8-17: Installing a Shipping Bracket

Direction 2414259-100 2019

5. Locate the radial drive and its cables. Refer to Figure 8-18.
Remove the binders that hold the radial cables to the bearing, and
disconnect the cables going to the cable chain.
Radial Drive #1
1
Location of
Radial Drive #2
(not shown)
Figure 8-18: Radial Drive
6. Remove the two M8 bolts holding the radial drive and remove the drive.
7. Replace the drive; tighten the bolts to 35 Nm.
8. Reconnect the cables to the cable chain.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9. Reinstall the cable binders.

10. Remove the shipping bracket.
12. Use the Hand-Held controller to rotate the gantry and check functionality
of the gantry. Watch the cables as you do this to make sure they do not
catch.
13. Reinstall rear gantry cover.
14. Check the functionality of the system. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional
Checks.
8.5.11.2 Replacing the Radial Motor Drive Assembly: No Motion Capabilities Exist
This procedure explains how to replace the radial drive assembly if the drive
is not functioning and you cannot rotate the gantry into a position where you
can install the shipping bracket.
1. Use the crank to manually rotate the detectors so they are vertical. Refer
to Chapter 3 - see Section 3.2.3.5, Narrow or Restricted Access for
information on location of crank hole and how to manually rotate the
detectors.
2. Once you have the detectors vertical, follow the procedure described
above in Section 8.5.11.1.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.12 Replacing the Radial-Motion-Limit Switch Board

(GE Part # 2187883/ ELGEMS Part # PCA000051).
The limit switches for detecting radial motion are mounted on the
limit-switch board in the detector. Refer to Figure 8-19.
To replace a switch, you replace the board.
Detector Interface Panel
Limit-Switch
Board
Figure 8-19: Location of the Limit-switch Circuit Board

2. Remove the detector's cover.
3. Disconnect all cables connected to the limit-switch board.
4. Remove the four M4 nuts holding the board and remove the board.
5. Replace the board tightening the nuts to 2 Nm. Verify that the actuator for
the end stop is positioned between the switch actuators.
7. Remount the detector cover.
9. Verify limit-switch functionality. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.13 Replacing the Roll Motor Drive Assembly

(GE Part # 2187875/ ELGEMS B010300659).
The procedure for replacing the roll drive assembly depends upon the position
of the detectors, and whether the drive is still functioning:
• If the detectors are in the opposed (180°) mode position and the drive is
still functioning: go to Section 8.5.13.1.
• If the detectors are in the opposed (180°) mode position, but the drive is
not functioning: go to Section 8.5.13.2.
• If the detectors are in a cardiac (101°) position and the drive is not
functioning: go to Section 8.5.13.3.
WARNING
Before performing any repair on the roll drive, the detectors must be
positioned as shown in Figure 8-20. This position keeps the detectors from
rotating in an uncontrolled manner to the lowest center-of-gravity position.
Uncontrolled movement may result in serious injury to you or other
service personnel in the room.
Move Detector #1 DETECTOR # 1 at 0°

to Minimum Radial Position
Move Detector #2
to Maximum Radial Position
DETECTOR # 2 at 180°
Figure 8-20: Positioning Detectors for Roll Motor Drive Replacement
Refer to Figure 8-21 for the location of the roll drive assembly.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Roll Drive Assembly
Note:
The locations of the detectors is shown before re-positioning
Figure 8-21: Roll Drive Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.13.1 Replacing the Entire Roll Drive Assembly: Motion Capabilities Exist
WARNING
The roll brake can become very hot. Avoid prolonged contact with it when
performing service procedures
Drive Assembly
Roll Limit Switch Board
Encoder
Figure 8-22: Roll Motor and Drive Assembly
1. Position the detectors as shown in Figure 8-20. Use a spirit level to verify
the detectors are level.
2. Use the Hand-Held Controller to position Detector #1 at minimum radial
position and Detector #2 at maximum radial position, as shown in
Figure 8-20.
4. Remove the outer cover of the IPS.
5. Lift off the IPS. Refer to Section 8.4.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Turn the IPS aside to gain access to the rear of the gantry.
7. Disconnect the encoder cable G7 and motor power cable G10 from the
connector pane.
8. Note the polarity of the brake cable at the fan unit; disconnect the cable.
9. Loosen the three M10 bolts and remove the roll drive.
10. Replace the roll drive, tightening the three M10 bolts to 70 Nm.
11. Remount all cables. Make sure that the brake cable is installed with
correct polarity.
12. Reposition the IPS.
13. Replace the outer cover for the IPS.
15. Perform the roll limit-switch calibration procedure described in
Section 6.1.
16. Perform the calibration procedure as directed in Section 6.3.7, Gantry
Roll Characterization.
8.5.13.2 Replacing the Entire Roll Drive Assembly: No Motion Capabilities
This procedure explains roll drive assembly replacement, when the gantry
cannot be rotated with the Hand-Held Controller.
1. Remove the gantry's rear protective cover so you can see the cable chain.
2. Use the crank to manually rotate the detectors to the position shown in
Figure 8-20. Refer to Section 3.2.3.5, Narrow or Restricted Access, for
information on location of crank hole and how to manually rotate the
detectors.
3. Once you have the detectors vertical, follow the procedure described
above in Section 8.5.13.1. Begin with Step 3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.13.3 Replacing the Entire Roll Drive Assembly: Gantry in Cardiac (101o) Mode
WARNING
1. If the gantry is in cardiac-mode, crank the gantry so both detectors are at

their lowest levels - see Figure 8-23.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.5, Narrow or Restricted Access.
Figure 8-23: Correct Detector Position
2. Carry out the procedures described in Section 8.5.13.1, but start with
Step 3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.13.4 Replacing the Roll-Limit-Switch Board

(GE Part # 2184457/ ELGEMS PCA000047).
During this procedure, refer to Figure 8-24.
Detector #1 Interface
Gantry Rear View Gantry Front View
Detector #2 Interface
Alternative position
for Trigger Screw
Set Screws
Trigger Screw
SW2 Assy
Roll Limit Board

SW2 to Roll Limit Board Cable
Figure 8-24: Gantry Roll Limit Switch Board
WARNING

2. Remove the outer cover to the IPS.
3. Remove the IPS. See Section 8.4
Do not disconnect any cables from the IPS gantry connector panel.
5. Disconnect all cables from the roll limit board.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
6. Unfasten the four M4 screws and remove the roll limit board.
7. Replace the board and tighten the four M4 screws to 4.3 Nm.
8. Reinstall all cables.
9. Reinstall the IPS.
10. Replace the outer cover to the IPS.
Section 6.1.
13. Perform the calibration procedure according to Section 6.3.7, Gantry Roll
Characterization.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.13.5 Replacing the SW2 Assembly
WARNING
performing service procedures.

Refer to Section 8.1, System Power-Off.
3. Lift off the IPS.
Do not disconnect any cables from the IPS gantry connector panel.
5. From the roll limit circuit board, disconnect the cable going to the SW2
assembly. Refer to Figure 8-23.
6. Loosen the two M3 screws and remove the SW2 assembly.
7. Replace the assembly and tighten the two M3 screws to 4.3 Nm.
8. Re-connect the cable at the roll limit board.
9. Replace the SW2 cover at the gantry front as indicated in Figure 8-23.
10. Reposition the IPS.
11. Replace the outer cover of the IPS.
Section 6.1.
14. Perform the calibration procedure according to Section 6.3.7, Gantry Roll
Characterization.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.14 Replacing the Roll-Lock Motor Assembly
Important This procedure requires partial removal of the roll-lock.

To carry out this procedure, the detectors must be positioned at 180°.
Microswitch #1
Figure 8-25: VG Lock Assembly Showing Correct Orientation of Microswitch #1
Figure 8-26: VG Lock

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Set the gantry to opposed mode, with Head #1 at 0° (on top).

2. Shut down the power to the system.
3. Unfasten the 3 cap screws holding the rear protection cover to the gantry
housing.
4. Remove the rear protection cover from the gantry housing.
5. Verify that the microswitch 1 (see Figure 8-23) is correctly positioned.
It is important that the operating lever is facing downward.
See insert to Figure 8-23.
Changing the orientation of the microswitch is described in step 9.
Figure 8-27: Replacing the VG-Lock Assembly
6. Remove the 2 screws holding the cable connector plug to the connector
socket of the VG Lock assembly and remove the connector plug from the
socket See Figure 8-28.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
7. Unscrew the four M5 screws from the VG-LOCK plate.

Note: Only the 2 upper M5 screws are visible in Figure 8-28.
Holding Screws
Connector Socket
Connector Plug
M5 Screws
Figure 8-28: Unscrewing the VG-LOCK plate
8. Remove the motor and fixing plate. See Figure 8-29.

9. If the microswitch was in the wrong orientation (step 5) simply unfasten
the securing machine screws and refitting correctly.
Figure 8-29: Removing the Motor and Fixing Plate
10. Remove the slide section of the VG-Lock.

11. Unscrew the two M8 screws and remove the VG Lock Guide. See
Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30: VG Lock Guide

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12. Align the new Lock Slide to the new Lock Guide (as shown in
Figure 8-30) and slide the two pieces together.
VG Lock Guide VG Lock Slide
Figure 8-31: Fitting the Slide to the Guide
13. Fit the new slide/guide assembly (as shown in Figure 8-32) using the two
M8 guide screws. Refer to Figure 8-33.
Figure 8-32: New Slide/Guide Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 8-33: Fitting the New Slide/Guide Assembly
14. Move the slide as far as possible to the right. See Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34: Move the Slide to the Right
15. Refit the motor assembly to its original position and tighten all screws.
16. Refit the cable connector (removed in step 6).
17. Power up the system.
18. Move the heads from Opposed to Cardiac mode, and back.
Repeat this procedure 4 more times to ensure that the operation is smooth
and that the VG-Lock is functioning correctly.
19. Refit the Gantry rear protection cover.
20. Perform functionality checks.
Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.15 Replacing the Cable Chain Assembly

(GE Part # 2184441/ ELGEMS ASM00773).
1. Remove the rear protection cover from the gantry housing to gain access
to the cable chains.
2. Position Detector #1 at 0° and Detector #2 at 180°.
Single Cable Support Bracket

WARNING POTENTIAL PINCH POINT
Double Cable Support Bracket

Detector #1 at 0° WARNING POTENTIAL PINCH POINT
Cable Chain Fixing Point
Strain Relief Fixing Point
Detector #2 at 180°
Roll Shaft
Figure 8-35: Cable Chain Assembly

5. Unfasten the IPS. Refer to Figure 8-3 and Section 8.4.
6. Swing the IPS to the side to gain access to the rear of the gantry.
Disconnect all cables, including the protective ground wires from the IPS
gantry connector panel, and the cables listed in Table 8-1 below.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 8-1: IPS Cable Connections
Location Cables Connector
Double cable support brackets Detector #1 DB9

TAXI link cable
Detector #1 DB25
signal/power cable
Radial drive 1 MNL6
power cable
Radial drive 1 DB9
encoder cable
Single cable support brackets Detector #2 DB9
TAXI link cable
Detector #2 DB25
signal/power cable
Roll-lock DB9
power cable
Radial drive 2 MNL6
power cable
Radial drive 2 DB9
encoder cable
7. Remove the screws from the cable chain strain relief fixing point, and
remove the strain relief mechanism. Refer to Figure 8-36.
8. Remove the screws from the cable chain fixing point as shown in
Figure 8-36.
9. Remove the screws holding both the double and single cable support
brackets.
10. Partially extract the cable chain. See Figure 8-37.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Cable Chain
Single Cable
Support Bracket
Double Cable
Support Bracket
Cable Chain
Fixing Point
Strain Relief
Fixing Point
Figure 8-36: Cable Chain
Pull Out the Cable Chain

(a few inches)
Figure 8-37: Partially Extract the Cable Chains

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11. Remove the cables disconnected in step 6 by individually pulling them

through the opening in the gantry ring. Refer to Figure 8-38.
Extract Cables (one-by-one)
Figure 8-38: Replacing the Cable Chains
12. Feed the new cable chain through the opening in the gantry ring.
Be careful that you do not damage the cable connectors when passing the
cables through the opening.
13. Refit the screws at the cable chain fixing point.
14. Identify the two Taxi cables (two thin gray cables) which run to the G2
and G5 sockets on the IPS rear panel, and arrange them so that they are
not next to each other.
Important Allowing the two Taxi Communication cables (IN board 1 and IN Board 2) to lie in
close proximity to each other (in the cable chain), creates a “crosstalk” effect and
signal interference.
15. Secure the cables with new cable ties (do not tighten the cable ties
excessively).
16. Cut off the protruding ends of the cable ties.
17. Fasten the cables to the two cable support brackets.
WARNING
Rotating the gantry while the rear cover is removed exposes several
potential pinch points.
Proceed with caution while performing the following steps.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
18. Refit the strain relief mechanism. See Figure Figure 8-36.
At this point, do not tighten the screws - this will allow the cables to slide
through the strain relief.
19. Position the IPS to facilitate easy access to the rear of the gantry and
re-connect all cables including the protective ground wires to the IPS.
WARNING
The safety of the system depends on grounding continuity.
When securing ground wires from the detectors and the gantry to the IPS,
you must use lock washers.
20. Verify all cable connections. Refer to Step 6, above.
WARNING
When rotating the gantry with the rear cover removed, several potential
pinch points (the cable chains) are exposed. Proceed with caution when
performing the following steps.
22. Roll the gantry 5 to 10 times from end-stop to end-stop until the cables
adjust to the bending of the cable chain. Verify that the cable chain does
not catch inside the gantry.
23. Repeat this procedure for the short cable chain by doing two or three
mode changes.
24. Tighten the screws for the strain relief at the strain relief fix point.
25. Remount the IPS. Refer to Section 3.2.9, Installing the Integrated Power
Supply (IPS).
26. Refit the outer cover to the IPS.
27. Refit the rear gantry cover.
28. Restore power as described in Section 8.2.
29. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
30. Re-mount the Double Cable Support Bracket.
31. Connect all the cables previously removed.
32. Restore the power to the system.
33. Rotate system 3 times from one Roll limit to another. Check smoothly
retractors working.
34. Conduct functional checks for image quality and gantry motions
according to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
35. Re-fit the rear gantry cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.5.16 Replacing the Detector Cables

(GE Part # 2187882 / ELGEMS CBL000891).
1. Remove the gantry's rear cover to gain access to the detector's cables
located inside the gantry housing.
2. Position the detector which requires cable replacement in the uppermost
(top) position.
.
Detector Requiring
Cable Replacement
Figure 8-39: Positioning the Detector for Cable Replacement

4. Remove the detector's cover.
5. Cut the cable binders holding the cables to the gantry bearing and pull the
cables aside.
6. Disconnect the following cables from the cable support brackets:.
• Detector #1 TAXI link cable DB9 connector

• Detector #1 signal/power cable DB25 connector
• Protective ground wire Ring terminal
7. Disconnect the same cables from the detector.

8. Cut the cable binders that hold the cables to the board support plate and
pull the cables aside.
9. Working between the detector and the gantry (see Figure 8-40):
• Remove the two M5 screws holding the angled adaptor flange at the
detector.
• Remove the two M5 screws holding the angled adaptor flange at the
gantry.
• Remove the cables going into the gantry by pulling the individual
cables through the opening in the gantry bearing.
• Remove the cables going into the detector by pulling the individual
cables through the opening in the detector interface.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Gantry Bearing Hole Angled Adaptor Flange
Gantry Bearing
Detector
Interface
Hole
Figure 8-40: Replacing the Detector Cables
10. Replace the cable assembly in the reverse order. Be careful not to damage
the cable connectors when passing the individual cables through the
openings in the bearing and the interface panel.
11. Remount the screws holding the angled adapter flanges at the detector and
at the bearing. Position the flexible conduit so it is bending toward the
center of the detector.
12. Reconnect all cables at both ends.
13. Replace the cable binders to affix the cables to the board support plate in
the detector.
14. Replace cable binders fixing the cables to the bearing inside the gantry.
WARNING
When rotating the gantry with the rear cover removed, several potential
pinch points (the cable chains) are exposed. Proceed with caution when
performing the following steps.
16. Move the detectors through their full range of movement. Verify that the
cable chains do not snag inside the gantry.
17. Remount the gantry’s protective covers.
18. Refer to Chapter 4, Functional Checks.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Detector Repair Procedures
8.6 Detector Repair Procedures
WARNING
• Do not place high activity sources close to a detector without a
collimator. Sources greater than 0.5 mCi (18.5 Mbq) may cause
long-term image quality damage if placed within 0.5m of a detector
without a collimator.
• Always turn OFF system power before removing any detector assembly.
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to rotate the gantry without the collimators installed on
the detectors.
• Detector cables should only be disconnected by a qualified service
technician.
• Do not remove the collimators unless absolutely necessary. The
collimators help protect the detectors from accidental damage and
minimize the effects of temperature change on the detectors.
• Position the detector in a horizontal position during repair procedures.
Most repair procedures can be performed in this position.
• Once the detector's cover is removed, the handles on the top lead
shieldings are visible. These are designed to carry the weight of the
shielding only. Do Not Try to Lift the Detector with these Handles.
• Before disassembling/reassembling any electronic assembly, take
standard precautions to protect the assembly against damage caused
by static discharges.
• When re-fitting the top lead shieldings, always use the correct screw
length and make sure that it is tightened to the specified torque.
Table 8-2 lists the Detector FRUs and directs you to the section that describes
the replacement procedure. Detector assemblies and recommended torque
specifications are shown in Figure 8-41 and Figure 8-42.
Table 8-2: Detector Field Replacable Units
FRU Refererence
Power Supply Section 8.6.4
I/N Board Section 8.6.5
Cables Section 8.6.6
Pre-Amplifier, Dyncor, and Dyncor Driver Section 8.6.7
Matrix Board Section 8.6.8
PMT Section 8.6.9
Scintillation Crystal Section 8.6.10
Collision Devices Section 8.6.11

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Detector Cover
Power I/N
Supply Board
Top Lead Shielding

Assembly
Matrix Board
PM Tube
NaI Crystal
Lead Casing
Collimator Locking Pins
Collimator
Figure 8-41: Detector Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Power I/N
Supply Board
Preamplifier
Dyncor Driver
Dyncor Module
Matrix Board
PM Tube
NaI Crystal
Lead Casing
Figure 8-42: Detector Electronic Parts
Description Quantity
PM Tubes 48
Pre-amplifiers 48
Dyncor Driver Module 1
Dyncor Module 14
Matrix Board 1
Detector power Supply 1
I/N Board 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.1 Detector Special Tools and Equipment List

Some special tools are required for disassembling/reassembling the detector.
Refer to Table 8-3 for a list of special tools required, and Table 8-3 for torque
specifications.
Table 8-3: Special Tools and Equipment
Assembly Screws Tools Operation

Detector mounting M 12 Allen wrench 10.0 mm Removal/refitting the detector
Detector cable outlet M4 Allen wrench 3.0 mm Removal/refitting
Detector cover M 4 CS Allen wrench 2.5 mm Removal/refitting of cover
Inside Top Lead shielding M5 Allen wrench 4.0 mm Removal/refitting of top lead shielding assembly
Power supply M 3 CS Allen wrench 2.0 mm Removal/refitting of PWB
M3 Allen wrench 2.5 mm
Bushing Hex wrench 5.5 mm
I/N board M3 Allen wrench 2.0 mm Disassembling of shield, and renewal/refitting
M3 Allen wrench 2.5 mm of PWB
Hex Hex wrench 5.5 mm
Bushing
Cables - - Removal/refitting
Pre-amplifier, Dyncor and - - Removal/refitting
Dyncor driver
Matrix board M3 Allen wrench 2.5 mm Removal/refitting
PMT M6 Allen wrench 5.0 mm Removal/refitting of support plate
Plastic spatula, 30 cm (12") Removal of optical couplant from crystal
Optical couplant PMT(s) replacement
Scintillation crystal M6 Allen wrench 5.0 mm Removal/refitting of X-tal and X-tal support plate
Lifting tool to place on mounting
patient table top Removal/refitting of X-tal (scintillation crystal)
Collision switches - Soldering iron Desoldering and removal / refitting of switch pad
Collision filters - Soldering iron Desoldering and removal / refitting of PWB
Table 8-4: Torque Specifications and Tools Used
Tool Used Max. Torque

Allen wrench 2.0 mm 1.8 Nm (1.3 lbf ft)
Allen wrench 10.0 mm 120 Nm (88 lbf ft)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.2 Removing the Detector Cover
Refer to Figure 8-43 to locate the parts mentioned in the following procedure.
Washer
DETECTOR COVER
M4 x 12
Screw
Mounting Plate for

Locking Screw Power Supply and I/O Board
for securing plate in upright position
Power Supply I/O Board

M5 x 25 Screw
TOP LEAD
SHIELDING
ASSEMBLY
Detector Contact PIN Board
Detector Flange LEAD CASING Detector Flange
Figure 8-43: Removing the Detector Cover

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Use the Hand Held Controller (HHC) to position the detectors in the
horizontal position and at a suitable working height. Refer to Figure 8-44.
.
Detector to be Replaced
Figure 8-44: Detectors Positioned in Horizontal Position
2. Remove power from the system as described in Section 8.1.

3. Loosen but do not remove the two M4 screws holding the detector cable
outlet block, located on the right side of the detector.
4. Withdraw the detector cable outlet block far enough to lift off the detector
cover.
5. Remove the eight M4 screws located on each side of the cover and lift off
the cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.3 Replacing a Detector
WARNING
A detector weighs approximately 550 lbs. (250 kg).
Use an appropriate lifting device to lift or move it.
8.6.3.1 Removing the Old Detector
1. Unlock the patient table and move it out of the way.

2. Remove the collimator from the detector to be replaced. If necessary, refer
to Chapter 4.
3. Rotate the gantry so the detector to be replaced is at the top of the gantry.
Replacing Detector #1 requires Detector #1 at 0oand Detector #2 at 180o.

Note
Replacing Detector #2 requires Detector #1 at 180o and Detector #2 at 270o.
4. Remove power from the system as specified in Section 8.1.

5. Remove the detector's cover as described in Section 8.6.2.
6. Position the lifting cart so it is directly under the detector. Adjust the
height of the cart until the detector is resting on the cart.
7. Disconnect the power supply and IN board cables.
8. Remove the M4X10 bolt and lock-washer that connects the protective
ground wire to the support panel.
9. Remove the rear six M10X16 bolts and four M10X25 bolts.
10. Remove the front two M10X25 bolts with lock-washers.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.3.2 Installing a New Detector
CAUTION
Do not unpack the detector until it has been stabilized at room temperature
for at least 24 hours.
1. Remove the top of the shipping box. Remove the inside packing material.
2. Remove the side insulating packing material. Then remove the remaining
packing material around the detector.
3. Use a lifting cart to move the detector and pallet directly in front of the
detector's support panel.
The detector is boxed and shipped in the correct orientation, with the
Note collimator face down.
4. Move the lifting cart to align the detector to the detector's support panel
on the gantry.
5. Insert from the rear the six M10X16 bolts and four (4) M10X25 bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (50 ft-lb).
6. Insert from the front the two M10X25 bolts with lock-washers. Tighten
the bolts to 70 Nm (50 ft-lb).
7. Connect the cables to the power supply and the IN board.
8. Attach the protective ground wire to the support panel with the M4X10
bolt and lock-washer.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.3.3 Installing the Locking Pins and Identification Dots
Locking Pin
DETECTOR 1 DETECTOR 2
Figure 8-45: Locking Pin Orientation
To install the locking pins and identification dots on the detector:

1. Insert the four locking pins into the detector and orient them correctly.
The orientation of the pins depends upon whether you have replaced
Detector #1 or Detector #2. See Figure 8-45.
2. Make sure the shoulders on the pins are in contact with the detector's
casing and that the pins extend 6 mm above the casing.
3. Install the four M6 screws and tighten the screws to 15Nm (10 lb.ft.).
4. Affix the identification dots to the front of the detector:
Detector #1 = 1 dot
Detector #2 = 2 dots
5. Reinstall the detector cover.

6. If you are replacing only one detector, restore power to the system as
directed in Section 8.2.
If you are replacing the second detector, proceed to Section 8.6.3.4.
7. Since power was removed from the gantry and table, they must be
recalibrated. Refer to Section 4.3.1, Calibrating the Gantry and Table.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.3.4 Replacing a Second Detector
This procedure assumes you are replacing both detectors at the same time,
and that you have just completed the procedure described in Section 8.6.3.
1. Follow the procedure described above to remove and replace Detector #1.
Make sure Detector #1 is at the home position, 0o.
2. Remove the protective cover from the rear of the gantry housing so you
can see the gantry cable.
3. Assemble the 15mm box spanner, extender, and crank handle and insert it
into the cranking hole in the gantry base. Refer to Figure 8-46.
.
Cranking Hole
Figure 8-46: Gantry Cranking Hole
4. Manually turn the crank in the CW direction (about 600 revolutions) to

rotate the gantry 180o. This will position Detector #2 at the top of the
gantry.
Watch the cable chain during rotation and make sure it does not snag.
Do not rotate the gantry beyond 180o.
Important Do not use a power drill to rotate the gantry. During rotation, the roll motor brake is
engaged and using a power drill may overheat and damage this motor.
CAUTION
You must be careful to not rotate the gantry more than 180o.
The roll motion is not mechanically limited. Rotating the gantry too far
could damage the cables.
5. Detector #2 is now on top and can be replace by following the procedures

described in Section 8.6.3.1 through Section 8.6.3.3.
6. Refit the gantry rear cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.4 Replacing the Power Supply Board

(ELGEMS Part # PCA000470).
Refer to Section 10.3.8 for the location of the Power Supply board.
1. Refer to Section 8.6 through Section 8.6.2 for information on how to
correctly position the detector, remove power, and remove the detector's
cover.
2. Disconnect the 24 volt input power cable and the collision output cable
from the power supply board. Refer to Figure 8-47.
3. Tag and disconnect the five cables from the power supply board.
24V Power Input

Connector for
Remote Fuse
HV Control
and PSU Diag. CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE
Connector for
Low Voltage
Collision LED
Collision Sensor Output
Connector for
High Voltage
Connector for
Power
to I/N Board
Figure 8-47: Power Supply Board
4. Remove all screws and stays holding the Power Supply board in place.
5. Replace the power supply board and re-install the screws and standoffs.
Tighten all screws to the torque specified in Table 8-3.
Important All 16 stays and screws must be replaced and screws tightened to the specified
torque.
Failure to do this may cause the detector to fail EMC requirements.
6. Re-mount the guide for the top cover and tighten the mounting screws as
specified in Table 8-3.
7. Reconnect the five cables to the power supply board.
8. Connect the 24 volt input power cable and the collision output cable.
9. Reposition the mounting plate for the I/N board and power supply.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11. Enter the Diagnostic Menu and execute the complete Power Supply Test
package.
12. After a successful test, install the detector cover.
13. Since power was removed from the system, you must perform the
gantry/table calibration procedure.
Refer to Section 4.3.1, Calibrating the Gantry and Table.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.5 Replacing the I/N Board

8.6.5.1 Replacing the I/N Board Without Shielding
(GE Part #2139848 / ELGEMS Part # PCA000348).
correctly position the detector, remove power, and remove the detector
cover.
Screw Screw
M3 x 5 Mounting Plate M3 x 5
for EMC Filter
26 pin EMC Filter(s)
Mounting Plate(s)
for EMC Filter
To Matrix Board To Power X, Y Analog

Supply
Output Cable
To
Matrix
Board
16 Pin
EMC Filter +5V Input
Power Cable
I/N Board
EMC Shielding
Assembly
Figure 8-48: I/N Board
2. Reconnect the X-Y analog output and 24V input power cables to the
I/N board.
3. Reposition the EMC filter mounting plates and insert the filters into the
connectors on the I/N board.
4. Reposition the lid for EMC shielding assembly and install all lid screws.
Tighten the screws holding the lid and the EMC filters to the torque
specified in Table 8-3.
Important To ensure EMC compliance, check that the lid for EMC shielding assembly is
mounted correctly all the way around the edge.
5. Remount the three detector interconnecting ribbon cables to the I/N board.
8. Enter the Diagnostic Menu and execute the complete I/N Board test
package.
9. After a successful test, reinstall detector cover.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Since power was removed from the system, you must perform the
gantry/table calibration procedure. Refer to Section 4.3.1, Calibrating the
Gantry and Table.
8.6.5.2 Replacing the I/N Board With Shielding

(ELGEMS Part # ASM000781).

correctly position the detector, remove power, and remove the detector
cover.
2. Tag and disconnect the three ribbon cables from the I/N board.
3. Carefully pull the glued flat cable from the I/N board top shield, and move
it aside. Remove all screws holding the lid to the EMC shielding
assembly, and remove the lid. Refer to Figure 8-46.
4. Loosen and remove the eight fixing screws holding the I/N board
assembly to the mounting plate (from the other side of the plate).
5. Replace the I/N board assembly and tighten the screws removed in step 4.
6. Pull off the glue protector tape and attach the flat cable removed in step 3.
Important To ensure EMC compliance, check that the lid for EMC shielding assembly is
mounted correctly all the way around the edge.
7. Remount the three detector interconnecting ribbon cables to the I/N board.
10. Enter the Diagnostic Menu and execute the complete I/N Board test
package.
11. After a successful test, reinstall detector cover.
12. Since power was removed from the system, you must perform the gantry
/table calibration procedure. Refer to Chapter 4 - see Section 4.3.1,
Calibrating the Gantry and Table.
13. Replace the I/N board and remount the stays. Tighten the stays as defined
in Table 8-3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.6 Disconnecting Cables from the Matrix Board

This procedure discusses how to disconnect the 24V power cable, collision
sensor cable, and X-Y analog output cable.
CAUTION
Detector cables should only be disconnected by qualified service
personnel.

cover.
2. Turn OFF power to the system as described in Section 8.1.
3. Tag and disconnect the 24 volt power cable, collision sensor cable and
X-Y output cable from the matrix board (refer to Figure 8-49).
I/N Board Power Supply

Connections Connections
Collision
Sensor Cable
Detector Cable
Outlet Block
Incoming
Detector Cable
24 V
Power Cable
X, Y
Output Cable
Figure 8-49: Detector Matrix Board Connections
4. Tag and disconnect the following cables from the matrix board (refer to
Figure 8-50):
A High voltage control 26 ways; I/N Board to Power Supply Unit
B Power I/N board to power supply unit
C Collision detection to power supply unit

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D
G
E
F
MATRIX BOARD
CONNECTIONS
A
C
Figure 8-50: Internal Detector Cables
5. Remove the ten M5X25 screws and lift off the top lead shieldings (refer to
Figure 8-41).
6. Tag and disconnect the following cables from the Matrix board (refer to
Figure 8-50):
D High voltage power supply unit to Matrix board
E Power supply unit to Matrix board
F Control 26 ways I/N board to Matrix board
G Signal 16 ways I/N board to Matrix board
7. Remove the matrix board and the PMT support plate.

8. Tag and disconnect the high voltage resistor cable (H).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.7 Replacing the Pre-Amplifier, Dyncor, and Dyncor Driver

(Part # PCA000177, PCA000178, PCA000179).
1. Refer to Section 8.6 through Section 8.6.6 for information on removing

the top lead shieldings and exposing the Matrix board sub-assemblies,
consisting of: pre-amplifiers, Dyncor modules, and Dyncor driver.
All the sub-assemblies are mounted on connectors, which provide the
electrical connections as well as the mechanical support. (Refer to
Figure 8-51.)
2. Remove the desired sub-assembly, being careful not to damage the
connectors. The connector on the Dyncor module is coded (Pos. 6) to
prevent accidental insertion of the wrong module.
3. Refer to Section 8.6.7.1 if you replace the Dyncor Driver.
DYNCOR DRIVER MODULE

COL #1
DYNCOR
MODULE PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp
PreAmp
COLUMN PMT 31 PMT 25 PMT 19 PMT 13 PMT 7
#1 (PMT PMT 1
1 TO 31)
COL #2
DYNCOR
MODULE PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp
COLUMN PMT 32 PMT 26 PMT 20 PMT 14 PMT 8 PMT 2
#2(PMT ROW #6 ROW #5 ROW #4 ROW #3 ROW #2 ROW #1 CODED
2 TO 32)
COL #3
DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR
DYNCOR MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULEPreAmp MODULE
MODULEPreAmp ROW #6PreAmp ROW #5 PreAmp ROW #4PreAmp ROW #3 ROW #2 PreAmp DYNCOR MODULE
COLUMNPMT 33 (PMT 31 PMT 27 (PMT 25 PMT 21 (PMT 19 PMT 15 (PMT 13 PMT 9 (PMT 7 PMT 3
#3(PMT TO 36) TO 30) TO 24) TO 18) TO 12) Row #1
3 TO 33)
COL #4 (PMT 1 to 6)
DYNCOR
MODULEPreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp
COLUMNPMT 34 PMT 28 PMT 22 PMT 16 PMT 10 PMT 4
#4 (PMT
4 TO 34)
COL #5
DYNCOR
MODULE PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp
#5 (PMT
5 TO 35)
COL #6
DYNCOR
MODULEPreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp PreAmp
#6 (PMT
6 TO 36)
Figure 8-51: Matrix Board with Daughter Board Attached

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.7.1 Manual Setting of Threshold Potentiometer of Dyncor Driver
(GE Part # 2139842-3 / ELGEMS Part # PCA000179).
When replacing the Dyncor Driver module, the threshold potentiometer has to
be set to the same value as the replaced unit.
1. On the board to be replaced, measure by means of a DVM (range

0-10KΩ) the impedance between the resistors shown in Figure 8-52.
2. Adjust the replacement module to the same value as the replaced module
and insert the unit.
3. No further manual field adjustment on the Dyncor Driver module is
needed.
R6
R7
R8 U1
THRESHOLD
R3
AX1M
Probe on These Resistor Ends
Figure 8-52: Measuring the Threshold Potentiometer Impedance

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.8 Replacing the Matrix Board

(GE Part # 2166048 / ELGEMS Part # PCA000176).
cover.
2. Remove all the sub-assemblies located on the matrix board.
3. Remove the 16 Pcs. M3 screws which secure the matrix board.
4. After replacing the matrix board, ensure that all 16 screws are tight.
5. Apply Loctite 7400 on the heads of all the Matrix screws, from top of
screw down to the board.
6. Reassemble the detector according to the detector repair procedure
described in Section 8.6.
Important When removing and re-mounting the matrix board, be careful to not damage the
HV and GND connectors to the PMTs
M3 SCREWS SECURING THE MATRIX BOARD
PMT31 PMT25 PMT19 PMT13 PMT 7 PMT 1
PMT34 PMT28 PMT22 PMT16 PMT10 PMT 4
Arrows Show M3 Screws Securing the Matrix Board
Figure 8-53: Matrix Board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.9 Replacing the PM Tubes

(GE Part # 2151302 / ELGEMS Part # ASM000768).
WARNING
You must wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when changing PM-tubes.
1. Refer to Section 8.6 through Section 8.6.2 for important information on

how to correctly position the detector, remove power, and remove the
detector's cover.
2. To gain access to the Photo Multiplier Tubes (PMT), you must remove the
top lead shieldings, the internal cabling, and the matrix board, including
sub-modules. Removal of these items was described prior to this section.
3. Remove all screws and lock washers holding the PMT support plate and
lift up the plate
4. Remove the PMT's "housing for spring" and the "light sealing felt ring."

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Pre-amplifier
Dyncor Driver Dyncor Module
Screw
M6 x 30
Locking
Washer Matrix Board
PMT Screw
PMT
M3 x 5
Support
Plate Stay 3 x 6
Threaded
X-Tal and Locking Washer
Felt Ring Support
for PMT Plate Mount Screw
M3 x 12
Screw
M4 x 16
House for High Voltage

Spring Resistor Board
Positioning Plates
for U-Metal Grid
PM Tube
U-Metal Grid
Terminals for High Voltage

Resistor Board connections
NaI Crystal
Lead Casing
Nut for Crystal Mounting
Figure 8-54: Photo Multiplier Tubes (PMT)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Grasp the base cover of the faulty PMT carefully, and pull perpendicularly
towards the crystal face, until the tube loosens.
Note Take care that the surrounding tubes are not moved or affected.
6. Carefully lift the tube from the crystal.

7. With a plastic spatula, scrape the compound from the crystal surface and
wipe off with paper napkins. Do NOT use alcohol to clean the crystal as
alcohol dissolves the couplant on the surrounding tubes
During regreasing, or when replacing the crystal, only Alcohol should be used for
Note cleaning.
8. Unpack the spare PM-tube. All spare part PM-tubes are supplied with a
pattern of white paint applied to the face plate (refer to Figure 8-55). This
is done to decrease the response coming from tubes located in the center
and thereby minimize the raw image tube pattern. This means that spare
PM-tubes can be used as center tubes without any modification.
9. If the replaced PM-tube is an edge tube, remove the paint. The best way to
do this is to scrape off the paint using a plastic object, like a ruler
10. Before adding optical couplant to the replacement tube, check that the
face plate is clean.
.
CRYSTAL TOP VIEW CRYSTAL SIDE VIEW

CENTER TUBE (Indicating Tube Positions) (Indicating PM Tube Positions)
(Painted)
EDGE TUBE
(Unpainted)
Figure 8-55: Painting on the Tube

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11. Press approximately 1 cm (3/16") strip of couplant onto the center of the
PMT face plate. Be careful that no air bubbles are trapped in the couplant
(refer to Figure 8-56).
1cm
(3/16")
Figure 8-56: Applying Optical Couplant to the PM Tube
12. Rotate the tube to position the connector for the pre-amplifier correctly.
Align the tube and press down to seat the tube on the face of the crystal.
13. When mounting the replacement PM-tube, be careful not to damage the
µ-metal surrounding the tubes.
14. Remount the "housing for spring" and the "light sealing felt ring" and
remount the detector following this procedure in reverse. Refer to
16. Perform a PM-tube alignment according to the procedure described in
Chapter 6, Calibration and Adjustments.
17. After a successful PM-tube alignment, check image quality as described
in Chapter 4, Functional Checks.
18. After a successful image quality check, re-assemble the detector cover
and the detector cable outlet block.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.10 Crystal Replacement or Total Re-Grease

(GE Part # 2139837 / ELGEMS Part # Y000200031).
To prevent damage to the crystal surface, it is recommended to leave the

Note collimators on detectors during all repair procedures. However, for this procedure
the collimators must be removed.
CAUTION
The crystal shipping box should remain wrapped and kept at a constant
temperature for at least 24 hours before unpacking.
The flight case can weigh up till 45 Kg (100 lbs.) and is top heavy. Do not
leave the case in a vertical position as it could tip over and injure someone.
Important Refer to Section 8.6 through Section 8.6.2 for important information on positioning
the detector, removing power, and removing the detector's cover.
See also the procedure sequence flowchart in Figure 8-58 on the following page.
1. Position and remove the collimator and detector as shown in Figure 8-57.
2. Position the table at it lowest height, as shown in Figure 8-57.
At this time, do not position the table under the detector. You still have to
place the phantom kit flight case on top of the table.
Align Tool to fit Detector Housing
Flight Case top with Tool for Crystal Removal

Detector Height 1080 mm
Table Height 650 mm
Figure 8-57: Aligning the Table with the Gantry for Crystal Removal

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Remove collimator Reposition the detector
PREPARATION
Remove detector cover Turn OFF system power
Remove cables following the cable

Remove the top lead shieldings
disassemble/reassemble procedure
Proceed with the cable

disassemble/reassemble procedure
DETECTOR
Remove all pre-amps, Dyncor
modules and Dyncor driver DIS-ASSEMBLING
Remove the Matrix Board

and the support plate
Remove all PMTs and Remove the X-tal and support

the U-metal grid plate mounting
Position tool on table
Turn ON system power
Lift up the faulty crystal

RENEWING OF THE
SCINTILLATION
Turn OFF system power Remove the fautly crystal CRYSTAL
Clean the new crystal and

reposition it on top of tool
Turn ON system power

Reposition crystal in housing
Turn OFF system power
Re-assembling Re-assemble the detector

following this procedure in reverse
Figure 8-58: Crystal Disassembly/Reassembly Sequence

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Turn OFF system power as described in Section 8.1.

4. Remove connections from the detector cable and remove all accessible
cables (refer to Figure 8-49).
5. Remove the top lead shieldings and remove all the inside cables,
including the high voltage resistor board. Refer to Figure 8-50.
6. Preparation for removal of the scintillation crystal is the same as for
removal of a single PMT.
• Removal of the Matrix Board is described in Section 8.6.8.
• Removal of PMTs is described in Section 8.6.9.
CAUTION
You must wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when you remove the
PM-tubes.
7. Remove all screws and lock-washers holding the PMT support plate and
lift up the plate.
8. Remove the "housing for the spring" and the "light sealing felt ring" from
all PMTs. Refer to Figure 8-54.
9. Operating from the collimator side, remove the eight nuts for the crystal
mounting. Refer to Figure 8-54.
10. Carefully remove the X-tal and support plate mounting from inside the
detector.
11. Mark the position of each PMT before removal.
The PMTs can be reinstalled at any position. However if reinstalled in the same
Note position, the time to re-tune the detector is greatly reduced.
12. Remove the metal grid.

13. With a plastic spatula, scrape the compound from the crystal surface and
wipe off with paper napkins. Do NOT use alcohol to clean the crystal as
alcohol dissolves the couplant on the surrounding tubes.
Note Alcohol may be used when the detector is re-greased or when replacing the crystal.
14. If a total re-grease of the detector is required, carry out and reassemble the
detector.
15. If the crystal is to be replaced, proceed to Step 17.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Source Holder
Tripod
Vial for
Source Holder
Support Tool Source Holders

(Four)
Figure 8-59: Phantom Kit and Crystal Support Tool Flight Case
16. Remove the lid from the Spatial Phantom Kit flight case. See Figure 8-59.
17. The tool designed for supporting the crystal when removed from the
detector is located inside the flight case lid. Release the two brass locks
and assemble the tool. Refer to Figure 8-60.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
STEP A STEP B
STEP C STEP D
Figure 8-60: Crystal Support Tool in Flight Case
18. Position the flight case cover and tool on the table top, roll the table in
under the detector, and lock the table to the floor. Align the position of the
flight case to make the crystal support tool fit into the opening in the
detector housing as shown in Figure 8-57.
19. Check that the two brass locks are in the home position before lifting the
crystal. Refer to Figure 8-60.
20. Before turning ON power, check that the disassembled detector has no
short circuits.
21. Turn ON system power as described inSection 8.2.
22. Press one of the collision override switches while operating the
Hand-Held Controller. The override switches are located on the rear of the
detectors.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Important Check that the brass locks on the top of the crystal support tool are in the home
position before moving the table upwards. Refer to Figure 8-60, Step C.
This is important as the brass locks could cause damage to the detector housing.
23. Use the HHC to lower the detector so that it just touches the support tool.
24. Re-check that the tool and crystal surface are level in X and Y direction.
25. Use the HHC to move the table upwards. Be aware that the sealing
between the crystal and the detector housing may cause the items to stick
together.
26. Move the table to its highest position.
27. Unpack the replacement crystal and clean it using alcohol on a napkin.
28. Position the crystal on the lifting tool, lower the table aligning the crystal
to be positioned, and correct in the detector housing.
29. Reassemble the detector following this procedure in reverse. When
lowering the crystal, make sure that it is aligned to fit into the opening in
the detector housing.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.11 Replacing the Contact PIN Board

(GE Part # 2166044 / ELGEMS Part # PCA000174).
1. Remove the collimator. Refer to Section 4.7 for the collimator change-out
procedure.
2. Working from the collimator side of the detector, remove the mounting
screws securing the detector contact PIN board. The board is located on
the corner of the detector. Refer to Figure 8-61.
PIN Board
Detector Flanges
Figure 8-61: Contact PIN Board
3. On the contact PIN board, re-solder the wires and then remove the PIN
board.
4. Install the new PIN board and re-solder the wires.
5. Remount the collimator.
6. Restore power as described in Section 8.2.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.6.12 Replacing the Service Collision-Override Switch

(GE Part # 2187880 / ELGEMS Part # S010000040).
1. Position the detector with the switch to be replaced in the top position.
Refer to Section 8.6 through Section 8.6.2 for important information on
positioning the detector, removing power, and removing the detector's
cover.
2. Turn OFF system power as described in Section 8.1.
3. Replace the switch. Refer to Figure 8-62.
COLLISION
OVERRIDE
SWITCH
Figure 8-62: Service Collision Override Switch

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Hand-Held Controller Repair Procedures
8.7 Hand-Held Controller Repair Procedures

If the Hand-Held Controller (HHC) (GE Part # 2166908-4 / ELGEMS Part #
SP320000216) is not working, check both ends of the cable to verify that the
plugs are fully inserted into the sockets.
To replace either the cable or the HHC, unplug the device and plug in the
replacement.
8.8 Collimator and Collimator Cart Repair Procedures

8.8.1 Replacing the Collision Sensor on the Collimator
This procedure requires special wrench (GE Part # 46-176584P1 / ELGEMS
Part # 56032003107) used by x-ray engineers to remove the high voltage cables
from an x-ray tube.
1. Remove the collimator from the detector. Refer to Section 4-6 for
information on how to transfer the collimators to the collimator cart.
2. Remove the collimator from the collimator cart and place it on a clean flat
surface with the collision sensor facing up.
CAUTION
Collimators are extremely heavy, weighing between 52 and 80 kg
(114 and 176 lbs).
Two or more people are required to lift and move the collimator.
3. Using the special spanner, remove the four Cover Flanges shown in
Figure 8-63. These flanges (located one in each corner) hold the latch
bushings and collision sensors in place .
4. Remove the four M3 screws from each of the two guide bushings - refer
to Figure 8-63.
The bushing on the collision sensor circuit board side of the collimator
has an elongated hole. Note that the elongation is parallel to a line running
from one bushing to the other.
5. Lift each of the guide bushings from the collimator.
Important While performing the next steps, care should be taken to prevent damage to the
sensor wiring.
As seen in Figure 8-63, the ribbon cable rests in a cable notch. This notch
is located under the collision sensor at the same corner as the collision
sensor circuit board.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Collimator and Collimator Cart Repair Procedures
6. Carefully lift the sensor about 50 mm from the collimator.

7. Unplug the ribbon cable connecting the sensor to the collision sensor
circuitboard cable.
8. Remove the collision sensor from the collimator.
9. Carefully unpack the new sensor and install it by reversing the above
process.
Important Be certain to align the elongated guide bushing on the collision sensor side of the
collimator so it is parallel to a line running from one bushing to the other.
Cover Flange
Guide Bushing with

Round Center Hole
Location of Guide Bushing

with Elongated Center Hole
Flange Plate
Cable Notch
Circuit Board
Figure 8-63: Collimator Collision Sensor

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.8.2 Replacing the Collimator Cart Locating Switch

(GE Part # / ELGEMS Part # UGP000781).
The Docking Pin Switch Assembly is supplied as a kit, the contents of which
are as follows:
Part No Description Qty
ASM000851 Switch Clamp Assembly 1
MEC005667 Activator Pin 1
HWO80100925 Spring Spacer Washers (Spare) 2
1. Ensure that the collimator cart is correctly mechanically adjusted for

proper operation.
2. Remove the IPS from the Gantry and shift it to the side.This is to allow
access to the docking switch assembly. See Section 8.4.
3. Bring the Gantry to Collimator Exchange position and shut down the
power to the system.
4. Remove the two screws from the switch cable connector, located at the
rear of the gantry (see Figure 8-64).
Figure 8-64: Accessing the Cable and Unscrewing the Connector
5. Remove the M3 hex securing screw locate on the front edge of the
collimator switch base - see Figure 8-65.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Securing Screw
Driving Slot
Figure 8-65: Removing the Switch Base Securing Screw
6. Unfasten the Switch Clamp Assembly from the rear of the Switch Base
See Figure 8-66
Set Screws
Securing Screw
Switch Clamp Assembly

Switch Base
Figure 8-66: Unfasten the Switch Clamp Assembly from the Switch Base
Note Steps 7 to 13 only apply to systems that have old type switch assemblies fitted.
7. Loosen the switch base by inserting a flat wide object in the driving slot
and turning After the initial loosening, unscrew by hand.
8. Remove the retaining ring (circlip) and the spring wasgers from the
switch base. Retain the washers for re-use.
See Figure 8-67.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Spring
Circlip Washers
Figure 8-67: Remove the Circlip and Washers
9. From the switch base, remove the switch assembly - see Figure 8-68.
The Switch base is kept and re-used.
Switch Base
Switch Assembly
Figure 8-68: Switch Base with Switch Assembly Removed
10. Fit the new activating pin into the switch base. Verify that the activating
pin moves freely, and refit the washers. Only seven washers are required
(4 x flat and 3 x spring), and they must be fitted in the order shown in
Figure 8-69. If any washers are lost, spare washers are included in the kit.
Flat Washers
M3 Locking Screw
Circlip
Spring Washers
Activating Pin
Switch Base
Figure 8-69: Exploded View of the Switch Base Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11. Secure the activating pin and washers with the retaining ring (circlip) and
check that all parts are securely held in place.
12. Screw the modified switch base back into the gantry.
13. Secure the Switch Base using the M3 locking screw.
14. From the rear of the gantry fasten the new switch clamp assembly to the
switch base by sliding the switch clamp assembly on to the switch base
and securing the two set screws (see Figure 8-70).
Switch Clamp Assembly Activating Pin
Set Screws
Switch Clamp Assembly

Set Screws
Switch Base
Figure 8-70: Fasten the New Switch Assembly to the Switch Base
15. Refit and tighten the two M2 screws that secure the cable connector.
16. Power up the system.
17. Dock the empty collimator cart to the gantry as per the collimator
exchange procedure.
18. Carefully move the detector radials in to engage the collimator cart.
Important Ensure that the collimator cart pin is properly engaged and that the four collimator
bushings are aligned with the cart locks.
In cases where the cart is not aligned in the horizontal axis, do not engage the
detectors with the cart. Perform steps 19 and 20. If OK, proceed to step 21.
19. Release the lock nut on the collimator cart docking pin and turn the pin to
retract slightly
20. Adjust the two bumpers so all eight collimator locks engage the locking
pins on the detectors at the same time when the cart is pressed up against
the gantry. Lock the bumpers at the correct distance.
21. Adjust the docking pin so the when the cart is engaged with the
collimators, the pin will activate the switches.
22. From the rear of the gantry, visually confirm that the activator pin is
correctly contacting the switches.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
23. Load the collimators onto the cart.

24. Using the hand control, move the radials to maximum out (away from the
cart) and verify that the radial in-out functions correctly without pressing
the collision override button, and that the roll motion is disabled.
25. Undock the collimator cart.
26. Verify that no motion is possible without using the collision override
button.
27. If problems are encounted during steps 24 or 36, refer to the
Troubleshooting Guide below.
28. Secure the collimator cart docking pin lock nut.
29. Verify that the collimator exchange is smooth.
30. Repeat steps 17 - 29 on the other collimator carts (if applicable).
31. Check the functionality of the pressure sensitive devices before handing
the system over to the operator.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures Troubleshooting Guide
8.9 Troubleshooting Guide

This section should be used in case of functionality problems.
If able to move the Gantry without collimators, and without pressing

the overide button:
1. Check collision override buttons (two on the rear side of each

detector).
All four buttons should be released.
2. Remove the detector cover and check the service collision override
switch in each detector. Switches should be released.
If the collimator cart is docked with collimators loaded on the cart,

and the radial motion is not possible without using the collision
overide button:
1. Disconnect connector J8 on the IPS rear connector panel.

Connect DVM between Pin 8 and Pin 9 of connector J8 on
disconnected cable. The docking override switch, connecting to those
pins should be in normally open position.(high impedance).
2. Verify proper operation of the switch using DVM.
In cases where the collimator cart is docked, and rotation motion is

possible:
1. Disconnect connector J8 of IPS rear connector panel.

Connect DVM between Pin-2 and Pin-3 of connector J8. The roll
disable switch, connected to those pins should be in normally open
position (high impedance).
2. Verify proper operation of the switch using DVM.
3. Shut down the power to the system.
4. Remove the IPS from the Gantry and shift it to the side. This is to
allow access to the gantry cable connections.
5. Remove the two screws from the cable connector, located at the rear
of the gantry.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Repair Procedures 3-AxisTable Repair Procedures
8.10 3-AxisTable Repair Procedures
WARNING
Do not move the table to the full extent of the table cable. This may cause
damage to the table cable.
The 3-Axis Table sub-assemblies are described in the following sections:

• Longitudinal Drive Assembly - Section 8.10.1
• Lateral Drive Assembly - Section 8.10.2
• Vertical Drive Assembly - Section 8.10.3
• Table Chassis Assembly - Section 8.10.4
• E-Stop Box Assembly - Left - Section 8.10.5
• E-Stop Box Assembly - Right - Section 8.10.5
• Table Distribution Box - Section 8.10.6
• Stretcher - Section 8.10.7

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.1 Longitudinal Drive Assembly

8.10.1.1 Longitudinal Drive Belt
2. Remove the longitudinal motor cover and longitudinal base cover

(see Figure 10-32 - items 21 and 32).
3. Loosen three M6 Allen head screws on the upper plate.
4. Move the longitudinal servo motor slightly to the right to relieve the
tension on the drive belt.
5. Remove and replace the longitudinal drive belt

(see Figure 10-32 - item 20).
6. Push the longitudinal servo motor to the left and adjust the drive belt
tension.
7. Tighten the three M6 Allen head screws on the upper plate keeping the
8. Place the longitudinal motor cover and longitudinal base cover removed
in step 2.
9. Turn ON all power to the system.
10. Perform functional checks to the table according to Chapter 4, Functional

Checks, of this manual.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.1.2 Longitudinal Servo Motor
1. Remove longitudinal drive belt. See Section 8.10.1.1.

2. Loosen two set screws on longitudinal motor pulley.
3. Remove longitudinal motor pulley.
4. Remove longitudinal servo motor with mounting plate attached.
5. Remove four M4 Allen head screws securing the mounting plate to the
longitudinal motor.
6. Fit the longitudinal motor mounting plate to the new servo motor using
the four M4 screws removed in step 5.
7. Place the new longitudinal servo motor and mounting plate in position,
and loosely fit the four M10 screws to the motor mounting plate.
8. Re-fit the longitudinal motor pulley to the motor shaft making sure one set
screw makes contact with the flat side of the motor shaft.
9. Tighten the set screws.
10. Replace longitudinal drive belt. See Section 8.10.1.1.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.1.3 Limit Switch - Longitudinal
There are two limit switches for Longitudinal Drive Assembly

(see Figure 8-71).
Minimum limit switch is located at the rear end of the table. Maximum Limit
Switch is located at the front end (opposite side) of the table.
Limit Switches
Figure 8-71: Longitudinal Limit Switches

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.1.3.1 Minimum Limit Switch
2. Carefully remove three M5 Phillips flat head screws from the center and
either end of the longitudinal retractable cover. Hold the cover to prevent
it from retracting. (See Figure 10-39).
3. Retract the longitudinal cover into the cylinder. Using adhesive tape
secure the end of the cover to the longitudinal motor cover.
4. Remove M3 Allen head screws and nuts securing the limit switch.
5. Replace limit switch.
6. Re-fit the M3 Allen head screws and nuts.
7. Pull out the longitudinal cover from the cylinder and re-fit the three M5
Phillips screws while holding the cover to prevent it from retracting.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.1.3.2 Maximum Limit Switch
2. Remove four M6 screws on the front cover of the table.
3. Remove three M3 Allen head screws.
4. Replace the limit switch.
5. Re-fit the M3 Allen head screws.
6. Secure the four M6 screws on the front cover of the table.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.2 Lateral Drive Assembly

Refer to Figure 10-40
8.10.2.1 Lateral Drive Belt
2. Remove the top left cover and lateral pulley cover.
3. Loosen three M6 Allen head screws on the lateral motor mounting plate.
4. Move the lateral servo motor slighly to the right to relieve the tension on
the drive belt.
5. Remove and replace lateral drive belt (see Figure 10-40 - item 2).
6. Move lateral servo motor to the left and adjust drive belt tension.
7. Tighten four M6 Allen head screws on the lateral plate keeping the
8. Place top left cover and lateral pulley cover.

8.10.2.2 Servo Motor

2. Remove lateral drive belt. See Section 8.10.2.1 for details.
3. Loosen the two set screws on the lateral motor drive pulley.
4. Remove lateral motor drive pulley.
5. Remove lateral servo motor with mounting plate attached.
6. Remove four M4 Allen flat head screws from the lateral motor mounting
plate.
7. Attach the lateral motor mounting plate to the new motor using the four
M4 screws removed in step 6.
8. Place in new motor in position and loosely fasten the four M4 screws.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9. Re-fit the pulley on to the motor shaft making sure one set screw fastens
against the flat side of the shaft.
10. Tighten the set screws.
11. Replace lateral drive belt. See Section 8.10.2.1.

8.10.2.3 Limit Switch - Lateral
Lateral limit switches are located at the rear end of the lateral plate, under the
upper plate assembly. One is on the left side, the other on the right side.
2. Remove the limit switch cover.
3. Remove the M3 Allen head screws.
4. Replace the defective limit switch.
5. Replace the M3 Allen head screws.
6. Place the limit switch cover.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.3 Vertical Drive Assembly

8.10.3.1 Vertical Servo Motor
2. Remove upper and bottom right table cover.
CAUTION
If the table is in maximum down position, remove both upper covers, then
remove the bottom left cover and after that the bottom right cover.
3. Remove four M6 Allen head screws from the base of vertical motor
mounting plate.
4. Pull on the vertical servo motor to relieve the tension on the drive belt.
5. Remove vertical motor drive belt from the motor pulley.
6. Loosen two set screws on vertical motor pulley.
7. Remove vertical motor pulley.
8. Remove four M5 Allen flat head screws from the vertical motor mounting
plate.
9. Remove vertical servo motor.
10. Place the new vertical servo motor in position against the vertical motor
mounting plate
11. Fit the four M5 Allen flat head screws through the vertical motor
mounting plate and secure the new servo motor.
12. Replace vertical motor pulley on vertical servo motor shaft making sure
one set screw tightens against the flat side of the motor shaft.
13. Tighten set screws.
14. Fit the vertical motor drive belt to the motor pulley.
15. Apply pressure to the vertical servo motor to adjust the drive belt tension.
16. Keeping the tension on the drive belt, tighten the four M6 screws on the
vertical motor mounting plate.
17. Place the bottom and upper table covers.
Checks of this manual.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.3.2 Limit Switch - Vertical
Vertical limit switches are mounted on the front table actuator. One is toward
the top of the table, the other is toward the bottom.
2. Remove the table upper cover.
3. Remove the two NC-4 Allen head screws holding the limit switch in
place.
Figure 8-72: Vertical Limit Switches
4. Replace the limit switch.
5. Re-fit the two NC-4 Allen head screws.
6. Replace the top table cover.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.3.3 Vertical Motor Drive Belt
2. Remove the vertical motor drive belt from the motor pulley
Refer to Section 8.10.3.1.
The Vertical Drive Assembly is described in Chapter 10 - Figure 10-32
3. Disconnect the vertical drive shaft from the front actuator.

4. Remove the old vertical motor drive belt from the actuator pulley.
5. Fit the new drive belt to the actuator pulley.
6. Reconnect the vertical drive shaft to the front actuator.

7. Adjust the drive belt tension.

8. Re-fit the bottom left cover to the table.

Checks of this manual..

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.4 Table Chassis Assembly

8.10.4.1 Caster Replacement
A motor vehicle scissor jack with a load capacity in excess of 700 Kg, and
three Wooden Blocks with dimensions of approximately 60 x 60 x160 mm
(2½ x 2½ x 6 ins), are required.
WARNING
Before starting this procedure, rotate the table wheels to 90° (at right angles
to the long chassis section), and ensure that they are braked to prevent
movement during this procedure.
1. Place one of the wooden blocks on top of the jack (see Figure 8-73). This
is to prevent the top of the jack entering the hollow section of the table
chassis.
2. Using the jack, raise the table so that the wheel is about 4 inches from the
ground.
Figure 8-73: Scissors Jack
3. Insert the other two wooden blocks (on end) under the table chassis (both
ends of the table) and lower the table to rest on the wooden blocks. This
will provide extra stability during the replacement operation.
4. Very carefully pull off caster cap on top of caster.

The cap is a push-on type and can be easily pried off with a screw driver.
5. Remove the M12 caster fastening nut and the washer beneath it.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Caster Cap
Caster
Fastening Nut
Washer
Caster
Figure 8-74: Caster Replacement
6. Remove the defective caster.
7. Fit the new caster in position.
8. Re-fit the M12 fastening nut and washer to the new caster.
9. Torque nut to 50 ft/lbs.
10. Replace the cap on top of caster.
11. Very carefully lift up table to remove wood blocks supporting table up and
lower table.

Checks of this manual.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.4.2 Vertical Actuator

1. Raise table to max height.
2. Verify cradle will not hit anything then extend cradle to its maximum
limit.
3. Remove top and bottom covers on table.
CAUTION
If the table is in maximum down position, remove both upper covers, then
remove the bottom left cover and after that the bottom right cover.
4. Carefully remove three M5 Phillips flat head screws from the center and
either end of the longitudinal retractable cover. Hold the cover to prevent
it from retracting.
5. Retract the longitudinal cover into the cylinder. Using adhesive tape,
secure the end of the cover to the longitudinal motor cover.
6. For front actuator replacement only:
a. Remove the stretcher.

b. Remove vertical motor drive belt from motor pulley and slide it along
the up/down shaft away from the working area. Refer to Section
8.10.3.1.
c. Remove two NC-6 Phillips head screws securing the vertical limit
switches holder.
d. Remove vertical limit switches holder from the front actuator.
7. Move the table laterally to one side. Use the holes in the table upper plate
to access the screws fastening the actuator top to the lateral plate.
8. Remove two of the four M10 Allen head screws holding the actuator in
place on top.
9. Move table lateral position near to center and remove the four M6 Allen
head screws and a Phillips head screw holding actuator on top.
10. Move table lateral position to other side.
11. Insert appropriate support (wooden bar about 59 cm long) between the
table base and top plate, near the replacing actuator.
12. Remove other two M10 Allen head screws holding the actuator in place
on top.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
14. Loosen the two M4 screws of the bellow coupling located closest to the
defective actuator.
15. Disconnect the vertical shaft from the actuator by sliding the bellow
coupling towards the up/down shaft.
16. Remove the four M10 Allen head screws and washers holding the
actuator on the base.
17. Lower the disconnected actuator by manually rotating its shaft.
18. Remove the defective actuator.
19. For front actuator only:
a. Release the two M5 set screws of the actuator pulley mounted on the
removed actuator.
b. Remove the actuator pulley from the removed actuator.
c. Place the actuator pulley on the new actuator shaft making sure one
M5 set screw hits against flat side of actuator shaft.
20. Remove the metal protective cover from the top of the new actuator.
21. Replace the actuator.
22. Re-fit the four M10 Allen head screws and washers holding the actuator
on the base.
23. Set actuator height by manually rotating its shaft to equal the height of the
opposite actuator ±0.5 mm.
24. Connect the actuators by sliding the bellow coupling towards the actuator
shaft.
25. Tighten the two M4 screws of the bellow coupling.
26. Re-fit two of the four M10 Allen head screws holding the actuator in
place on top.
27. Carefully remove the actuator support.
29. Move the table lateral position to about the center and replace the four M6
Allen head screws and a Phillips head screw holding the actuator in place
on top.
30. Move table lateral position to other side.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
31. Re-fit other two M10 Allen head screws holding actuator in place on top.
32. For front actuator replacement only:
a. Re-fit the vertical limit switch holder and fix it to the front actuator
with two NC-6 Phillips head screws.
b. Re-fit the vertical motor drive belt to pulley and tighten it. Refer to
Section 8.10.3.1.
c. Re-fit the stretcher.
33. Pull out the longitudinal cover from the cylinder and re-fit the three M5
Phillips screws while holding the cover to prevent it from retracting.
34. Re-fit the removed covers on table.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.5 E-Stop Box Assembly - Left or Right

Refer to Figure 10-37 and Figure 10-38.
8.10.5.1 E-Stop Switch
2. Remove the two M6 Phillips head screws holding the E-Stop box.
3. Remove and replace the E-Stop switch wires connected to the Reset
Switch.
4. Secure the two M6 Phillips screws holding the E-Stop box.

8.10.5.2 Reset Switch
2. Remove the two M6 Phillips head screws holding the E-Stop box.
3. Move the plastic lever on the side of the Reset Switch clockwise to unlock
and remove the switch.
4. Remove the wires connected to the Reset Switch.
5. Remove the plastic nut ring holding the reset button in place inside the
table E-Stop box.
6. Pull out the button of the Reset Switch.
7. Replace with the button portion of the Reset Switch.
8. Replace white plastic ring holding the Reset Switch in place inside the
table E-Stop box.
9. Line up Reset button with Reset Switch and seat in place.
10. Move the plastic lever on the side of the switch counterclockwise to lock
it in place.
11. Rewire the Reset Switch. Polarity does not apply.
12. Line up the Reset button with the Reset switch and seat in place.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
13. Move the plastic lever on the side of the switch counterclockwise to lock
it in place.
14. Reconnect the bale E-Stop box to the table.
15. Secure the two M6 Phillips screws holding the E-Stop box.


Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.6 Junction Box

2. Disconnect the table cable from IPS side.
3. Remove the top and bottom covers on the table left side.
4. Disconnect all cables going to the junction box, including the internal
ground cable.
5. Disconnect the main ground of table cable connected to the table base.
6. Cut the ties mounting the wires of the table cable to the base.
7. Remove the two M4 Phillips head screws holding the retractor plate and
remove the plate and retractor from junction box.
8. Remove the two M4 Phillips head screws holding the junction box in
place.
9. Remove the junction box and pull the table cable with its connectors from
the aperture in the front of the table base.
10. Insert the new cable with the junction box through the aperture under the
pedal connecting rod in the front of the table base. The IPS connector end
is inserted from inside the table base so that it exits the aperture in the
direction of the IPS.
11. Locate the new junction box in place.
12. Re-fit two M4 Phillips head screws holding the junction box in place.
13. Re-fit the retractor plate to the junction box.
14. Re-fit the ties, which restrain the cable wires, and the cable holder, which
restrains the entire table cable with corrugated bundle.
15. Re-fit the cable cover and cable clams to the table base.
16. Connect the main ground of table cable to the table base.
17. Reconnect all cables to the junction box, including the internal ground cable.
18. Re-fit top and bottom covers on table left side.
19. Connect the table cable to the IPS.
20. Restore all power to the system.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.7 Stretcher
1. Set the table lateral to the center.
2. Extract the stretcher about the 10 cm of longitudinal travel.
There are eight service holes for stretcher replacement on the table upper
plate. Two on left side and other two on the right side near the E-Stop
Boxes. Another set of four holes is on the front part of the table upper
plate. See Section 10.6.4 for details.
4. Remove longitudinal drive belt. See Section 8.10.1.1 for details.
5. Remove minimum limit switch. See Section 8.10.1.3.1 for details.
6. By rotating the longitudinal lead screw manually, set the stretcher
longitudinal position to obtain the best access to the first four of sixteen
M6 Allen head screws holding the longitudinal linear guide bearings to
the bottom of stretcher cart. See Section 10.6.13 for details
7. Moving the stretcher longitudinally, remove all sixteen M6 screws
through the service access holes.
8. Remove the pulley from the longitudinal lead screw.
9. Remove the longitudinal lead screw rear support.
10. Remove the stretcher backward by rotating manually the longitudinal lead
screw.
11. Replace the new stretcher by rotating manually the longitudinal lead
screw.
12. Re-fit the sixteen M6 Allen head screws keeping both the gaps between
the stretcher and the side rails the same distance apart and parallel.
13. Tighten the sixteen M6 Allen head screws holding the longitudinal linear
guide bearings to the bottom of stretcher cart with a torque of 7.4 Nm.
Apply Loctite.
14. Re-fit the longitudinal lead screw rear support and pulley.
15. Re-fit the minimum limit switch. See Section 8.10.1.3.1 for details.
16. Re-fit the longitudinal drive belt. See Section 8.10.1.1 for details.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
8.10.8 Longitudinal Roller

1. Remove the stretcher.
3. Remove the longitudinal rollers (see Figure 10-40 - item 46).
4. Replace the two axles and bearings to the new longitudinal roller.
5. Insert the longitudinal roller to its place.
6. Re-fit the stretcher.
7. Turn ON all power to the system


Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 9 - Software Installation
Software installation includes the following steps, to be performed in the

order given below:
• Read the Installation Procedure Flowcharts - Section 9.1

• Preparation - Section 9.2
• Recording the Acquisition Computer Configuration Data - Section
9.3
• Full System Backup - Section 9.4
• Software Installation - Section 9.5
• Restoring User Data - Section 9.6
• Configuring Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and Date/Time -
Section 9.7
• Automatic Send - Section 9.8
• Motion Controller Initialization - Section 9.9
• Final System Adjustments - Section 9.10
• System Check Out - Section 9.11
CAUTION
When upgrading or changing version levels, the Study Database of a
previous software version may not be restored on a System with a newer
version.
Be sure to transfer all the acquired studies to the Processing & Review
Station before starting software loading or updating, otherwise the studies
will be lost.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Installation Procedure Flowcharts
9.1 Installation Procedure Flowcharts

9.1.1 Flowchart for Systems WITH Installation Settings Diskette
Transfer ALL patient Manually restore

data to the Processing Acquisition Computer
& Review Station Configuration files
(customer action) using st_bru (F)
Section 9.6
Manually log system Configuration of

information to Table 9-1 Automatic Send
in Preparation section Section 9.8
Full System Backup Motion Controller

Section 9.4 Initialization
Section 9.9
Load LynxOS 3.0.1

Installation Boot Disk
(LSW000476)
Load LynxOS Utilities Final System
Disk (LSW000477) Adjustments
Load Installation Settings Section 9.10
Diskette
Section 9.5.1
Software Installation
GenieAcq V4.0
(LSW00474)
Section 9.5.1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Installation Procedure Flowcharts
9.1.2 Flowchart for Systems WITHOUT Installation Settings Diskette
Load LynxOS 3.0.1

Installation Boot Disk Configuration of
(LSW000476) Automatic Send
Load LynxOS Utilities
Section 9.8
Disk (LSW380)
Preapare Installation
Settings Diskette
Motion Controller
Software Installation
Initialization
GenieAcq V4.0
(LSW00474) Section 9.9
Section 9.5.2
Final System
Adjustments
Manually restore
Section 9.10
Acquisition Computer
Configuration files
using st_bru (F)
Section 9.6

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Preparation
9.2 Preparation
Complete the tasks outlined in this section prior to the installation of
GenieAcq V4.0 software.
9.2.1 Reviewing the Customer Information Sheet (CIS)

Review the CIS prior to upgrading the existing software.
9.2.2 Current log configuration

GenieAcq V4.0 Build 10 contains a number of changes to the configuration
file structure. To ensure that the system is configured correctly, the Operating
System (OS) configuration parameters will be added via the st_config script
instead of using a backup tape. Therefore, the current OS configuration
parameters will need to be logged to the Current Configuration Log table in
Table 9-1 prior to loading V4.0 software.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Preparation
9.2.3 Recording the Current System Configuration

Manually log the system characteristics and parameter settings to Table 9-1
before proceeding with Software loading.
Table 9-1: Current Configuration Log Table
System Parameters Current Settings

System Type
Options Configuration
Whole Body Table Position
Institution Name
System Sound Configuration
Unit of Measure Configuration
Processing Environment Configuration
Keyboard Configuration
Current Date/Time Zone/Daylight Saving
System Host Name & IP Configurations
Internet External Host Configurations
Printer Configuration Settings
Remote Station Config Menu
InSite Configuration Settings
Internet Routing Configuration Settings
Network and Archive Configuration
Backup filenename (.GZ)
FTP Address of Backup file (.GZ)

Internet Mask (if enabled)
DICOM Network Configuration
DICOM Site Name
INSITE Configuration
INSITE via Genie P&R or GenieAcq Station
GenieAcq SLIP Address
Port Master Address

Hardware Configuration
Graphics Card (if applicable)
Ethernet Card (if applicable)
I/O card
Monitor Type
Colors
Physical Resolution
Mouse Type
Buttons
Device Location

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Recording the Acquisition Computer Configuration Data
9.3 Recording the Acquisition Computer Configuration Data
9.3.1 Network Information

Log into Service Account
Login: service
password: service. <Enter>
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Service Menu:
Start AUI (10) <Enter>
AUI Screen:
Select: Patient Database (top left hand icon)
Network Card:
Log network information to Table 9-1
Patient Database Screen:

Select: Shutdown
Shutdown Confirm:
Select: YES

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.3.2 Logging the First Time Configuration Information

Perform the following procedure and log all the information displayed in the First Time
Configuration Sequential Menu to Table 9-1.
Login: service
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Point the cursor to a dark gray area of the screen.

Click the left mouse button.
From the pop-up menu, select: Terminal Window

Direction 2414259-100 2019
/usr/service>
Type: su
password: root.genie <Enter>
The root (#) is displayed
Type:
st_config <Enter>
The following is displayed
Configuration Utility
This script.......
You may quit this configuration.......
Would you like to proceed with configuration [Y]?
In every software version the order

of steps may be slightly different
Configuration Utility Main Menu

Type: F <Enter> <Enter>
First Time Configuration sequential menu begins
Current System Type is listed

Log to Table 9-1 <Enter>
Current Options Configuration is listed

Current Whole Body Table position selection

Current Institution Name


Direction 2414259-100 2019
Current System Sound Configuration

Current Unit of Measure Configuration

Current Processing Environment Configuration

Current Keyboard Configuration

Current Date/Time Zone/Daylight Savings settings

Current System Host Name & IP Configuration settings

Current Internet External Host Configuration settings

Current Printer Configuration settings

Current Remote Station settings

Current InSite Configuration settings

Current Internet Routing Configuration settings

Current Internet Network Mask Configuration settings

First Time Configuration complete,

save configuration now?
(Y/N) [Y]
Type: N <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Configuration Utility Main Menu

Type: Q <Enter>
Do you wish to quit without saving (Y/N)?

Type: Y <Enter>
At the root (#) type: configX Type exactly as shown

<Enter> (case sensistive)
The Graphics Card Configuration screen is displayed (see Figure 9-1).
Mouse
Configuration Tabs
Keyboard
Configuration Tabs
Graphic Card
Selection Toggle
Graphic Card
Selection Menu
Graphic Card
Parameter Settings
Figure 9-1: Graphics Card Configuration screen
Log these parameters shown on your screen

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Select Graphics Card Toggle
Current selection is highlighted

Log to Table 9-1
Ensure all parameters are logged carefully
The Monitor Card Configuration screen is displayed (see Figure 9-2).
Monitor Selection
Toggle
Monitor Selection tab
Monitor Parameter
Settings
Figure 9-2: Monitor Card Configuration screen

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Select Graphics Card Toggle

Log to Table 9-1
Ensure all parameters are logged carefully
The Mouse & Keyboard Selection screen is displayed (see Figure 9-3).
Mouse
Configuration Tabs
Keyboard
Configuration Tabs
Figure 9-3: Mouse & Keyboard Selection Screen

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Select Mouse configuration tab
Current selection is highlighted Log 3 buttons and Device information

Log to Table 9-1
Select Keyboard configuration tab

Log to Table 9-1
File Menu (Alt+F)

Q to Quit
N to Save Changes

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.3.3 Supplied Software
Table 9-2: Supplied Software
Qty Media Type Description Part Number Rev
1 3.5”Diskette Inst Boot Disk LynxOS 3.0.1 LSW000476 0

1 3.5”Diskette Inst Util Disk LynxOS Ver. 3.0.1 LSW000477 0
1 CD Genie Acq 4.0 Build 14 LSW000525 0
1 3.5”Diskette Upgrade Diskette LSW000478 0
1 3.5”Diskette Installation Settings Backup Diskette LSW000390 00
WARNING
Before you start the software loading procedure, make sure that the Gantry
is in opposed mode (for system with two Detectors). Return to 0 position.
CAUTION
Do not load non-system software onto the Acquisition computer. Running
non-system applications may interfere with Acquisition operations.
CAUTION
The Study Database of a previous software version can not be restored on
a system with a newer version.
Be sure to transfer all the acquired studies to the Processing & Review
Station before starting software loading or updating, otherwise the
studies will be lost.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Full System Backup
9.4 Full System Backup

9.4.1 Archiving User Acquisition Templates, Tuning & Correction Site
Specific Data to a Hard Disk
Log into Service Account Hard disks are used as backup media on
Login: service DELL1400, DELL GX-200 and IBM 205
password: service. <Enter> computers.
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>

/usr/service>
Type: su
Type:
st_bru <Enter>
Acquisition Computer Backup/Restore Utility

This script.......
Press: <Enter>
Acquisition Computer Backup/Restore Utility: Main Menu:

Select: (1) <Enter>
Acquisition Computer Backup Menu:

Select: (2) Backup Media <Enter>
Select: (3) Hard Disk <Enter>
Hard Disk Partition Backup Menu:

Type: (1) Partition a <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
(R) <Enter> <Enter>
Acquisition Computer Backup Menu

Type: 4 <Enter>
Backup File Selection Menu Option 1 <Enter> YES

Press <Enter> Acquisition Computer Configuration Files
Type: 3 <Enter> YES

User Acquisition Templates
Type: 4 <Enter> YES

Tuning and Correction Data
Type: 5 <Enter> YES

System (OS) Configuration Files
Verify that Backup File Category 2 is set to NO
Backup File Selection Menu

[R] <Enter>

Type: B <Enter>
Operation Complete
Press <Enter> to continue

Type: Q <Enter>
The (#) is displayed
Type: reboot -a <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.4.2 Archiving User Acquisition Templates, Tuning & Correction Site

Specific Data to a DAT Tape
Log into Service Account DAT Tapes are used as backup media on
Login: service DELL1300, DELL2200 and
password: service. <Enter> Intel Altserver computers.
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>

/usr/service>
Type: su
Type:
st_bru <Enter>

This script.......
Press: <Enter>

Select: (1) <Enter>

Select: (2) Backup Media <Enter>
Select: (2) Tape <Enter>
SCSI Tape Interface Selection Menu

Select: (5) Adaptec AHA2940/2940W ISA <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SCSI Tape ID Selection Menu

Select: (2) Tape ID2 <Enter>

Select: (4) <Enter>
Backup File Selection Menu Option 1 <Enter> YES

Press <Enter> Acquisition Computer Configuration Files
Type: 3 <Enter> YES

Type: 4 <Enter> YES

Type: 5 <Enter> YES

Verify that Backup File Category 2 is set to NO
Backup File Selection Menu

[R] <Enter>

Type: B <Enter>
Operation Complete

Type: Q <Enter>
The (#) is displayed

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.4.3 Creating the Installation Settings Backup Diskette
Reboot the system

Login: service
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>

lynxdemo:/usr/service>
Type: su
Insert the ga_upgrade diskette.

Type: cd $PCACQDIR <Enter>
Type: tar xzvf /dev/fd0 <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Remove the ga_upgrade diskette.

Type: ga_upgrade <Enter>
PC Type Menu:
(1) Intel Altserver
(2) DELL 1300
(3) DELL 1400
(4) DELL 2200
(5) DELL GX-200
(6) IBM 205
Press (M) to return to Main Menu
Upgrade Settings Main Menu:

Select (S) Save Installation Settings <Enter>
GENIE Acquisition Save Settings Menu:

Select (1) Save Installation Settings <Enter>
Please insert installation settings diskette.Continue (Y/N): [Y]
Press <Enter>
Insert a blank diskette (write-enabled) which will hold the installation settings and press <Enter>.
GENIE Acquisition Save Installation Settings Menu:
Type: (R) <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Backup of acquisition templates correction and tuning site specific data is now performed:

Select (B) Backup <Enter>

Select (B) Begin Backup <Enter>
Press <Enter> to check media, “Q” to quit backup.
Press: <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> Backup is performed
After Backup is completed:

Type: (Q) Quit Backup / Restore Utility
Remove the Installation Settings diskette.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Software Installation
9.5 Software Installation

Installation is performed from CD on the following computers:
DELL 1400, DELL GX-200 and IBM 205
Installation is performed from Dat Tape on the following computers:

DELL 1300, DELL 2200 and IntelAltServer
9.5.1 Software Installation USING the Installation Settings Backup

Diskette
If you have an installation settings backup diskette,
continue with this section. If not, go to Section 9.5.2.
9.5.1.1 Installation From CD
Before you start check that the following materials are available:
1 Clinical Software Kit containing:

1 3.5”Diskette Inst Boot Disk LynxOS 3.0.1 LSW000476
1 3.5”Diskette Inst Util Disk LynxOS Ver. 3.0.1 LSW000477
1 CD Genie Acq 4.0 Build 14 (Aquisition Operating Software) LSW000525
1 3.5”Diskette Installation Settings Backup Diskette LSW000390
1. Insert the Lynx OS 3.0.1 Installation boot disk (LSW000??) into the Floppy Disk drive.
2. Reboot the PC by typing: reboot -a.
The following message will appear (after approx 2 minutes):
Please insert the Installation Utilities Disk
3. Remove the Installation Boot disk and replace with Lynx OS Installation Utilities disk
(LSW000???).
Ensure that the Utilities disk is not write protected before inserting.
4. Press <Enter> to continue.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Loading Installation Utilities Disk...

Welcome to GENIE Aquisition Software Installation.
To upgrade you need an Installation Settings diskette.

An Installation Settings diskette is created by running
ga_upgrade under the service login for the existing GENIE
Acquisition software version...
Do you have an Installation Settings diskette (Y/N): [Y]
5. Type Y and press <Enter>.

6. Remove the Installation Utilities diskette and insert the Installation Settings diskette.
Press <Enter>. The following mesage appears:
Please insert the Installation Settings Diskette.
Continue (Y/N): [Y]
GENIE Acquisition Main Menu:

Select (L) Load <Enter>
Load Installation Settings Menu:

Select (1) Load Installation Settings <Enter>
Insert Installation Settings diskette (Y/N): [Y]
Type: (Y) <Enter> Load is performed
After Load is completed:

Press: <Enter> to return to Main Menu

Select (B) Begin Installation <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
*** Final Installation Menu ***

Continue now will result in loss of all data on the IDE Hard Disk
(hd0b) !

Select (C) Continue Installation <Enter>
Beginning Installation
Creating disk partitions...done
Creating file systems...done
Mounting file systems...done
Please make sure that the GENIE Acquisition distribution Media is in the
IDE CD-ROM drive (/dev/hd2)
8. Insert the CD “GenieAcq Ver 4.0 Build 14 LSW000525” into the CD ROM drive.
9. Wait for the light on the CD ROM drive to go out. This will take a few seconds. Then press
<Enter> to continue.
The following is displayed A Progress Bar appears
Determining LynxOS products to install...done
Extracting Development OS from the IDE CD-ROM drive (hd2)

/tar_iamges/5600.devos.tar.gz)
When the Progress Bar reaches 100%

the following message appears
Creating boot partitions...done

Please remove all installation media and
press <Enter> to reboot the system
10.Remove the installtion media (CD and diskette) and press <Enter> to reboot.
11.Go to Patch Installation Menu - Section 14.1 .

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.5.1.2 Installation From DAT Tape
Before you start check that the following materials are available:

1 DAT Tape Genie Acq 4.0 Build 14 (Aquisition Operating Software) LSW000475
1 3.5”Diskette Installation Settings Backup Diskette LSW000390
1. Insert the Lynx OS 3.0.1 Installation boot disk (LSW000476) into the Floppy Disk drive.
2. Reboot the PC by typing: reboot -a.
The following message will appear (after approx 2 minutes):
Please insert the Installation Utilities Disk
3. Remove the Installation Boot disk and replace with Lynx OS Installation Utilities disk
(LSW000477).
Ensure that the Utilities disk is not write protected before inserting.
Loading Installation Utilities Disk...

Welcome to GENIE Aquisition Software Installation.

Acquisition software version...
Do you have an Installation Settings diskette (Y/N): [Y]

6. Remove the Installation Utilities diskette and insert the Installation Settings diskette.
Press <Enter>. The following mesage appears:
Please insert the Installation Settings Diskette.
Continue (Y/N): [Y]

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Select (L) Load <Enter>
Load Installation Settings Menu:

Select (1) Load Installation Settings <Enter>
Insert Installation Settings diskette (Y/N): [Y]
Type: (Y) <Enter> Load is performed
After Load is completed:

Press: <Enter> to return to Main Menu


(hd0b) !

Select (C) Continue Installation <Enter>
Beginning Installation
Creating disk partitions...done
Creating file systems...done
Mounting file systems...done
Please make sure that the GENIE Acquisition distribution Media is in the
DAT Tape drive (/dev/hd2)
8. Insert theDAT Tape “GenieAcq Ver 4.0 Build 14 LSW000475” into the DAT Tape drive.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9. Wait for the light on the Tape drive to go out. This will take a few seconds. Then press
The following is displayed A Progress Bar appears
Determining LynxOS products to install...done
Extracting Development OS from the DAT Tape

/tar_iamges/5600.devos.tar.gz)
When the Progress Bar reaches 100%

the following message appears
Creating boot partitions...done

10.Remove the installtion media (DAT Tape and diskette) and press <Enter> to reboot.
11.Go to Patch Installation Menu - Section 14.1 .

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.5.2 Software Installation WITHOUT Installation Settings Backup

Diskette
During the software installation process you will be

requested to create an installation settings backup
diskette. This will be used later on to restore system
settings when installing or re-installing software.
9.5.2.1 Installation From CD
Before you start, check that the following materials are available:

1 CD Genie Acq 4.0 Build 10 (Aquisition Operating Software) LSW000525
Operating System Installation Diskettes:
1. Insert the LynxOS 3.0.1 Installation boot disk into the disk drive.
Reboot the computer, by typing reboot -a
After several minutes the following message appears
Please insert the Installation Utilities Disk.
2. Remove the Installation boot disk and insert the LynxOS Utilities disk into the drive.
(Ensure that the utility disk is not write protected before inserting).
The following message appears
Loading Installation Utilities Disk.

Welcome to GENIE Acquisition Software Installation

Acquisition software version
Do you have an Installation Settings diskette (Y/N) ? [Y]
4. Answer N.
Install without an installation setting diskette (Y/N)? [Y]

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Answer Y.
GENIE Acquisition Main Menu: (1) MPR, (2) MPS, (3) MPT,
Select (1) <Enter> (4) MG, (5) MC,
(6) MCV(MyoSIGHT),
(7) AC400
GENIE Acquisition System Type Menu: (8) XR
Select the relevant system from the list <Enter> (9) XC
GENIE Acquisition System Options Menu: MC, MyoSIGHT and MG

Select (1) TRANS and choose ATC Option <Enter> systems with ATC
GENIE Acquisition System Options Menu: MyoSIGHT and MG

Select (2) Proximity Device and choose ABC Option <Enter> systems with ABC
After changing the Options, make sure the options have been set
correctly in the Current System Options
Type: (R) (R) <Enter>

Select (2) PC Type <Enter>
(1) Intel Altserver
(2) DELL 1300
GENIE Acquisition PC Type Menu: (3) DELL 1400
Select “your PC type:”<Enter> (4) DELL 2200
(5) DELL GX-200
(6) IBM 205
Reset factory defaults for “your PC type” (Y/N): [Y]
Press <Enter>
Type: (R) <Enter>
GENIE Acquisition Main Menu: The factory defaults are shown

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Saving Installation Settings to a Floppy Diskette
This step is necessary to enable the software to

automatically install the system settings required for
your specific configuration that is defined.


Please insert the Installation

Settings Diskette.Contnue (Y/N): [Y]
6. Remove the Installation Utility Disk and insert the Installation Settings Diskette (or a blank
diskette).
The installation settings will be saved.
Type: (R) <Enter>


(hd0b) !
8. Select C and press <Enter> to continue installation.

The following message will appear:
Beginning installation
Creating disk partitions… done
Creating file systems… done
Mounting file systems… done
Please make sure that the GENIE Acquisition distribution
Media is in the IDE CD-ROM drive (/dev/d2)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9. Insert the CD: “GenieAcq Ver 4.0 Build 14 LSW000525” into the CD ROM drive.
10.Wait for the light on the CD drive to extinguish. This will take a few seconds. Then press
The following will be displayed with a progress indicator.
Determining LynxOS products to install…done
Extracting Development OS from the IDE CD-ROM drive (hd2)

/tar_images/5600.devos.tar.gz)
11.When the progress indicator reaches 100% the following messages appears
Creating boot partitions…done
12.Remove installation media (CD and Diskette) and press <Enter> to reboot.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.5.2.2 Installation From DAT Tape
Before you start, check that the following materials are available:

1 DAT Tape Genie Acq 4.0 Build 14 (Aquisition Operating Software) LSW000475
Operating System Installation Diskettes:
1. Insert the LynxOS 3.0.1 Installation boot disk into the disk drive.
Reboot the computer, by typing reboot -a
After several minutes the following message appears
Please insert the Installation Utilities Disk.
2. Remove the Installation boot disk and insert the LynxOS Utilities disk into the drive.
(Ensure that the utility disk is not write protected before inserting).
Loading Installation Utilities Disk.

Welcome to GENIE Acquisition Software Installation

Acquisition software version
Do you have an Installation Settings diskette (Y/N) ? [Y]
4. Answer N.
Install without an installation setting diskette (Y/N)? [Y]

Direction 2414259-100 2019
5. Answer Y.
GENIE Acquisition Main Menu: (1) MPR, (2) MPS, (3) MPT,
Select (1) <Enter> (4) MG, (5) MC,
(6) MCV(MyoSIGHT),
(7) AC400
GENIE Acquisition System Type Menu: (8) XR
Select the relevant system from the list <Enter> (9) XC
GENIE Acquisition System Options Menu: MC, MyoSIGHT and MG

Select (1) TRANS and choose ATC Option <Enter> systems with ATC
GENIE Acquisition System Options Menu: MyoSIGHT and MG

Select (2) Proximity Device and choose ABC Option <Enter> systems with ABC
After changing the Options, make sure the options have been set
correctly in the Current System Options
Type: (R) (R) <Enter>

Select (2) PC Type <Enter>
(1) Intel Altserver
(2) DELL 1300
GENIE Acquisition PC Type Menu: (3) DELL 1400
Select “your PC type:”<Enter> (4) DELL 2200
(5) DELL GX-200
(6) IBM 205
Reset factory defaults for “your PC type” (Y/N): [Y]
Press <Enter>
Type: (R) <Enter>
GENIE Acquisition Main Menu: The factory defaults are shown

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Saving Installation Settings to a Floppy Diskette
This step is necessary to enable the software to

automatically install the system settings required for
your specific configuration that is defined.


Please insert the Installation

Settings Diskette.Contnue (Y/N): [Y]
6. Remove the Installation Utility Disk and insert the Installation Settings Diskette (or a blank
diskette).
The installation settings will be saved.
Type: (R) <Enter>


(hd0b) !
8. Select C and press <Enter> to continue installation.

The following message will appear:
Beginning installation
Creating disk partitions… done
Creating file systems… done
Mounting file systems… done
Please make sure that the GENIE Acquisition distribution
Media is in the DAT Tape drive (/dev/d2)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9. Insert the DAT Tape “GenieAcq Ver 4.0 Build 14 LSW000475” into the Tape drive.
10.Wait for the light on the Tape drive to extinguish. This will take a few seconds. Then press
The following will be displayed with a progress indicator.
Determining LynxOS products to install…done
Extracting Development OS from the Tape drive (hd2)

/tar_images/5600.devos.tar.gz)
11.When the progress indicator reaches 100% the following messages appears
Creating boot partitions…done
12.Remove installation media (Tape and Diskette) and press <Enter> to reboot.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.5.3 Patch Installation Menu

GENIE Acquisition Patch Installation Main Menu:
1. To install patch GA400-02-1, complete section 5.3 and then proceed to:
Appendix G, Installing Patch GA400-2-1
After the patch is installed continue with Section 9.6, Restoring User Data.
GENIE Acquisition Patch Installation Main Menu:
GENIE Acquisition Patch Installation Menu:

Select: (C) Continue Installation <Enter>
Please remove all patch media and

press <Enter> to continue
When Millenium MG system is selected,

the “Make GenieAcq License” screen appears
Proceed as follows:
Enter password followed by <Enter> or <Enter> only to exit
Type: 14geonly <Enter> Type exactly as shown
License Option Choices

Type: (1) Millennium MG <Enter>
Select another Option number License Key Created

Type: (Q) <Enter> message appears
(R) Press <Enter> <Enter>
After completion following message will appear:

Secondary configuration is complete!
Press Enter to reboot your system…
2. Press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Restoring User Data
9.6 Restoring User Data

9.6.1 Restoring User Data from Hard Disk
Log into Service Account Hard Disks are used for restore on
Login: service DELL 1400, GX-200 and IBM 205
password: service. <Enter> computers
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Service Menu:
Go to UNIX window (7) <Enter>
/usr/service>
Type: su
Type:
st_bru <Enter>

This script.......
Press: <Enter>

Select: (2) <Enter>
Acquisition Computer Restore Menu

Select: (2) <Enter>
Restore Media Selection

Select: (3) Hard Disk <Enter>
Hard Disk Partition Selection Menu

Type: (1) Partition a <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Hard Disk Partition Selection Menu

(R) Press: <Enter> <Enter>

Select: (4) <Enter>
Restore File Selection Menu Type: 1<Enter> YES

Press: <Enter> User Acquisition Configuration Files
Type: 3 <Enter> YES

Type: 4 <Enter> YES

Type: 5 <Enter> YES

Verify the Restore File Category 2 is set to NO
Restore File Selection Menu

(R) <Enter>

Type: B <Enter><Enter>
Operation Complete
Press: <Enter> to continue

Type: Q <Enter>
The system prompt (#) is displayed

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.6.2 Restoring User Data from DAT Tape

Log into Service Account DAT Tapes are used for restore on
Login: service DELL1300, DELL2200 and Intel
password: service. <Enter> Altserver computers
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Service Menu:
/usr/service>
Type: su
Type:
st_bru <Enter>

This script.......
Press: <Enter>

Select: (2) <Enter>

Select: (2) <Enter>
Restore Media Selection

Select: (2) Tape <Enter>
SCSI Tape Interface Selection Menu

Select: (5) Adaptec AHA2940/2940W ISA <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
SCSI Tape ID Selection Menu

Select: (2) Tape ID2 <Enter>

Select: (4) <Enter>
Restore File Selection Menu Type: 1<Enter> YES

Press: <Enter> User Acquisition Configuration Files
Type: 3 <Enter> YES

Type: 4 <Enter> YES

Type: 5 <Enter> YES

Verify the Restore File Category 2 is set to NO
Restore File Selection Menu

(R) <Enter>

Type: B <Enter>
Operation Complete
Press: <Enter> to continue

Type: Q <Enter>
The system prompt (#) is displayed

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Configuring Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and Date/Time
9.7 Configuring Time Zone, Daylight Savings Method, and

Date/Time
The correct date and time must be specified since this information appears on
all acquisitions. You must also specify the local time zone and daylight
savings method. The following sections explain the procedures.

Login: service
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Service Menu:
/usr/service>
Type: su
Type:
st_config
Would you like to proceed with configuration?

Press y to continue
Press: (1) System Configuration
Press: (9) Time and Date

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Date / Time / Time Zone / Daylight Savings Configuration
This menu allows selection of the system date, time, time zone and
the daylight savings method in use at this location.
WARNING: Changes made to the date, time, time zone and the daylight savings
method are made immediately!
Current Time Zone:480 minutes

Current Date:Monday July 15, 1996
Current Time:16:20
1) Set Time Zone and Daylight Savings Method

2) Set System Date and Time

Enter Option[C]:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
9.7.1 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Savings Method

1. Press <1> and then <Enter> to define the time zone and daylight savings
method.
2. Specify the number of minutes west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
you are located. For example, Wisconsin, USA, is in the Central time
zone, six hours west of GMT. For a system in Wisconsin, you would enter
the number "360" (6 x 60 = 360).
Time Zone and Daylight Savings Menu
Current Time Zone: 360 minutes

Time zone is specified in the number of minutes from

Greenwich, England that the current time zone is located.
Locations west of Greenwitch are in the range: 0 to 720
Locations east of Greenwitch are in the range: 0 to -720
U.S. Time Zone Minutes West of Greenwich
Pacific US 480
Central US 360
Eastern US 300
Western Europe 0
Central Europe -60
Eastern Europe -120
Enter minutes west of Greenwich (-720 to 720) [< Enter >=no change]: 360
3. Press <Enter> to display the daylight savings menu.

4. Press < 0 > if time does not change in spring and fall, no daylight savings
time. If daylight savings time is used, select the number that corresponds
to your location and then press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Daylight Savings Method Selections Available:
0) No daylight savings
1) USA
2) Australia
3) Eastern Europe
4) Central Europe
5) Western Europe
Enter Daylight Savings Method [< Enter >=no change]: 1
5. Verify that the time information is correct.

6. Press < 2 > and then <Enter> to set the date and time.
7. Enter the year, month, day, hour, and minute as a 12-digit number and
then press <Enter>.
The following example shows how the 12-digit number is determined:
1996 07 15 18 21
Year Month Day Hour Minute
Date and Time Entry
Day and time are specified together in a string of characters

in the following format:
yyyymmddhhmm
| | | | |
| | | | +------> minute (00-59)
| | | +---------> hour (00-23)
| | +------------> day of month (01-31)
| +-----------------> month (01-12)
+----------------------> year (199x or 200x)
Current Date and Time (above format): 199607151821
Enter date and time [< Enter >=no change]:
8. After the time and date are specified, they are displayed. Press <Enter> to
continue to the next configuration menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Automatic Send
9.8 Automatic Send

Login: service
Password: service. <Enter>
Authorized User:
(Y) <Enter>
Service Menu:
(10) Start AUI <Enter>
Click on Patient Database Icon

(top left on screen)
Click on Automatic button in

Network Card
Check with the customer and confirm which stations will

have studies sent to them automatically. Refer
to Table 9-1
Select relevant stations
Click on Shutdown
Type: (Y) <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Motion Controller Initialization
9.9 Motion Controller Initialization

TIP
When software has been loaded and you are ready to initialize the Motion
Controller, it is recommended to power down the system from the IPS for 5
minutes and then to reconect the power.
When logging into AUI, if the Gantry does not initialize and the icon on the
Desktop is grayed out (disabled), Motion Controller initialization should be carried
out as follows:
1. From the Service Menu, select: (4) Initialize Motion Controller.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. When the initialization process has finished, log into AUI through the Service Menu again.
4. Verify Gantry functionality.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Final System Adjustments
9.10 Final System Adjustments

9.10.1 Characterizing the Gantry and Table
1. Perform the Table Characterization Procedure outlined in Section 6.3, Table / Gantry
Characterization.
2. Verify that Gantry Calibration has been completed properly.
3. If not, perform Gantry Characterization.
9.11 System Check Out

To verify overall system functionality, refer to the Chapter 4, Functional Checks
Note
for detailed information.
1. Acquire several quality control scans (floods and bars) in order to determine the state of system
and to verify that the tuning & correction files were loaded correctly.
2. Verify that all User Templates have been restored
3. Acquire new COR’s for the system. Verify Gantry and Detector motion.
4. Acquire new Uniformity Corrections for the collimator used for SPECT acquisitions.
5. Exercise network connectivity to DICOM & Processing Stations.
6. Create a new system backup file (.GZ)
Since a number of configuration files have changed, a new system backup file
(.GZ) must be created and independently stored, using this new version of
software - GenieAcq V4.0 Build 14.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 10 - Renewal Parts
10.1 General Information

This chapter provides identification of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and
supports item part numbers needed to properly service the system. For clarity,
some non-FRU items are also listed and illustrated, though not every part and
assembly will be found. All FRUs are however listed.
The parts lists, and their respective illustrations, identify all of the items of an
assembly and sub-assembly by means of location indicators. Each parts list
has the following elements for each item listed:
• Location indicator (item number) for each item identified on the
accompanying illustration.
• Part number.
• Name and description (if applicable) of the item.
• FRU indication.
• Quantity of the item for that particular assembly or sub-assembly.
10.1.1 FRU Definition

An FRU is a spare part that supports the most economical level of repair
(labor and material) for returning the system to normal imaging operation,
with minimal downtime.
Only Source Pole stocks all FRU level items. Orders for non-FRU parts will
not be accepted unless a certified need exists. Should this occur, contact
Service Engineering.
Important Non-FRU item changes do not initiate Service Documentation updates.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts General Information
10.1.2 FRU Codes

FRU codes listed in the parts lists are defined as follows:
• N - This letter tells you the item is a non-FRU item. "N" items are
not available for field orders. These items are listed and
illustrated only to show relationships within the assembly.
• 1 - The number "one" indicates the item is a 'critical' component,
and is immediately available for all field service orders.
• 2 - The number "two" tells you the item is a 'non-critical'
component, and that it is available for lower-priority field service
orders.
WARNING
If exchanged, the Sodium Iodide Crystal Assembly should be returned to
the system vendor for correct disposal.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts Genie Acquisition Computer
10.2 Genie Acquisition Computer
10.2.1 Acquisition Computer and Accessories

Item GE Part # ELGEMS Part # Name FRU Qty Description (Remarks)
1 UGP001612 PC Tower 1 1 IBM 205
2 2148380 Keyboard 1 1
3 221359 CP00051793P Monitor 17" 1 1
4 2148382 Mouse 1 1
5 2148383 CP320050020 Mon Ext Cable 1 1 20".
6 2148385 CP320030020 Keyboard Ext Cable 1 1 20".
7 2148386 CP320020020 Mouse Ext Cable 1 1 20".
9A 2161114 PCA000347 Framing Board 1 2 PCI
9B 2139964-2 Framing Board 1 2 Eisa (Alternative)
10 2148384-2 CBL000470 Comp Power Cord 1 1 Extender 26'.
11 2148384-4 CBL000469 Mon Power Cord 1 1 Extender 46'.
12 2186634 CBL000471 Taxi 1 Link Cable 20' 1 1 CPU to Detector #1
13 2186634-2 CBL000472 Taxi 2 Link Cable 20' 1 1 CPU to Detector #2
17 2186632 CBL000468 Comms Serial Cable 1 1 IPS to CPU
18 2156589 TZ320001000 Cable Cover 20' 2 2 Gray Corrugated
19 2161803 CBL000466 Ribbon Cable 2 2 Framing Board
20 2162322 TZ32002113 Mounting Clip 2 2 For Gray Corrugated
21 2162322 TZ32002113 Mounting Clip 2 2 For Split Tubing
24 2154334-2 RF01001117D EMI Gasket 2 A/R 1 mm x 10 mm wide
25 2156589-2 TZ320001500 Cable Cover 1.5" x 5' 2 1 Gray Corrugated
26 2414263-100 Manual 2 1 MG Operator Reference
27 2414264-100 Manual 2 1 MC Operator Reference
28 2307226-100 Manual 2 1 MG/MG Site Preparation
29 2179934-100 MAN000060 ACQ/PROC/QC Cards 2 1
30 2180597-100 MAN000425 Manual 2 1 System Service
31 46-208713P4 XWO2513125M Cable Clamp 2 1 0.3125
32 46-208718P11 XW02517500M Cable Tie 2 1 Loop type
33 46-208718P5 XW02510013A Loop 1/2" ID 2 2
34 46-208785P3 XW025000003 Cable Tie 2 2
35 46-220371P3 HB02219207C Thread Spacer 2 2
36 CP00022055 I/O Card 2 1 VSCOM 200/55 I/O Card
37 UGP001067 I/O Card 2 1 Digi Neo Card (ATC Option)
38 UGP001613 GenieAcq SW 2 1 SW as spare part
Package R4.0

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.2.1.1 Mobile Cart
Figure 10-1: Mobile Cart
10.2.1.2 Mobile Cart Parts List

1 DTP000115 Mobile Cart Assembly 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts Gantry
10.3 Gantry
10.3.1 Gantry Packing Material
18
17 19
20
21
16
15
22
14
23
13 5 24
12 25
28
11
10 x4
9
8 7
6
5 4
3 2
1
28
Figure 10-2: Gantry Packing Material

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.1.1 Gantry Packing Material List
Refer to Figure 10-2 on the previous page.

1 2193851 Carriage Bolt 2 6
4 2190360 MEC000657 Left Shipping Bar 2 1
5 46-214695P91 HS004016040 Cap Screw 2 6 M16 x 40
6 HS004608030 C-Sunk Screw 2 24 M18 x 30
7 2190362 MEC000656 Mounting Plate 2 4 For Swivel Caster
8 2103580-54 HS004512045 C-Sunk Screw 2 24 M12 x 45
9 2190363 HD000411562 Swivel Caster 2 4
12 46-311804P15 HW001010000 Washer 2 58 D =14
13 46-312345P7 HN001508000 Nut 2 42 M12
14 46-328416P50 HS006012025 Hex Screw 2 16 M12 x 25
15 21893847 MEC000697 Shipping Brackets 2 4 Radial Restraint
16 46-328416P50 HS006012025 Hex Screw 2 16 M12 x 25
17 2193847 MEC000664 Spacer Bar 2 1 For Dolly
18 46-214695P53 HS004010025 Cap Screw 2 4 M10 x 25
19 46-328430P4 HW00100010M Washer 2 4 D =10
20 46-328425P3 HN001510000 Nut 2 4 M10
21 46-316701P1 BR32000046A Gantry Dolly 2 1 Blue Ends
22 46-328416P53 HS006012040 Hex Screw 2 12 M12 x 40
23 2190361 MEC000658 Right Shipping Bar 2 1
24 46-311804P15 HW001010000 Washer 2 58 D =14
25 46-312345P7 HN001508000 Nut 2 42 M12
28 2189626 PKG000074 Shipping Crate 2 1
2189626 PM402030023 Packing Material 2 2 For Detector
2193852 Insert 2 1 For Gantry Pallet

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.2 Gantry - Front
29
28
32
20
21
22
23
24
25
31 26
27
30
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11 1
10 4
9 5 2
8 7 6
3
Figure 10-3: Gantry - Front

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.2.1 Gantry - Front Parts List

1 HS004012080 Capscrew N 4 M12 x 80
3 HS004012055 Capscrew N 8 M12 x 55
4 ASM000774 Bearing Assembly N 1 Radial Drive
5 CBL000890 Cable 2 1 Detector No 2
6 MEC000671 Rail 2 2 For Collimator Cart
7 46-214695P36 HS004006020 Capscrew 2 6 M6 x 20
8 HS004506016 C-Sunk Screw 2 M6 x 16
9 2184904 MEC000561 Cover 2 2 For Transmission
Scanner
10 2103580-1 HS008004008 C-Sunk Screw2 2 2 M4 x 8
11 2184339 SP320000035 Cover 2 1 For Gearbox
12 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 1 M4 x 8
13 2184315 SP320000009 Bracket 2 1 For SW2 Assembly
14 46-214695P1 HS004003005 Capscrew 2 2 M3 x 5
15 2184460 PCA000052 SW2 Assembly 2 1 Roll Limit-Switch
Connector Refer to
Section 7.2.10.
16 2103580-1 HS008004008 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M4 x 8
17 2193485 MEC000659 Adapter 2 2 For Hand Held Controller
18 2103580-53 HS004508016 C-Sunk Screw 2 2 M8 x 16
19 2184345 SP320000040 Curve 2 1 For Roll Position
20 46-214695P36 HS004006020 Capscrew 2 6 M6 x 20
21 MEC002736 Shaft N 8 For Bearing NATV
22 HB10010015P Bearing N 8 NATV 15 PP
23 HS004010020 Capscrew N 4 M10 x 20
24 Bracket N 1 For Detector No 1
25 ASM000774 Bearing Assembly N 1 Radial Drive
26 HS004510020 C-Sunk Screw N 4 M10 x 20
27 2194063 MEC002737 Stop Plate 2 4 Radius
28 2187882 CBL000891 Cable 2 1 Detector No 1
29 HS004005010 Capscrew N 8 M5 x 10
30 ASM000168 Detector Interface N 2 Refer to Section 10.5.6.
31 BR32000030C HHC Refer to Section 10.4.
32 MEC004293 Base Attachment for 2 1 Handset Holder
HHC
33 ASM000877 Fan Assembly 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.3 Gantry - Back
31
30
29 32
28
27
26 33
25
24
23 34
22
21
20
19
18
17
35
38 37 36
16 39
45 40
44
15
42
14 43
41
13
12
10
5
11
4
9 . 3
8 2
7
6 1
Figure 10-4: Gantry - Back

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.3.1 Gantry - Back Parts List

1 HS004005012 Capscrew N 10 M5 x 12
2 2184313 MEC002755 Base 2 4 For Adjusting Foot
3 MEC005343 Circlip N 4 Spring RB35 DIN7993B
4 2184312 MEC002754 Adjustable Foot 2 4
5 2184311 MEC000621 Housing 2 4 For Adjusting Foot
6 2146470 Roll Drive Gear N Refer to Section 10.3.7.
7 HW01010120M Lockwasher 2 3 M12
8 HS004012030 Capscrew 2 3 M12 x 30
9 ASM000166 Roll Dr Assy Refer to Section 10.3.6.
10 2184458 ASM0000172 Fan Assembly 2 1 For Roll Motor
11 HS004010035 Capscrews 2 3 M10 x 35
12 46-228730P7 HW01010050M Lockwasher 2 2 M5
13 46-214695P21 HS004005008 Capscrew 2 2 M5 X 8
14 2103580-15 HS004606025 C-Sunk Screw 2 3 M6 x 25
15 2184309 MEC002673 Adapter 2 3 M6
16 2184338 MEC004078 Back Cover 2 1
17 2184310 MEC002752 Cable Cover 2 1
18 HS004008012 Capscrew 2 2 M8 x 12
19 2184314 MEC002756 Bracket 2 1 Cable Outlet
20 2184334 MEC002732 Outer Relief Brkt 2 1 For Cable
21 46-235202P3 HS004003010 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M3 x 10
22 HS004004020 Capscrew 2 2 M4 x 20
23 MEC005323 Casing N 1 Aluminum
24 G012300020 Tape Glide 2 1 Polyethylene 2 inch
25 2184441 ASM000872 Cable Chain Assembly 2 1 Refer to Section 7.2.13 and
Section 8.5.15.
27 2184325 Cable Retainer 2 1
28 2184454 B010259507 Radial Gear Motor 2 1 Worm Gear and Motor
29 HS004008030 Capscrew 2 2 M8 x 30
30 HB201927672 Main Bearing 2 1
31 Tape 2 1 Scotch 465 1 inch
32 2103580-1 HS004504008 C-Sunk Screw 2 28 M4 x 8
33 MEC005375 Cover 2 1 For 4-ring Bearing

Direction 2414259-100 2019

34 HS004008040 Capscrew 2 46 M8 x 40
35 ASM000174 Roll Lock N Assembly.
36 HS40070825M Reamed Bolt 2 2 D10 x 25
37 2184336 MEC005374 Stop 2 1 For Roll Lock
38 46-328420P8 HS004008020 Capscrew 2 2 M8 x 20
39 HS083506008 Button Screw 2 2 M6 x 8
40 46-214695P36 HS0040060020 Capscrew 2 4 M6 x 20
41 851352P205 HN01120030M Locknut 2 4 M3
42 ASM000876 Worm Gear 2 1 Part of Radial Gear Motor
Assembly
(supplied with motor)
43 HS004008055 Capscrew 2 2 M8 x 55
44 ASM000876 Motor 2 2 Part of Radial Gear Motor
Assembly
(supplied with worm gear)
45 2228808 Roll Cable Protection 2 1 Strain Relief Band

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.4 Roll Lock
Important Refer to Section 8.5.14 for the replacement procedure.
11
12
17
13 14 15
5
18
16
10
9
8
7
6 5 4
3
2
1
Figure 10-5: Roll Lock

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.4.1 Roll Lock Parts List

1 2187879 B010300225 Motor 1 1 SWF GMPG 02225 404.156
3 2184329 MEC2689 Mounting Plate 2 1 For Roll Motor
5 HS004003025 Capscrew N 10 M3 x 25
6 2184343 MEC002683 Cover 2 2 For Roll Switch - Right
7 2187898 Micro Switch 1 5 SS-5GL2T
9 2184337 ASM000808 Mounting Plate 2 1 For Roll Lock Switch
Assembly (including switches)
10 2187878 SP320000132 Set Screw 1 2 M4 x 4
11 MEC005653 Guide for Roll Lock 2 1
12 ASM000762 Slide for Roll Lock 2 1
13 2184330 MEC002628 Eccentric 2 1
14 2184889 MEC002682 Knob for Roll Lock 2 1
15 46-214695P2 HSO4003008 Capscrew 2 1 M3 x 8
16 2184340 MEC002687 DB-9 Bracket 2 1 For Roll Lock
17 46-214695P89 HS004003006 Capscrew 2 2 M3 x 6
18 2184344 MEC002683 Cover 2 1 For Roll Switch - Left

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.5 Radial Drive
4 8
9
3
Figure 10-6: Radial Drive

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.5.1 Radial Drive Parts List

1 HS004006075 Capscrew N 1 M6 x 75
2 2184877 MEC002746 Washer 2 1 M6
3 2184876 MEC002740 Pinion 2 1 Z = 16, M = 2.5
4 2184895 MEC005343 Key 2 1

5 2184874 MEC005341 Gear Wheel 2 1 Z = 90, M = 1.5
6 2184872 MEC002741 Bearing Housing 2 1

7 HB101205009 Bearing 2 1 NNF 5009 ADA-2LSV
8 2184875 MEC002742 Locking Flange 2 1

9 2103580-3 HS004504012 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M4 x 12

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.6 Roll Motor Drive Assembly
3
4 5
6
7
8
Figure 10-7: Roll Motor Drive Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.6.1 Roll Motor Drive Assembly Parts List

1 B010300659 Drive Assembly N 1 BJ10
2 2184335 MEC000662 Stay 2 4 For Photo Eye
3 2184333 MEC000661 Disk 2 1 For Photo Eye
4 2187878 HS005004004 Setscrew 2 1 M4 x 4
5 2184457 PCA000047 Board 1 1 Roll Limit Board

Refer to Section 7.2.6,
Section 7.2.7, and Section
8.5.14.
6 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 4 M4 x 8
7 2187877 SP320000131 Encoder 1 1

8 Screw N 3

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.7 Roll Drive Gear
8
7
6
3
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 10-8: Roll Drive Gear
10.3.7.1 Roll Drive Gear Parts List

1 HS004010025 Capscrew N 1 M10 x 25
2 2184327 MEC002758 Washer 2 1 For Driving Gear
3 2194073 HB7006000035 Circlip 2 2 SW 52 x 1.5
4 2184883 MEC005344 Intermediate Gear 2 1

5 2194068 HB201405205 Bearing 2 1 G5205 2RSN
6 46-214695P36 HS004006020 Capscrew 2 3 M6 x 20
7 2184328 MEC002731 Intermediate Shaft 2 1

8 2184882 MEC001862 Mounting Plate 2 1 BJ10
10.3.8 Integrated Power Supply (IPS)

10.3.8.1 IPS Assembly A

Direction 2414259-100 2019
56
91
55
93
33
78
58
57 54
86
71
79
27
62
Figure 10-9: IPS: Assembly A

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.2 IPS Assembly A Parts List

- 2184212 CBL000493 IPS Cable N1 2 1 950mm: MUX Brd. to Motor
Amp. Backplane
(Connectors BF5, BJ4 & BJ5)
- 2184213 CBL000494 IPS Cable N2 2 1 850mm: MUX Brd. to Gantry
Connect. Panel
(Connectors BF3 & G13)
- 2184215 IPS Cable N3 2 1 1.4m: Gantry Connect. Panel
to Drive DCL1091
(Connectors G12, DJ6 & DJ4)
- 2184216 IPS Cable N4 2 1 1.1m: Controller SB214 to
Gantry Connect. Panel
& Drive DCL1091
(Connectors SB7, G10 & DJ4)
- 2184217 CBL000496 IPS Cable N5 2 1 1.05m: Gantry Connect. Panel
to Controller SB214
(Connectors G11, SB5 & SB6)
- 2184218 CBL000498 IPS Cable N6 2 1 900mm: IPS Connect. Panel to
Controller SB214
(Connectors J5, SB8, SB9 &
SB10)
- 2184219 CBL000499 IPS Cable N7 2 1 900mm: Controller Sb214 to
Motor Amplifier
(Connectors BJ7 & SB12)
- 2184220 CBL000500 IPS Cable N8 2 1 1.13m: IPS Connector Panel to
MUX Brd.
(Connectors J7 & BF4)
- 2184221 CBL000501 IPS Cable N9 2 1 1m: IPS Connect. Panel to
(Connectors J9F & G5)
- 2184222 CBL000502 IPS Cable N10 2 1 1M: IPS Connect. Panel to
(Connectors J8F & G2)
- 2184342 SP320000037 Washer 2 2 For Hand Grip
- 2184811 CBL000503 IPS Cable N11 2 1 980mm: Drive DCL1091 to

Controller SB214
(Connectors DJ1 & SB3)
- 2184812 CBL000504 IPS Cable N12 2 1 550mm: PSU Brd. to MUX Brd.
(Connectors BE24 & BF8)
- 2184813 CBL000920 IPS Cable N13 2 1 980mm: Gantry Connect.
Panel to MUX Brd.
(Connectors G9 & BF1)

Direction 2414259-100 2019

- 2184814 CBL000505 IPS Cable N14 2 1 1.1m: MUX Brd. to Controller
SB214 & IPS Connect.
Panel (Connectors BF6, SB17,
SB14 & J2)
- 2184815 CBL000506 IPS Cable N15 2 1 800mm: Controller SB214 to
MUX Brd. & IPS Connect.
Panel
(Connectors SB19, BF7 & J5)
- 2184816 CBL000507 IPS Cable N16 2 1 900mm: Motor Amp.
Backplane to PSU Brd.
(Connectors BJ3 & BE21)
- 2184817 CBL000508 IPS Cable N17 2 1 1.2m: IPS Connect. Panel to
Gantry Connect Panel
(Connectors J16 & G16)
- 2184818 CBL000509 IPS Cable N18 2 1 900mm: IPS Connect to
(Connectors J1 & G17)
Controller SB214
(Connectors J10 to SB11)
- 2184820 CBL000511 IPS Cable N20 2 4 1.3m: Drive DCL1091 to PSU
Brd.
(Connectors DJ5 & BE2)
- 2184821 CBL000512 IPS Cable N21 2 2 950mm: PSU Brd. to Controller
SB214
(Connectors BE4 &SB18)
- 2184822 CBL000513 IPS Cable N22, N23 2 1 -
- 2184824 CBL000514 IPS Cable Kit N24 2 1 -

IPS Connect. Panel
(Connectors J11 & J13)
27 2184309 MEC002673 M6 Adapter 2 4 -
54 2184890 MEC002675 Handgrip 2 1 Suspension w/lock
55 2184891 MEC002676 Handgrip 2 1 Suspension w/lock
56 2184892 MEC000612 Bracket 2 1 Suspension
57 2184893 MEC000689 Bracket 2 1 Suspension
58 2184903 MEC002678 Stay for Cover 2 4 -
- 2186607 CBL000516 IPS Cable N26 2 1 800mm: PSU Brd. to Fans

(Connectors BE2 to FAN1 &
FAN2)
- 2186608 CBL000517 IPS Cable N27 2 1 Connectors BE16, BE18, BF2,
J6, J14, J15, G1, G4, G7,
G8, G14, G15 & SB14
- 2186617 CBL000518 IPS Connector 2 1 Connector SB15
62 2195812 MEC000643 Cover for IPS 2 1 White Color

Direction 2414259-100 2019

62 MEC008049 Cover for IPS 2 1 Blue Color
71 2193769 LBL000460 Caution Label 2 2 Heavy IPS
78 46-311814P4 HB70020120M Circlip 12 x 1 2 2 -
79 2103580 HS004506025 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M6 x 25
- 2103580 HS004506020 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M6 x 20
86 46-214695P21 HS004005008 Capscrew 2 4 M5 x 8
91 2103580-53 HS004506016 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M8 x 16
93 2103580-11 HS004506010 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 M6 x 10
- 46-312765P18 HB02300316M Stay 2 4 Threaded Brass M3 x 16
- 46-220285P16 FI001000061 Filter 2 1 Schaffner FN-610

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.3 IPS Assembly B
81
75
66 74
72
88
89 53
63
84
87
Figure 10-10: IPS: Assembly B
10.3.8.4 IPS Assembly B Parts List
53 2184866 MEC000642 Cover 2 1 For IPS Chassis

63 2193518 B00010119M EMC Filter Screen 2 4
66 2193708 HH000283016 Handle 2 1 For Top Cover
72 2193770 LBL000461 Caution Label 2 1 "Do Not Lift IPS..."
74 46-328428P1 HNO1120040M Lock Nut M4 2 18
75 851352P225 HN01120050M Locking Nut M5 5 24
81 46-214695P14 HS004004012 Capscrew 2 1 M4 x 12
84 46-214695P23 HS004005012 Capscrew 2 6 M5 x 12
87 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 11 M4 x 8
88 2103580-45 HS004505016 C-Sunk Screw 2 2 M5 x 16
89 2103580-4 HS004504016 C-Sunk Screw 2 2 M4 x 16

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.5 IPS Assembly C
6 87
84
5
Figure 10-11: IPS: Assembly C
10.3.8.6 IPS Assembly C Parts List

5 2186874 B01021091D Roll Drive 1 1 4 Amp
6 2186881 B01020214A Motion Controller 1 1 4 Axis.
84 46-214695P23 HS004005012 Capscrew 2 6 M5 x 12
87 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 11 M4 x 8
10.3.8.7 IPS Assembly D

Direction 2414259-100 2019
90 7
1
65
85
8
35
80 28
69
76
97
Figure 10-12: IPS: Assembly D

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.8 IPS Assembly D Parts List

1 2146498 B010206012 Amplifier Drive Board 1 3 60 V DC 12 Amps.
7 2186883 B010200164 Amp Backplane 1 1 4 Axis.
8 2187886 ASM000164 Fan 120mm 12 V DC 1 2 -
28 2184316 MEC002674 Guide 2 2 -
35 2184347 MEC002679 Shaft 2 1 For Card Cage
65 46-272301P11 B00011103W Finger Guard 2 2 -
69 2193709 LBL000458 Label 2 6 "Earth Warning"
76 46-312512P8 HN80257040M Brass Nut M4 2 32 -
80 46-214695P2 HS004003008 Capscrew 2 2 M3 x 8
85 46-214695P1 HS004003005 Capscrew 2 18 M3 x 5
90 46-214695P60 HS004004040 Capscrew 2 8 M4 x 40
97 46-228730P6 Lock Washer 2 2 -

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.9 IPS Assembly E
87
87
74
Figure 10-13: IPS: Assembly E
10.3.8.10 IPS Assembly E Parts List

74 46-328428P1 HN01120040M Lock Nut M4 2 18
87 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 11 M4 x 8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.11 IPS Assembly F
16
85
2
96
97
(not shown)
85
73
81
4
85
96
Figure 10-14: IPS: Assembly F

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.12 IPS Assembly F Parts List

2 2168930 BR320068930 HHC CAN BUS Board 1 1 Refer to Section 7.4.18 thru
Section 7.4.20 and also to
Section 8.5.6.
CBL000948 Adapter Cable 1 1 Refer to Section 8.5.4
3 UGP001275 Power Supply Board 1 1 Refer to Section 8.5.4
+ Cable Adapter
4 2184462 PCA000049 MUX Board 1 1 Refer to Section 7.4.13 and
Section 8.5.5.
16 2187897 Fuse Little 10A 250V 1 1 ON Power Supply Board.
73 851352P205 HN01120030M Lock Nut M3 2 40 -
81 46-214695P14 HS004004012 Capscrew 2 18 M4 x 12
85 46-214695P1 HS004003005 Capscrew 2 18 M3 x 5
96 46-312765P12 HB02300306M Stay 2 20 Threaded Brass
97 PCA0000331 MEC Board 1 1
MEC003466 Bracket for MEC 1 1
CBL000523 MEC Collision Cable 1 1
CBL000522 MEC Signal Cable 1 1
CBL000524 MEC HHC Cable 1 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.13 IPS Assembly G
36
30
92
32
94 76
101
87
84
68
29
70
Figure 10-15: IPS: Assembly G
10.3.8.14 IPS Assembly G Parts List

29 2184318 Selector Cover 2 1 Mains Voltage
30 2184319 MOV Bracket 2 1 -
32 2184322 Selector 2 1 Mains Voltage
36 2184449 DTP000072 IPS Transformer 2 1 -
68 2179920 Caution Label 2 2 "High Voltage"
70 2193713 Label 2 1 "Mains Transformer"
76 46-312512P8 Brass Nut M4 2 32 -
84 46-214695P23 Capscrew 2 6 M5 x 12
87 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 11 M4 x 8
92 46-235274P5 Captive Fastener 2 10 -
94 2193787 Hex Stay 2 4 M5 x 15
101 2193843 Metal Oxide Varistor 2 2 B32K130.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.15 IPS Assembly H
68 34
75
73
64
73
52
31
80
87
76 97 76
74 12
78 11
10
9
99
15
100 77 13
67
14
81
82
Figure 10-16: IPS: Assembly H

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.8.16 IPS Assembly H Parts List

9 2187887 S010000075 Switch 1 1 With Round Black Bezel
10 2187888 S09061050A Circuit Breaker 1 1 PR11-2-5.00.
13 2187892 DS010746164 LED Indicator 24V 1 2 Green
14 2187894 DS010746152 LED Indicator 24V 1 2 Red
15 2187896 DS04000004G Neon Indicator 1 2 Snap-in Green
31 2184320 MEC000646 Filter Bracket 2 1 -
34 2184346 MEC000639 Support Plate 2 1 For FOR 4 DB9
52 2184865 MEC000687 Connector Panel 2 1 For IPS
64 2133533-10 FI001000202 Filter 2 1 Schaffner FN-660
67 46-284314P1 P0500400030 Panel Mount Inlet 2 1 Hubble
68 2179920 LBL000457 Caution Label 2 2 "High Voltage"
73 851352P205 HN01120030M Lock Nut M3 2 40 -
74 46-328428P1 HN01120040M Lock Nut M4 2 18 -
75 851352P225 HN01120050M Locking Nut M5 2 4 -
76 46-312512P8 HN80257040M Brass Nut M4 2 32 -
77 2193845 P050400005 IEC Panel Outlet 2 3 -
78 46-311814P4 HB7002012M Circlip 12 x 1 2 2 -
80 46-214695P2 HS004003008 Capscrew 2 2 M3 x 8
81 46-214695P14 HS004004012 Capscrew 2 18 M4 x 12
82 2103580-39 HS004503008 C-Sunk Screw 2 6 M3 x 8
87 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 2 11 M4 x 8
97 46-228730P6 HW01000040M Lock Washer 2 2 -
99 2193749 Switch I/O Black 2 1 C1350VQ
100 2193800 Switch 2 1 C1350VQ

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.3.9 Gantry Cable List

1 CBL000904 Roll Limit to IP Cable Y 1 Connect to G7 on IPS
2 CBL000890 Detector 2 Assy Cable Y 1 Inner Bracket
3 ASM000872 Gantry Retractor Y 1 Connect on IPS to:
G2, G3, G5, G6, G9, G11,
G13, and CHASSIS
1.
DETECTOR
MOTOR 2
RADIAL
BOARD
BOARD
2
ROLL
LIMIT
SW2
BD1
BD2
G7
CBL000904
2.
G12
POWER/BRAKE
CBL000892_01
CBL00890
ENCODER
G10
ENCODER
2189889
G8
G11 G13 CHASSIS
BRACKET
IB5
IB4
IB2
IB1
DOCKING
(2184441)
SWITCH
BOARD
MOTOR
INNER
ROLL
FAN
BRAKE
3.
FAN
LOCK MOTOR
G9
ASSEMBLY
GANTRY
IPS
G6
ASM000872
G5
G3
G2
BRACKET
HANDSET 1
(2184441)
E-STOP 1
OUTER
CHASSIS
OB5
OB4
OB2
OB1
G4
POWER/BRAKE
CBL00520_03
CBL00891
ENCODER
G1
HANDSET 1
E-STOP 1
CHASSIS
MOTOR 1
RADIAL
DETECTOR
PROT. GND
1
Figure 10-17: IPS - Gantry Cables

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts Hand Held Controller
10.4 Hand Held Controller

10.4.1 Hand Held Controller Assembly
10.4.1.1 Hand Held Controller Assembly Parts List

1 2166908-4 SP320000246 Handset "A" 1 1 With Coil Cord
2 2166908-10 BR32000030D Handset "B" 1 N/A With Coil Cord (optional)
3 2166908-6 SP320000245 Static Unit 1 2 For E-stop
4 2166908-7 SP320000247 Coil Cord 1 1 Handset
5 2166908-8 MEC004293 Cradle 2 2 For Handset

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts Detectors
10.5 Detectors
10.5.1 Detector Assemblies
10.5.1.1 Detector Assembly A
19
20
18 21
17 22
23
16
15
14
13
12 24
11
10
9
8
7 25
5
26
4
3 27
2 28
Figure 10-18: Detector: Assembly A

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.2 Detector Assembly A Parts List

1 46-235202P14 HS004504010 C-Sunk Screw 2 4 Hex Soc M3 x 6
2 2166044 PCA000344 Contact PIN Board 1 2 Detector.
3 2LAB0544-A LBL000421 S/N Label 2 2
4 2LAB0346-A LBL000420 Identifier Label 2 2 Tube Manufacturer
5 2LAB0298-A LBL000422 Label ETL Listed 2 1
6 2166114 MEC004426 Lead Casing 2 2 Detector
7 46-228757P7 DTP000084 Crystal Seal Tape 1 2 264cm
8 Cover
9 2139846-2 PCA000175 HV Resistor Board 1 2 2139846-2
10 2177413 MEC005363 Console 1 2 For HV Pins
11 46-214695P15 HS004004016 Capscrew 2 12 M4 x 16
12 2139858 G011500009 Light Seal 1 2 Detector (240cm)
13 2139837 Y000200031 Crystal 1 2 Refer to Section 8.6.10.
14 46-217178P5 70213903019 Gliding Tape 1 2 2" (144cm)
15 2165553 RF32000001A MU Metal Array 2 2
16 2165554 MEC004433 Support Bracket 2 4 MU Metal
17 46-328431P1 HW001094001 Washer 2 8 M4
18 46-400910P5 HS04004012 Capscrew 2 8 M4 x 12
19 46-401261P1 MEC004438 PMT Base Light Seal 1 96
20 46-400910P5 MEC004436 PMT Spring Base 2 96
21 MEC004435 PMT Spring 2 96
22 46-277387P2 MEC004437 Locking Ring 2 96 For PMT Spring
23 2151302 ASM000768 PMT Assembly 1 96 Philips Painted.
24 2165549 MEC004430 Mount 2 2 X-TAL & Support Plate
25 2165552 MEC004431 Insulator 2 4 For X-TAL Mounting
26 2182460 Latch Cam 2 8 Detector Collimator
27 2166082 MEC004432 Mounting Nut 2 16 Crystal
28 2165543 MEC004427 Collimator Guide 2 4 Detector

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.3 Detector Assembly B
Important Refer to Section 8.6.7 for replacement procedures.
11
12
10
13
14
15
16
9 17
8
7
6
5
4
3
Figure 10-19: Detector: Assembly B

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.4 Detector Assembly B Parts List

1 2166078 MEC004434 PMT Support Plate 2 2
2 2WAS0040-A 2WAS0040-A Locking Washer 2 4
3 46-214695P38 HS004006030 Capscrew 2 8 M6 x 30
4 46-312765P13 HB02300306M Standoff (Stay) 2 40 M3 x 6 mm Long
5 2166048 PCA000176 Matrix Board 1 2 Refer to Section 8.6.8.
6 46-214695P1 HS004003005 Capscrew 2 76 M3 x 5
7 2139840-2 PCA0000177 PMT Preamp 1 96 SMD
8 PCA000178 Dyncor Module 1 14
9 2139842-3 PCA000179 Dyncor Dr Module 1 2 Refer to Section 8.6.7.
10 2177923 ASM000531 Lead Shield 2 2 Top Back
11 46-214695P27 HS00400525M Hex Soc Capscrew 2 20 M5 x 25
12 2177924 HH000283015 Handle 2 4 For Top Lead Shield
13 2103580-4 HS004504016 C-Sunk Capscrew 2 16 M4 x 16
14 46-311799P7 2 16 M5 x .8 x 16
15 2177928 Caution Label 2 4 Top Shield
16 2177922 Shield 2 2 Top Front
17 2177927 Warning Label 2 4 Top Shield

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.5 Detector Assembly C
5
4
6
2
8
14
13
18
11
10
20
21
22
22
Figure 10-20: Detector: Assembly C

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.6 Detector Assembly C Parts List

1 PCA000470 Power Supply 1 2 Detector.
2 46-214695P1 HS004003005 Capscrew 2 76 M3 x 5
3 46-214695P12 HS0040034008 Soc HD Capscrew 2 4 M4 x 8
4 2177792 Ground Cable 2 2 Detector Mounting Plate
5 2177963 Hinge 2 4 For Detector Boards
6 2SCRO191-A Capscrew 2 4 M5 x 55
8 46-312512P7 Brass Nut 2 8 M3
10 2165566 Mounting Plate 2 4 26 Pin Filter
11 2172304 PCA000182 Filter Board 1 4 26 Pin
13 2172310 PCA000181 Filter Board 1 2 16 Pin
14 2165558 Mounting Plate 2 2 16 Pin Filter
18 2165557 MEC004441 EMC Shield 2 2 I/N Board
20 ASM000781 I/N Board 1 2 (with shield)
20 2139848 PCA000348 I/N Board 1 2 (without shield)
21 46-312765P18 Standoff (stay) 2 20 M3 x 16 mm long
22 46-235202P6 C-Sunk Screw 2 20 M3 x 8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.1.7 Detector Assembly D
5
4
2
1
Figure 10-21: Detector: Assembly D
10.5.1.8 Detector Assembly D Parts List

1 2177964 MEC000044 Mounting Plate 2 2 For Detector Boards
2 2177963 MEC004429 Hinge 2 4 For Detector Boards
4 2103580-13 HS004506016 C-Sunk Fl Capscrew 2 4 M6 x 16
5 4WAS0097-A MEC004446 M6 Adapter 2 4
6 MEC005191 Detector Cover 2 2
7 46-214695P36 HS004006020 Hex Soc Capscrew 2 6 M6 x 20
8 LBL000890 Detector Cover Label 1 2
9 LBL000742 GE Logo Label 1 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.2 Collimators
10.5.2.1 Collimator - LEGP
(GE Part # 2181001 / ELGEMS Part # CC32000001A).
10.5.2.2 Collimator - LEGP Parts List

1 2162503-2 CC320011104 Board 1 2 Sensor Contact
2 2174222 MEC005676 Collimator Cover 2 2 With Collision Sensor
3 2179286 Spring Holder 2 8
4 2181387 MEC003648 Flange 2 8 Collimator Cover
5 2181389 MEC003645 Bushing 2 2 Collimator Guide
6 2181390 MEC003644 Bushing 2 2 Collimator Guide (central)
7 2179285 MEC003647 Latch Bushing 2 8
9 2181558 HW001600030 Disc Spring 2 8 Bevelled
10 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 1 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD
2181560-2 MEC005702 Shim 2
10.5.2.3 Collimator - LEHR

10.5.2.4 Collimator - LEHR Parts List

2 2174222-2 MEC005677 Collimator Cover 2 2 With Collision Sensor
10 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.2.5 Collimator - MEGP

10.5.2.6 Collimator - MEGP Parts List

10 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD
10.5.2.7 Collimator - HEGP
10.5.2.8 Collimator - HEGP Parts List



10 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.2.9 Collimator - LEUHS

10.5.2.10 Collimator - LEUHS Parts List



10 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD
10.5.2.11 Collimator - LE Pinhole

10.5.2.12 Collimator - LE Pinhole Parts List

9 2181560 MEC005701 Shim 2 8 1.25 ID 1.75 OD
10 46-405765P2 Collimator Insert 2 1
11 46-405765P3 Pinhole Insert 2 1 4mm
12 46-405765P4 Pinhole Insert 2 1 6mm

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.3 Collimator Cart Assembly

(GE Part # 2173498 / ELGEMS Part # BR32000114A).
Figure 10-22: Collimator Cart Assembly
10.5.3.1 Collimator Cart Assembly Parts List

2185385 SP320000083 Top Cover 2 1 Left
2185386 SP320000084 Top Cover 2 1 Right
2185388 SP320000085 Docking Pin 2 1
2185398 SP320000086 Handle Grip 2 2 Actuator
2185399 SP320000087 Handle Post 2 2 Actuator
2185407 SP320000088 Spacer 2 4 Locating Pin
2185409 SP320000089 Locating Pin 2 4
2185443 SP320000090 Column Weldment 2 1
2185444 SP320000091 Weldment 2 2 Caster Post
2185468 SP320000094 Cart Handle 2 1
2185470 SP320000095 Base Weldment 2 1
2185472 SP320000096 Washer 2 1 Glide Shaft
2185473 SP320000097 Post 2 2 Swivel Caster
2175443 MEC005243 Lockpin, Coll Cart 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019

2185475 SP320000098 Guide Block 2 1 Left
2185477 SP320000099 Guide Block 2 1 Right
2185482 SP320000100 Trim Strip 2 1 Bottom
2185483 SP320000101 Trim Strip 2 1 Top
2185484 SP320000102 Mounting Bracket 2 1 Bottom
2185485 SP320000103 Mounting Bracket 2 1 Back
2185486 SP320000104 Mounting Bracket 2 1 Front
2185487 SP320000105 Mounting Bracket 2 1 Top
2185489 SP320000106 Plate Assembly 2 1 Right Collimator
2185845 Weldment 2 1 Bottom Cover - right
2185846 Weldment 2 1 Bottom Cover - left
2186251 SP320000107 Mounting Block 2 1 Locator
2186256 SP320000108 Die Spring 2 4
2186259 SP320000109 Bracket 2 2 Bottom Cover
2186262 SP320000110 Bushing Endstop 2 8
2186263 SP320000111 Weldment 2 1 Docking Bush
2185463 SP320000093 Plate Assembly 2 1 Left Collimator
Rubber Bumper 2 2
Caster 2 2 5" Locking
Caster 2 2 10" Gray
Retaining Ring 2 8
Standoff 2 12 Hex male/female
Screw 2 61 M5 x 12
Screw 2 10 M6 x 16
Screw 2 8 M10 x 25
Shoulder Screw 2 4 M12 x 80
Setscrew 2 12 M10 x 60
Washer 2 2 M12
Washer 2 4 M6
Lockwasher 2 4 M6
Hex Nut 2 20 M10
10.5.4 Custom Tools - Detector

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.4.1 Custom Tools - Detector Parts List

1 MEC006502 Source Holder 2 1 For Test Tube
DTP000157 Test Tube 2 1 For Source Holder
2 2152724-3 BR32000101A Phantom 2 1 Resolution
3 2122273 Phantom Storage 2 1 Resolution
4 2157824 Knurled Mtg Knob 1 1 To Phantom
5 2146256-2 BR32000056A NEMA 2 1 NEMA Kit
6 2146273-2 BR32000055A Linearity Kit 2 1 Spatial Linearity Kit

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.5 Collimator Cart Guide Bushing & Docking Switch Assembly
3 9
11
12
4
2
10
1
7
Figure 10-23: Collimator Cart Guide Bushing and Docking Switch Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.5.1 Collimator Cart Guide Bushing & Docking Switch Assembly Parts List

1 2193490 MEC005333 Guide Bushing 2 1
2 2193912 HW080100925 Wave Spring 2 3 23.8 x 17 x 0.25
3 ASM000851 Switch Clamp Assy 1 Part of Docking Switch Kit
4 46-311813P3 HB700102404 Circlip 2 1
5 2193911 HW003417245 Washer 2 4 PS 17 x 24 x 0.50
6
7 46-214913P2 HS005003005 Set Screw 2 1 M3 x 5
8
9 UGP000781 Docking Switch Kit 1 2 Complete Upgrade Set of
Switch Assembly
10 MEC005667 Activating Pin 2 1
11 CBL001011 Switch Cable
12 S003000010 Spot Switch 2 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.6 Detector Interface
6 16
14
15
13 17
18 32 33
34
12 19 35
11 20
21
10
31
9 22 30
8 23 29
28
7
24 26
25
5 4
3
2
6 1
27
Figure 10-24: Detector Interface

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.5.6.1 Detector Interface Parts List

1 2187884 SP320000136 Service Switch 1 1 For Collimator Override Switch
Cable
2 2193503 Capscrew 2 2 M4 x 6
3 Bracket N 1 For Override Switch
4 2187880 SP320000133 PB Switch 1 1 SPDT "Cheat"
5 Mounting Plate N 1
6 2187885 SP320000238 Illumin Switch 1 2 For Collimator Override
7 Set Screw N 2 M4 x 4
8 46-214695P33 Cover 2 1 For Prox. Cable Outlet
10 Label 1 1 Collision Override Button Right
11 2193492 Rack 2 1 For Detector Movement
12 2194067 Stop 2 1 For Detector Movement
13 Capscrew N 2 M6 x 12
14 Warning Label N 1 "Moving Parts"
15 2194065 56432053918 Actuator 2 1 For End Stop
16 Label N 1 Collision Override Button Left
17 Set Screw N 1 M6 x 12
18 2177925 Anti Vibr Buffer 2 1 M6 x 6
19 Anchor for Cable N 2
20 46-214695P12 HS004004008 Capscrew 1 2 M4 x 8
21 2194064 56032060107 Actuator 2 1 For Lock Position
22 46-328428P1 Lock Nut 2 4 M4
23 46-328424P13 Set Screw 2 4 M4 x 16
24 Lockwasher N 4 S4
25 Chromed Nut N 4 M4
26 2187883 SP320000135 Limit Switch Board 1 1 Radial.
27 2193901 Cable 1 2 Internal Detector
28 46-214695P13 Capscrew 1 3 M6 x 20
29 2103508P14 C-Sunk Screw 1 1 M6 x 20
30 2193502 MEC2748 Shaft 1 1 For Lock Limit Switch
31 2193501 MEC5347 Roller 1 1 For Lock Limit Switch
32 2193498 Spring 1 1 For End Stops
33 46-214695P14 HS004004012 Capscrew 1 1 M4 x 12
34 2193500 Lock 1 1 For End Stop Spring

Direction 2414259-100 2019
35 C-Sunk Screw 1 2 M4 x 8

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Renewal Parts New MG Patient Table
10.6 New MG Patient Table

For specifications for MG 3-Axis Patient Table ASM000861, refer to Appendix E -
Note 3-Axis Patient Table Specifications.
10.6.1 MG Patient Table and Accessories General View

ASM001285 UGP 001282
37
36
8
15
7
14
16
13
38
39
5 40
Figure 10-25: MG Patient Table General View 1
Refer to Table 10-1.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
ASM001285
36
7
37
15
40
5
39
38
13
40
16 13
8 38
Figure 10-26: MG Patient Table General View 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.2 3-Axis Patient Table Basic Assembly

ASM001263
27
4
27
25
29 7
26
4
9 29
26
32
21
28
10
11
35 35
Figure 10-27: 3-Axis Patient Table Basic Assembly and Covers

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.3 Patient Table Subassemblies
30
7
33
34
30
33
41
Figure 10-28: Patient Table Subassemblies 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
30
30
23
31
24 22
10
11
Figure 10-29: Patient Table Subassemblies 2 (Refer to Table 10-1)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.4 MG Patient Table Upper Subassemblies

ASM001263
20
1
11
22
18 42
10
12
17
19
3
Figure 10-30: Patient Table Upper Subasssemblies
Refer to Table 10-1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-1: MG 3-Axis Patient Table Basic Components and Subassemblies Part List
Item Elgems Part No. Name/Description GE Part No Quantity FRU
ASM001285 MG Table Assy.- VCP 1 N
ASM001263 MG /MPR Table Assy. Basic 1 N
1 ASM000120 Longitudinal Shade Assy. 1 1
2 ASM001226 MCV Table Lateral Assy. 1 N
3 ASM001232 MCV Lateral Motor 1 N
4 ASM001262 MG Table Chassis Assy. 1 N
5 ASM001274 Rear Location Pedal 1 N
6 ASM001264 MG Table Upper Assy. 1 N
7 ASM000122 Composite Top Assy. 1 2
8 ASM000123 Composite Extender Assy. 1 2
9 ASM000373 Accesory Holder Assy. 1 1
10 ASM001265 Left E-Stop Box Assy. 1 2
11 ASM001266 Right E-Stop Box Assy. 1 2
12 ASM001267 Longitudinal Motor Assy. 1 N
13 UGP001281 Pedal Package - VCP 1 N
14 MEC007290 Cable In Plug 1 2
15 MEC007292 Front Cover 1 2
16 MEC007293 Front Plug 1 2
17 B 01010001E Motor, For Longitudinal Motion 1 1
18 MEC000011 Longitudinal Motor Pulley 1 1
HG000418090 Pulley Bore D=0.25 Pitch 1 N
19 MEC007023 Lateral Motor Bracket 1 1
20 HG000575090 Belt Timing 75 Grooves Pit 1 1
21 MEC000566 Longitudinal Motor Cover 1 1
22 MEC007024 Lateral Activator 2 1
23 MEC007026 Lateral Stopper 2 N
24 MEC007027 Lateral Rail Spacer 2 N
25 MEC007032 Extrusion Cover Front 1 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-1: MG 3-Axis Patient Table Basic Components and Subassemblies Part List
Item Elgems Part No. Name/Description GE Part No Quantity FRU
26 MEC007034 Lateral Plate Cover 2 1
27 MEC007049 Upper Cover 2 1
28 MEC007240 Rear Cover 1 2
29 MEC007036 Lower Cover 2 1
30 MEC007301 Side Extrusion 2 N
31 XW040420015 Bumper, OD=20,L=15,Stud M6 2 2
32 MEC007321 Longitudinal Base Cover 1 2
33 MEC007433 Hand Rail End Cap 2 N
34 MEC007308 Shade Cover Bracket 1 1
35 LBL000889 Millennium MG Label 2 1
36 DTP000103 Mattress Pad Long 1 1
37 DTP000033 Mattress Pad Short 1 1
38 HB201624325 Bearing 2 N
Not HS05300815M Spring Plunger 1 N
Shown
Not MEC000521 Locator Cross Pin 1 N

Shown
39 MEC001866 Pedal Axle 1 1
40 MEC001867 Pedal 2 1
41 ASM001291 Distribution Box Assembly 1 N

Refer to Chassis Assy
42 NA Service Holes for Stretcher 8 N

Replacement

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.5 Table Chassis Assembly

ASM001262
11
12
6
16
9
17
14
8
2
10
1
5 13
7 (x4)
15
18
Figure 10-31: MG Patient Table Chassis
Refer to Table 10-2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.6 Vertical Drive Assembly
1
2
13
1
10
Figure 10-32: Patient Table Vertical Drive Assembly
Refer to Table 10-2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-2: Table Chassis Part List & Vertical Drive Assembly
Item Elgems Part No Name/Description GE Part No Quantity FRU
ASM001262 MG/MPR Table Chassis Assy. 1 N
1 B 01010330K Vertical Motion Motor 1 1
2 HC010301515 Coupling Flexible 2 1
3 HD000400062 Caster 4 1
4 HG000570090 Timing Belt 1 1
5 HG83000101A Rear ACTUATOR 1 1
6 HG83000102A Front ACTUATOR 1 1
7 MEC007249 Caster Nut Cover 4 2
8 MEC000015 Vertical Motor Pulley 1 2
9 MEC005731 Table Large Pulley 1 1
10 MEC007017 Motor Plate 1 N
11 MEC007047 Retractor 1 N
12 MEC007048 Retractor Plate 2 N
13 MEC007066 Up/Down Shaft 1 1
14 MEC007133 M.S Holder 1 N
15 MEC007236 Base Machining 1 N
16 S 003000010 Limit Switch 2 1

Not CBL001451 Lateral Base Ground Cable 1 1
shown
Not CBL001452 Top Plate Ground Cable 1 1

shown
17 ASM001291 Distribution Box Assembly 1 1

(Including Table Cable)
Not CBL001433 Internal Limit Switch Cable 1 1
shown
18 ASM001274 Rear Location Pedal 1 N

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.7 Rear Locating Pedal Assembly
5
3
8
8 4
9
6 5
7
1
4
6
2
1
Figure 10-33: MG Rear Locating Pedal Assembly (see Table 10-3)
Table 10-3: Rear Locating Pedal Assembly Part List
ASM001274 Rear Location Pedal 1 N

1 HB70020300M Retaining Ring External Shaft 2 2
2 OR000102215 O-Ring, ID=1.049, W=0.139, 1 2
3 MEC007237 Pedal Box 1 N
4 MEC007264 Pedal Holder 1 1
5 MEC007266 Bushing 2 2
6 MEC007267 Location Pin 1 2
7 XW040420015 Bumper 1 2
8 HS05306168M Spring Plunger 1 2
9 MEC007265 Pedal 1 2
10 HN80257082M Secured Nut M8 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.8 Upper Table Assembly
15
13
1
Front Longitudinal L.S.
2
15
11
13
9
Rear Longitudinal L.S.
10
12
18 (x2)
17 (x2)
4
14
Front Longitudinal Screw Mount
18
5
3 (x2)
4
8
4
10
16 6
Rear Longitudinal Lead

Screw Mount Front Roller (x2)
Figure 10-34: MG Upper Table Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-4: Upper Table Assembly Parts List
ASM001264 MG/MPR Table Upper Assy. 1 N
1 ASM000122 Composite Top Assy. 1 N
2 DTP000058 Longitudinal Lead Screw 1 1
3 HB101022160 Bearing Needle O.D=22mm 4 1

Id=1
4 HB201106202 Bearing Ball, ID=15mm 2 1

O.D=35m
5 MEC000012 Longitudinal Shaft Pulley 1 1
6 MEC000027 Roller Shaft 2 2
7 MEC000526 Limit Switch Bracket 2 2
8 MEC005418 Longitudinal Guide Adapter 1 2
9 MEC007244 Longitudinal Rail Base 2 2
10 MEC007245 Longitudinal Screw Support 2 2
11 MEC007246 Roller Block Support 2 2
12 MEC007248 Upper Plate 1 N
13 MEC007302 Longitudinal Limit Switch 2 2

Spacer
14 MEC007303 Upper Plate Reinforcement 1 N
15 S 003000010 Limit Switch 2 1
16 TZ320002105 Roller 2 1
17 MEC007312 Stopper Spacer 2 1
18 XW040420015 Bumper 3 1
Not CBL001432 Longitudinal Limit switch 1 1
Shown
Cable.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.9 Lateral Plate Assembly

ASM001226
3
4
Figure 10-35: Lateral Plate (see Table 10-5)
Table 10-5: Lateral Plate Components
Elgems Part
Item Name/Description GE Part No FRU Quantity
Number
ASM001226 Lateral Plate Assembly N 1
1 ASM001232 Lateral Motor Assembly N 1

Refer to Section 9.6.4
2 HG000568090 Lateral Drive Belt 1 1
3 MEC000022 Lateral Lead Screw 1 1
4 HG010425500 Lateral Linear Bearing 1 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.10 Lateral Motor Assembly

ASM001232
Figure 10-36: Lateral Motor (see Table 10-6)
Table 10-6: Lateral Motor Components
Elgems Part
Number
ASM001232 Lateral Motor Assembly N 1
1 B_01010002E Lateral Servo Motor 1 1
2 MEC000013 Lateral Pulley 2182727 2 1
3 MEC007023 Lateral Motor Bracket N 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.11 Left E-Stop Box Assembly

ASM 001265
4
5
5
6
Figure 10-37: Left E-stop Box Assembly (see Table 10-7)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-7: Left E-stop Box Assembly Parts List
Item Elgems Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number Quantity FRU
ASM001266 MG Left E-Stop Box Assy. 1 N
1 BR320031725 PCB For E-Stop 1 1
2 MEC007242 Emergency Switch Box 1 N
3 P 00900018R Connector 8 Recep. 1 1
4 S 010200151 Mushroom Lock 1 1
5 S 01020801C Button Red Round Stay-Put 1 1
6 X 010172507 Rubber Stopper For E-Stop 1 1

Not CBL001503 MG Table HHC Left Cable 1
Shown

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.12 Right E-Stop Box Assembly
2 6
5
Figure 10-38: Right E-stop Box Assembly (see Table 10-8)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 10-8: Right E-stop Box Assembly Parts List
Item Elgems Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number Quantity FRU
ASM001266 MG Right E-Stop Box Assy. 1 N
1 BR320031725 PCB For E-Stop 1 1
2 MEC007242 Emergency Switch Box 1 N
3 P 00900018R Connector 8 Recep. 1 1
4 S 010200151 Mushroom Lock 1 1
5 S 01020801C Button Red Round Stay-Put 1 1
6 X 010172507 Rubber Stopper For E-Stop 1 1

Not CBL001503 MG Table HHC Right Cable 1
Shown

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.13 Composite Top Assembly
Figure 10-39: Composite Top Assembly (see Table 10-9)
Table 10-9: Composite Top Assembly Parts List
Item Elgems Part Number Name/Description GE Part No FRU Quantity
ASM000122 Composite Top Assembly 1
1 DTP000103 Mattress Pad (Long) 2157676 2 1
2 DTP000028 Stretcher Assembly 2 1
3 HS004006025 Screw M-6 L=25mm N 16

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.14 Longitudinal Shade Cover Assembly
Figure 10-40: Longitudinal Shade Cover (see Table 10-10)

Table 10-10: Longitudinal Shade Cover Parts List
ASM000120 Longitudinal Shade Cover 2183112 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10.6.14.1 Cables - 3-Axis Patient Table
For more information about cables, see Chapter 7, PWB Configuration and
Interconnects.
Vendor Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number FRU Quantity
CBL-001520 Ground Wire (Table Distribution Box 2 1

to IPS Cable Assembly)
J5 Cable (Table Low Power) 1
J6 Cable (Table Interface) 1
J7 Cable (Table High Power) 1
Ground Wire 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 11 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Problems may be caused by a hardware/software failure or by out-of-spec

calibrations. Most of the system diagnostics are computer-aided tests, which
isolate the malfunction to a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). Based on the
results of the test, the unit is replaced or the required calibration procedure is
specified.
The troubleshooting routine typically starts at the system level. Knowing the
equipment failure symptom, you can use the functional block diagrams to
decide which diagnostic test(s) to run to isolate the problem.
For less complicated units, or for units not supported by diagnostics, you can
use the functional block diagrams to decide the appropriate troubleshooting
routine/flowchart to select to resolve the problem. Working through the
routine, the test results will direct you to the next appropriate action.
If a computer-aided diagnostic test exists, the following information is
provided:
• Test name.
• Test description and approximate execution time.
• How to activate the test.
• A list of possible error massages and recommended actions.
• Recommended steps to reconfigure and re-test the hardware/software.
11.1 Using the Diagnostic Interface

This section shows the procedure for accessing and using the:
• EUI (Exerciser User Interface)
• DUI (Diagnostic User Interface)
The above interfaces are designed to be user friendly. For example, screen
elements in the EUI and DUI environment are selected via window interfaces,
using the mouse. By using both the EUI and DUI together, fault finding is
simplified.
Figure 11-1 shows how to use the screens.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Using the Diagnostic Interface
Click here to Maximize

Click here to
Select Pop-up Menu Click here to Minimize
Restore Alt + F5
Refresh
Move Alt + F7
Minimize Alt +
Lower Alt + F3
Kill Alt + F4
COMMANDS
RESTORE Returns the window to its original size
REFRESH Repaints the screen
MOVE Repositions the window on the screen
SIZE Resizes the window
MINIMIZE Reduces the window to an icon at the lower left

of the screen
MAXIMIZE Enlarges the window to fill up the whole screen
LOWER Moves one window in front of behind the other
KILL Allows the user to quit the window
Figure 11-1: Manipulating EUI and DUI Windows

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Using the EUI
11.2 Using the EUI

The Exerciser User Interface (EUI) provides the following:
• User interface for running system level exerciser for all six motion
axes:
1) gantry roll; 2) gantry pitch; 3) gantry tilt; 4) table longitudinal;
5) table vertical; and 6) table lateral.
• Status information for each of the six motions.
The following procedure explains how to use the EUI.
1. Display the Main Screen and select the <Shutdown> button located in
the upper right corner of the Main Screen.
2. If an acquisition or a quality control operation is in progress, a message
appears explaining that the system cannot be shutdown.
3. If the system can be shutdown, a message asks for confirmation that
Acquisition should be shutdown. Select [Yes] to shutdown the system.
4. After several minutes, the Shutdown Screen is displayed. Select [Yes].
Log into the system as follows:
User name: shutdown
Password: shutdown
A message is displayed stating that the system will shut down in five
seconds. No other message is displayed. Wait five to ten seconds.

User name: service
Password: service.
The authorization appears:
Are you an authorized user? (y/n) : y
6. At the authorization screen, press <y> (for "yes") and then press
<Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The service menu appears:
Service
SERVICE MENU
1) Start Diagnostics (DUI)
2) Start Gantry Diagnostics/Exerciser (EUI)
3) Characterize the Gantry
4) Initialize Motion Controller
5) Error Logging and Analysis
6) Run Backup Utility
7) Go to UNIX Shell
8) Display Help Screen
9) Run Database Integrity Check
10) Start AUI
11) Set Jog Speeds For Characterizing
12) Load Monitor Test Pattern
13) Run the Proactive PMT Analysis (PPA)
14) Logout of Service Account
Enter Menu Choice (1-14)
7. Select <2> to Start Gantry Exerciser (EUI).

The following three windows are displayed:
• EUI: provides status, and user interface for running the
motion exerciser.
• EUI TGC: alerts service person that system calibration may be
required. Refer to Section 11.2.1.
• EUI_GO: displays system messages.
11.2.1 System Calibration

If the system requires calibration, the window labeled "EUI TGC" displays
the following message:
MOVE TABLE COMPLETELY AWAY FROM GANTRY. THEN PRESS SET

BUTTON TO BEGIN CAL, OR PRESS RESET BUTTON TO ABORT CAL!
At this point, you have the option of calibrating the system or not.
If the system has not been calibrated, the table/gantry status information
displayed is like that of the example shown in Figure 11-2.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
TABLE / GANTRY STATUS INFORMATION

Long. Axis Status Lat. Axis Status Vert. Axis Status
Limit Switches: not a limit not a limit not a limit Motion Control
Pot Value: n/a n/a n/a
Position Value: opened opened opened
Encoder State: ok ok ok Collision
Motor State: off off off
Motion State: ok ok ok
Drive Amp State: ok ok ok E-stop
Calibration State: not cal’d not cal’d not cal’d
Roll Axis Status Rad1 Axis Status Rad2 Axis Status

Limit Switches: not at limit not at limit not at limit
Position Value: opened opened opened
Encoder State: ok ok ok VG Status
Motor State: off off disconnected
Motion State: disconnected disconnected disconnected
Drive Amp State: ok ok ok
Calibration State: not cal’d not cal’d not cal’d
MULTIPLE AXIS MOTION SETUP

Cumulative
Axis Position 1 Position 2 Speed Active Move Total
Longitudinal: 100.00 mm 1300.00 mm 39.90 mm/s Yes 0
Lateral: -80.00 deg 80.00 deg 39.90 deg/s Yes 0
Vertical: 630.00 mm 830.00 mm 9.90 mm/sec Yes 0
Roll: -240.00 deg 240.00 deg 5.90 deg/sec Yes 0
Radial 1: 200.00 mm 280.00 mm 13.90 mm/sec Yes 0
Geometry: MT MG Yes 0
Move Direction: Timer Iterations Iterations Completed
OML:
Start Cancel Exit Reset Total
Figure 11-2: Table/Gantry Status Information Before Calibration
Important The system cannot be calibrated unless it has undergone characterization.

The system exerciser cannot move any axis that is uncalibrated.
However, motion for any of the six axes can be driven using the Hand-Held
Controller (HHC) whether the system is calibrated or not.
To calibrate the system, proceed as follows:

1. Initiate the calibration cycle by pressing the Set button on the Hand-Held
SET CANCEL Controller (shown in left margin).
2. Note the following:
• System motion begins, and each axis of motion is driven, until a
limit-switch is activated.
• The calibration message disappears from the screen.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
If necessary, press the Cancel button to abort the calibration procedure.

Note
After the system has successfully completed calibration, the EUI status fields
are updated with data, as shown in Figure 11-3.
TABLE / GANTRY STATUS INFORMATION

Long. Axis Status Lat. Axis Status Vert. Axis Status
Limit Switches: not a limit not a limit not a limit Motion Control
Position Value: 0.00 182.27 283.2
Encoder State: ok ok ok Collision
Motor State: on on on
Drive Amp State: ok ok ok E-stop
Calibration State: cal’d cal’d cal’d
Roll Axis Status Rad1 Axis Status Rad2 Axis Status

Limit Switches: not at limit not at limit not at limit
Position Value: 283.01 -111.15 607.87
Encoder State: ok ok ok VG Status
Motor State: no disconnected disconnected
Drive Amp State: ok ok ok
Calibration State: cal’d cal’d cal’d
MULTIPLE AXIS MOTION SETUP

Cumulative
Axis Position 1 Position 2 Speed Active Move Total
Longitudinal: 100.00 mm 1300.00 mm 39.90 mm/s Yes 0
Lateral: -80.00 deg 80.00 deg 39.90 deg/s Yes 0
Vertical: 630.00 mm 830.00 mm 9.90 mm/sec Yes 0
Roll: -240.00 deg 240.00 deg 5.90 deg/sec Yes 0
Geometry: MT MG Yes 0
Move Direction: Timer Iterations Iterations Completed
OML:
Start Cancel Exit Reset Total
Figure 11-3: Table/Gantry Status Information After Calibration

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.2.2 Table/Gantry Status Information

The upper half of the EUI window displays status information for each of the
six motion axes, and the collision sensors (E-stops and motor controller). The
table/gantry status parameters are updated during the motion exercise.
Table 11-1 explains the meaning of each message displayed.
Table 11-1: Status Information
Item Information Provided Messages
Limit switches Status and data values "Not at limit" Limit switches were not activated.
"Forward" Forward limit switch was activated.
"Reverse" Reverse limit switch was activated.
Pot value Status and data values Values are in engineering units (degrees). The value should be
(for roll axis) between 400 - 500 at 0° ± 1° roll axis position
Position value Status and data values Values are in engineering units. The lower half of the EUI window
shows the actual engineering units, such as: lateral is in mm, etc.
Encoder state Status and data values (nothing) Encoder is functioning properly.
"Disconnected" There is no connection with the encoder.
"Faulted" Encoder signals are invalid.
Motor state Status and data values "On" Axis drive motor is turned ON.
"Off" Axis drive motor is turned OFF.
"Disconnected" Power to axis-drive motor is interrupted.
Note: The pitch and lateral motion axes share the same motor
amplifier, so the status message "disconnected" appears in the
status field for the axis that is currently switched ON.
The same scenario applies to the vertical and tilt axes that
share another motor.
Motion state Status and data values "Idle" Axis is not moving.
"Running" Axis is in motion.
Drive amp state Status and data values "OK" Motor amplifier is functioning properly.
"Faulted" Motor amplifier output is invalid.
Calibration state Status and data values "Cal'd" Axis is calibrated.
"Not cal'd" Axis is uncalibrated.
Motion control Status of communication (Nothing) There is communication between the Acquisition
between the acquisition computer and the motor controller.
computer and motor
"Down" Motor controller is not communicating with the
controller
program.
Collision Status of collision sensors "Activated" A collision sensor has been activated.
"No collision" Collision sensor is not activated.
"Override" Override button is being pressed and held during
collision state.
E-stop Status of E-stops "On" An E-stop has been activated.
"Off" The E-stop has been reset.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.2.2.1 Multiple Axis Motion Setup
The lower half of the EUI window is where you specify the range of motion.
The range of motion for any axis is determined by the values typed into the
Position 1 and Position 2 fields:
• Position 1 field for the longitudinal axis is highlighted with a black
border, indicating that it is ready to accept data input. All fields in this
area behave this way.
• Operator Message Line (OML) field shows the valid range of values
that may be entered for the longitudinal axis.
1. Enter a value into the Position 1 field for the longitudinal axis (one
boundary for this axis).
The Operator Message Line at the bottom of the screen displays the
acceptable range.
2. Set the other boundary for the longitudinal axis by entering the desired
value into the Position 2 field.
3. Enter the desired Speed of the motion axis.
4. Select [Yes] under the Active column to activate a motion axis. Select
[Yes] to deactivate an axis.
You may exercise one motion axis, or all six axes.
Important When all six axes have been selected, only 4 axes will move at any one time.
5. Press <Start> to start the exercise.
Note Should you wish to stop the exercise at any time, press <Cancel>.
6. Refer to Table 11-2 (on the next page) for information on interpreting the
results.
7. During the exercise, monitor the EUI_GO window for system messages.
The following is an example of a system message displayed by EUI_GO
when a tilt limit-switch is activated:
StaNum: 0, Axis = Tilt, Axis Status 00: Forward Limit Switch Activated
8. To access the error log, select option 4 View the Error Log at the
Service Menu.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Errors are logged in the following format:
996/04/27 20:44:08 PDT pcacq17:gip_ph:gip_recv.c[$Revision: 1.18 $] handleCntlMsg() line

767 error 0x07100002 level 2
GIP Error: Collision condition has occurred.
9. After you have completed all the exercises, press <Exit> to end the
program.
Table 11-2: EUI Results
Field Description
Move Direction Indicates when the exerciser is moving an axis to Position 1 or Position 2 during
the motion cycle.
Timer Displays the total time (seconds) for the number of iterations of motion for the
selected axes.
Iterations Up to 9999 cycles of motion (iterations) can be entered into this field.
For multiple–axis movements, one iteration includes the start of the first axis
movement and concludes with the completion of the last axis movement.
Iterations Completed Displays the number of motion cycles that have been completed for the selected
axes.
Cumulative Move Total Displays the accumulated number of motion cycles that have been completed.
The number continues to increment each time the exerciser is run. All six fields
are reset to zero by selecting the Reset Total button at the bottom of the EUI
window.
Reset Total Resets the Cumulative Move Total field to zero.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Error Log Tool Graphical User Interface (ELT)
11.3 Error Log Tool Graphical User Interface (ELT)
Figure 11-4: Error Log Viewer
11.3.1 Introduction
The ELT is a Graphical User Interface used to display the error log.
The ELT (see Figure 11-4) is used locally by a field engineer (FE) or remotely
by the On-line Center (OLC) and by developers for diagnosing faults reported
by GenieAcq systems. The ELT provides the following features:
• Activation – Can be run from the Genie Acquisition service menu

(see Figure 11-5) or remotely as a post-mortem analysis of an
error_report file.
• Categorisation – Errors and events will be categorised into sub-
systems. Select the required category from the Sub-system drop-
down list:
AUI
Motion
Acquisition
Calibration
Networking

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Database
Diagnostic
Session
Boot
None
• Search Facility – Enter text to use as key to match entries in the error
log in the Search field.
• Filters – (Severity, Sub-system, From, To, and Time) customize the
view of the error log. Filters can be combined to reduce the number of
errors displayed by the tool (see Figure 11-6).
• System Information page – a list of recent Critical errors, useful
system information and system statistics (see Figure 11-8 and
Figure 11-9).
11.3.2 Using the ELT Graphical User Interface

1. Make sure AUI is down.
2. From the Service Menu, select Option 5: “Error Logging and Analysis”
(see Figure 11-5). The "Genie Acquisition Error Log Viewer" with the
default file loaded is displayed (see Figure 11-4).
Service
SERVICE MENU
7) Go to UNIX Shell
10) Start AUI
Figure 11-5: Service Menu

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.3.3 ELT Filters and Search Tools

The ELT enables viewing of errors and events from an error log. The file
pcacq_errors located in /usr/adm/pcacq_errors is automatically loaded and
displayed. By default all the errors and events are displayed.
11.3.3.1 Filters
You can remove unwanted errors and events by selecting one or more filters.
1. From the left side of the window in the Filters area (see Figure 11-6),
enter the filter parameters in the appropriate fields:
Figure 11-6: ELT Filter Parameters
• Severity – select the severity from a drop down list. Multiple

severities can be selected for display. Default is ALL; indicating the
field should not be used for filtering.
• Sub-system –select the sub-system(s) from a drop down list. Multiple
sub-systems can be selected. Default is ALL; indicating the field
should not be used for filtering.
• Date – enter valid From and To dates (format: YYYY/MM/DD).
• Time – enters a time to match. Insensitive until a valid date has been
entered in the date text filled (format: hh:mm:ss) .

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.3.3.2 Search Tool
Figure 11-7: ELT Search Tool
1. The search tool (see Figure 11-7), enables location of text within the error
log. In the Search field, enter the text to find in the text entry window.
2. Press the <Start> button at the bottom. Only the matching error log
entries will be displayed in the Error Log tab. The entries that contain the
matching text will be displayed and highlighted.
3. To view all the entries again, press the <Reset> button and then press the
<Start> button again.
11.3.3.3 System Information

You can obtain information about the system parameters and the correction
dates performed on the local system.
1. Click on the System Information tab. The System Parameters and Map
Creation Date tabs will be displayed (see Figure 11-8). In the System
Parameters tab you can find information about the local station host name,
internet address and system type as well as information about the software
version currently installed on the system.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Figure 11-8: System Information / System Parameters

2. In the Maps Creation Date tab card you can find the details about which
corrections where made on each detector and on which dates.
Figure 11-9: System Information / Maps Creation Date

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.3.3.4 Viewing Other Files
Once the error log becomes full, the system saves the old pcacq_errors file
under names pcacq_errors.0, pcacq_errors.1 etc… and creates a new file
named pcacq_errors. To view old errors, which occurred in the past and are
not listed in the latest pcacq_errors file anymore, load the other
pcacq_errors.* files, as follows:
1. Click File>Open. The Open New Error Log File window is displayed.
Figure 11-10: Open New Error Log File
2. By default the path to search is “/usr/adm”. Select any pcacq_errors_*

file and press <OK>. The file will be loaded in the UI.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Proactive PMT Analysis (PPA) User Interface
11.4 Proactive PMT Analysis (PPA) User Interface

The PPA tool user interface allows visual inspection and identification of the
condition of photomultiplier tubes in a detector. The PMT window contains a
tab for each of the two Detectors (on single detector systems only the left
“Detector 1” tab is active).
Each tab contains a pictorial representation of the Detector and its
photomultiplier tubes. In addition, each tab contains a histogram of the tube’s
working points.
Histogram Bar Photomultiplier Tube
Lower Limit Upper Limit
Working Point Values Enter tube number here
LEGEND:
Red - tube/s exceeding fail limits
Orange - tube/s approaching fail limits
Gray - tube/s within acceptable limits
Blue - selected range of working points
Figure 11-11: PMT User Interface

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.4.1 Using the PPA Graphical User Interface

1. Make sure AUI is down.
2. From the Service Menu, select Option 13: “Run the Proactive PMT
Analysis (PPA)” (see Figure 11-12). The " Proactive: PMT Analysis
Tool" is displayed (see Figure 11-11).
Service
SERVICE MENU
7) Go to UNIX Shell
10) Start AUI
Figure 11-12: Service Menu
11.4.2 PMT Histogram

The histogram displays the upper and lower tube fail limits.
• Red limits identify failed tubes.
• Orange (warn) limits indicate tubes close to failure.
• Histogram bars filled in grey identify the tube with acceptable
working values.
For example from the histogram displayed in Figure 11-11, the red bars on
both ends indicate that there are three tubes below the limit and eight tubes
above the limit, adding up to a total of 11 defective tubes.
To identify tube working status:
1. Move the mouse pointer over a histogram bar.

• The bar on the histogram is filled blue.
• Each tube within the selected range is highlighted blue.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
LEGEND:
Red - tube/s exceeding fail limits
Orange - tube/s approaching fail limits
Gray - tube/s within acceptable limits
Blue - selected range of working points
Green - selectedhistogram bars and tubes
Figure 11-13: MultipleSelection
a. Clicking the left mouse button on a histogram bar causes the bar and its
Note associated tubes to be selected - green color.
b. Clicking again deselects the bar and tubes.
c. Hold the Ctrl key down to make multiple selections (see Figure 11-13).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.4.3 Tube Working Values

Use the Working Points drop-down list to display tube working values as
follows:
Selection Tube Display
All In this mode, all the tubes display their working

value.
Fail In this mode only failed tubes display their value.
These tubes are also highlighted red.
Fail + Warn In this mode only the tubes approaching fail limits
(warning – highlighted orange) display their value.
Note Tube numbers, when available, are displayed in the top left corner of the tube icon.
11.4.3.1 Working Point History
The working points history displays a graph of twenty working point readings
for a specified tube.
• Click on a detector tube to display the working point history for the
tube.
• Selecting a plotted point displays the working point value and date on
the graph.
• Entering the number of a tube in the tube number text box to view the
history of the specified point.
• Add new working point readings to the graph by selecting Save from
the File menu. If there are already 20 working points saved, the new
value will be saved and the oldest value will be discarded.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Troubleshooting the Detector
11.5 Troubleshooting the Detector

Make sure that the Acquisition computer, including the Framing board, is
operating correctly before performing any of the following tests.
Since all tests are activated through the TAXI link, you should test the
communication capability between the Framing board and the I/N board
before executing any of the tests. If this is not already done, this test can be
executed from the Framing board test package.
The diagnostic test package for the I/N board consists of nine individual tests.
Each test can be executed separately, but we advise you to execute the tests in
the sequence they are described, since the result of the tests often depends on
the functionality of other circuits on the board. The test package forms a
complete test of all functionality on the I/N board.
All tests are initiated by sending a unique start command via the TAXI
receiver circuit to the Normalization DSP. The Normalization DSP then
executes the test and the result is transmitted to the Framing board.
11.5.1 Dyncor Analog Test

11.5.1.1 PMT Working Point
The output of U2 controls the PMT-gain. Refer to Figure 11-14. This DC

value reflects the present condition of the PMT gain and is refereed to as the
Working Point of the tube. Also, Figure 11-14 shows the position of T1 test
point and the signal wave form from the output of the pre-amplifier. The wave
forms prove that the detector is operational and exposed to a Co-57 flood
source.
Vertical
1Volt/DIV
0 Volt >
Test Point T1
Figure 11-14: Pre-amplifier T1 Test Signal Wave Form

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.5.1.2 Dyncor Driver Board
Figure 11-15 shows the signal wave form on test point Threshold, HighDyn
and LowDyn. The waveforms show that the detector is operational and
exposed to a Co-57 flood source.
TEST POINT: "THRESHOLD" ON MATRIX BD TEST POINT: "HIGHDYN" ON MATRIX BD
Vertical: Vertical:
100 M V/DIV 1 V/DIV
0 VOLT > 0 VOLT >
Horizontal: 0.2 µSEC/DIV Horizontal: 0.2 µSEC/DIV
TEST POINT: "LOWDYN" ON MATRIX BD
Vertical:
1 V/DIV
0 VOLT >
Horizontal: 0.2 µSEC/DIV
Figure 11-15: Dyncor Driver Test Signal Wave Forms
Figure 11-16 shows the position of Threshold, Low Dyn and High Dyn test
points on connector AX2M.
Low DYN
Threshold High DYN
TP1 TP3 TP6 Threshold Setting
TP2 TP4
Figure 11-16: Dyncor Driver Test Point Positions

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.5.1.3 Dyncor Module
Figure 11-17 shows the position of T1 test point and the signal wave from the
output of the Dyncor module. The waveforms prove that the detector is
operational and exposed to a Co-57 flood source.
0 VOLT > Test Point T1
Vertical:
1 V/DIV
Figure 11-17: Dyncor Module T1 Test Signal Wave Form
11.5.1.4 Dyncor Matrix Board
Figure 11-18 shows the position of the rows and column's test point on the
matrix board and the output signal wave. The waveforms show that the
detector is operational and exposed to a Co-57 flood source.
Test Point Columns

Test Point Rows
Vertical:
1 V/DIV
TP: COL 1
SIGNAL
+15V -15V -HV

GND
GND
TP: COL 2
SIGNAL
TP: GND TP: GND TP: GND
TP: ROW 6 TP: ROW 5 TP: ROW 4 TP: ROW 3 TP: ROW 2 TP: ROW 1
SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL
TP: COL 3
SIGNAL
TP: LOW DYN
TP: COL 4
SIGNAL
0 VOLT > TP: HIGHDYN TP: THRESHOLD
TP: COL 5
SIGNAL
TP: GND TP: GND TP: GND
TP: COL 6
SIGNAL
Figure 11-18: Rows and Columns Output Wave Form

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.5.2 DUI Functional Description

The Diagnostic User Interface (DUI) is activated from a Lynx OS window.
1. From the Graphical User Interface (GUI), press <Alt> + the right mouse
button. Drag the cursor to minimize and release the buttons.
2. Move the cursor into a window.
3. From the window enter dui and then press <Enter>.
This will display the Diagnostic User Interface.
The following tests are available from the Diagnostic User Interface (refer to
Figure 11-19 and Table 11-3).
Subsystem 0: Acquisition PC
FRU 0: Framing Board
Subsystem 1: Detector
FRU 1: I/N Board
FRU 2: Power Supply Board
FRU 3: Matrix Board
FRU 4: Preamp Assemblies
FRU 5: Dyncor Driver Board

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Diagnostic dui
Test Diagnostic Test Selector
Selector Scroll Test
System Level Diagnostic Tests
Selector
-Subsystem 0: Acquisition PC
-Subsystem1: Detector
Test Errors
Clear Logged in
File
Selected
Test(s)
Clear Selections Iterations: Stop on Error: Log Errors:
Enter No.
Test Diagnostic Status Window
of Test
Execution Iterations
List TEST EXECUTION LIST PASS FAIL
System 1: Detector
FRU 1: I/N Board Test
1 0
Test 1019 Framing to I/N Master Register Response
Test 10ex Normalization DSP External RAM 1 0
Area
Error
Message
Area
Test Scroll Test

Status
OML: Test Execution
Start Cancel Exit Test Timer: Total Timer:
Test Start Cancel Test Exit DUI Test Time Test Time
in Progress Signal Total Test
Figure 11-19: Diagnostic User Interface

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 11-3: Diagnostic User Interface Functions
DUI Fields Functions
Diagnostic Test Available tests are displayed in this area.

Selection Area Tests are selected by a single click on the test text. A double click on the test
text will display the test, including all subtests.
Selected tests will be displayed on black background.
Clear Selections Activating the Clear Selection button will deselect all selected tests.
Iterations The number of iterations a selected test can be performed is set from 1 to 99
times. Normal iteration is set to 1.
Note:If the number of iterations is set to more than 1, the "Stop On Error" must
not be set in order to execute all test iterations.
Log Errors When the Log Errors Button is set, errors found will be logged in an error file.
Test Response Area Test Response is displayed in the Test Execution List area.
PASS FAIL The PASS column will display the number of times the tests have been
executed. Zero (0) indicates that the test has not been executed.
The FAIL column will display the number of times the concerned test has failed.
Error Message Area If a test fails, detailed information about the cause will be displayed in the Error
Message area. The messages will always be displayed on the lowest lines in
the Test Execution List area.
Test Status Area The test status is displayed in the Test Status area.
OML Test Execution Completed, indicates that all selected tests have been executed.
Currently Executing Selected Tests, indicates the selected test(s) are being
executed at the moment.
Error Have Occurred, indicates that the selected test(s) has failed.
Test Start Activating the Test Start button will start the execution of all the selected tests.
The test progress will be displayed in Test Execution List area and in the Test
Status area.
Cancel Activating the Cancel button will stop the execution of all the selected tests.
The test selected will remain displayed in the Test Execution List area.
Exit Activating the Exit button will cancel all functions and close the Diagnostic User
Interface (DUI) window.
Test Time The elapsed test time for the currently executed test is displayed in the Test
Time area.
Test Timer
Total Time When executing tests containing a number of subtests, the total elapsed test
time for the whole test package is displayed in the Total Time area.
Total Timer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.5.3 Accessing the I/N Board Test
Important I/N board failures reported through the diagnostic process should NOT result in the
immediate replacement of the I/N board. Test errors with the following numbers may
occur due to tight limits in the diagnostic software:
- 159: Corruption (X+Y+E)
- 160: Channel Baseline Offset Beyond Limit (X+X-Y+Y-E)
- 161: Channel Out of Limit (X+X-Y+Y-E)
- 162: Channel Limit
If these errors occur, repeat the diagnostic tests. Only consistent errors in multiple
passes reflect a real error, which should then result in the replacement of the I/N
board.
When testing the I/N Board, all tests and test results are communicated via the
TAXI Link between the Acquisition Console and the Detector (refer to
Figure 11-20 and Figure 11-21). Therefore, it is advisable to ensure that the
TAXI Link is fully operational before executing any of the tests. This is
achieved by performing the Framing Board to I/N Board Communication
Test, which is part of the Correction DSP Tests Package of the Framing
Board.
Always execute the test programs in the sequence in which they are listed in
this section. The results of many of the tests are dependent upon the
functionality of board circuits other than those tested. Executing the complete
test package assures that all functionality on the I/N Board has been tested.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Diagnostic Test Selector

Subsystem 1: Detector
Diagnostic Status Window

-Subsystem1: Detector
-FRU 1: I/N Board
-FRU 2: Power Supply Board
-FRU 3: Matrix Board
-FRU 4: Preamp Assemblies
OML: Test -FRU 5: Dyncor Driver Board
Start Cancel dui

PASS FAIL
TEST EXECUTION LIST
Clear Selections
System 1: Detector
FRUTest
1: 1019 Framing to I/N Master Register
I/N Board 1 0
Test 1019 Framing to I/N Master Register 1 0
Test 10ex Normalization DSP External RAM 1 0
Test 10fx I/N Board EEPROM 1 0
Test 10hx Normalization DSP to Pile Up DSP Serial Communications 1 0
Test 10ix Normalization DSP to Taxi Event Timing 1 0
Test 10jx Pile Up DSP to Normalization DSP Event Timing 1 0
Test 10kx X+, X-, Y+,Y-, E Channel Baseline 1 0
Test 10lx X+, X-, Y+, Y-, E Channel Accumulator 1 0
Test 10mx X+, X-, Y+, Y-, E Channel Analog Inputs 1 0
Test 10nx Bias Circuit 1 0
Figure 11-20: Detector Diagnostic Test Structure (I/N Board Selected)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
X+ Analog Overflow 256 x

Input 10 bit Detection 16 bit Raw
Position and ALU 18 bit
Amplifier ADC Register Event Pile-up
Signal Lock-up FIFO
Control DSP
Buffer
Base Line 3 similar circuits for FIFO and
Restore Circuit X-, Y+,& Y- channels Buffer
Control
Overflow, 256 x
Analog Slope, 256 x 18 bit
Energy Input 10 bit and 16 bit 18 bit
ALU FIFO
Signal Amplifier ADC Event Register FIFO
Detection
Register Event
Input Register
Test signals Timing Pile-up
Event 16 bit Corrected
Byte #1 Event
Register
Buffer
Event
Byte #2 8 bit 640 KB
Normal- Serial Communication Line
Boot Norm DSP
Event Register RAM ization
Byte #3 DSP Detector
Taxi I/O
Event
Taxi
Transmit Byte #4
Timing Detector
Event I/O
To
Taxi link Byte #5 Detector
to Framing Board Taxi Taxi in
EE Working
Taxi out Register I/O Point
Receive Register PROM ADC
Figure 11-21: I/N Board Block Diagram

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics InSite Hardware and Software Checks
11.6 InSite Hardware and Software Checks

The Acquisition system should be connected to InSite either indirectly,
through another workstation acting as a gateway.
11.6.1 Performing PC Diagnostics

The main diagnostic package is called CHECK IT 4 PRO. This is a standard
off-the-shelf package of diagnostics that comes with its own documentation.
Please refer to the documentation provided with the system for more details
on how to load and run the diagnostics.
If the CHECK IT 4 PRO diagnostics are run from the menu that is supplied with the
Note diagnostics package, the screen will go blank and the system will require a reboot.
This is due to an incompatibility with the current video card.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.6.2 Testing the Network

11.6.2.1 Ping Test (TCP/IP Only)
The ping test is the simplest way to find out if a hardware node on your
network is operating. The ping test sends a data packet to a specified node.
See Figure 11-22.
Sending Receiving
"PING"
NETWORK NETWORK
Figure 11-22: Sending Ping
When the specified node receives the packet, it sends a reply packet back to
the sending node. See Figure 11-23.
CTSC_OC0
CTSC_OC0
IS ALIVE
NETWORK NETWORK
Figure 11-23: Replying to Ping
If the sending node does not receive a reply packet within a second, it
re-sends the data packet to the specified node. The sending node continues to
re-send the data packet to the specified node (one packet per second) until a
reply packet is received or until a time-out period has expired (the default
time is 20 seconds).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Important Ping does not pass through gateways and some routers. If the device being tested
is on the other side of a router that does not pass a ping, you will not receive an
answer from that device.
Use the ping test to verify that a specified node can receive data packets:
1. Check to make sure that the node being tested is powered up and running.
2. Check for damage to the hardware between the two nodes.
3. Enter the following command inserting the hostname or IP address where
specified. UNIX commands are case sensitive. The commands must be
lowercase and hostnames must be uppercase:
ping <hostname or IP address>
For example, to perform a ping test of CTSC_OC0

(IP address = 192.1.2.1), enter one of the following:
ping CTSC_OC0
or
ping 192.1.2.1
4. When the specified node has received the data packet, the following
message displays at the sending host:
<specified hostname or IP address> is alive
For example, if the specified node was CTSC_OC0, the message would
be:
CTSC_OC0 is alive
5. If the specified node does not respond before time–out, the following
message displays at the sending host:
no answer from <specified hostname or IP address>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
For example, if the specified node was CTSC_OC0, the message would
be:
no answer from CTSC_OC0
6. If the specified node does not reply to the ping test, it could be that the
node has lost power, has crashed, or there may be a hardware problem
between the sending node and the specified node.
11.6.2.2 FTP Test (TCP/IP only)
There may be network problems that ping, spray, and netstat cannot detect. A
node may respond to the ping command and still be unable to transfer images.
This is because these tests do not function at the application level.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) functions at all OSI levels. FTP is a program that
transfers files to and from another node. Use the FTP test to determine if
images can be transferred across the network to a specified node. Other
advantages of FTP over ping are:
• FTP tests networks at the protocol level.
• Transferring images takes enough time to allow netstat to monitor the
transfer on the receiving node while the transfer is taking place.
Use the netstat command on the receiving node while transferring, to
determine if the traffic between the nodes being tested is significantly
higher than on the other nodes.
The three FTP commands used in the test are listed in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4: FTP Commands
Command Command Format What it Does
open open hostname Establishes communication with another node

whose host name is hostname.
put put file_name Sends a file by the name file_name to the other
node accessed by the open command.
get get file_name Transfers a file by the name file_name from the
other node accessed by the open command.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Use the following procedure:

1. Create a directory to transfer files to by typing:
mkdir <directory name>
2. Change to that directory by typing:

cd <directory name>
3. Start the netstat interval option.

4. Enter the file transfer program by typing:
ftp
5. At the prompts, enter your user name and password.

6. Establish a connection to the remote node by typing the following at the
FTP> prompt:
open <remote hostname>
7. Transfer an image across the network from your node to the specified
remote node by entering the following:
put <file name>
8. Transfer an image from the remote node to your node:

get <file name>
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8, transferring progressively larger images to

determine node limits.
As node limits are approached, the transfers will become slower. When
the node limit has been exceeded, images that are too big will not be
transferred.
If transfer becomes excessively slow or impossible at an image size
smaller than the published limits, the node may be at fault or the network
may have excess traffic.
10. Exit ftp by typing the following:
quit
11. Exit the netstat interval option.

12. Delete the test directory by typing:
rm –r <directory name>
13. Type y at each prompt.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Checking the 4-Axis Motion Controller
11.7 Checking the 4-Axis Motion Controller
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Figure 11-24: 4-Axis Motion Controller
The LED labeled "µP ON" on the motion controller indicates the overall
health of the controller. It flickers on power-up, and then stays ON
continuously except for when it is receiving communication over the RS-232
port. The normal state for this light when Acquisition is not connected or up is
continuously ON. With Acquisition connected, the light will blink quickly
during the booting of Acquisition and then at a rate of about once every half a
second, the rate at which Acquisition requests position information from the
controller.
If the light continuously flickers with a noticeable period with the light OFF
between flickers, this means that the controller's watchdog circuit is timing
out, putting the controller into the reset mode. This could happen for one of
two reasons:

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. The input 5V that powers the processor board has dropped to a point
where it is bordering on the lowest acceptable voltage level for the
controller, 4.62V.
2. The software is not booting correctly. This could be the case if a new
version of firmware was just installed into the controller. If new firmware
was just installed, check to be sure that the E-PROMS were burned
correctly.
If the light does not come ON at all or flickers and then stays OFF, it means
that the controller's watchdog circuit will not let the controller out of reset. In
this case, the input voltage should be checked to be sure that it is at least 4.85
volts, but preferably a solid 5 volts.
If all of the above checks out, and the light still does not stay ON except for
the normal flashing due to Acquisition communication, replace the controller
and contact ACS Engineering information for more in-depth troubleshooting
procedures.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.7.1 Monitoring the Controller's Inputs and Outputs

The controller uses a series of inputs and outputs for controlling and checking
the status of gantry motion control. Refer to Table 11-5 for inputs.
Important Two outputs (OUT3 and OUT4) are used to multiplex primary, secondary, and third
input banks into six inputs (IN4, IN6, IN7, IN8, IN15 and IN16).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 11-5: Input LEDs
Input OUT3 OUT4 Explanation Comment

IN1 HHC key other than fast speed has been pressed z = Key pressed
IN2 Fast HHC key has been pressed = Fast key pressed
= LO,0V; LED On
z
= HI,5V; LED Off
IN3 Motion Controller reset button on IPS has been pressed z = Reset
IN4 Geometry change position; Detector #2 at 180° z = In position
= Out of position
z Collimator cart docking, z = Docked
Spare 1 = Undocked

z
z RAD1 -
z z Collimator cart docking, z = Docked
Spare 1 = Undocked
IN5 Table/gantry reset position -
IN6 Lock motor assembly, locked position z = Locked
= Unlocked
z Spare 2 n/a
z RAD2 -
z z Spare 2 n/a
IN7 (Not used) n/a
z Spare 6 n/a
z Roll limit SW5 z = SW5 On
= SW5 Off
z z Spare 6 n/a
IN8 Lock motor assembly, unlocked position z = Unlocked
= Not unlocked
z Spare 3 n/a
z Roll limit SW2 z = SW2 On
= SW2 Off
z z Spare 3 n/a
IN9 Collision input z = Collision
= No collision
IN10 HHC code Refer to Table 11-7
IN11 HHC code
IN12 HHC code
IN13 HHC code
IN14 E-stop z = No E-stop
= E-stop pressed
IN15 Detectors in 180° position z = Detectors in 180° position
= Not in 180°
z Spare 4 n/a
z Radius 1 in "lock" position z = Radius 1 in "lock" position
= Out of "lock" position
z z Spare 4 n/a
IN16 Detectors in 101° position z = Detectors in 101° position
= Out of 101° position
z Spare 5 n/a
z Radius 2 in "lock" position z = Radius 2 in "LOCK" position
= Out of position
z z Spare 5 n/a

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table 11-6: Output LEDs
Output Explanation Comment

z = LO,0V; LED On OUT1 MUX board: T-axis selector z = Vertical axis
= HI,5V; LED Off = Radial 1 axis
OUT2 MUX board: Z-axis selector z = Lateral axis
= Radial 2 axis
OUT3 MUX board: Primary/secondary input bank selector z = Selects secondary bank inputs
= Selects primary bank inputs
OUT4 MUX board: Third input bank selector z = Third bank inputs
= Either prim./sec. inputs
OUT5 n/a -
OUT6 n/a -
OUT7 Roll lock motor trigger
OUT8 Roll lock motor control z = Disabled

= Enabled
OUT9 n/a -
OUT10 n/a -
OUT11 n/a -
OUT12 n/a -
OUT13 n/a -
OUT14 n/a -
OUT15 n/a -
OUT15 n/a -
Table 11-7: Hand-Held Controller Inputs
IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13

Table Lateral, Right z
Radial Ina z
Table Down z z
Roll, CCW z
Table Longitudinal, Out z z
Table Lateral, Left z z
Acquisition Start z z z
Radial, Out
a z
Table Longitudinal, In z z
Cancel z z z
Roll, CW z z
Set z z z
Table Up z z z
Clear Persistence z z z z
Radius Select 1
a
a
Radius Select 2
a. Pressing the radial key on the Hand-Held Controller causes a

quick code to be sent to the inputs for differentiating between
single or dual detector movement.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
11.7.2 Motor Servo Amplifier LEDs
Important The lights on the Drive cards should be the same.
There is one light above each of the drive connectors (TB5, TB6, TB15, and
TB16) on the controller. The following applies to these lights:
• The light is ON when the drive is enabled and OFF when it is
disabled.
• When using the HHC to jog each axis, the corresponding light (X for
longitudinal, Y for roll, Z for radial 1 or vertical, and T for radial 2 or
lateral) should light and stay lit.
• The lights for Z and T will go OFF during the switching of the
multiplexed axes.
• Drives stay enabled once enabled until disabled by a Reset command
or a collision E-stop.
• If any one of these LEDs tries to turn ON but then flashes OFF in
response to a HHC motion key press, this means the axis is faulting.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Tightening Roll Motor Encoder Set Screws
11.8 Tightening Roll Motor Encoder Set Screws

Sometimes the gantry shudders when rotating in Cardiac mode. This may be
caused because the three set screws of the Roll Motor Encoder become loose
and the Encoder moves freely in and out on the shaft.
When the screws are tightened and secured with locking fluid, the shuddering
disappears.
Figure 11-25: Roll Encoder Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
All part numbers in brackets refer to Figure 11-25:
CAUTION
Always use caution when handling an Encoder. It is a precise optical
measuring instrument and should be handled accordingly.
1. Move the IPS and open the rear cover (5) of the Encoder (2) - see
Figure 11-26.
Cover
Encoder
Figure 11-26: IPS and Encoder

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2. Loosen the three set screws (4) mounting the Encoder (2) on to the shaft
of the motor (1) - see Figure 11-27.
Spring Bracket
Gap
Screws (3)
Encoder
Figure 11-27: Loosening Set Screws
3. One by one, open the three screws (3), mounting the spring bracket of the
Encoder (2), secure them with locking fluid "LOCTITE 220" or
equivalent and tighten back with torque approximately 0.8 Nm.
4. Gently push the Encoder (2) until the gap between the Encoder and the
spring bracket is between 0.5 and 1.0 mm - see Figure 11-27
5. Secure the three set screws (4) with locking fluid "LOCTITE 220" or
equivalent and tighten them back with torque approximately 0.5 Nm.
6. Check that the spring is still working by gently twisting the Encoder a few
degrees from side to side. When you let go of the Encoder it should go
back into its original position.
7. Close the Encoder rear cover (5) and tighten it firmly by hand.
8. Check the system functionality, especially the roll axis.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Testing Collimator Locking Mechanisms
11.9 Testing Collimator Locking Mechanisms

11.9.1 Overview
A careful review of the collimator locking mechanisms revealed that in
certain infrequent cases the efficiency may be reduced when the collimators
are not regularly exchanged.
• In systems where the weekly intrinsic QC is performed using a
point source, the collimator locking mechanism requirement is met
and no further action is required.
• In systems where the weekly extrinsic QC is performed with a flood
source without weekly collimator exchanges, the following action is
required:
Activate the locking mechanism through the full range of motion
at least once a week.
This can be accomplished by completing a collimator exchange at
least once per week. If you are using only one set of collimators,
unlocking and locking the collimators will meet the requirements.
These actions will take between five to ten minutes.
• In severe cases in which a proactive hardware solution is required,
the Collimator Latch Bushing kit should be used as a preventative
measure.
11.9.2 Test Procedure

1. The procedure to be performed when the collimator is loaded on the
gantry.
2. Roll the gantry into the position where the interesting collimator is located
at the bottom.
3. Using the force meter, measure the force, required for rotating the Latch
Bushing (100) by mean of Bushing Jig (ASM001408). It should be within
the range of 4-10 kg. (Corresponds the torque 1.5 Nm - 3.5 Nm).
Note To make sure that the jig remains in place, use a screwdriver or similar tool (see illustration)
to hold down the bushing jig while testing the Force Meter. Position the screwdriver lightly in
the center of the jig to act as a bearing and so as not to affect the measurement.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Bushing Jig
L
L
Force Meter
U
P
Collimator Latch
CAUTION
4. After measurement, use the jig to rotate the latch back to its original
orientation (the same at all four latches of the collimator).
5. Remove and reload the collimators according to the standard Collimator

exchange procedure to make sure that they function properly.
11.9.3 Calibration Procedure

1. If the measured torque is out of the limits, unscrew Collimator Cover
Flange (70) rotate Latch Bushing (100) manually about half of turn and
remove it with two Disk Springs (130) and Shims (141 and 142) if present
from the Spring Holder (30).
Note Use special Wrench for Collimator Cover Flange (70) unscrewing and tightening.
2. Add or remove the Shims (141 and/or 142) in order to achieve desired
torque.
3. Insert the Shims and two Disk Springs (130) into the Spring Holder (30).
Important Make sure to place the springs in X-manner.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
4. Lubricate ONLY the outer round surface of the Latch Bushing (100) with
white lithium grease (as shown on the picture).
5. Insert the Latch Bushing (100) and secure it with Collimator Cover
Flange (70).
6. Repeat the testing procedure.
CAUTION

PART LIST:
30 Spring Holder 2179286

70 Collimator Cover Flange 2181390
100 Latch Bushing 2179285
130 Disk Spring 46.5 x 30.5 x 0.6 HW001600030
141 Shim 0.1 mm MEC005701
142 Shim 0.2 mm MEC005702
Lubrication surface

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Chapter 12 - Planned Maintenance
WARNING
Most repair procedures direct you to remove power from the system.
However, some repair/replacement procedures require the detectors be
placed in a particular position which requires power to be maintained.
To prevent unexpected motion and prevent injury or damage to equipment,
disconnect or restrict access to all Hand-Held Controllers, as well as the
Acquisition computer and press all system E-Stop buttons.
The following applies to the procedures described in this chapter:

• The procedures should be performed at the specified intervals to
ensure the safe and effective operation of the entire system.
• If you are advised to "Inspect for Damage", you should carefully
inspect the assembly and then test it. If any damage or functional
limitation is found, it should be noted and assessed for implications to
system safety and operation.
• In all cases where internal inspection is required, refer to the safety
information in Chapter 8, Repair Procedures - Section 8.3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Planned Maintenance Tool List
12.1 Tool List

No special tools are required other than those listed in Chapter 1 - refer to
Section 1.19.
12.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule

See Table 12-1 for the planned maintenance schedule for both the Customer
and Field Engineers.
Some of the tasks the Field Engineer is responsible for are no longer performed on
Note an annual basis, but on "every other year" timing. If you are not sure that these
steps have been completed on the previous PM visit, perform them and make sure
to note this on the checklist.
Table 12-1: Planned Maintenance Schedule - MG / MC
Subassembly Tasks Customer Field Engineer

Weekly 3 Mo. 12 Mo. 24 Mo.
General Clean outside of Gantry, table and PC of dust and √

debris
Acquisition Error Log check √ √

Computer
Clean dust from fans and boards √ √

Inspect cables for damage √ √ √
Verify software revision is at min. 2.5.1 or greater √ √
Check amount of free disk space √
Monitor Verify image quality: focus, size, intensity √
Keyboard / Clean mouse and tracking ball of dust and debris √
Mouse
Verify functionality √
Mobile Inspect for loose hardware
√
Monitor Cart
Inspect for wheel damage √

Detectors & Check CUA (Uniformity) & Energy peaks
Image Quality √ √ √
Check Quad. Phantom (Resolution) √ √ √

Inspect collimator locking mechanism on detectors √ √ √
Perform and check Center of Rotation (COR) √

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Planned Maintenance Planned Maintenance Schedule
Table 12-1: Planned Maintenance Schedule - MG / MC
Collimator Inspect locking mechanism on collimator carts

Cart
√ √
Inspect for wheel damage √
Collimators Inspect for general damage √ √
Inspect and test locking mechanism √ √ √
Inspect all collision sensors for damage and √
√ √
operation
Gantry Verify functionality of safety related functions √ √ √

Clean IPS inside and out √ √
Inspect IPS cable connections for damage √ √ √
Inspect Hand-Held Controller cable for damage √ √ √
Lubricate double roll bearing √
Lubricate roll gear drive √
Lubricate linear bearing rails for radial detector
motion √
Lubricate linear gear rack √

Lubricate roll-lock assembly √ √
Verify Radial 1 Mechanical Stopper is in place √ √
Verify Radial 1 Stop Blocks are in place √ √
Verify Radial 2 Mechanical Stopper is in place √ √
Verify Radial 2 Stop Blocks are in place √ √
Software and Limit Switch Function Test √ √
Verify Gantry Anchoring √
Verify Obstruction Free Zone √ √ √
Verify all motions and limit-switches √ √
Table Verify functionality of safety related functions √ √ √
Lubricate vertical drive assembly √
Lubricate lateral drive assembly √
Lubricate longitudinal drive assembly √
Inspect casters for damage √ √ √
Inspect cables for damage √ √ √
Verify all motions and limit-switches √ √

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Planned Maintenance Procedures
12.3 Procedures
12.3.1 General
12.3.1.1 Clean Outside Surfaces of Gantry, Table and Acquisition Pc of Dust and
Debris
Use a vacuum to remove dust and debris that has collected on the
system, especially at the back of the Gantry and PC chassis, where
cooling fans are located.
At least once a month, external metallic surfaces should be wiped with
a moistened clean towel and mild detergent, to remove any foreign
material that may have accumulated. Enameled surfaces should be
cleaned using a clean cloth moistened slightly with a good quality
mild cleaner and polish acceptable for such use.
The monitor screens on the system are used for operator feedback and
image review. These screens should be kept clean and mark free for
optimal performance.
Clean up of radionuclide spilled on the device may be done using
standard radioactive decontamination solutions. However, strong
cleaners or solvents should be used with caution as they may damage
painted surfaces. Refer to your Nuclear medicine department’s
radioactive decontamination procedures.
It is important at all times that any areas that come into direct contact
with the patients should be regularly cleaned and disinfected. This
applies particularly to the imaging table. All surfaces should be wiped
with a mild disinfecting agent, such as alcohol or Chlorhexidine (2%
solution in water) daily.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.2 Acquisition Computer
12.3.2.1 Verify Software Revision
1. Shutdown Genie Acq. Application and Login as follows:

User name: service <Enter>
Password: service.genie <Enter>
2. Open a Terminal Window and type:

cd /usr/genieacq/bin <Enter>
more date_stamp <Enter>
Information regarding software revision and installed patches will be

displayed. Record information on PM Checklist, acquisition PC
comments section. MINIMUM Version Required is 2.5.1.
12.3.2.2 Error Log Check
While still logged on as “Service” and with Terminal window still

opened, check the error log typing: listerror <Enter>. Review the
entries in the log for unusual error listing.
12.3.2.3 Clean Dust From Fans and Boards
1. Shutdown the Genie Acquisition PC and remove the power cord

from the back of the PC. Open the PC Cabinet, and with a
vacuum, carefully remove accumulated dust from cooling fan and
PC boards. Care must be taken not to unseat the internal boards
and cables.
Note Observe proper antistatic practice while cleaning the PC.
2. Close the PC cabinet and reinsert power cord.
12.3.2.4 Inspect Cables for Damage
Inspect all cables connections on back of Genie Acquisition PC. Each

connector should be firmly mounted and retaining hardware tightened.
There should be no loose or torn cable insulation or exposed wires.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.2.5 Check Amount of Free Disk Space
Restart Genie Acquisition application and check disk space indicator

on the top of the Patient Selector field of the main Genie Acquisition
screen.
Disk Space
Indicator
If disk is close to being full, please note this on PM Checklist,

Acquisition PC comments section and ask the customer to archive this
data.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.3 Monitor
12.3.3.1 Verify Image Quality: Focus, Size, and Intensity
The brightness and contrast of the monitor must be properly adjusted

so that images will be displayed correctly. If all monitors in your
department are adjusted properly, the same image should display
identically on each monitor. The monitor should be adjusted under
the normal lighting levels used in the department.
The controls for brightness and contrast adjustment are located on the
front of the monitor, on a panel below the screen. In addition, these
controls adjust other monitor functions such as vertical centering,
height, etc.
The two controls are called [SELECT] and [ADJUST]. There are two
buttons for each control. Pressing either [SELECT] button will display
a menu of monitor functions. If necessary, use either right or left
[SELECT] button to toggle to the CONTRAST function. To adjust the
contrast, press either the right (increase) or left (decrease) [ADJUST]
buttons.
For brightness, use the [SELECT] buttons to toggle to the
BRIGHTNESS function. To adjust the brightness, press either the
right (increase) or left (decrease) [ADJUST] buttons. When
completed, the menu selections or adjusting icons will disappear from
the screen.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.4 Keyboard / Mouse
12.3.4.1 Clean Mouse and Keyboard of Dust and Debris
External surfaces should be wiped with a moistened clean towel and

mild detergent, to remove any foreign material that may have
accumulated.
Remove the back cover on mouse, which holds the tracking ball in
place, and carefully remove any dust, which has accumulated on the
rollers inside.
12.3.4.2 Verify Functionality
1. Check the operation of the mouse. If needed refer to the

Operator’s Manual Chapter 4 – User Interface, to get details for
proper button operation.
2. Check operation of keyboard. Check for sticking or non-
functioning keys.
3. If improper operation is identified, check the keyboard and mouse
type selections in Genie Acquisition configuration. ( st_config )

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.5 Mobile Monitor Cart
12.3.5.1 Inspect for Loose Hardware
1. Check that all hardware that holds the keyboard and monitor trays
is in place and tight. Check that the monitor is firmly in place and
all hardware used to retain the monitor is in place and tight.
Figure 12-1: Monitor Cart Inspection
12.3.5.2 Inspect for Wheel Damage
2. Check all four cart wheels roll properly and that they are mounted
tightly to the cart base. Check the operation of the wheel locks.
Figure 12-2: Monitor Cart Wheels Inspection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.6 Detectors and Image Quality
WARNING
The mechanical end stop activates the limit switch of the Detector and
mechanically stops the Detector if the limit switch fails. Removal of the
mechanical end stop is prohibited under all circumstances! It is not
required for any service procedure or maintenance activity.
12.3.6.1 Check CUA (Uniformity) and Energy Peaks
1. Check camera uniformity performance by reviewing the

customer’s daily flood and CUA data. Any CUA performed on
the system whose results were saved may be retrieved from the
database for display. The two CUA Selection buttons provide a
means to move forward or backward in time and browse previous
CUA data. The selected CUA is indicated by the yellow cursor
placed over the trend curves. The maximum number of data
points that may be saved to the database is configurable and is
currently set to 60. This is intended to allow a maximum of one
year’s worth of weekly CUAs to be available instantly for review
and comparison.
2. Both the integral and differential CFOV uniformity must be below
the red horizontal line (FFOV values don’t apply).
CFOV FFOV
Integral: 7.5 8.5
Differential: 5.5 6.5
3. If CUA data is borderline or failing CUA specifications,

personally acquire 5-8 million count intrinsic floods and evaluate
images.
4. Check the energy calibration of the Detectors by viewing the peak
positions in the spectrum display during the set up or running of an
acquisition. The peak channel of the energy spectrum should be
within ± 2 channels of the isotope’s peak energy.
Any troubleshooting or corrective action needed to address the Uniformity of the
Note system should not be charged against the PM service dispatch. A separate
corrective action dispatch should be created for any time need for this activity.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.6.2 Check Resolution ("4–Quadrant" Bar Phantom)
Check camera resolution performance by reviewing the customer’s

intrinsic or extrinsic resolution flood data. If the customer does not
keep an archive of resolution images, minimally acquire a 3 million-
count intrinsic resolution flood, using a cobalt flood source and a
4-quadrant bar phantom.
Spatial resolution refers to the ability of the camera to separately
image two objects. It is recommended that 3 million counts are
obtained for a bar phantom. Use a 256 matrix for an extrinsic and 512
matrix for an intrinsic setup.
The GE supplied phantom has bars measuring 2.5, 3.0, 3.5 and
4.0 mm respectively. When using GE Medical System’s 4-quadrant
bar phantom, the 3 largest bar quadrants should have clearly visible
and well-defined bars, with the smallest bar quadrant showing some
degradation in the clarity of these bars.
12.3.6.3 Perform and Check Center of Rotation (COR)
There is no check for COR performance separate from a recalibration,

consequently perform a new COR for one pair of collimators. Follow
procedure detailed in the Operator’s Manual - Chapter 10.
The mm COR value is the difference in millimeters from the
measured COR and the theoretical COR. If this value is accepted, it is
stored in all subsequent acquisitions and is used in reconstructing the
acquired data. Upon completion of the COR procedure, the computer
generates the following results (expressed in millimeters):
COR: The X center of rotation correction used

in tomographic reconstruction.
COR Variation: The differences between the maximum
and minimum amplitudes of the X vari-
ation curve.
Y Variation: The differences between the maximum
and minimum amplitudes of the Y vari-
ation curve.
Mean Y Position: Actual Y position of the point source as
positioned by the user, which provides
feedback in the setup consistency.
Verify that the absolute X COR value displayed is less than or equal to
5 mm.
The X COR Variation and Y Variation should both be less than 4 mm.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Any troubleshooting or corrective action needed to address the Resolution or COR

Note of the system should not be charged against the PM service dispatch. A separate
corrective action dispatch should be created for any time need for this activity.
12.3.6.4 Inspect Collimator Locking Mechanism on Detectors
1. Closely inspect the two collimator guide and four latching pins on
the detector face. Look for loose hardware, cracks or other
mechanical damage to surfaces of these pins.
Figure 12-3: Collimator Guide Inspection
2. Replace any of the pins that are damaged or exhibit uneven ware
as compared with the others.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.7 Collimator Cart
12.3.7.1 Inspect Locking Mechanism on Collimator Carts
1. Check all eight collimator latching assemblies on each collimator

cart in the department. Make sure that none of the latching
assemblies have been damaged or show signs of excessive wear.
Figure 12-4: Collimator Cart Locking Mechanism Inspection
2. Perform collimator exchange for every collimator cart in the

department. Make sure that the collimators transfer from cart to
detector and detector to cart smoothly and that the collimator
locking handles on the cart swings easily.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.7.2 Inspect for Wheel Damage
Note This step can be done in conjunction with the collimator cart inspection.
1. Check all four cart wheels roll properly and that they are mounted
tightly to the cart base. Check the operation of the two rear wheel
locks. Make sure that the wheel locks in fact hold the collimator
cart from rolling.
Figure 12-5: Collimator Cart Wheels Inspection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.8 Collimators
12.3.8.1 Inspect for General Damage
1. Visually check for dents and or creases on the collimator surfaces

for every collimator in the department. If found, perform an
extrinsic flood to check to see if the collimator’s septa has been
damage.
Figure 12-6: Collimators Inspection
12.3.8.2 Inspect and Test Locking Mechanism
Note This step can be performed in conjunction with the collimator cart inspection.
1. Check all four collimator latching assemblies on each collimator

in the department. Make sure that none of the latching assemblies
have been damaged or show signs of excessive ware.
Figure 12-7: Collimator Locking Mechanism Inspection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2. Perform collimator exchange for every collimator in the

department. Make sure that the collimators transfer from cart to
detector and detector to cart smoothly and that the collimator
locking handles on the cart swing easily.
12.3.8.3 Inspect and Tighten Collimator Cart Wheel Screws

Inspect all the Collimator Cart Wheel screws for tightness. If required tighten
as follows (see Figure 12-8):
1. Tighten the two hexagonal socket countersunk head screws that
fix the 10” diameter wheels of the Collimator Carts to their axles.
Tighten to a torque of 7.70 ±1.30Nm.
2. Apply this tightening to all Collimator Carts at the site.
Head Screw
Figure 12-8: Collimator Cart Screw

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.8.4 Inspect all Collision Sensors for Damage and Operation
Note This step can be performed in conjunction with the collimator cart inspection.
While each collimator is mounted on the detector, test the collision

sensors. Make sure that all flat surfaces are active and that the
collision sensing system of the Gantry reacts properly to the activation
of the sensors on each collimator. If any area of the collimator
collision sensors fails to work properly, remove this collimator from
use until a new collision sensor can be installed.
12.3.8.4a Collision Sensor (PSD) Test
PASS / FAIL Criteria:

If a PSD does not stop the motion, the test has FAILED
If it is determined to have FAILED, execute Section 12.3.9.14
1. With site's most commonly used collimators installed, execute HOME position.
While the system is moving, press the Collision Sensor (PSD) on Head 1 and
verify it stops the motion.
2. Press the cancel button on the HHC to recover from the error.
3. Execute HOME position again. While the system is moving, press the Collision
Sensor (PSD) on Head 2 to verify it stops the motion.
4. Press cancel button on the HHC to recover from the error.
Figure 12-9: Collision Sensors Inspection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.8.5 Test Collimators Locking Mechanisms
1. The procedure to be performed when the collimator is loaded on the

gantry.
2. Roll the gantry into the position where the required collimator is located
at the bottom.
3. Using the force meter, measure the force, required for rotating the Latch
Bushing (100) by mean of Bushing Jig (ASM001408). It should be within
the range of 4-10 kg. (Corresponds the torque 1.5 Nm - 3.5 Nm).
Note To make sure that the jig remains in place, use a screwdriver or similar tool (see illustration)
to hold down the bushing jig while testing the Force Meter. Position the screwdriver lightly in
the center of the jig to act as a bearing and so as not to affect the measurement.
COLLIMATOR LOCKING MECHANISM PART LIST:

30 Spring Holder
70 Collimator Cover Flange 2179286
100 Latch Bushing 2181390
130 Disk Spring 46.5 x 30.5 x 0.6 2179285
141 Shim 0.1 mm HW001600030
142 Shim 0.2 mm MEC005701
MEC005702
Lubrication surface
Bushing Jig
L
L
Force Meter
U
P
Collimator Latch
Figure 12-10: Testing Collimator Locking Mechanism

Direction 2414259-100 2019
CAUTION

Calibration Procedure:
6. If the measured torque is out of the limits, unscrew Collimator Cover

Flange (70) rotate Latch Bushing (100) manually about half of turn and
remove it with two Disk Springs (130) and Shims (141 and 142) if present
from the Spring Holder (30).
Note Use special Wrench for Collimator Cover Flange (70) unscrewing and tightening.
7. Add or remove the Shims (141 and/or 142) in order to achieve desired
torque.
8. Insert the Shims and two Disk Springs (130) into the Spring Holder (30).
Important Make sure to place the springs in X-manner.
9. Lubricate ONLY the outer round surface of the Latch Bushing (100) with
white lithium grease (as shown on the picture).
10. Insert the Latch Bushing (100) and secure it with Collimator Cover
Flange (70).
11. Repeat the testing procedure.
CAUTION

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9 Gantry
12.3.9.1 Verify Functionality of Safety Related Functions
Verify the operation each of the following safety features found on the
Gantry.
E-Stops
The Gantry has two red emergency stop push buttons on either side of
the Gantry ring. Check both of the push buttons for proper operation.
Gantry and table motion should not be possible while either of the
emergency stop switches are engaged.
Collision Override
Located on the back of each detector are two Collision Override
buttons. These buttons permit slow speed motions when the Gantry is
in a collision mode. Check these switches for proper operation by
creating a collision, (have an assistant press and hold the collision
sensor on a collimator or remove collimators), and confirm that
Gantry slow speed motion is only possible while pressing the collision
override button.
ABC Option (if equipped)
The Automatic Body Contour (ABC) option controls the positioning
of the detector heads, ensuring that a distance of 10 mm is constantly
maintained between the heads and the patient’s body, in both SPECT
and Whole Body Scans. An infrared transmitter and receiver attached
to each detector head, automatically control the distance between the
detectors and the patient.
Note The ABC option can only be used in 180° opposed mode.
Acquire a Whole Body Scan and verify that the option is work
correctly. Refer to Millennium MG ABC Option - Service Manual,
Direction 2263788-100, if necessary.
WARNING
Observe proper “Lock Out Tag Out” procedures with next steps.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.2 Clean IPS Inside and Out
Place the Gantry in “Standby Mode”. Remove the outside cover and
undock the IPS chassis from the rear of the Gantry. Vacuum any dust
and debris from the outside of the chassis. Check to make sure that
debris has not accumulated under the IPS chassis.
Turn off all power to systems. Remove the IPS chassis cover and
carefully vacuum the interior of the IPS of dust that may have
accumulated. Return system power but leave the Gantry in “Standby
Mode”. Observe that the two cooling fans in the base of the IPS are
spinning slowly and that the airflow is out of the bottom of the IPS.
Return Gantry to “Normal Mode” and observe that the two cooling
fans speed up. Replace IPS chassis cover.
12.3.9.3 Inspect IPS Cable Connections for Damage
Inspect all cables connections on back and front of the IPS chassis.
Each connector should be firmly mounted and retaining hardware
tightened. There should be no loose or torn cable insulation or
exposed wires.
12.3.9.4 Inspect Hand-Held Controller and Cable Connections for Damage
1. Check operation of Hand Held Controller (HHC). Refer to

Operator’s Manual if necessary. If non-responsive or sticking
push buttons are found, replace the HHC.
2. Inspect modular connection at the base of the Gantry, where the
HHC plugs into. Make sure that there is a good connection and
that the HHC coil cord remains positively seated. Move the HHC
to the opposite side of the Gantry and confirm that the HHC works
at the other connection point.
12.3.9.5 Lubricate Double Roll Bearing
WARNING
During lubrication, the Gantry is rotated with a number of pinch-points
exposed. Be careful when performing these procedures.
Gantry grease fittings are countersunk type 1/4-28 UNF.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Recommend Grease: Mobile 28 or equivalent, per Mil-G-81322.

When correctly lubricated, the raceways are filled approximately 1/3
full.
Figure 12-11: Double Roll Bearing Lubrication
Figure 12-12: Double Roll Bearing Grease Fittings
If you do not have a grease gun for these countersunk fittings, the grease can be
Note applied with brush, directly on the ball bearings exposed between the raceways.
Figure 12-12 shows the location of the grease fittings when Detector
#1 is at 0°and Detector #2 is at 180°.
1. Use a clean cloth to remove old grease coming out of these three
grease fittings and along the raceways of the rotate bearing.
2. Rotate the Gantry until the inner grease fitting is at the top. This
position results in better distribution of the lubricant in the

Direction 2414259-100 2019
bearing. Apply grease. Rotate the Gantry CW and CCW and

lubricate the fitting at 90°, 180°, and 270°. Rotate the Gantry in
both directions to distribute the grease.
3. Rotate the Gantry to position the middle grease fitting in the top
position. Apply grease. Perform several detector transitions
between 101° and 180° to distribute the grease.
4. Rotate the Gantry until the outer grease fitting is at the top. Apply
grease. Lubricate the fitting at 90°, 180°, and 270°. You have to
rotate the Gantry both CW and CCW to perform this procedure.
Rotate the Gantry in both directions to distribute the grease.
12.3.9.6 Lubricate Roll Gear Drive
WARNING
During lubrication, the Gantry is rotated with a number of pinch-points
exposed. Be careful when performing these procedures.
Recommend lubricant: SKF Alfalub LGEM2 or equivalent.

When correctly lubricated, only a thin layer of grease should cover the
toothed rim and roll drive gear wheels.
Figure 12-13: Roll Gear Drive Lubricaton

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Rotate the Gantry so Detector #1 is at 90° and Detector #2 is at

180°.
Figure 12-14: Detector Location for Roll Gear Drive Lubrication
2. Remove Gantry base cover to gain access to the roll drive gear
wheels.
3. Use a clean cloth to remove old grease at the edge of the toothed
rim on the rotate bearing and motor drive gears.
4. Use a small brush to apply a fine layer of grease to the bearing.
5. Rotate the Gantry in 90° increments and apply a thin layer of
grease at each setting. You will have to rotate the Gantry both CW
and CCW to do this.
6. Rotate the Gantry CW and CCW to distribute the grease.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.7 Lubricate Linear Bearings for Radial Detector Motion
WARNING
During lubrication, the radial drive assembly is moved with a number of
pinch-points exposed. Be careful when performing these procedures.
Recommended lubricant: SKF Alfalub LGEM2 or equivalent.

When correctly lubricated, only a thin layer of grease should cover the
radial linear bearing rails and the radial drive gear racks.
Figure 12-15: Radial Detector Linear Bearings Lubrication
Important note
WARNING
The mechanical stop block activates the limit switch of the detector and with the
mechanical stopper it stops the detector mechanically if the limit switch fails.
Removal of the mechanical stop block is prohibited under all circumstances!
Mechanical Stop Block

DO NOT REMOVE!!!
Figure 12-15a – Mechanical Stop Block

Direction 2414259-100 2019
1. Remove the detector covers to gain access to the radial drives.

Remove old grease at the edge of the linear bearing rails and drive
gear rack using a clean cloth.
Figure 12-16: Radial Detector Linear Bearings Lubrication Points
2. Use the Hand-Held Controller to position the detectors in

minimum radial position. Use a small brush to apply a thin layer
of grease to the radial drive gear racks and to the radial drive linear
bearing rails.
3. Move the detectors to maximum radial position and apply a thin
layer of grease to the radial drive linear bearing rails.
4. Move the detectors back to minimum position and apply grease
once more to the radial drive gear racks.
5. Move the detectors between maximum and minimum radial
positions a few times to distribute the grease.
6. Remount the detector covers.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.8 Lubricate Roll Lock Assembly
WARNING
During lubrication, the roll lock assembly is removed and a number of
pinch-points are exposed. Large mass of detectors can be a source of
stored mechanical power. The roll-lock must only be removed when the
detectors are in the opposed mode, with Detector #1 at 0° and Detector #2
at 180°. Be careful when performing these procedures.
Recommended Grease: Mobile 28 or equivalent, per Mil-G-81322.

When correctly lubricated, the slide and glide should be thinly
covered. The eccentric cavity for the motor drive assembly should be
1/3 full of grease.
Figure 12-17: Roll Lock Assembly Lubrication Points
1. Position the detectors in the opposed mode with Detector #1 at 0°

and Detector #2 at 180°.
2. Turn OFF power at the IPS, and remove cables to the roll lock. If
necessary, refer to Section 4.2 for shutdown procedure.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
3. Loosen and remove the four countersunk M5x20 screws holding

the roll lock motor assembly to the guide and remove the motor
assembly.
4. Mark the position of the slide. Remove the slide; use a clean cloth
to remove old grease from the guide and slide.
5. Clean the roll-lock ex-centric on the motor assembly.
6. Lubricate the parts as shown in figure above and reposition the
slide.
7. Align the roll lock motor assembly and slide and remount using
the four countersunk M5x20 screws. Tighten the screws to
5.6 Nm.
8. Restore power to the system.
12.3.9.9 Verify All Motions and Limit Switches
1. Run each of the Gantry axes individually to the extent of its travel.
Check that the motion runs smoothly and stops within the
expected locations.
Gantry Rotation
Gantry rotation is measured from 0° in the home position, with
Detector 1 located at the top of its rotation and facing straight
down. The Gantry can be rotated between -270° and +270°, one
and a half rotations around the patient. Limit switches on the
rotation drive mechanism enforce the limits of rotation. If the
Gantry is rotated to either the positive or negative limit, then
rotating away from the limit is the only direction allowed until the
switches are reset at 15° away from the limit.
Axis Acquisition Speed Handset Speed
Low High
Gantry Rotation 0.6 °/s 1.2 °/s 6.0 °/s
The ATC option has its own PM Procedure and Schedule. Follow these instruction
Note found in the Millennium MG ATC Manual, Direction 2263786-100.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.10 Inspect and Tighten VG Lock Assembly Screws
Inspect all VG Lock Assemble screws for tightness. If necessary,

tighten as follows:
Precautions:
If Detector #2 is not in the bottom position, its might move freely in

roll direction endangering everyone standing near the gantry.
Take extra precautions whileworking behind the Gantry:
m
Do not insert hand and/or fingers into the Gantry.
m Use only proper tools with the appropriate extender.
Procedure:
1. Roll the Gantry to the position where Detector #2 is on the bottom.

2. Remove the gantry rear cover.
3. Locate the VG Lock on the Gantry. It is located on the right side,
looking into the Gantry from the back (see Figure 12-18).
VG Lock Mounting Screws

(one screw behind the cable)
Figure 12-18: VG Lock Location
4. Using the Torque Wrench with a 5mm Allen bit and extender,
tighten the two VG Lock Mounting Screws (see Figure 12-18 and
Figure 12-19) with 35 Nm (310 inch. lb) torque.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The access for the screws is through the holes in VG Lock Plate.
VG Lock Mounting Screws
Figure 12-19: VG Lock Mounting
5. Reassembly the gantry rear cover.

6. Verify system functioning, especially geometry change.
The ATC option has its own PM Procedure and Schedule. Follow these instruction
Note found in the Millennium MG ATC Manual, Direction 2263786-100.
12.3.9.11 Mechanical Stopper Inspection

If the mechanical stopper is missing or loose, the test has FAILED
1. With heads opposed and roll (Gantry rotation) at 00,

check Head 2:
Roll 00
Head 1 Radial 280 mm ± 2 mm
Head 2 Radial 130 mm ± 2 mm.
Figure 12-19a – Gantry Orientation
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 12-30a Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
2. Approach from the IPS side and shine a light into the notch shown in Figure 5.
This is to show notch location.

It is not the radial position
required for the inspection.
Figure 12-19b – Notch Location

3. Observe if the brass actuator (Blue Circle) has black metal on 3 sides (Red
Circled example has metal on all 3 sides), see Figure 6. In other words, does the
mechanical stopper exist?
Mechanical Stopper
Rack
Figure 12-19c – Mechanical Stopper Block and Actuator when viewed at

280 mm Radial Position
4. Repeat the inspection and test for Head 1. Move the Roll (rotation) and Radials to:
Roll 1800
5. Approaching from the IPS side, shine a light into the notch shown in Figure 6.
6. Observe if the brass actuator (Blue Circle) has black metal on 3 sides (Red Circled
example has metal on all 3 sides), see Figure 6. If the mechanical stopper is missing,
execute section 9.5.5. Then contact service support for a fix.
If this inspection fails, down the system following section 12.3.9.14 and contact your
local Service Support Team.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 12-30b Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.12 Stop Blocks Verification

PASS/ FAIL:
If the block is missing, the test has FAILED.
If a screw is found loose and cannot be tightened to 70 Nm of torque with loc-
tite, this test has FAILED.
1. Rotate the gantry to 90-270.
2. Verify all four stop blocks are present (2 per detector), see Figure 9 and 10.
3. By attempting to tighten the flat head screw, check each stop block’s screw is
tight to 35 Nm (310 in-lb). Then make a slippage
mark with a paint marker, as shown by red mark in
Figure 9. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LOOSEN
THE SCREWS!!
4. If a block screw is found loose:
a. Move radial to 250 mm.
b. Remove the screw.
c. Apply loc-tite 242 or 243, then reinstall the
screw tightening to 70 Nm (620 in-lb).
5. Repeat the torque checks and slippage marks for the
other 3 stop blocks.
Figure 12-19d – Stop Block and Slippage Mark
Figure 12-19e – Stop Block Locations
If this verification fails, down the system following section 12.3.9.14 and contact your
local Service Support Team.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 12-30c

Rev. 2
2019
12.3.9.13 Software and Limit Switch Function Test

If any of the four Radial 1 or 2 max and min limit switches are not seen by the
EUI, the test has FAILED.
1. Verify system is in opposed mode.
2. Log into service: User = service PW = service.genie
3. From Service Menu, start the EUI.
4. Select the Exerciser tab.
5. Using HHC, move both radials to minimum. Verify in the EUI, it indicates
“reverse.”
6. Using HHC, move both radials to maximum. Verify in the EUI, it indicates
“forward.”
7. Click <Exit>
8. Logout of the service account.
Radials at Min
Radial Max
Figures 12-19f – EUI IN Radial Switches Activated Figure 12-19g – EUI OUT Radial Switches Activated
Figure 12-19h – EUI when NO Switches are Activated
If this function test fails, down the system following section 12.3.9.14 and contact
your local Service Support Team.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 12-30d Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.9.14 Down the System Locking Out the System while keeping
Power to the Heads
If any of the above 4 safety tests FAIL, perform the following steps:
1. Shutdown the GENIEacq PC.

2. Toggle the “Energy Saver Switch” located on the IPS, see Figure 14. This
keeps power on the heads but prevents someone from moving the system.
3. Disconnect the power cable to the GenieAcq. Then use a LOTO box to lock
out the power cable.
Figure 12-19i – IPS Rear Panel and Energy Saver Switch
12.3.9.15 Verify Gantry Anchors

1. Verify the two anchors exist.
2. Check torque is at least 49 Nm (437 in-lbs)
Note Install torque is 55 Nm (487 in-lbs).
12.3.9.16 Verify the Obstruction Free Area

• Verify the obstruction free area is marked with yellow tape. See Section 3.12
for dimensions.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual 12-30e

Rev. 2
2019
12.3.10 Table
Verify the operation each of the following safety features found on the
Gantry.
Locking Pin Assemblies
1. Check the front and rear floor docking pins assemblies for proper
operation.
2. Visually inspect these assemblies for excessive ware or fatigue on
the metal parts like the pedals and pin assemblies.
3. Vacuum the receiving pockets on the floor plates to remove and
debris accumulated.
Figure 12-20: Locking Pin Assemblies Inspection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E-Stops
The table has two red emergency stop push buttons on either side of
the rear of the table top. Check both of the push buttons for proper
operation. Gantry and table motion should not be possible while
either of the emergency stop switches are engaged.
12.3.10.3 Lubricate Vertical Drive Assembly
Older MG Tables
Figure 12-21: Older MG Tables Vertical Drive Assembly Lubrication
The original table design on the Millennium MG (see Figure 12-21)

utilized vertical jackscrews and vertically mounted linear bearings.
The jackscrew assemblies are self lubricating and do not require
additional lubrication maintenance.
1. Remove the table base covers to gain access to the jackscrews and
linear bearings.
2. Clean any accumulated debris from threads of jackscrew.
3. Attach the grease gun to the grease fitting located on the side of
the vertically mounted linear bearings and apply four grams of
grease (four pressure strokes). Repeat the previous step for the
other three vertically mounted linear bearings.
4. Remount the base covers.
Recommended Grease: AFB or equivalent.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Newer MG, MC Tables
Figure 12-22: Newer MG Tables Vertical Drive Assembly Lubrication
1. Remove the table base covers (see Figure 12-22) to gain access to
the vertical actuators.
2. Attach the grease gun to the grease fitting located on the side of
the bottom section of the actuator and apply four grams of grease
(four pressure strokes).
3. Repeat the previous step for the other actuator.
4. Remount the base covers.
Recommended Grease: BERUTOX MB ll-H or equivalent.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.10.4 Lubricate Lateral Drive Assembly
All Table Versions, Lateral Drive Lead Screw
Lateral Drive Lead Screw
Figure 12-23: Lateral Drive Assembly Lubrication
1. Move the table laterally in order to gain access to both sides of the
lateral screw.
2. Squeeze a small amount of grease onto the lateral screw and
spread it on the surface uniformly.
3. Move the table between maximum and minimum lateral positions
a few times to distribute the grease.
All Table Versions, Lateral Linear Bearings

1. Move the table laterally in order to gain access to the grease
fittings located on each of the four lateral linear bearings.
2. Fill the linear bearings with 2.9 g (3 full grease pumps) of grease.
3. Move the table between maximum and minimum lateral positions
a few times to distribute the grease.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.10.5 Lubricate Longitudinal Drive Assembly
Figure 12-24: Longitudinal Drive Assembly
MG & MC Table Versions, Longitudinal Drive Lead Screw
1. Disconnect the longitudinal shade cover from the patient pallet in

order to gain access to the lead screw.\
2. Move the patient pallet to maximum out position in order to gain
access most of the longitudinal drive screw.
3. Squeeze a small amount of grease onto the longitudinal drive
screw and spread it on the surface uniformly.
4. Move the table between maximum and minimum longitudinal
positions a few times to distribute the grease.
All Table Versions, Longitudinal Linear Bearings
1. Disconnect the longitudinal shade cover from the patient pallet in

order to gain access to the grease fittings locating on the two rear
longitudinal linear bearings. Remove the front extrusion cover
and extract the patient pallet to its maximum in order to gain
access to the grease fittings located on the two front longitudinal
linear bearings. Fill the linear bearings with 2.9 g (3 full grease
pumps) of grease.
2. Move the patient pallet between maximum and minimum
longitudinal positions a few times to distribute the grease.
3. Remount the table top assembly covers.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
12.3.10.6 Inspect Casters for Damage
1. Check all four patient table wheels roll properly and that they are
mounted tightly to the table base. Check the operation of the
wheel locks.
Figure 12-25: Table Casters
12.3.10.7 Inspect Cables for Damage
Inspect cable coming from the Patient table. There should be no loose
or torn cable insulation or exposed wires.
12.3.10.8 Verify All Table Motions and Limit-Switches
1. Run each of the patient table’s axes individually to the extent of its
travel. Check that the motion runs smoothly and stops within the
expected locations.
Table Vertical
The vertical motion for the table is driven by a servo motor. The
motor controller activates the vertical drive based on signals
received from the Acquisition Computer or the HHC. Move the
vertical motion until the table is at it lowest position, and verify
that the status display on monitor reads 0 ± 2 mm. (Distance from
cradle to floor is 610 mm ± 0.5 mm.) Move the table to its highest
position, and verify that the status display on monitor reads 253 ±
2 mm. (Distance from cradle to floor is 863 ± 0.5 mm.)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table Longitudinal (Millennium MG & MC)
The longitudinal motion of the table is driven by a servo motor.

The motor controller activates the longitudinal drive based on
signals received from the Acquisition Computer or the HHC. The
total travel distance is 1,570 mm. With a fully retracted table
cradle, the minimum longitudinal position, the status display on
monitor reads 0 ± 2 mm for table longitudinal position. With an
extended table, cradle to its furthest position, the status display on
monitor reads 1570 ± 2 mm for table longitudinal position.
Table Lateral
The lateral motion of the table is driven by a servo motor. The

motor controller activates the lateral drive based on signals
received from the Acquisition computer or the HHC. The total
side-to-side travel distance is 218 - 228 mm. The monitor reads 0
mm when the lateral motion is centered with the Gantry’s axis of
rotation, home position. Move the table laterally all the way to the
left until it stops and verify that the status display on monitor reads
-116 ± 2 mm, minimum. Move the table laterally all the way to
the right until it and verify that the status display on monitor reads
+116 ± 2 mm, minimum.
Axis Acquisition Speed Handset Speed
Low High
Table Vertical 0.1 mm/s 5 mm/s 7.6 mm/s
Table Lateral 0.1 mm/s 3.4 mm/s 25 mm/s
Table Longitudinal 0.4 mm/s 10 mm/s 40 mm/s

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Planned Maintenance Planned Maintenance Procedural Checklist
12.4 Planned Maintenance Procedural Checklist
Site Name
Dispatch #
Service Engineer Name
Service Engineer Signature

Date
SID #
Acquisition Computer
Error Log check
Clean dust from fans and boards
Inspect cables for damage
Verify software revision is at min. required 2.5.1
Comments
Detectors and Image Quality
Check CUA (Uniformity) & Energy peaks
Check quad. phantom (Resolution)
Inspect collimator locking mechanism on

detectors
Comments
Collimator Cart
Inspect locking mechanism on collimator

carts
Comments
Collimators
Inspect for general damage
Inspect and test locking mechanism
Inspect all collision sensors for damage and

operation
Comments

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Planned Maintenance Planned Maintenance Procedural Checklist
Gantry
Verify functionality of safety related functions

Clean IPS inside and out
Inspect IPS cable connections for damage
Inspect Hand-Held Controller cable

connections for damage
Lubricate double roll bearing *
Lubricate roll gear drive *
Lubricate linear bearings for radial detector *

motion
Lubricate linear gear drive *
Lubricate roll lock assembly

Verify Radial 1 Mechanical Stopper
Verify Radial 2 Mechanical Stopper
Verify Stop Blocks on Radial 1
Verify Stop Blocks on Radial 2
Software and Limit Switch Function Test

*
Verify Gantry Anchoring
Verify Obstruction Free Zone
Verify all motions and limit switches
Comments
Table
Lubricate vertical drive assembly *
Lubricate lateral drive assembly *
Lubricate longitudinal drive assembly *
Inspect casters for damage
Inspect cables for damage
Verify all motions and limit switches
Comments
* Required once every 24 months or every other year.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix A - DICOM Modality Worklist
A.1 Description
One of the fundamental requirements for efficient clinical information
management is that everyone in the patient care path can easily and efficiently
access image data archives across the various medical facilities.
The Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) standard is

a set of rules that facilitates the reliable exchange of medical images between
instruments, computers, and hospitals. It establishes a common language that
ensures that a medical image produced on one vendor's machine will be
displayable on the workstation from another vendor.
The essence of the DICOM standard is that it prescribes a uniform, well-
understood set of rules forthe communication of digital images.
To enable the GENIE Acquisition worklist feature the remote DICOM station
should be configured to have a station type of OTHER and support the query
worklist (QW) service.
The remote station is configured using the st_config utility.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual A-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Configuring a Worklist Provider as a Remote DICOM Station on GENIE Acquisition
A.2 Configuring a Worklist Provider as a Remote DICOM

Station on GENIE Acquisition
To configure a remote DICOM worklist provider, the following information
will be required:
1. Power up the computer.
If necessary, press the power buttons on the monitor and tower.
User name: service
Password: service.genieacq
3. Select the “Go to UNIX shell” option from the menu.

An xterm window appears.
4. Set the user ID to “root”.
(Prompt): su root
Password: root.genieacq
following:
st_config

Would you like to proceed with configuration?
6. Press <Enter> to answer “Yes”.

The configuration Main Menu appears.
7. Select the “Network Configuration" option from the menu.
The System Network Configuration Menu appears.
8. Select the "Remote Station Configuration" option from the menu.
The Remote Station Configuration Menu appears.
9. Select the “Add new Station” option from the menu.
The Add a New Remote Station menu appears.
10. Enter the worklist provider’s host name and press <Enter>.
11. Enter the protocol (use default) and press <Enter>.
12. Enter the worklist provider’s AE title and press <Enter>.
13. Enter the worklist provider’s station type OTHER and press <Enter>.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Configuring a Worklist Provider as a Remote DICOM Station on GENIE Acquisition
14. Enter the worklist provider’s internet address and press <Enter>.
15. Enter the worklist provider’s DICOM port and press <Enter>.
16. Press <Enter> to answer “Yes” to display the worklist provider on the
user Interface.
17. Enter the worklist provider’s service. Type QW and press <Enter>.
18. Press <Enter> to answer “No” for the worklist provider’s service
redirection name.
19. Press <Enter> to finish entering the worklist provider’s services.
20. Enter worklist provider’s comments.
Type: Worklist Provider and press <Enter>.
21. Press <Enter> and press <Enter> again.
The Main menu will appear.
22. Select the “Save Configuration Changes" option from the menu.
23. Press <Q> followed by <Enter> to quit configuration.
The GENIE Acquisition is now configured to receive worklists from the
worklist provider.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Configuring GENIE Acquisition as a Remote DICOM Station on the Worklist Provider
A.3 Configuring GENIE Acquisition as a Remote DICOM

Station on the Worklist Provider
The procedure for configuring a worklist provider system will vary depending
on the manufacturer and model of the worklist provider system. You should
ask the administrator for the worklist provider system to perform the
configuration using the following information:
Parameter Value
GENIE Acquisition Host Name
GENIE Acquisition AE Title
GENIE Acquisition Internet

Adress
GENIE AcquisitionPort Number 2030
If you are not sure of the above values then you can get them using
st_config:
1. 1. Run st_config as described above.
The Main menu will appear.
2. Select the “Network Configuration” option from the menu.
The System Network Configuration menu will appear.
3. Select the “Internet Configuration” option from the menu.
The Internet Configuration menu will appear.
4. Select the “Change Acquisition Computer Host Name and Internet
Address” option from the menu.
5. Note down the GENIE Acquisition values for:
Parameter Displayed Parameter
Host Name Current Station Name
AE Title Uppercase version of Current Station Name
Internet Address Current Internet Address
6. Press <Q> followed by <Enter> to quit configuration.
You now have all the information you require to configure the worklist
provider.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix B - Genie Acq – Vision Connectivity
B.1 Configuring Genie Acq to Vision P&R Station Connections
To configure Genie Acq Version 3.0 Build 12 (M3 Version) to work with a
Vision Processing and Review station, perform the following steps:
1. Open the xterm window and Log as root by typing:
su root
pasword: root.genie
2. Type: st_config.
Answer y to proceed with configuration.
3. Type 2 to choose “Network Configuration” and press <Enter>.

4. Type 1 to choose “Remote Station Configuration”
The Remote Station Configuration menu should appear.
5. Type 1 to “Add new station”

a. At the “Enter new host name” prompt, type vision station name
and press <Enter>.
b. At the “Enter the protocl” prompt, press <Enter> to choose default
DICOM protocol
c. At the “Enter new station AE title” prompt, type vision station title
and press <Enter>.
d. At the “Enter new station type”prompt, type DEFAULT and press
<Enter>.
e. At the “Enter new station internet address”prompt, type station IP
and press <Enter>.
f. At the “Enter new station DICOM port”prompt, type 4104 and press
<Enter>
g. Press <Enter> to answer to all other questions.
The System will return to the Remote Station Configuration menu.
6. Press <Enter> twice to return to Main menu.

7. Type S and press <Enter> to save the configuration.
8. After saving the configuration quit the st_bru.
9. When the system requests, answer <Enter> to reboot.
To configure eNTEGRA to work with Genie Acq, see the eNTEGRA Service
Note Manual.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual B-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix C - Genie Acq – eNTEGRA Connectivity
C.1 Configuring Genie Acq to eNTEGRA P&R Station Connections
To configure Genie Acq Version 3.0 Build 12 (M3 Version) to work with an
eNTEGRA Processing and Review station, perform the following steps:
1. Open the xterm window and Log as root by typing:
su root
pasword: root.genie
2. Type: st_config.
Answer y to proceed with configuration.
3. Type 2 to choose “Network Configuration” and press <Enter>.

4. Type 1 to choose “Remote Station Configuration”
The Remote Station Configuration menu should appear.
5. Type 1 to “Add new station”

a. At the “Enter new host name” prompt, type entegra station name
and press <Enter>.
b. At the “Enter the protocl” prompt, press <Enter> to choose default
DICOM protocol
c. At the “Enter new station AE title” prompt, type entegra station
title and press <Enter>.
d. At the “Enter new station type”prompt, type GENIE and press
<Enter>.
e. At the “Enter new station internet address”prompt, type station IP
and press <Enter>.
f. At the “Enter new station DICOM port”prompt, type 104 and press
<Enter>
g. Press <Enter> to answer to all other questions.
The System will return to the Remote Station Configuration menu.
6. Press <Enter> twice to return to Main menu.

7. Type S and press <Enter> to save the configuration.
8. After saving the configuratiom quit the st_bru.
9. When the system requests, answer <Enter> to reboot.
To configure eNTEGRA to work with Genie Acq, see the eNTEGRA Service
Note Manual.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual C-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix D - Installation and Configuration of Other
Computer Models
This appendix contains information about the installation of the following

computer models:
• Dell PowerEdge 1400SC
• Dell Optiplex GX-200
• Dell PowerEdge 1300
and the configuration of the following computer models:
• Dell PowerEdge 1400SC
• Dell Optiplex GX-200
• Dell PowerEdge 1300
• Dell 2200
• Intel AltServer
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual D-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Dell PowerEdge 1400SC
D.1 Dell PowerEdge 1400SC

D.1.1 General Description for Dell PowerEdge 1400SC Computer
Table D-1: Dell PowerEdge 1400SC Computer - Hardware Specifications
Computer Internal Disk 2 x 20GB 7200 rpm IDE Hard Drives

Tower Drives Removable Drawer for Second Hard Drive
3.5” Flopy Drive
CPU Pentium III 1.26 GHz

Motherboard
128 MB Non ECC RDRAM 133 MHz
Cache 256KB
Graphic Card On-board Graphic Card

ATI RAGE XL 4MB SDRAM
I/O Card I/O Digi Neo Card
Network Card On-board NIC Intel Pro 100 + Ethernet
CD-ROM LG48 CRD - Model 8482B
Monitor Type Color
Resolution 1280 x 1024 x 256, 72 Hz
User Keyboard English / Standard USA

Interfaces
Mouse Scroll Intel Mouse

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.1.2 Dell PowerEdge 1400SC Computer System Connections
BCNT
IPS UNIT
ACQ
1 1 1 1
J7
0 0 0 0
Det
J5 J6
1
Det
2
GANTRY MOTION CONTROL
PC Input
Monitor
Framing Board 2
Framing Board 1
ACQ. COMPUTER PC COMMUNICATION CBL000843
DELL 1400SC
COM 2
Legend
AC - Attenuation Control
BC - Body Contour
BC1-P1 Printer
COM 1
Keyboard
Mouse
USB
Monitor
Network
ECG Socket (BNC) 1
2
P1
3
AC2-P2
P2
4
AC3-P3 P3 5
63000183-02
6
P4
DIGI NEO I/O Card
Figure D-1: System Connections - DELL PowerEdge 1400SC Computer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
CAUTION
Always plug the PC and Monitor into the power outlet on the IPS.
Never plug the PC directly into a wall receptacle.
WARNING
Do not plug the PC Tower or Monitor into any power source other
than the Isolated power on the IPS.
D.1.2.1 Second Removable Hard Drive
The second hard drive replaces the DAT drive and is contained within an IDE
mobile rack
1. Confirm that the jumper in the 1st Hard Drive is CS (Cable Select).
2. Confirm that the jumper in the 2nd Hard Drive is CS (Cable Select).
3. Confirm that the jumper in the CD-ROM is CS (Cable Select).
4. Confirm that the IDE 1 cable is connected to the 1st Hard Drive as Master.
5. Confirm that the IDE 2 cable is connected to the 2nd Hard Driver as Slave.
6. Confirm that the IDE 2 cable is connected to the CD-ROM as Master.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.1.3 BIOS Configuration

It is important to confirm the BIOS settings before proceeding with the
installation.
1. Press <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> to restart the computer.
The computer will start loading the BIOS.
2. Press the <F2> key to enter the BIOS setup program.
Note Entering the BIOS setup program will take a few seconds
3. Verify that the Bios Version is A08 (in the right side of the screen).
4. Verify that the Diskette Drive A: is 3.5inch, 1.44Mb.
5. Verify that the System Memory is 128Mb ECC SDRAM.
6. Verify that the Video Memory is 4Mb SDRAM.
7. Highlight the CPU Information and press <Enter>.
8. Press <Enter> and verify that the Clock Speed is1.26.
9. Verify that the Primary Drive 0 is Hard Drive.
10. Verify that the Primary Drive 1 is Off.
11. Verify that the Secondary Drive 0 is CD-ROM Reader.
12. Verify that the Secondary Drive 1 is Hard Drive.
If any of the above settings are not correct, proceed as follows
13. Using the arrow key, select the Primary Drive 0 and press <Enter>.
14. Change the Drive Type to AUTO by pressing “+” or “-“ Key on the
numeric keypad.
15. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set the Drive Type of Secondary Drive 0 to
AUTO.
16. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set the Drive Type of Secondary Drive 1 to
AUTO.
17. Highlight the Boot Sequence and press <Enter>.
a. Verify that the √1..........Diskette Drive A:
b. Verify that the √2..........Hard Drive C:
c. Verify that the √3..........CD ROM Device
d. If any of the above settings are not correct, proceed according to the
directions on the screen.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
18. Highlight the Integrated Devices and press <Enter>.

19. Verify that the SCSI controller is OFF.
20. Verify that the Network Interface controller is ON.
21. Verify that the Mouse controller is ON.
22. Verify that the Serial Port 1 is AUTO.
23. Verify that the Serial Port 2 is AUTO.
24. Verify that the IDE controller is AUTO.
25. Verify that the Diskette controller is AUTO.
26. Press <Esc> to exit.
27. Highlight the PCI IRQ Assignment and press <Enter>.
28. Verify that the Slot 5: DIGI International Serial Port is IRQ5.
Slot 5 should be verified only for MG with ATC, or MG with ABC and ATC options.
Note
29. Press <Esc> to exit. The following message will be displayed: Save And
Exit

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Dell Optiplex GX-200
D.2 Dell Optiplex GX-200
D.2.1 General Information on the Dell GX-200 Computer
• Processor - High Speed Pentium III.
• Memory – 128 MB non ECC RDRAM 133 MHz.
• Two 15 GB 7200 rpm EIDE Hard Drives.
• Removable tray for the 2nd hard drive.
• On-board NIC 3COM 3C905C.
• On-board graphic card AGP 8MB nVIDIA TNT2M64.
• Framing Board - Uses only the PCI framing board.
• IDE CD-ROM x 48.
Important Refer to Figure D-3 for the correct adapter board locations.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
The Dell GX-200 computer uses two PCI bus slots for the Framing boards.
Voltage Selecting Switch (110 - 220 volt)

Not Auto Sensing - Requires Manual Selection (M) Power Input Socket
Com Port 1
Printer
Keyboard (K)
Mouse (J)
USB Port (U)
Com Port 2 (G)
Framing Framing
I/O Card
Board 1 Board 2
Monitor (E)
Framing Board 1 (C)
Framing Board 2 (D)
Network (A)
Sound (S)
ECG (W)
I/O Card
Figure D-2: Dell Optiplex GX-200 Computer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Y P
C
X
N G D
Q M
Mains Input Power
Power from IPS

M
N Power
from IPS
E Monitor
Printer
Com Port 1
J Mouse (J)
K Keyboard (K)
Com Port 2(G)
Graphics Card (E)

Framing Board 1 (C)
Network (A)
Framing Board 2 (D)
ECG Socket (W)

I/O Card
Figure D-3: System Connections - Dell Optiplex GX-200 Computer

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table D-2: System Connections - Dell Optiplex GX-200 Computer
IPS Tower Monitor Keyboard Mouse Table Network HHC ECG Function/Connector Type
Keyboard cable:
K K PS-2 connector
Mouse cable:
J J PS-2 connector
Monitor cable:
E E 15-pin, 3-row, D-type connector
120 V AC input power to monitor:

N N IEC 320 connector
120 V AC input power to tower:

M M IEC 320 connector
Framing Board for Detector #1:

C C DB-9 connector

D D DB-9 connector
Network cable to nearest LAN

A A transceiver:
RJ-45 connector
Optional ECG trigger:

W W BNC
Gantry motion control:

G G DB-9 connector (COM2)
Table connections J5, J6, & J7:

X X
Shielded CPC connector
Y Y
Z Z
Optional connection to
P P Hand-Held Controller:
RJ 45 connector
Main input power to IPS:

Q IEC 320 connector:
(See Section 3-2-5-3)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.2.2 Connecting the Cables from the PC tower to the Monitor

1. Connect VGA Cable from the Monitor to the graphic card socket E on the
PC.
2. Connect Keyboard Cable to the PS/2 socket K on the PC.
3. Connect Mouse Cable to PS/2 socket J on the PC.
4. Connect the Monitor power cable to an AC outlet on the IPS.
CAUTION
Always plug the PC and Monitor into the power outlet on the IPS. Never
plug the PC directly into a wall receptacle.
5. Connect the PC Tower power cable to an AC outlet on IPS.
D.2.3 Cable Connections from the PC Tower to the Gantry and Detector
1. Connect the Gantry Cable from G on the IPS to Com Port-2 on the
computer tower.
2. Connect the 1st Detector cable C to Framing Board 1 on the computer
tower.
3. Connect the 2nd Detector cable D to Framing Board 2 on the computer
tower.
WARNING
Do not plug the PC Tower or Monitor into any power source other than the
Isolated power on the IPS.
D.2.4 Connect Cables for Network

Connect from PC Tower RJ45 socket (A) to the LAN ( Local area network).

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.2.5 BIOS Configuration

It is important to confirm the bios settings before proceeding with the
installation.
1. Press <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> to restart the computer.
The computer will start loading the BIOS.
2. Press the <F2> key to enter the BIOS setup program.
Note Entering the BIOS setup program will take a few seconds.
1. Verify that the Primary Drive 0…….…………. Hard Drive

2. Verify that the Primary Drive 1 .…………...…. Off
3. Verify that the Secondary Drive 0 ……………. CD-ROM Reader
4. Verify that the Secondary Drive 1………….…. Hard Drive
5. Use <Esc> to exit.
To change incorrect BIOS settings:
1. Using the arrow key, select the Primary Drive 0 and press <Enter>
2. Change the Drive Type to AUTO by pressing “+” or “-” Key on the
numeric keypad.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for Secondary Drive 1
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for Secondary Drive 0
5. Highlight the Integrated Devices and press <Enter>
6. Verify that the Network Interface controller is ON
7. Verify that the IDE Driver Interface is AUTO
8. Verify that the Mouse Port is ON
9. Verify that the Serial Port 1 is AUTO
10. Verify that the Serial Port 2 is AUTO
11. Verify that the Primary Video Controller is AUTO
12. Press <Esc> to exit. The following message will be displayed:
Save And Exit.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.2.6 ISA Configuration

1. Insert the Dell RCU diskette P/N LSW000150 in the floppy drive.
2. Press F1 (or Ctrl +Alt + Del) key to continue past the Welcome panel
once verified for correctness.
3. Use [up/down arrow] key to highlight Configure Computer.
4. Press <Enter>.
5. When the Resource Configuration Utility screen appears press <Enter>.
and select Dell System OptiPlex GX200.
6. Use [up/down arrow] key to highlight Step 2: Add and Remove Boards.
7. Press <Enter>.
The Add and Remove Boards menu will be displayed.
8. Select SLOT ISA 4 (Empty)
9. Press Insert.
10. Press <Enter>. to confirm.
11. Use [up/down arrow] key to select one of the following:
ISA7009.CFG PCXE board for GX200 (ATC)
ISA7007.CFG for VScom 200/55 (default)
The cards may be visually identified using Figure D-4.
VScom 200/55 (ABC) default Digi Card PCXE (ATC)
Figure D-4: I/O Card Identification

12. Press <Enter> three times to reach step (2): Add Or Remove Boards
screen.
13. Press [F10] to save and exit.
The Resource Configuration Utility screen appears.
14. Select option (5) Save and Exit and <Enter>.
15. Select Save File Configuration and Restart the Computer and press
<Enter>.
A warning message regarding mouse controller appears.
Disregard the message, select OK and press <Enter>.
The Reboot message appears.
16. Remove the RCU diskette from the floppy drive and press <Enter> to
confirm.
The following message appears: Strike F1 to retry boot or F2 for Setup
Utility.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Preparation
D.3 Preparation
Complete the tasks outlined in this section prior to the installation of
GenieAcq V4.0 software.
D.3.1 Reviewing the Customer Information Sheet (CIS)

Review the CIS prior to upgrading the existing software.
D.4 Software Installation Procedure

Install GenieAcq SW V 4.0 as described in Section 9.4.3.
D.4.1 System Configurations

Continue from the previous section as follows:
Note If mouse unavailable at this time use the TAB key to navigate the screen.
D.4.1.1 Monitor Configuration

(#)
(#)
configX
Type:configX
Type: <Enter>
<Enter> Type exactly as Type
shownexactly as shown
Monitor Card Tab
Correct Monitor
Selection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Software Installation Procedure
D.4.2 Motion Controller Initialization

When software has been loaded and you are ready to initialize the Motion
Controller, it is recommended to power down the system from the IPS for 5
minutes and then to reconect the power.
When logging into AUI, if the Gantry does not initialize and the icon on the
Desktop is grayed out (disabled), Motion Controller initialization should be carried
out as follows:
1. From the Service Menu, select: (4) Initialize Motion Controller.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. When the initialization process has finished, log into AUI through the Service Menu again.
4. Verify Gantry functionality.
D.4.3 Final System Adjustments

D.4.3.1 Characterizing the Gantry and Table
If the Acquisition Configuration files were not restored, you must perform the gantry/table
characterization procedure outlined in the System Service Manual
D.4.4 System Check Out
To verify overall system functionality, refer to the System Operation Manual for
Note detailed information.
1. Acquire several quality control scans (floods and bars) in order to determine the state of system
and to verify that the tuning & correction files were loaded correctly.
2. Verify that all User Templates have been restored
3. Acquire new COR’s for the system. Verify Gantry and Detector motion.
4. Acquire new Uniformity Corrections for the collimator used for SPECT acquisitions.
5. Exercise network connectivity to DICOM & Processing Stations.
6. Create a new system backup file (.GZ)
Since a number of configuration files have changed, a new system backup file
(.GZ) must be created and independently stored, using this new version of
software - GenieAcq V3.0 Build 12.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Dell PowerEdge 1300 Computer
D.5 Dell PowerEdge 1300 Computer

The Dell PowerEdge 1300 computer specifications are as follows:
• Processor - Pentium III 450 MHz processor.
• Memory - 128 MB on board. Cache 512 KB.
• Framing Board - Uses only the PCI framing board.
• Hard Disk - Hard Disk 9.1 GB (only 2 GB is used).
D.5.1 Computer System Connections
D.5.1.1 Adaptor Board Description and Locations
The following table describes the adaptor boards and their locations.
This information should be used in conjunction with Figure D-5.
Table D-3: DELL PowerEdge 1300 Computer - Adaptor Board Locations
A PCI slot 1(bottom) PCI -1 SMC-8433BTA NIC
B PCI slot 2 PCI -2 Adaptec AHA2940UW SCSI Controller
C PCI slot 3 PCI -3 Framing Board #1
D PCI slot 4 PCI -4 Empty
E PCI slot 5 MGA Matrox Millennium II PCI or Emptya
F EISA slot 6 ISA Slot I/O Board
L 15-pin socket On-board graphic card (used when E is not fitted)
a. When graphic card E is not fitted, the monitor should be connected to the on-board
graphic card - socket L.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
M
Power Cable
L Socket
Monitor
Socket
Slot 1
A NIC
B Slot 2
SCSI
Slot 3
C FB-1
D Slot 4
FB-2
E Slot 5 Not Used
F Slot 6
I/O
Figure D-5: Socket and Adaptor Board Locations - Dell PowerEdge 1300

Direction 2414259-100 2019
P
Z
N
X Y
Q M D
C
G
Z
Y
X
M
Only used with on-board graphic card
L
I
J
Network Connection A
Optional SCSI Connection B
C
Only used when card E is fitted D
E
I/O I/O Connection F
Figure D-6: System Connections (Dell PowerEdge 1300)

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Table D-4: System Connections - Dell PowerEdge 1300 Computer
IPS Tower Monitor Keyboard Mouse Table Network HHC ECG Modem Function/Connector Type
Keyboard cable:
I I PS-2 connector
Mouse cable:
J J PS-2 connector
Monitor cable:
E or L E 15-pin, 3-row, D-type connector
120 V AC input power to monitor:

N N IEC 320 connector
120 V AC input power to tower:

M M IEC 320 connector

C C DB-9 connector

D D DB-9 connector
Network cable to nearest LAN

A A transceiver:
DB-15 connector
Optional EKG trigger:

W W BNC, coax cable
Gantry motion control:

G G DB-9 connector
X X Table connections J5, J6, & J7:

Shielded CPC connector
Y Y
Z Z
Optional connection to
P P Hand-Held Controller:
RJ 45 connector
Main input power to IPS:

IEC 320 connector:
Q
(See Section 3-2-5-3)
Optional connection to modem:

F F DB-9 connector

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.5.2 Bios Configuration:

1. Power up the computer.
2. When the Dell screen appears, press <F2> to enter setup.
The Entering Setup screen appears
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to verify or select the IDE Drivers
Primary
Drive 0: None
Drive 1: None
Secondary
Drive 0: None
Drive 1: None
4. Use the <Alt + P> keys to go to the next page
5. Use the up/down arrow key to select Power Management
6. Verify / set to Disabled using the left/right arrow key
7. Use the up/down arrow key to select Chassis Intrusion
8. Verify / set to Not Detected, using the left/right arrow key
9. Use the up/down arrow key to select IDE Controller
10. Verify / set to Off using the left/right arrow key
11. Use the up/down arrow key to select SCSI.
12. Verify / set to Off using the left/right arrow key.
13. Press <Alt + B> keys to reboot.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.5.3 ISA Configuration

1. Insert the Dell RCU diskette P/N LSW000101 in the floppy drive
2. Press the <Enter> key to continue past the Welcome panel once verified
for correctness.
3. Use [up/down arrow] key to highlight Configure Computer
4. Press <Enter>
5. When Configuration Changes screen appears press <Enter>to accept
changes.
6. Use [up/down arrow] key to highlight Step 2: Add and Remove Boards.
7. Press <Enter>
8. The Add and Remove Boards menu will be displayed.
9. Select SLOT PCI/ISA 6 (Empty)
10. Press Insert.
11. Press OK.
12. Use [up/down arrow] key to highlight ISA7006.CFG
13. Press <Enter> twice.
14. Press [F10] to save and exit

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.5.4 SMC Ethernet Board Configuration

1. Insert the ECU bootable diskette into the floppy drive.
2. Re-boot the system by typing reboot -a.at the unix shell window, or by
typing reboot as both the username and password in the login screen
3. Wait for the message starting MS DOS then quickly press F5
This will take you to the DOS prompt.
4. Insert the SMC Driver Diskette shipped with the unit.
5. Type ezstart <Enter> and begin execution of diags.
The EZStart for Ethernet menu will be displayed.
6. Use arrow keys to select Custom, and press <Enter>.
7. Use arrow keys to select Setup and press <Enter>.
8. Use the [TAB] key to select cable type and use the up/down arrow key to
select UTP
9. Use the Tab key to select Save and press <Enter>
10. When Adapter configuration saved message appears press <Enter>
11. Use arrow keys to select Previous and press <Enter>
12. Use arrow keys to highlight Exit and press <Enter>. The System returns
to the DOS prompt.
The PC system is tested by performing diagnostics and checks at the board
level through to the system level. Diagnostics are performed at the DOS level
and at the “service” user, based on Lynx (Unix) operating system.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.5.5 DOS Based Diagnostics - Etherdiags

1. Insert the ECU bootable diskette into the floppy drive.
2. Re-boot the system by typing reboot -a.at the unix shell window, or by
typing reboot as both the username and password in the login screen
3. Wait for the message starting MS DOS then quickly press F5
4. This will take you to the DOS prompt.
D.5.6 SMC Ethernet Controller Diagnostic Tests

1. Remove the DOS bootable floppy disk.
2. Insert the SMC Driver Diskette floppy shipped with unit
3. Type ezstart, press <Enter> to begin execution of diags.
The EZStart for Ethernet menu will be displayed.
4. On the top right corner of the screen the Ethernet address is displayed
Record this address in the DHR
5. Choose <Exit> and reboot the system
D.5.7 Software Installation Procedure

Install GenieAcq SW V 4.0 as described in Section 9.4.3.

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.6 System Configurations

D.6.1 Graphics Card & Keyboard Configurations
Table D-5:
Computer Board Memory
DELL 1300 Matrox Millennium II PCI 4MB

(220Mhz)
DELL 1300 with on-board ATI 3D Rage IIc 2Mb

adapter
DELL 2200 Matrox Millennium (MGA 2Mb

Storm)
ATI Graphic Xpression Mach64

Intel AltServer OR
Matrox Millennium (MGA

Storm)
Dell PowerEdge 1400SC ATI Xpert XL 3D Rage Pro 4MB
Dell Optiplex GX-200 Generic nVidia TNT2 8MB
Keyboard Setting
English: US/
Standard PC
Keyboard
Graphic Card
Selection Tab
Graphics Card
Generic nVidia TNT2 8MB
Selection Menu
Virtual Resolution:
Disabled
Colors: 256
Physical Resolution:
1280x1024 at 75Hz
Memory Size:
Ensure correctly set
using the table above

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.6.2 Monitor Configuration

(#)
(#)
configX
Type:configX
Type: <Enter>
<Enter> Type exactly as Type
shownexactly as shown
Monitor Card Tab
Correct Monitor
Selection

Direction 2414259-100 2019
D.6.3 Mouse Configuration
PS/2 Mouse for DELL 1300 Serial Mouse for all other platforms
a. Select PS/2 compatible a. Select Logitech Mouseman
b. Change to 3 buttons b. Change to 3 buttons
c. Change the Device field to /dev/mouse c. Change the Device field to /dev/mouse
Refer to the previously recorded information logged into the table.

For DELL 1300 which uses a PS/2 mouse, this will not be available at this time.
Use the Tab key to highlight selections, use the up and down arrows to scroll
through the available list, press <Enter> to select.
See (a) in table above
See (b) in table above
See (c) in table above
File Menu:
File Menu:
ALT-F <Enter>
ALT-F <Enter> If the prompt (#) does not appear, press <Enter>.
If the prompt (#) does not appear, press <Enter>
(#)
(#)
reboot -a <Enter>
reboot -a <Enter>

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix E - 3-Axis Patient Table Specifications
Note For specifications of the new MG Patient Table ASM001285, refer to Chapter 10
GE PN 2186646 Elgems PN ASM000861
11
6
12
3
7
4.4
8
12 4.5
2
4.1
4.2
4.1
1
4.2
Figure E-1: 3-Axis Patient Table (Exploded View)
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual E-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1 3-Axis Patient Table Assembly
Refer to Figure E-1.
Item Elgems Part No. Name/Description GE Part No FRU Quantity
ASM000860 Table Assembly 2151297 N 1
1 Table Chassis Assembly - N 1

Refer to Section E.1.2
3 Table Top Assembly - N 1

4 ASM000125 Table Covers 2157687 2 1
5 DTP 000029 Composite Extender 2157675 2 1
6 DTP 000033 Mattress Pad (Short) 2157676-2 2 1
Right E-Stop Box Assembly

7 ASM000116 2157673 2 1
Left E-Stop Box Assembly

8 ASM000117 2157672 2 1
9 ASM000120 Longitudinal Retractable Cover 2183112 2 1

10 MEC000013 Accessory Holder 2157679 1 1
11 MEC000542 Front Extrusion Cover 2182737 2 1
12 MEC000546 Shade Cover Bracket 2179004 N 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.1 Patient Table Covers
Elgems Part
Item Name/Description GE Part Number FRU Quantity
Number
4.1 MEC000567 Table Cover Top 2157683 2 2
4.2 MEC000568 Table Cover Bottom 2157688 2 2
Not Millennium Label 2157684 2 1

Shown
4.4 MEC000569 Table Chassis Cover 2177189 2 1
4.5 MEC000566 Longitudinal Motor Cover 2179327 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.2 Table Chassis Assembly
2B 2A
5
4
9 7
Figure E-2: Table Chassis
Item Elgems Part No Name/Description GE Part No FRU Quantity
1 ASM000856 Table Chassis Assembly - N 1
2A HG83000101A Front Actuator. 2 1
2B HG83000102A Rear Actuator 2 1
3 HD00400062 Caster 2146480 1 4
4 S 003000010 Limit Switch 2199587 1 2
5 ASM000857 Vertical Drive Assembly. - N 1

7 ASM000155 Front Locating Pedal Assembly - N 1

Refer to <Cross ref 10pt>Section E.1.3
8 ASM000161 Rear Locating Pedal Assembly - N 1

Refer to <Cross ref 10pt>Section E.1.4
9 MEC000014 Caster Nut Covers 22003476 2 4

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.3 Front Locating Pedal Assembly
Figure E-3: Front Locating Pedal Assembly
ASM000155 Front Locating Pedal Assembly N 1
1 MEC000521 Locator Cross Pin 2182657 2 1
2 MEC000523 Pedal 2182658 2 1
3 HG010000100 Pedal Hinge Pin 2182659 2 1
4 HS05306158F Spring Plunger 2182660 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.4 Rear Locating Pedal Assembly
4
3
Figure E-4: Rear Locating Pedal Assembly
ASM000161 Rear Locating Pedal Assembly N 1
1 MEC000521 Locator Cross Pin 2182657 2 2
2 MEC000523 Pedal 2182658 2 2
3 HG010000100 Pedal Hinge Pin 2182659 2 2
4 HS05306158F Spring Plunger 2182660 2 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.5 Vertical Drive Assembly
2
1
4
5
Figure E-5: Vertical Drive Assembly
ASM000857 Vertical Drive Assembly - N 1
1 B_010259500 Vertical Servo Motor - old type 2146478 1 1

(can still be used)
1 UGP000993 Vertical Servo Motor - new type 1 1

(including software motion patch)
2 HC010336516 Vertical Drive Shaft Couplings 2
3 HG000570090 Vertical Motor Drive Belt 2146477 1 1
4 MEC000015 Vertical Motor Pulley 2182650 2 1
5 MEC005729 Long Shaft 2182651 2 1
6 MEC005731 Actuator Pulley 2182652 2 1
7 MEC005728 Vertical Motor Mounting Plate 2206550 2 1
8 MEC005730 Shaft Connector 2 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.6 Table Top Assembly
11
13
12
12
5
10
16 15
Figure E-6: Table Top Assembly

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Item Elgems Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number FRU Quantity
Table Top Assembly - N 1
Longitudinal Motor Assembly
4 ASM000858 2157674- N 1
5 S-003000010 Limit Switch 2199587 1 4
Composite Top Assembly
6 ASM000122 2 1
10 MEC000012 Longitudinal Load Pulley 2182739 2 1
11 TZ320002105 Longitudinal Roller 2182745 2 2
12 MEC000548 Longitudinal Screw Support 2182747 2 2
13 DTP000058 Longitudinal Lead Screw 2182749 2 1
Lateral Motor Assembly
15 ASM000114 N 1
16 HG000575090 Longitudinal Belt 2146472 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.7 Lateral Motor Assembly
Figure E-7: Lateral Motor Assembly
Elgems Part
Number
ASM000114 Lateral Motor Assembly N 1
1 B_016259502 BR-050 Servo Motor - old type 2146476 1 1

(can still be used)
1 B_01010002E Lateral Servo Motor - new type 1 1

2 MEC000013 Lateral Pulley 2182727 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.8 Right E-Stop Box Assembly
Figure E-8: Right E-stop Box Assembly
ASM000116 Right E-Stop Box Assembly 2157673 2 1
1 MEC005369 E-Stop Box Right _ N 1
2 P_00900018R RJ-45 Jack 2157081 1 1
3 S_010200151 E-Stop Switch 2146460 1 1
4 S_010200150 Reset Switch Green 2146461 1 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.9 Left E-Stop Box Assembly
Figure E-9: Left E-stop Box Assembly
Item Elgems Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number FRU Quantity
ASM000117 Left E-Stop Box Assembly 2157672 2 1
1 MEC005371 E-Stop Box Left - N 1
2 P_00900018R RJ-45 Jack 2157081 1 1
3 S_010200151 E-Stop Switch 2146460 1 1
4 S_010200150 Reset Switch Green 2146461 1 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.10 Longitudinal Drive Assembly
Figure E-10: Longitudinal Motor Assembly
ASM000121 Longitudinal Motor Assembly - N 1
1 B_010259501 BR-050 Servo Motor - old type 2146473 1 1

(can still be used)
1 UGP000992 Longitudinal Servo Motor - new type 1 1

3 MEC000011 Longitudinal Motor Pulley 2182748 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.11 Composite Top Assembly
Figure E-11: Composite Top Assembly
ASM000122 Composite Top Assembly 1
1 DTP000103 Mattress Pad (Long) 2157676 2 1
2 DTP000028 Stretcher Assembly 2 1
Figure E-12: Longitudinal Retractable Cover

Direction 2414259-100 2019
E.1.12 Cables - 3-Axis Patient Table
Vendor Part Number Name/Description GE Part Number FRU Quantity
Vertical Brake Power Cable 2146458 2 1
Lateral & Vertical Limit Switch Cable 2146459 2 1
Table–to–IPS Assembly/Cable 2157156 1 1
J5 Cable (Table Low Power) 2146485 2 1
J6 Cable (Table Interface) 2146486 2 1
J7 Cable (Table High Power) 2146487 2 1
Longitudinal Limit Switch Cable 2146457 2 1
Ground Wire 2157427 2 1

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix F - Preparing the Second Hard Drive
1. After starting the computer, when LynxOS loading starts, and just after
the display of the message about the successful installation of the BIOS,
the following lines appear on top of the screen:
LynxOS Preboot 3.0.1 build …
Copyright (c) …
Command? < b s0a / lynx.os >
2. At this stage you must immediately type:

b - <Enter>
There should be a space between the b and the -
You must type b - at the prompt within 10 seconds. If you do not type the
Note
command within that period of time, reboot the system and repeat the above
step.
You now see the # prompt.
3. Type: mkpart /dev/rhd3

4. At the prompt type: “c” to delete the partition if it exists.
5. At the prompt type: m 2047
9. At the prompt type: “p” to see the partition format.
The partition format should look like
Partition Boot Megabytes Id

a 2047.47
b 2047.50
c 2047.50
d 2047.50
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual F-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
10. At the prompt type “e” to save and exit.
Note If the prompt does not appear, press <Enter>.
You now see the prompt.
11. Type: reboot -a

The system will boot to the Acquisition Login screen.
In case the system hangs during reboot, press reset on the PC and reboot again.
Note If this fails to solve the problem, it is possible that the display card is not configured
correctly.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual F-2 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Appendix G - Installing Patch GA400-2-1
G.1 Patch Installation from CD LSW000524
The following instructions will install the patch from a CD:
1. Reboot the GenieAcq software.
2. When the Command? <b s0b/lynx.os> prompt appears, type:
b - <Enter>
3. Type: cd /patches/
4. Insert the GA400-02-1 patch LSW000524 to the CD drive and
type the following:
mount /dev/hd2 /mnt <Enter>
tar xvf /mnt/GA400-02-1.tar
umount /mnt
/usr/ad/InstallPatch GA400-02-1
5. Insert the GALIC-01-0 P/N 5419377 patch diskette into the floppy
drive.
6. Type: tar –xvf /dev/fd0 <Enter>. The list of the patch files
appears.
7. Type: /usr/adm/InstallPatch GALIC-01-0 <Enter>. The
following message appears: Installs new PR Server License until January
2038
8. Type: more /use/genieacq/bin/date_stamp
9. Verify that the patch appears.
10. Remove the patch diskette from the floppy drive.
11. Reboot the computer by typing: reboot -a
G.2 Patch Installation from DAT Tape LSW000529

The following instructions will install the patch from a DAT Tape:
b - s0b <Enter>
4. Insert the GA400-02-1 patch LSW000529 to the DAT drive and
type the following:
tar xvf /dev/rst2940.2
/usr/ad/InstallPatch GA400-02-1
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual G-1 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019
Patch Removal

6. Verify that the patch appears.
G.3 Patch Removal

The following instructions will remove the patch from the system:
b - <Enter>
/usr/ad/DeInstallPatch GA400-02-1
5. Verify that the patch does not appear.
Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual G-2 Rev. 2

Direction 2414259-100 2019

Millenium MG Service Manual Rev2 2414259-100 Genie 4 2019

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Millenium MG Service Manual Rev2 2414259-100 Genie 4 2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Millenium MG Service Manual Rev2 2414259-100 Genie 4 2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g GE Medical Systems

Millennium™ MG & MC Nuclear Medicine

GE Medical Systems - Europe: Telex 698626

Acquisition and/or processing software and the related documentation are

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS shall not be liable nor obligated in any manner

User provided programs or scripts are NOT validated nor warranted by GE

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.

FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

BRDINJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

PCN REV DATE DESCRIPTION PAGES APPROVED

02047 1 Nov. 2004 New Release All P. Patlajan

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

Chapter 2 - Site Planning and Pre-Installation

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

2.5.5 Acquisition Computer ................................................................................ 2-4

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

3.4.13 Configuring Other Starlink Stations......................................................... 3-97

Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

4.5.1 Checking Longitudinal Motion ................................................................ 4-14

Chapter 5 - Theory of Operation

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

5.3.13 Acquisition Database................................................................................ 5-21

Chapter 6 - Calibration and Adjustments

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

6.2.1 Adjusting the Longitudinal Cradle Limit-switch ....................................... 6-5

Chapter 7 - PWB Configuration and Interconnects

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

7.2.14 Cable Chain Assembly Wiring List ......................................................... 7-16

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

7.4.23 Transformer Wiring................................................................................ 7-109

Chapter 8 - Repair Procedures

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

Chapter 9 - Software Installation

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2

9.5.2 Software Installation WITHOUT Installation Settings Backup Diskette 9-28

Chapter 10 - Renewal Parts

Millennium MG/MC System Service Manual Rev. 2